Turning ___________________

Preface

___________________
Introduction 1

___________________
Setting up the machine 2
SINUMERIK
___________________
Working in manual mode 3
SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D
Turning ___________________
Machining the workpiece 4
Simulating a machining
___________________
operation 5
Operating Manual
___________________
Creating G code program 6
Creating a ShopTurn
___________________
program 7
Programming technology
___________________
functions (cycles) 8

___________________
Multi-channel view 9

___________________
Multi-channel support 10

___________________
User data 11

___________________
Teaching in a program 12

___________________
Working with a B axis 13
Valid for:
Working with two tool
SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840DE sl / 828D Controller ___________________
carriers 14
Software CNC software version for 840D sl / 840DE sl 2.7
SINUMERIK Operate for PCU/PC 2.7
___________________
Tool management 15

___________________
Program management 16
02/2011
6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 Continued on next page
Legal information

Siemens AG order number: 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2011.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 03/2011 Technical data subject to
Postfach 48 48 change
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
 Continuation

Setting up drives 17

HT 8 18

Ctrl Energy 19
SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D
Turning Easy Message (828D only) 20

Easy Extend (828D only) 21

Operating Manual
Service Planner (828D only) 22
Ladder Viewer and Ladder
add-on (828D only) 23
Alarms, error messages, and
system alarms 24

Appendix A
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG order number: 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2011.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 03/2011 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

SINUMERIK documentation
The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in the following categories:
● General documentation
● User documentation
● Manufacturer/service documentation

Additional information
You can find information on the following topics at www.siemens.com/motioncontrol/docu:
● Ordering documentation/overview of documentation
● Additional links to download documents
● Using documentation online (find and search in manuals/information)
Please send any questions about the technical documentation (e.g. suggestions for
improvement, corrections) to the following address:
docu.motioncontrol@siemens.com

My Documentation Manager (MDM)

Under the following link you will find information to individually compile OEM-specific
machine documentation based on the Siemens content:
www.siemens.com/mdm

Training
For information about the range of training courses, refer under:
● www.siemens.com/sitrain
SITRAIN - Siemens training for products, systems and solutions in automation technology
● www.siemens.com/sinutrain
SinuTrain - training software for SINUMERIK

FAQs
You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product
Support. http://support.automation.siemens.com

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 5
Preface

SINUMERIK
You can find information on SINUMERIK under the following link:
www.siemens.com/sinumerik

Target group
This documentation is intended for users of turning machines running the SINUMERIK
Operate software.

Benefits
The operating manual helps users familiarize themselves with the control elements and
commands. Guided by the manual, users are capable of responding to problems and taking
corrective action.

Standard scope
This documentation describes the functionality of the standard scope. Extensions or changes
made by the machine manufacturer are documented by the machine manufacturer.
Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control.
However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the
equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.
Furthermore, for the sake of clarity, this documentation does not contain all detailed
information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of
installation, operation or maintenance.

Terms
The meanings of some basic terms used in this documentation are given below.

Program
A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to produce a specific
workpiece on the machine.

Contour
The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece. More specifically, it refers to
the section of the program that defines the outline of a workpiece comprising individual
elements.

Cycle
A cycle, such as the tapping cycle, is a subprogram defined in SINUMERIK Operate for
executing a frequently repeated machining operation.

Turning
6 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Preface

Technical Support
You will find telephone numbers for other countries for technical support in the Internet under
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 7
Preface

Turning
8 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Table of contents

Preface ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
1 Introduction.............................................................................................................................................. 21
1.1 Product overview .........................................................................................................................21
1.2 Operator panel fronts ...................................................................................................................22
1.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................22
1.2.2 Keys of the operator panel...........................................................................................................23
1.3 Machine control panels ................................................................................................................33
1.3.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................................33
1.3.2 Controls on the machine control panel ........................................................................................33
1.4 User interface...............................................................................................................................36
1.4.1 Screen layout ...............................................................................................................................36
1.4.2 Status display...............................................................................................................................37
1.4.3 Actual value window ....................................................................................................................40
1.4.4 T,F,S window ...............................................................................................................................41
1.4.5 Current block display ...................................................................................................................43
1.4.6 Operation via softkeys and buttons .............................................................................................43
1.4.7 Entering or selecting parameters .................................................................................................45
1.4.8 Pocket calculator..........................................................................................................................47
1.4.9 Context menu...............................................................................................................................49
1.4.10 Touch operation ...........................................................................................................................49
1.4.11 Changing the user interface language.........................................................................................50
1.4.12 Entering Asian characters............................................................................................................51
1.4.13 Protection levels...........................................................................................................................53
1.4.14 Online help in HMI sl....................................................................................................................55
2 Setting up the machine ............................................................................................................................ 59
2.1 Switching on and switching off.....................................................................................................59
2.2 Approaching a reference point.....................................................................................................60
2.2.1 Referencing axes .........................................................................................................................60
2.2.2 User agreement ...........................................................................................................................61
2.3 Modes and mode groups .............................................................................................................63
2.3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................63
2.3.2 Modes groups and channels........................................................................................................65
2.3.3 Channel switchover......................................................................................................................65
2.4 Settings for the machine ..............................................................................................................66
2.4.1 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS) ....................................................................66
2.4.2 Switching the unit of measurement..............................................................................................67
2.4.3 Setting the work offset .................................................................................................................68
2.5 Measuring the tool .......................................................................................................................71
2.5.1 Measuring a tool manually ...........................................................................................................71
2.5.2 Measuring a tool with a tool probe...............................................................................................73
2.5.3 Calibrating the tool probe.............................................................................................................75

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 9
Table of contents

2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass ................................................................................... 76

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................................... 77
2.7 Work offsets ................................................................................................................................ 79
2.7.1 Display active zero offset ............................................................................................................ 80
2.7.2 Displaying the work offset "overview" ......................................................................................... 81
2.7.3 Displaying and editing base zero offset ...................................................................................... 82
2.7.4 Displaying and editing settable zero offset ................................................................................. 83
2.7.5 Displaying the zero offset details. ............................................................................................... 84
2.7.6 Deleting a work offset.................................................................................................................. 85
2.7.7 Measuring the workpiece zero .................................................................................................... 86
2.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data ................................................................................................ 87
2.8.1 Specify working area limitations.................................................................................................. 87
2.8.2 Editing spindle data..................................................................................................................... 88
2.8.3 Spindle chuck data...................................................................................................................... 89
2.9 Displaying setting data lists......................................................................................................... 91
2.10 Handwheel assignment............................................................................................................... 92
2.11 MDA ............................................................................................................................................ 94
2.11.1 Loading an MDA program from the Program Manager .............................................................. 94
2.11.2 Saving an MDA program............................................................................................................. 95
2.11.3 Executing an MDA program ........................................................................................................ 96
2.11.4 Deleting an MDA program........................................................................................................... 96
3 Working in manual mode ......................................................................................................................... 97
3.1 General........................................................................................................................................ 97
3.2 Selecting a tool and spindle ........................................................................................................ 97
3.2.1 T,S,M window.............................................................................................................................. 97
3.2.2 Selecting a tool............................................................................................................................ 99
3.2.3 Starting and stopping the spindle manually ................................................................................ 99
3.2.4 Positioning the spindle .............................................................................................................. 100
3.3 Traversing axes......................................................................................................................... 101
3.3.1 Traverse axes by a defined increment...................................................................................... 101
3.3.2 Traversing axes by a variable increment .................................................................................. 102
3.4 Positioning axes ........................................................................................................................ 103
3.5 Simple stock removal of workpiece........................................................................................... 104
3.6 Thread synchronizing................................................................................................................ 106
3.7 Default settings for manual mode ............................................................................................. 108
4 Machining the workpiece ....................................................................................................................... 109
4.1 Starting and stopping machining............................................................................................... 109
4.2 Selecting a program .................................................................................................................. 110
4.3 Executing a trail program run .................................................................................................... 111
4.4 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................................... 113
4.4.1 Current block display................................................................................................................. 113
4.4.2 Displaying a basic block............................................................................................................ 113
4.4.3 Display program level................................................................................................................ 114

Turning
10 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Table of contents

4.5 Correcting a program .................................................................................................................115

4.6 Repositioning axes.....................................................................................................................117
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point ........................................................................................118
4.7.1 Use block search .......................................................................................................................118
4.7.2 Continuing program from search target .....................................................................................120
4.7.3 Simple search target definition...................................................................................................121
4.7.4 Defining an interruption point as search target ..........................................................................122
4.7.5 Entering the search target via search pointer ............................................................................123
4.7.6 Parameters for block search in the search pointer ....................................................................124
4.7.7 Block search mode ....................................................................................................................125
4.8 Intervening in the program sequence ........................................................................................127
4.8.1 Program control..........................................................................................................................127
4.8.2 Skip blocks .................................................................................................................................128
4.9 Overstore ...................................................................................................................................130
4.10 Editing a program.......................................................................................................................131
4.10.1 Searching in programs...............................................................................................................132
4.10.2 Exchanging program text ...........................................................................................................133
4.10.3 Copying/pasting/deleting a program block.................................................................................134
4.10.4 Renumbering a program ............................................................................................................135
4.10.5 Creating a program block...........................................................................................................136
4.10.6 Opening additional programs.....................................................................................................137
4.10.7 Editor settings ............................................................................................................................138
4.11 Mold making view ......................................................................................................................140
4.11.1 Mold making view ......................................................................................................................140
4.11.2 Starting the mold making view ...................................................................................................142
4.11.3 Specifically jump to the program block ......................................................................................143
4.11.4 Searching for program blocks ....................................................................................................144
4.11.5 Changing the view .....................................................................................................................144
4.11.5.1 Enlarging or reducing the graphical representation ...................................................................144
4.11.5.2 Modifying the viewport ...............................................................................................................145
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions ..........................................................................147
4.12.1 Selected G functions..................................................................................................................147
4.12.2 All G functions ............................................................................................................................149
4.12.3 Auxiliary functions ......................................................................................................................150
4.13 Displaying the program runtime and counting workpieces ........................................................153
4.14 Setting for automatic mode ........................................................................................................154
5 Simulating a machining operation.......................................................................................................... 157
5.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................157
5.2 Simulation before machining of the workpiece ..........................................................................162
5.3 Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece .....................................................163
5.4 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece .....................................................164
5.5 Different views of a workpiece ...................................................................................................165
5.5.1 Side view....................................................................................................................................165
5.5.2 Half section ................................................................................................................................165
5.5.3 Face view ...................................................................................................................................166

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 11
Table of contents

5.5.4 3D view...................................................................................................................................... 166

5.5.5 2-window ................................................................................................................................... 167
5.6 Graphical display....................................................................................................................... 167
5.7 Editing the simulation display.................................................................................................... 168
5.7.1 Blank display ............................................................................................................................. 168
5.7.2 Showing and hiding the tool path.............................................................................................. 168
5.8 Program control during the simulation ...................................................................................... 169
5.8.1 Changing the feedrate............................................................................................................... 169
5.8.2 Simulating the program block by block ..................................................................................... 170
5.9 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic ................................................................................ 171
5.9.1 Enlarging or reducing the graphical representation .................................................................. 171
5.9.2 Panning a graphical representation .......................................................................................... 172
5.9.3 Rotating the graphical representation ....................................................................................... 172
5.9.4 Modifying the viewport .............................................................................................................. 173
5.9.5 Defining cutting planes.............................................................................................................. 174
5.10 Displaying simulation alarms..................................................................................................... 175
6 Creating G code program ...................................................................................................................... 177
6.1 Graphical programming............................................................................................................. 177
6.2 Program views .......................................................................................................................... 178
6.3 Program structure ..................................................................................................................... 181
6.4 Basic information....................................................................................................................... 181
6.4.1 Machining planes ...................................................................................................................... 181
6.4.2 Current planes in cycles and input screens .............................................................................. 182
6.4.3 Programming a tool (T) ............................................................................................................. 183
6.5 Generating a G code program .................................................................................................. 184
6.6 Blank input ................................................................................................................................ 185
6.6.1 Function..................................................................................................................................... 185
6.7 Machining plane, milling direction, retraction plane, safe clearance and feedrate (PL, RP,
SC, F) ........................................................................................................................................ 187
6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey ............................................................................................ 188
6.9 Calling technology cycles.......................................................................................................... 193
6.9.1 Hiding cycle parameters............................................................................................................ 193
6.9.2 Setting data for cycles............................................................................................................... 193
6.9.3 Checking cycle parameters....................................................................................................... 194
6.9.4 Changing a cycle call ................................................................................................................ 194
6.9.5 Compatibility for cycle support .................................................................................................. 195
6.9.6 Additional functions in the input screens................................................................................... 195
6.10 Measuring cycle support ........................................................................................................... 196
7 Creating a ShopTurn program ............................................................................................................... 197
7.1 Graphic program control, ShopTurn programs ......................................................................... 197
7.2 Program views .......................................................................................................................... 198
7.3 Program structure ..................................................................................................................... 201

Turning
12 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Table of contents

7.4 Basic information .......................................................................................................................202

7.4.1 Machining planes .......................................................................................................................202
7.4.2 Machining cycle, approach/retraction ........................................................................................204
7.4.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .......................................................................................206
7.4.4 Polar coordinates .......................................................................................................................208
7.4.5 Clamping the spindle .................................................................................................................209
7.5 Creating a ShopTurn program ...................................................................................................210
7.6 Program header .........................................................................................................................212
7.7 Generating program blocks........................................................................................................214
7.8 Tool, offset value, feedrate and spindle speed (T, D, F, S, V)...................................................215
7.9 Call work offsets.........................................................................................................................218
7.10 Repeating program blocks .........................................................................................................218
7.11 Entering the number of workpieces ...........................................................................................220
7.12 Changing program blocks ..........................................................................................................221
7.13 Changing program settings........................................................................................................222
7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey .............................................................................................224
7.15 Calling technology functions ......................................................................................................229
7.15.1 Additional functions in the input screens ...................................................................................229
7.15.2 Checking cycle parameters........................................................................................................229
7.15.3 Setting data for technological functions .....................................................................................230
7.15.4 Changing a cycle call .................................................................................................................230
7.15.5 Compatibility for cycle support ...................................................................................................230
7.16 Programming the approach/retraction cycle ..............................................................................231
7.17 Measuring cycle support ............................................................................................................233
7.18 Example: Standard machining ...................................................................................................234
7.18.1 Workpiece drawing ....................................................................................................................235
7.18.2 Programming..............................................................................................................................235
7.18.3 Results/simulation test ...............................................................................................................249
7.18.4 G code machining program........................................................................................................251
8 Programming technology functions (cycles) .......................................................................................... 255
8.1 Drilling ........................................................................................................................................255
8.1.1 General ......................................................................................................................................255
8.1.2 Centering (CYCLE81) ................................................................................................................256
8.1.2.1 Function .....................................................................................................................................256
8.1.3 Drilling (CYCLE82).....................................................................................................................258
8.1.4 Reaming (CYCLE85) .................................................................................................................261
8.1.5 Boring (CYCLE86) .....................................................................................................................263
8.1.6 Deep-hole drilling (CYCLE83)....................................................................................................266
8.1.7 Tapping (CYCLE84, 840)...........................................................................................................270
8.1.8 Drill and thread milling (CYCLE78) ............................................................................................276
8.1.9 Positioning and position patterns ...............................................................................................280
8.1.9.1 Approach/retraction....................................................................................................................280
8.1.10 Arbitrary positions (CYCLE802).................................................................................................281
8.1.10.1 Function .....................................................................................................................................281

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 13
Table of contents

8.1.11 Position pattern line (HOLES1), grid or frame (CYCLE801)..................................................... 283

8.1.12 Circle position pattern (HOLES2).............................................................................................. 286
8.1.13 Displaying and hiding positions................................................................................................. 289
8.1.14 Repeating positions................................................................................................................... 291
8.1.14.1 Function..................................................................................................................................... 291
8.2 Rotate........................................................................................................................................ 292
8.2.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 292
8.2.2 Stock removal (CYCLE951) ...................................................................................................... 292
8.2.3 Groove (CYCLE930) ................................................................................................................. 295
8.2.4 Undercut form E and F (CYCLE940) ........................................................................................ 298
8.2.5 Thread undercuts (CYCLE940) ................................................................................................ 300
8.2.6 Thread turning (CYCLE99) ....................................................................................................... 303
8.2.7 Thread chain (CYCLE98).......................................................................................................... 312
8.2.8 Cut-off (CYCLE92) .................................................................................................................... 316
8.3 Contour turning ......................................................................................................................... 318
8.3.1 General information................................................................................................................... 318
8.3.2 Representation of the contour................................................................................................... 319
8.3.3 Creating a new contour ............................................................................................................. 321
8.3.4 Creating contour elements ........................................................................................................ 323
8.3.5 Entering the master dimension ................................................................................................. 328
8.3.6 Changing the contour................................................................................................................ 330
8.3.7 Contour call (CYCLE62) - only for G code program ................................................................. 331
8.3.8 Stock removal (CYCLE952) ...................................................................................................... 332
8.3.9 Stock removal rest (CYCLE952)............................................................................................... 337
8.3.10 Plunge-cutting (CYCLE952)...................................................................................................... 340
8.3.11 Plunge-cutting rest (CYCLE952)............................................................................................... 343
8.3.12 Plunge-turning (CYCLE952) ..................................................................................................... 345
8.3.13 Plunge-turning rest (CYCLE952) .............................................................................................. 349
8.4 Milling ........................................................................................................................................ 351
8.4.1 Face milling (CYCLE61)............................................................................................................ 351
8.4.2 Rectangular pocket (POCKET3)............................................................................................... 355
8.4.3 Circular pocket (POCKET4) ...................................................................................................... 360
8.4.4 Rectangular spigot (CYCLE76)................................................................................................. 366
8.4.5 Circular spigot (CYCLE77)........................................................................................................ 370
8.4.6 Multi-edge (CYCLE79) .............................................................................................................. 374
8.4.7 Longitudinal groove (SLOT1) .................................................................................................... 377
8.4.8 Circumferential groove (SLOT2) ............................................................................................... 382
8.4.9 Open groove (CYCLE899) ........................................................................................................ 386
8.4.10 Long hole (LONGHOLE) - only for G code program................................................................. 393
8.4.11 Thread milling (CYCLE70) ........................................................................................................ 395
8.4.12 Engraving (CYCLE60)............................................................................................................... 399
8.5 Contour milling .......................................................................................................................... 406
8.5.1 General information................................................................................................................... 406
8.5.2 Representation of the contour................................................................................................... 406
8.5.3 Creating a new contour ............................................................................................................. 408
8.5.4 Creating contour elements ........................................................................................................ 410
8.5.5 Changing the contour................................................................................................................ 415
8.5.6 Contour call (CYCLE62) - only for G code program ................................................................. 416
8.5.7 Path milling (CYCLE72) ............................................................................................................ 418
8.5.8 Contour pocket/contour spigot (CYCLE63/64).......................................................................... 423

Turning
14 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Table of contents

8.5.9 Predrilling contour pocket (CYCLE64).......................................................................................425

8.5.10 Milling contour pocket (CYCLE63).............................................................................................429
8.5.11 Contour pocket residual material (CYCLE63, option)................................................................433
8.5.12 Milling contour spigot (CYCLE63)..............................................................................................435
8.5.13 Contour spigot residual material (CYCLE63, option).................................................................438
8.6 Further cycles and functions ......................................................................................................442
8.6.1 Swiveling plane / aligning tool (CYCLE800) ..............................................................................442
8.6.2 Swiveling tool (CYCLE800)........................................................................................................450
8.6.2.1 Orienting turning tools - only for G code program (CYCLE800) ................................................450
8.6.2.2 Orienting milling tools - only for G code program (CYCLE800).................................................452
8.6.2.3 Preloading milling tools - only for G code program (CYCLE800) ..............................................453
8.6.3 High-speed settings (CYCLE832)..............................................................................................454
8.6.4 Subroutines ................................................................................................................................456
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn .....................................................................................459
8.7.1 Drilling centric.............................................................................................................................459
8.7.2 Thread centered.........................................................................................................................461
8.7.3 Transformations .........................................................................................................................464
8.7.4 Translation .................................................................................................................................465
8.7.5 Rotation......................................................................................................................................466
8.7.6 Scaling .......................................................................................................................................467
8.7.7 Mirroring .....................................................................................................................................468
8.7.8 Rotation C ..................................................................................................................................469
8.7.9 Straight and circular machining..................................................................................................470
8.7.10 Selecting a tool and machining plane ........................................................................................471
8.7.11 Programming a straight line .......................................................................................................472
8.7.12 Programming a circle with known center point ..........................................................................474
8.7.13 Programming a circle with known radius ...................................................................................476
8.7.14 Polar coordinates .......................................................................................................................478
8.7.15 Straight line polar .......................................................................................................................480
8.7.16 Circle polar .................................................................................................................................482
8.7.17 Machining with the counterspindle.............................................................................................483
8.7.17.1 Programming example: Machining main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machining
counterspindle............................................................................................................................484
8.7.17.2 Programming example: Machining, counterspindle - without previous transfer ........................485
8.7.17.3 Programming example: Machining bar material ........................................................................485
8.7.17.4 Parameters, counterspindle .......................................................................................................486
9 Multi-channel view ................................................................................................................................. 491
9.1 Multi-channel view .....................................................................................................................491
9.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area ..................................................................491
9.3 Multi-channel view for large operator panels .............................................................................494
9.4 Setting the multi-channel view ...................................................................................................496
10 Multi-channel support ............................................................................................................................ 499
10.1 Working with several channels ..................................................................................................499
10.2 Multi-channel editor....................................................................................................................500
10.2.1 Creating a multi-channel program..............................................................................................500
10.2.2 Entering multi-channel data .......................................................................................................501
10.2.3 Editing the multi-channel program .............................................................................................504

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 15
Table of contents

10.2.3.1 Changing the job list.................................................................................................................. 504

10.2.3.2 Editing a G code multi-channel program................................................................................... 505
10.2.3.3 Editing a ShopTurn multi-channel program .............................................................................. 507
10.2.3.4 Creating a program block.......................................................................................................... 515
10.2.4 Synchronizing programs ........................................................................................................... 517
10.2.5 Optimizing the machining time .................................................................................................. 520
10.3 Simulating a machining operation............................................................................................. 522
10.3.1 Simulation.................................................................................................................................. 522
10.3.2 Different workpiece views for multi-channel support ................................................................ 523
10.4 Display / edit the multi-channel functionality in the "Machine" operating area ......................... 524
10.4.1 Running-in a program ............................................................................................................... 524
10.4.2 Block search and program control ............................................................................................ 525
10.5 Multi-channel functionality for large operator panels ................................................................ 528
10.6 Setting the multi-channel function............................................................................................. 531
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle ................................................................................................... 533
11 User data ............................................................................................................................................... 539
11.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 539
11.2 R parameters ............................................................................................................................ 540
11.3 Global GUD ............................................................................................................................... 541
11.4 Channel GUD............................................................................................................................ 542
11.5 Local LUD.................................................................................................................................. 543
11.6 Program PUD............................................................................................................................ 544
11.7 Searching for user data............................................................................................................. 545
11.8 Defining and activating user data.............................................................................................. 545
12 Teaching in a program........................................................................................................................... 547
12.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 547
12.2 General sequence..................................................................................................................... 547
12.3 Inserting a block ........................................................................................................................ 548
12.3.1 Input parameters for teach-in blocks......................................................................................... 549
12.4 Teach-in via Windows ............................................................................................................... 550
12.4.1 General...................................................................................................................................... 550
12.4.2 Teach in rapid traverse G0........................................................................................................ 552
12.4.3 Teach in straight G1.................................................................................................................. 552
12.4.4 Teaching in circle intermediate and circle end point CIP.......................................................... 552
12.4.5 Teach-in A spline ...................................................................................................................... 553
12.5 Editing a block........................................................................................................................... 555
12.6 Selecting a block ....................................................................................................................... 556
12.7 Deleting a block......................................................................................................................... 557
12.8 Settings for teach-in .................................................................................................................. 558
13 Working with a B axis ............................................................................................................................ 559

Turning
16 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Table of contents

13.1 Lathes with B axis ......................................................................................................................559

13.2 Tool alignment for turning ..........................................................................................................562
13.3 Milling with a B axis....................................................................................................................563
13.4 Swiveling ....................................................................................................................................563
13.5 Approach/retraction....................................................................................................................565
13.6 Position pattern ..........................................................................................................................567
13.7 Tool selection for the manual mode...........................................................................................568
13.8 Measuring a tool with the B axis ................................................................................................569
14 Working with two tool carriers ................................................................................................................ 571
14.1 Programming with two tool carriers ...........................................................................................571
14.2 Measure tool ..............................................................................................................................572
15 Tool management.................................................................................................................................. 573
15.1 Lists for the tool management....................................................................................................573
15.2 Magazine management .............................................................................................................574
15.3 Tool types...................................................................................................................................575
15.4 Tool dimensioning......................................................................................................................578
15.5 Tool list.......................................................................................................................................583
15.5.1 Other data ..................................................................................................................................586
15.5.2 Creating a new tool ....................................................................................................................587
15.5.3 Measuring the tool .....................................................................................................................589
15.5.4 Managing several cutting edges ................................................................................................590
15.5.5 Delete tool ..................................................................................................................................591
15.5.6 Loading and unloading tools ......................................................................................................591
15.5.7 Selecting a magazine.................................................................................................................593
15.6 Tool wear ...................................................................................................................................595
15.6.1 Reactivate tool ...........................................................................................................................597
15.7 Tool data OEM ...........................................................................................................................599
15.8 Magazine....................................................................................................................................601
15.8.1 Positioning a magazine..............................................................................................................603
15.8.2 Relocating a tool ........................................................................................................................603
15.9 Sorting tool management lists....................................................................................................605
15.10 Filtering the tool management lists ............................................................................................606
15.11 Specific search in the tool management lists.............................................................................607
15.12 Displaying tool details ................................................................................................................609
15.13 Changing the cutting edge position or tool type.........................................................................610
15.14 Working with multitool ................................................................................................................611
15.14.1 Tool list for multitool ...................................................................................................................612
15.14.2 Create multitool ..........................................................................................................................613
15.14.3 Equipping multitool with tools.....................................................................................................615
15.14.4 Removing a tool from multitool ..................................................................................................616

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 17
Table of contents

15.14.5 Deleting multitool....................................................................................................................... 616

15.14.6 Loading and unloading multitool ............................................................................................... 616
15.14.7 Reactivating multitool ................................................................................................................ 617
15.14.8 Relocating a multitool................................................................................................................ 619
15.14.9 Positioning multitool .................................................................................................................. 620
16 Program management ........................................................................................................................... 621
16.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 621
16.1.1 NC memory ............................................................................................................................... 624
16.1.2 Local drive ................................................................................................................................. 624
16.1.3 USB drives ................................................................................................................................ 625
16.2 Opening and closing the program............................................................................................. 626
16.3 Executing a program ................................................................................................................. 627
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list ...................................................................... 629
16.4.1 Creating a new directory ........................................................................................................... 629
16.4.2 Creating a new workpiece......................................................................................................... 630
16.4.3 Creating a new G code program............................................................................................... 631
16.4.4 New ShopTurn program............................................................................................................ 632
16.4.5 Storing any new file................................................................................................................... 633
16.4.6 Creating a Joblist ...................................................................................................................... 634
16.4.7 Creating a program list.............................................................................................................. 635
16.5 Creating templates .................................................................................................................... 637
16.6 Searching directories and files.................................................................................................. 638
16.7 Displaying the program in the Preview. .................................................................................... 639
16.8 Selecting several directories/programs..................................................................................... 640
16.9 Copying and pasting a directory/program ................................................................................. 642
16.10 Deleting a directory/program..................................................................................................... 644
16.11 Renaming file and directory properties ..................................................................................... 645
16.12 EXTCALL .................................................................................................................................. 647
16.13 Backing up data ........................................................................................................................ 649
16.13.1 Generating an archive in the Program Manager....................................................................... 649
16.13.2 Generating an archive via the system data............................................................................... 650
16.13.3 Reading in an archive in the Program Manager ....................................................................... 652
16.13.4 Read in archive from system data ............................................................................................ 654
16.14 Setup data ................................................................................................................................. 655
16.14.1 Backing up setup data............................................................................................................... 655
16.14.2 Reading-in set-up data.............................................................................................................. 658
16.15 V24 ............................................................................................................................................ 660
16.15.1 Reading-in and reading-out archives ........................................................................................ 660
16.15.2 Setting V24 in the program manager ........................................................................................ 662
17 Setting up drives .................................................................................................................................... 665
17.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 665
17.2 Setting up drives ....................................................................................................................... 666

Turning
18 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Table of contents

18 HT 8....................................................................................................................................................... 669
18.1 HT 8 overview ............................................................................................................................669
18.2 Traversing keys..........................................................................................................................672
18.3 Machine control panel menu......................................................................................................673
18.4 Virtual keyboard .........................................................................................................................674
18.5 Calibrating the touch panel ........................................................................................................676
19 Ctrl Energy............................................................................................................................................. 677
19.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................677
19.2 Displaying energy consumption .................................................................................................678
19.3 Measuring and saving the energy consumption ........................................................................679
19.4 Displaying measured curves......................................................................................................680
19.5 Using the energy-saving profile .................................................................................................680
20 Easy Message (828D only).................................................................................................................... 683
20.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................683
20.2 Activating Easy Message...........................................................................................................684
20.3 Creating/editing a user profile ....................................................................................................685
20.4 Setting-up events .......................................................................................................................686
20.5 Logging an active user on and off..............................................................................................688
20.6 Displaying SMS logs ..................................................................................................................689
20.7 Making settings for Easy Message ............................................................................................690
21 Easy Extend (828D only) ....................................................................................................................... 691
21.1 Overview ....................................................................................................................................691
21.2 Enabling a device.......................................................................................................................692
21.3 Activating and deactivating a device..........................................................................................692
21.4 Commissioning Easy Extend .....................................................................................................693
22 Service Planner (828D only) .................................................................................................................. 695
22.1 Performing and monitoring maintenance tasks .........................................................................695
22.2 Wartungsaufgaben einrichten ....................................................................................................697
23 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only) ..................................................................................... 699
23.1 PLC diagnostics .........................................................................................................................699
23.2 Structure of the user interface....................................................................................................700
23.3 Control options ...........................................................................................................................701
23.4 Displaying PLC properties .........................................................................................................703
23.5 Displaying information on the program blocks...........................................................................704
23.6 Displaying and editing NC/PLC variables ..................................................................................706

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 19
Table of contents

23.7 Downloading a PLC user program............................................................................................ 707

23.8 Editing the local variable table .................................................................................................. 708
23.9 Creating a new block................................................................................................................. 709
23.10 Editing block properties............................................................................................................. 710
23.11 Inserting and editing networks .................................................................................................. 711
23.12 Editing network properties......................................................................................................... 713
23.13 Displaying/canceling the access protection .............................................................................. 714
23.14 Displaying and editing symbol tables........................................................................................ 714
23.15 Searching for operands............................................................................................................. 715
23.16 Inserting/deleting a symbol table .............................................................................................. 717
23.17 Displaying the network symbol information table...................................................................... 718
23.18 Displaying and editing PLC signals........................................................................................... 719
23.19 Displaying cross references ...................................................................................................... 720
24 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms ......................................................................................... 723
24.1 Displaying alarms...................................................................................................................... 723
24.2 Displaying an alarm log............................................................................................................. 725
24.3 Displaying messages ................................................................................................................ 726
24.4 Sorting, alarms, faults and messages....................................................................................... 727
24.5 PLC and NC variables............................................................................................................... 728
24.5.1 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables .......................................................................... 728
24.5.2 Saving and loading screen forms.............................................................................................. 732
24.5.3 Load symbols ............................................................................................................................ 733
24.6 Version ...................................................................................................................................... 734
24.6.1 Displaying version data ............................................................................................................. 734
24.6.2 Save information ....................................................................................................................... 735
24.7 Logbook..................................................................................................................................... 736
24.7.1 Displaying and editing the logbook ........................................................................................... 737
24.7.2 Making a logbook entry ............................................................................................................. 737
24.8 Creating screenshots ................................................................................................................ 739
24.9 Remote diagnostics................................................................................................................... 740
24.9.1 Setting remote access............................................................................................................... 740
24.9.2 Permit modem........................................................................................................................... 742
24.9.3 Request remote diagnostics...................................................................................................... 742
24.9.4 Exit remote diagnostics ............................................................................................................. 744
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................ 745
A.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 745
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 747

Turning
20 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Introduction 1
1.1 Product overview
The SINUMERIK controller is a CNC (Computerized Numerical Controller) for machine tools.
You can use the CNC to implement the following basic functions in conjunction with a
machine tool:
● Creation and adaptation of part programs
● Execution of part programs
● Manual control
● Access to internal and external data media
● Editing of data for programs
● Management of tools, zero points and further user data required in programs
● Diagnostics of controller and machine

Operating areas
The basic functions are grouped in the following operating areas in the controller:

2SHUDWLQJDUHDV

([HFXWHSDUWSURJUDPVPDQXDOFRQWURO 0$&+,1(

(GLWLQJRIGDWDIRUSURJUDPV 3$5$0(7(5
7RROPDQDJHPHQW

&UHDWLQJDQGDGDSWLQJRISDUWSURJUDPV 352*5$0

$FFHVVWRLQWHUQDODQGH[WHUQDOGDWDPHGLD 352*5$0
0$1$*(5

$ODUPGLVSOD\6HUYLFHGLVSOD\ ',$*126,6

$GDSWLQJRIWKH1&GDWDWRWKHPDFKLQH 67$5783
V\VWHPVHWWLQJ

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 21
Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

1.2 Operator panel fronts

1.2.1 Overview

Introduction
The display (screen) and operation (e.g. hardkeys and softkeys) of the SINUMERIK Operate
user interface use the operator panel front.
In this example, the OP 010 operator panel front is used to illustrate the components that are
available for operating the controller and machine tool.

Operator controls and indicators

   

(5)

(5)





   

Turning
22 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

1 Status LED: POWER

2 Status LED: TEMP
(illuminated LEDs indicate increased wear)
3 Alphabetic key group
4 Numerical key group
5 Softkeys
6 Control key group
7 Hotkey group
8 Cursor key group
9 USB interface
10 Menu select key
11 Menu forward button
12 Machine area button
13 Menu back key

Figure 1-1 View of OP 010 operator panel front

References
A more precise description as well as a view of the other operator panel fronts that can be
used may be found in the following reference:
Operator Components and Networking Manual; SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl

1.2.2 Keys of the operator panel

The following keys and key combinations are available for operation of the control and the
machine tool.

Keys and key combinations

Key Function

<ALARM CANCEL>
Cancels alarms and messages that are marked with this
symbol.

<CHANNEL>
Advances for several channels.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 23
Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
<HELP>
Calls the context-sensitive online help for the selected window.

<NEXT WINDOW> *
 Toggles between the windows.
 For a multi-channel view or for a multi-channel functionality,
switches within a channel gap between the upper and lower
window.
 Selects the first entry in selection lists and in selection fields.
 Moves the cursor to the beginning of a text.

* on USB keyboards use the <Home> or <Pos 1> key

+ <NEXT WINDOW> + <SHIFT>
 Selects the first entry in selection lists and in selection fields.
 Moves the cursor to the beginning of a text.
 Selects a contiguous selection from the current cursor
position up to the target position.
 Selects a contiguous selection from the current cursor
position up to the beginning of a program block.
+ <NEXT WINDOW> + <ALT>
 Moves the cursor to the first object.
 Moves the cursor in the first column of a table row.
 Moves the cursor to the beginning of a program block.

+ <NEXT WINDOW> + <CTRL>

 Moves the cursor to the beginning of a program.
 Moves the cursor in the first row of the current column.

+ + <NEXT WINDOW> + <CTRL> + <SHIFT>

 Moves the cursor to the beginning of a program.
 Moves the cursor in the first row of the current column.
 Selects a contiguous selection from the current cursor
position up to the target position.
 Selects a contiguous selection from the current cursor
position up to the beginning of the program.

<PAGE UP>
Scrolls upwards by one page in a window.

Turning
24 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
+ <PAGE UP> + <SHIFT>
In the program manager and in the program editor from the
cursor position, selects directories or program blocks up to the
beginning of the window.

+ <PAGE UP> + <CTRL>

Positions the cursor to the topmost line of a window.

<PAGE DOWN>
Scrolls downwards by one page in a window.

+ <PAGE DOWN> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor, from the
cursor position, selects directories or program blocks up to the
end of the window.

+ <PAGE DOWN> + <CTRL>

Positions the cursor to the lowest line of a window.

<Cursor right>
 Editing box
Opens a directory or program (e.g. cycle) in the editor.
 Navigation
Moves the cursor further to the right by one character.

+ <Cursor right> + <CTRL>

 Editing box
Moves the cursor further to the right by one word.
 Navigation
Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell to the right.

<Cursor left>
 Editing box
Closes a directory or program (e.g. cycle) in the program
editor. If you have made changed, then these are accepted.
 Navigation
Moves the cursor further to the left by one character.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 25
Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
+ <Cursor left> + <CTRL>
 Editing box
Moves the cursor further to the left by one word.
 Navigation
Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell to the left.

<Cursor up>
 Editing box
Moves the cursor into the next upper field.
 Navigation
– Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell upwards.
– Moves the cursor upwards in a menu screen.

+ <Cursor up> + <CTRL>

 Moves the cursor in a table to the beginning of the table.
 Moves the cursor to the beginning of a window.

+ <Cursor up> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor, selects a
contiguous selection of directories and program blocks.

<Cursor down>
 Editing box
Moves the cursor downwards.
 Navigation
– Moves the cursor in a table to the next cell downwards.
– Moves the cursor in a window downwards.

+ <Cursor down> + <CTRL>

 Navigation
– Moves the cursor in a table to the end of the table.
– Moves the cursor to the end of a window.
 Simulation
Reduces the override.

+ <Cursor down> + <SHIFT>

In the program manager and in the program editor, selects a
contiguous selection of directories and program blocks.

Turning
26 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
<SELECT>
Switches between several specified options in selection drop
down list boxes and in selection boxes.
Activates check boxes.
In the program editor and in the program manager, selects a
program block or a program.

+ <SELECT> + <CTRL>
When selecting table rows, switches between selected and not
selected.
+ <SELECT> + <SHIFT>
Selects in selection lists and in selection fields the previous
entry or the last entry.
<END>
Moves the cursor to the last entry field in a window, to the end
of a table or a program block.
Selects the last entry in selection lists and in selection fields.

+ <END> + <SHIFT>
Moves the cursor to the last entry.
Selects a contiguous selection from the cursor position up to the
end of a program block.

+ <END> + <CTRL>
Moves the cursor to the last entry in the last line of the actual
column or to the end of a program.

+ + <END> + <CTRL> + <SHIFT>

Moves the cursor to the last entry in the last line of the actual
column or to the end of a program.
Selects a contiguous selection from the cursor position up to the
end of a program block.

<BACKSPACE>
 Editing box
Deletes a character selected to the left of the cursor.
 Navigation
Deletes all of the selected characters to the left of the cursor.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 27
Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
+ <BACKSPACE> + <CTRL>
 Editing window
Deletes a word selected to the left of the cursor.
 Navigation
Deletes all of the selected characters to the left of the cursor.

<TAB>
 In the program editor, indents the cursor by one character.
 In the program manager, moves the cursor to the next entry
to the right.

+ <TAB> + <SHIFT>
 In the program editor, indents the cursor by one character.
 In the program manager, moves the cursor to the next entry
to the left.
<TAB> + <CTRL>
 In the program editor, indents the cursor by one character.
 In the program manager, moves the cursor to the next entry
to the right.
<TAB> + <SHIFT> + <CTRL>
 In the program editor, indents the cursor by one character.
 In the program manager, moves the cursor to the next entry
to the left.

+ <CTRL> + <A>
$
In the actual window, selects all entries (only in the program
editor and program manager).

+ <CTRL> + <C>
&
Copies the selected content.

+ <CTRL> + <E>
(
Calls the "Ctrl Energy" function.

+ <CTRL> + <F>
)
Opens the search dialog in the machine data and setting data
lists, when loading and saving in the MDI editor as well as in the
program manager and in the system data.
+ <CTRL> + <L>
/
Scrolls the actual user interface through all installed languages
one after the other.

Turning
28 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
+ + <CTRL> + <SHIFT> + <L>
/
Scrolls the actual operator interface through all installed
languages in the inverse sequence.

+ <CTRL> + <P>
3
Generates a screenshot from the actual operator interface and
saves it as file.

+ <CTRL> + <S>
6
Switches the single block in or out in the simulation.

+ <CTRL> + <V>
9
 Pastes the text from the clipboard at the actual cursor
position.
 Pastes text from the clipboard at the position of a selected
text.

+ <CTRL> + <X>
;
Cuts out the selected text. The text is located in the clipboard.

+ <CTRL> + <Y>
<
Reactivates changes that were undone (only in the program
editor).

+ <CTRL> + <Z>
=
Undoes the last action (only in the program editor).

+ + <CTRL> + <ALT> + <C>

&
Creates a complete archive on an external data carrier (USB-
FlashDrive).

+ + <CTRL> + <ALT> + <S>

6
Creates a complete archive on an external data carrier (USB-
FlashDrive).

+ + <CTRL> + <ALT> + <D>

'
Backs up the log files on the USB-FlashDrive. If a USB-
FlashDrive is not inserted, then the files are backed-up in the
manufacturer's area of the CF-Card.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 29
Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
+ + <SHIFT> + <ALT> + <D>
'
Backs up the log files on the USB-FlashDrive. If a USB-
FlashDrive is not inserted, then the files are backed-up in the
manufacturer's area of the CF-Card.

+ + <SHIFT> + <ALT> + <T>

7
Starts "HMI Trace".

+ + <SHIFT> + <ALT> + <T>

7
Exits "HMI Trace".

+ <ALT> + <S>
6
Opens the Editor to enter Asian characters.

<DEL>
 Editing box
Deletes the first character right of the cursor.
 Navigation
Deletes all characters.

+ <DEL> + <CTRL>
 Editing box
Deletes the first word to the right of the cursor.
 Navigation
Deletes all characters.

<Spacebar>
 Editing window
Inserts a space
 Switches between several specified options in selection drop
down list boxes and in selection boxes.

<Plus>
  Opens a directory, which contains the element.
 Increases the size of the graphic view for simulation and
traces.

<Minus>
  Closes a directory, which contains the element.
 Reduces the size of the graphic view for simulation and
traces.

Turning
30 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
<Equals>
Opens the calculator in the entry fields.

<Asterisk>
Opens a directory with all of the subdirectories.

<Tilde>
a
Changes the sign of a number between plus and minus.

<INSERT>
 Opens an editing window in the insert mode. Press the key
again, exits the window and the entries are undone.
 Opens a selection box and shows the selection possibilities.
 In the machining step program, enters an empty line for G
code.

+ <INSERT> + <SHIFT>
For G code programming, for a cycle call activates or
deactivates the edit mode.

<INPUT>
 Completes input of a value in the entry field.
 Opens a directory or a program.
 Inserts an empty program block if the cursor is positioned at
the end of a program block.
 Inserts a character to select a new line and the program
block is split up into 2 parts.
 In the G code, inserts a new line after the program block.
 In the machining step program, inserts a new line for G code.

<ALARM> - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Select the "Diagnosis" operating area.

<PROGRAM> - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Calls the "Program Manager" operating area.

<OFFSET> - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Calls the "Parameter" operating area.

<PROGRAM MANAGER> - only OP 010 and OP 010C

Calls the "Program Manager" operating area.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 31
Introduction
1.2 Operator panel fronts

Key Function
Menu forward key
Advances in the extended horizontal softkey bar.

Menu back key

Returns to the higher-level menu.

<MACHINE>
Calls the "Machine" operating area.

<MENU SELECT>
Calls the main menu to select the operating area.

Turning
32 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.3 Machine control panels

1.3 Machine control panels

1.3.1 Overview
The machine tool can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens or with a
specific machine control panel from the machine manufacturer.
You use the machine control panel to initiate actions on the machine tool such as traversing
an axis or starting the machining of a workpiece.

1.3.2 Controls on the machine control panel

In this example, the MCP 483C IE machine control panel is used to illustrate the operator
controls and displays of a Siemens machine control panel.

Overview

         

(1) EMERGENCY STOP button

Activate the button in situations where
 life is at risk.
 there is the danger of a machine or workpiece being damaged.
All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 33
Introduction
1.3 Machine control panels

Machine manufacturer
For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button, please
refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
(2) Installation locations for control devices (d = 16 mm)
(3) RESET
 Stop processing the current programs.
The NCK control remains synchronized with the machine. It is in its initial
state and ready for a new program run.
 Cancel alarm.
(4) Program control
<SINGLE BLOCK>
Single block mode on/off.

<CYCLE START>
The key is also referred to as NC Start.
Execution of a program is started.
<CYCLE STOP>
The key is also referred to as NC Stop.
Execution of a program is stopped.
(5) Operating modes, machine functions
<JOG>
Select "JOG" mode.

<TEACH IN>
Select "Teach In" submode.

<MDI>
Select "MDI" mode.

<AUTO>
Select "AUTO" mode.

<REPOS>
Repositions, re-approaches the contour.

<REF POINT>
Approach reference point.

Inc <VAR>(Incremental Feed Variable)

Incremental mode with variable increment size.

Inc (incremental feed)

Incremental mode with predefined increment size of 1, ..., 10000
increments.
...

Turning
34 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.3 Machine control panels

Machine manufacturer
A machine data code defines how the increment value is
interpreted.
(6) Customer keys
T1 to T15
(7) Traversal axes with rapid traverse superposition and coordinate exchange
Axis keys
; Selects an axis.

...

Direction keys
 Select the traversing direction.

...


<RAPID>
Traverse axis in rapid traverse while pressing the direction key.

<WCS MCS>
Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS) and machine
coordinate system (MCS).
(8) Spindle control with override switch
<SPINDLE STOP>
Stop spindle.

<SPINDLE START>
Spindle is enabled.

(9) Feed control with override switch

<FEED STOP>
Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives.

<FEED START>
Enable for program execution in the current block and enable for ramp-up to
the feedrate value specified by the program.
(10) Keyswitch (four positions)

Figure 1-2 Front view of machine control panel (milling version)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 35
Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4 User interface

1.4.1 Screen layout

Overview

 


 

 



 




1 Active operating area and mode

2 Alarm/message line
3 Program name
4 Channel state and program control
5 Channel operational messages
6 Axis position display in actual value window

Turning
36 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

7 Display for
 active tool T
 current feedrate F
 active spindle with current status (S)
 Spindle utilization rate in percent
8 Operating window with program block display
9 Display of active G functions, all G functions, H functions and input window for different functions (for example, skip
blocks, program control)
10 Dialog line to provide additional user notes
11 Horizontal softkey bar
12 Vertical softkey bar

Figure 1-3 User interface

1.4.2 Status display

The status display includes the most important information about the current machine status
and the status of the NCK. It also shows alarms as well as NC and PLC messages.
Depending on your operating area, the status display is made up of several lines:
● Large status display
The status display is made up of three lines in the "Machine" operating area.
● Small status display
In the "Parameter", "Program", "Program Manager", "Diagnosis" and "Start-up" operating
areas, the status display consists of the first line from the large display.

Status display of "Machine" operating area

First line

Display Description
Active operating area
"Machine" operating area
With touch operation, you can change the operating area here.

"Parameter" operating area

"Program" operating area

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 37
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Display Description
"Program manager" operating area

"Diagnosis" operating area

"Start-up" operating area

Active mode or submode

"Jog" mode

"MDA" mode

"Auto" mode

"Teach In" submode

"Repos" submode

"Ref Point" submode

Alarms and messages

Alarm display
The alarm numbers are displayed in white lettering on a red
background. The associated alarm text is shown in red
lettering.
An arrow indicates that several alarms are active.
An acknowledgment symbol indicates that the alarm can be
acknowledged or canceled.
NC or PLC message
Message numbers and texts are shown in black lettering.
An arrow indicates that several messages are active.
Messages from NC programs do not have numbers and appear
in green lettering.

Turning
38 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

Second line

Display Description
Program path and program name

The displays in the second line can be configured.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Third line

Display Description
Display of channel status.
If several channels are present on the machine, the channel
name is also displayed.
If only one channel is available, only the "Reset" channel status
is displayed.
With touch operation, you can change the channel here.
Display of channel status:
The program was aborted with "Reset".
The program is started.
The program has been interrupted with "Stop".

Display of active program controls:

PRT: no axis motion
DRY: Dry run feedrate
RG0: reduced rapid traverse
M01: programmed stop 1
M101: programmed stop 2 (name varies)
SB1: Single block, coarse (program stops only after blocks
which perform a machine function)
SB2: Data block (program stops after each block)
SB3: Single block, fine (program also only stops after blocks
which perform a machine function in cycles)
Channel operational messages:
Stop: An operator action is usually required.
Wait: No operator action is required.

The machine manufacturer settings determine which program controls are displayed.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 39
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

1.4.3 Actual value window

The actual values of the axes and their positions are displayed.

Work/Machine
The displayed coordinates are based on either the machine coordinate system or the
workpiece coordinate system. The machine coordinate system (Machine), in contrast to the
workpiece coordinate system (Work), does not take any work offsets into consideration.
You can use the "Machine actual values" softkey to toggle between the machine coordinate
system and the workpiece coordinate system.
The actual value display of the positions can also refer to the SZS coordinate system
(settable zero system). However the positions are still output in the Work.
The ENS coordinate system corresponds to the Work coordinate system, reduced by certain
components ($P_TRAFRAME, $P_PFRAME, $P_ISO4FRAME, $P_CYCFRAME), which are
set by the system when machining and are then reset again. By using the ENS coordinate
system, jumps into the actual value display are avoided, that would otherwise be caused by
the additional components.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Maximize display

Press the ">>" and "Zoom act.val." softkeys.

Turning
40 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

Overview of display

Display Meaning
Header columns
Work/Machine Display of axes in selected coordinate system.
Item Position of displayed axes.
Display of distance-to-go The distance-to-go for the current NC block is displayed while the
program is running.
Feed/override The feed acting on the axes, as well as the override, are displayed
in the full-screen version.
Repos offset The distances traversed in manual mode are displayed.
This information is only displayed when you are in the "Repos"
submode.
Footer Display of active work offsets and transformations.
The T, F, S values are also displayed in the full-screen version.

See also
Work offsets (Page 79)

1.4.4 T,F,S window

The most important data concerning the current tool, the feedrate (path feed or axis feed in
JOG) and the spindle are displayed in the T, F, and S windows.

Tool data

Display Meaning
T
Tool name Name of current tool
Location Location number of current tool
D Cutting edge of the current tool
The tool is displayed with the associated tool type symbol corresponding to
the actual coordinate system in the selected cutting edge position.
If the tool is swiveled, then this is taken into account in the display of the
cutting edge position.
In DIN-ISO mode the H number is displayed instead of the cutting edge
number.
H H number (tool offset data record for DIN-ISO mode)
If there is a valid D number, this is also displayed.
Ø Diameter of current tool
R Radius of the actual tool

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 41
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Display Meaning
Z Z value of the actual tool
X X value of the actual tool

Feed data

Display Meaning
F
Feed disable

Actual feed value

If several axes traverse, is displayed for:
 "JOG" mode: Axis feed for the traversing axis
 "MDA" and "AUTO" mode: Programmed axis feed
Rapid traverse G0 is active
0.000 No feed is active
Override Display as a percentage

Spindle data

Display Meaning
S
S1 Spindle selection, identification with spindle number and main spindle
Speed Actual value (when spindle turns, display increases)
Setpoint (always displayed, also during positioning)
Symbol Spindle status
Spindle not enabled
Spindle is turning clockwise
Spindle is turning counterclockwise
Spindle is stationary

Override Display as a percentage

Spindle utilization Display between 0 and 100%
rate The upper limit value can be greater than 100%.
See machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
42 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.5 Current block display

The window of the current block display shows you the program blocks currently being
executed.

Display of current program

The following information is displayed in the running program:
● The workpiece name or program name is entered in the title row.
● The program block which is just being processed appears colored.

Editing a program directly

In the Reset state, you can edit the current program directly.

1. Press the <INSERT> key.

2. Place the cursor at the relevant position and edit the program block.
Direct editing is only possible for G code blocks in the NC memory, not
for external execution.
3. Press the <INSERT> key to exit the program and the edit mode again.

1.4.6 Operation via softkeys and buttons

Operating areas/operating modes

The user interface consists of different windows featuring eight horizontal and eight vertical
softkeys.
You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the softkey bars.
You can display a new window or execute functions using the softkeys.
The operating software is sub-divided into six operating areas (machine, parameter,
program, program manager, diagnosis, startup) and five operating modes or submodes
(JOG, MDA, AUTO, TEACH IN, REF POINT, REPOS).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 43
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Changing the operating area

Press the <MENU SELECT> key and select the desired operating area using
the horizontal softkey bar.

You can call the "Machine" operating area directly using the key on the operator panel.

Press the <MACHINE> key to select the "machine" operating area.

Changing the operating mode

You can select a mode or submode directly using the keys on the machine control panel or
using the vertical softkeys in the main menu.

General keys and softkeys

When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the user
interface, you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an operating area.
To do so, press the menu forward key.
The symbol indicates that you are in the expanded softkey bar.
Pressing the key again will take you back to the original horizontal softkey bar.
Use the ">>" softkey to open a new vertical softkey bar.

Use the "<<" softkey to return to the previous vertical softkey bar.

Use the "Return" softkey to close an open window.

Use the "Cancel" softkey to exit a window without accepting the entered
values and return to the next highest window.

When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parameter screen
form correctly, you can close the window and save the parameters using the
"Accept" softkey. The values you entered are applied to a program.
Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately, e.g. to rename or
delete a program.

Turning
44 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.7 Entering or selecting parameters

When setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter various parameter
values in the entry fields. The background color of the fields provides information on the
status of the entry field.

Orange background The input field is selected

Light orange background The input field is in edit mode
Pink background The entered value is incorrect

Selecting parameters
Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in the input field. Fields of
this type do not allow you to type in a value.
The selection symbol is displayed in the tooltip:

Associated selection fields

There are selection fields for various parameters:
● Selection of units
● Changeover between absolute and incremental dimensions

Procedure

1. Keep pressing the <SELECT> key until the required setting or unit is
selected.

The <SELECT> key only works if there are several selection options
available.
- OR -
Press the <INSERT> key.
The selection options are displayed in a list.

2. Select the required setting using the <Cursor down> and <Cursor up>
keys.

3. If required, enter a value in the associated input field.

4. Press the <INPUT> key to complete the parameter input.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 45
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Changing or calculating parameters

If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather than overwriting the
entire entry, switch to insertion mode.
In this mode, you can also enter simple calculation expressions, without having to explicitly
call the calculator. You can execute the four basic calculation types, work with expressions in
brackets as well as generate square roots and squares.

Note
Generating square roots and squares
The extract roots and generate square functions is not available in the parameter screens of
the cycles and functions in the "Program" operating area.

Press the <INSERT> key.

The insert mode is activated.

You can navigate within the input field using the <Cursor left> and
<Cursor right> keys.

Use the <BACKSPACE> and <DEL> key to delete individual characters.

+ <*> Enter the multiplication characters using the <SHIFT> + <*> keys.

+ </> Enter the division character using the <SHIFT> + </> keys.

Enter bracket expressions using the <SHIFT> + <(> and <SHIFT> + <)>
keys.

+ <)>

+ <number> Enter "r" or "R" as well as the number x from which you would like to
5 extract the root.

+ <number> Enter "s" or "S" as well as the number x for which you would like to
6 generate the square.

Close the value entry using the <INPUT> key and the result is
transferred into the field.

Turning
46 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

Accepting parameters
When you have correctly entered all necessary parameters, you can close the window and
save your settings.
You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously erroneous. In this
case, you can see from the dialog line which parameters are missing or were entered
incorrectly.

Press the "OK" softkey.

- OR -
Press the "Accept" softkey.

1.4.8 Pocket calculator

You can use the calculator to quickly calculate parameter values during programming. If, for
example, the diameter of a workpiece is only dimensioned indirectly in the workpiece
drawing, i.e., the diameter must be derived from the sum of several other dimension
specifications, you can calculate the diameter directly in the input field of this parameter.

Calculation methods
The following arithmetic operations are available:
● Addition
● Subtraction
● Multiplication
● Division
● Calculation with parentheses
● Square root of x
● x squared
You can input a maximum of 256 characters in a field.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 47
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Procedure

1. Position the cursor on the desired entry field.

2. Press the <=> key.

The calculator is displayed.

3. Input the arithmetic statement.
You can use arithmetic symbols, numbers, and commas.
4. Press the equals symbol on the calculator.

- OR -
Press the "Calculate" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <INPUT> key.
The new value is calculated and displayed in the entry field of the
calculator.
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The calculated value is accepted and displayed in the entry field of the
window.

Note
Input order for functions
When using the square root or squaring functions, make sure to press the "R" or "S" function
keys, respectively, before entering a number.

Turning
48 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.9 Context menu

When you right-click, the context menu opens and provides the following functions:
● Cut
Cut Ctrl+X
● Copy
Copy Ctrl+C
● Paste
Paste Ctrl+V

Program editor
Additional functions are available in the editor
● Undo the last change
Undo Ctrl+Z
● Redo the changes that were undone
Redo Ctrl+Y
Up to 10 changes can be undone.

1.4.10 Touch operation

If you have an operator panel with a touch screen, you can perform the following functions
with touch operation:

Operating area switchover

You can display the operating area menu by touching the display symbol for
the active operating area in the status display.

Channel switchover

You can switch over to the next channel by touching the channel display
in the status display.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 49
Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.11 Changing the user interface language

Procedure

1. Select the "Startup" operating area.

2. Press the "Change language" softkey.

The "Language selection" window opens. The language set last is
selected.
3. Position the cursor on the desired language.
4. Press the "OK" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <INPUT> key.

The user interface changes to the selected language.

Note
Changing the language directly on the input screens
You can switch between the user interface languages available on the controller directly on
the user interface by pressing the key combination <CTRL + L>.

Turning
50 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.12 Entering Asian characters

You have the possibility of entering Asian characters.

Note
Call the input editor with <Alt + S>
The input editor can only be called there where it is permissible to enter Asian characters.

You can select a character by using the Pinyin phonetic notation, which enables Chinese
characters to be expressed by combining Latin letters.
The editor is available for the following Asian languages:
● Simplified Chinese
● Traditional Chinese
● Korean

Note
You require a special keyboard to enter Korean characters.

Structure of editor

3KRQHWLFLQSXW )XQFWLRQVHOHFWLRQ

2IIHUHGFKDUDFWHUV
3KRQHWLFVHOHFWLRQIURPGLFWLRQDU\

Functions

Pinyin input

Editing of the dictionary

Input of Latin letters

Precondition
The control has been set to Chinese or Korean.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 51
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Procedure

Editing characters
1. Open the screen form and position the cursor on the entry field and
$ press the <Alt +S> keys.
The editor is displayed.
+

2. Enter the desired phonetic notation.

3. Click the <Cursor down> key to access the dictionary.

4. By keeping the <Cursor down> key pressed, displays all the entered
phonetic notations and the associated selection characters.
5. Press the <BACKSPACE> softkey to delete entered phonetic notations.

6. Press the number key to insert the associated character.

When a character is selected, the editor records the frequency with
which it is selected for a specific phonetic notation and offers this
character at the top of the list when the editor is next opened.
Editing the dictionary
1. Select the dictionary editing function in the selection box.
The editor provides a further line in which the combined characters and
phonetic notations are displayed.
2. Enter the desired phonetic notation in the phonetic input field.
Various characters are displayed for this phonetic notation, from which
you can select a character by entering either of the appropriate number
(1 to 9).
You can toggle the input cursor between the compound phonetic
notations field and the phonetic input field by pressing the <TAB> key.
Combined characters are cancelled via the <BACKSPACE> key.

3. Press the <SELECT> key to take a combined phonetic notation into the
dictionary.

Turning
52 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.13 Protection levels

The input and modification of data in the control system is protected by passwords at
sensitive places.

Access protection via protection levels

The input or modification of data for the following functions depends on the protection level
setting:
● Tool offsets
● Work offsets
● Setting data
● Program creation / program editing

Note
Configuring access levels for softkeys
You have the option of providing softkeys with protection levels or completely hiding
them.

References
For additional information, please refer to the following documentation:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Softkeys

Machine operating area Protection level

End user
(protection level 3)

Parameters operating area Protection level

Tool management lists

Key switch 3
(protection level 4)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 53
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Diagnostics operating area Protection level

Keyswitch 3
(protection level 4)

End user
(protection level 3)

End user
(protection level 3)

Manufacturer
(protection level 1)

End user
(protection level 3)

Service
(protection level 2)

Startup operating area Protection levels

End user
(protection level 3)

Keyswitch 3
(protection level 4)

Keyswitch 3
(protection level 4)

Key switch 3
(protection level 4)

Keyswitch 3
(protection level 4)

Service
(protection level 2)

End user
(protection level 3)

End user
(protection level 3)

Turning
54 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

1.4.14 Online help in HMI sl

A comprehensive context-sensitive online help is stored in the control system.
● A brief description is provided for each window and, if required, step-by-step instructions
for the operating sequences.
● A detailed help is provided in the editor for every entered G code. You can also display all
G functions and take over a selected command directly from the help into the editor.
● A help page with all parameters is provided on the input screen in the cycle programming.
● Lists of the machine data
● Lists of the setting data
● Lists of the drive parameters
● List of all alarms

Procedure

Calling context-sensitive online help

1. You are in an arbitrary window of an operating area.
2. Press the <HELP> key or on an MF2 keyboard, the <F12> key.
The help page of the currently selected window is opened in a
subscreen.

3. Press the "Full screen" softkey to use the entire user interface for the
display of the online help.

Press the "Full screen" softkey again to return to the subscreen.

4. If further helps are offered for the function or associated topics, position
the cursor on the desired link and press the "Follow reference" softkey.
The selected help page is displayed.
5. Press the "Back to reference" softkey to jump back to the previous help.

Calling a topic in the table of contents

1. Press the "Table of contents" softkey.
Depending on which technology you are using, the Operating Manuals
"Operator control Milling", "Operator control Turning" or "Operator
control Universal" as well as the "Programming" Programming Manual
are displayed.
2. Select the desired manual with the <Cursor down> and <Cursor up>
keys.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 55
Introduction
1.4 User interface

3 Press the <Cursor right> or <INPUT> key or double-click to open the

manual and the chapter.

4. Navigate to the desired topic with the "Cursor down" key.

5. Press the <Follow reference> softkey or the <INPUT> key to display the
help page for the selected topic.

6. Press the "Current topic" softkey to return to the original help.

Searching for a topic

1. Press the "Search" softkey.
The "Search in Help for: " window is opened.
2. Activate the "Full text " checkbox to search in all help pages.
If the checkbox is not activated, a search is performed in the table of
contents and in the index.
3. Enter the desired keyword in the "Text" field and press the "OK" softkey.
If you enter the search term on the operator panel, replace an umlaut
(accented character) by an asterisk (*) as dummy.
All entered terms and sentences are sought with an AND operation. In
this way, only documents and entries that satisfy all the search criteria
are displayed.
4. Press the "Keyword index" softkey if you only want to display the index
of the operating and programming manual.

Displaying alarm descriptions and machine data

1. If messages or alarms are pending in the "Alarms", "Messages" or
"Alarm Log" window, position the cursor at the appropriate display and
press the <HELP> or the <F12> key.
The associated alarm description is displayed.
2. If you are in the "Startup" operating area in the windows for the display
of the machine, setting and drive data, position the cursor on the
desired machine data or drive parameter and press the <HELP> or the
<F12> key.
The associated data description is displayed.

Turning
56 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Introduction
1.4 User interface

Displaying and inserting a G code command in the editor

1. A program is opened in the editor.
Position the cursor on the desired G code command and press the
<HELP> or the <F12> key.
The associated G code description is displayed.
2. Press the "Display all G functions" softkey.

3. With the aid of the search function, select, for example, the desired G
code command.

4. Press the "Transfer to editor" softkey.

The selected G function is taken into the program at the cursor position.
5. Press the "Exit help" softkey again to close the help.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 57
Introduction
1.4 User interface

Turning
58 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Setting up the machine 2
2.1 Switching on and switching off

Start-up

When the control starts up, the main screen opens according to the operating mode
specified by the machine manufacturer. In general, this is the main screen for the "REF
POINT" submode.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 59
Setting up the machine
2.2 Approaching a reference point

2.2 Approaching a reference point

2.2.1 Referencing axes

Your machine tool can be equipped with an absolute or incremental path measuring system.
An axis with incremental path measuring system must be referenced after the control has
been switched-on – however, an absolute path measuring system does not have to be
referenced.
For the incremental path measuring system, all the machine axes must therefore first
approach a reference point, the coordinates of which are known to be relative to the machine
zero-point.

Sequence
Prior to the approach, the axes must be in a position from where they can approach the
reference point without a collision.
The axes can also all approach the reference point simultaneously, depending on the
manufacturer’s settings.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

NOTICE

If the axes are not in a collision-free position, you must first traverse them to safe positions
in "JOG" or "MDA" mode.
You must follow the axis motions directly on the machine!
Ignore the actual value display until the axes have been referenced!
The software limit switches are not active!

Procedure

1. Press the <JOG> key.

2. Press the <REF. POINT> key.

Turning
60 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.2 Approaching a reference point

3. Select the axis to be traversed.

;

4. Press the <-> or <+> key.

 The selected axis moves to the reference point.
If you have pressed the wrong direction key, the action is not accepted
 and the axes do not move.

A symbol is shown next to the axis if it has been referenced.

The axis is referenced as soon as the reference point is reached. The actual value display is
set to the reference point value.
From now on, path limits, such as software limit switches, are active.
End the function via the machine control panel by selecting operating mode "AUTO" or
"JOG".

2.2.2 User agreement

If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need to confirm that the
current displayed position of an axis corresponds to its actual position on the machine when
you reference an axis. Your confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other
Safety Integrated functions.
You can only give your user acknowledgement for an axis after it has approached the
reference point.
The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate system (Machine).

Option
User acknowledgement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software option.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <REF POINT> key.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 61
Setting up the machine
2.2 Approaching a reference point

3. Select the axis to be traversed.

;

4. Press the <-> or <+> key.

 The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The
coordinate of the reference point is displayed.
 The axis is marked with .

5. Press the "User enable" softkey.

The "User Acknowledge" window opens.
It shows a list of all machine axes with their current position and SI
position.
5. Position the cursor in the "Acknowledgement" field for the axis in
question.
6. Activate the acknowledgement with the <SELECT> key.

The selected axis is marked with an "x" meaning "safely referenced"

in the "Acknowledgement" column.
By pressing the <SELECT> key again, you deactivate the
acknowledgement again.

Turning
62 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.3 Modes and mode groups

2.3 Modes and mode groups

2.3.1 General
You can work in three different operating modes.

"JOG" mode
"JOG" mode is used for the following preparatory actions:
● Approach reference point, i.e. the machine axis is referenced
● Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. measuring tools,
measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program
● Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption
● Positioning axes

Select "JOG"

Press the <JOG> key.

"Ref Point" submode

The "REF POINT" submode is used to synchronize the control and the machine. For this
purpose, you approach the reference point in "JOG" mode.

Selecting "REF POINT"

Press the <REF POINT> key.

"REPOS" submode
The "REPOS" submode is used for repositioning to a defined position. After a program
interruption (e.g. to correct tool wear values) move the tool away from the contour in "JOG"
mode.
The distances traversed in "JOG" mode are displayed in the actual value window as the
"Repos" offset.
"REPOS" offsets can be displayed in the machine coordinate system (MCS) or workpiece
coordinate system (WCS).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 63
Setting up the machine
2.3 Modes and mode groups

Selecting "Repos"

Press the <REPOS> key.

"MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic)

In "MDA" mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-modally to set up the
machine or to perform a single action.

Selecting "MDA"

Press the <MDA> key.

"AUTO" mode
In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only partially.

Select "AUTO"

Press the <AUTO> key.

"TEACH IN" submode

The "TEACH IN" submode is available in the "AUTO" and "MDA" modes.
There you may create, edit and execute part programs (main programs or subroutines) for
motional sequences or simple workpieces by approaching and saving positions.

Selecting "Teach In"

Press the <TEACH IN> key.

Turning
64 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.3 Modes and mode groups

2.3.2 Modes groups and channels

Every channel behaves like an independent NC. A maximum of one part program can be
processed per channel.
● Control with 1channel
One mode group exists.
● Control with several channels
Channels can be grouped to form several "mode groups."

Example
Control with 4 channels, where machining is carried out in 2 channels and 2 other channels
are used to control the transport of the new workpieces.
Mode group 1 channel 1 (machining)
Channel 2 (transport)
Mode group 2 channel 3 (machining)
Channel 4 (transport)

Mode groups (MGs)

Technologically-related channels can be combined to form a mode group.
Axes and spindles of the same mode group can be controlled by one or more channels.
An operating mode group is in one of "Automatic", "JOG" or "MDI" operating modes, i.e.,
several channels of an operating mode group can never assume different operating modes.

2.3.3 Channel switchover

It is possible to switch between channels when several are in use. Since individual channels
may be assigned to different mode groups, a channel switchover command is also an implicit
mode switchover command.
When a channel menu is available, all of the channels are displayed on softkeys and can be
switched over.

Changing the channel

Press the <CHANNEL> key.

The channel changes over to the next channel.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 65
Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

- OR -
If the channel menu is available, a softkey bar is displayed. The active
channel is highlighted.
Another channel can be selected by pressing one of the other softkeys.

References
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Channel switchover via touch operation

On the HT 8 and when using a touch screen operator panel, you can switch to the next
channel or display the channel menu via touch operation in the status display.

2.4 Settings for the machine

2.4.1 Switching over the coordinate system (MCS/WCS)

The coordinates in the actual value display are relative to either the machine coordinate
system or the workpiece coordinate system.
By default, the workpiece coordinate system is set as a reference for the actual value
display.
The machine coordinate system (MCS), in contrast to the workpiece coordinate system
(WCS), does not take into account any work offsets, tool offsets and coordinate rotation.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <JOG> or <AUTO> key.

3. Press the "Act.vls. MCS" softkey.

The machine coordinate system is selected.

The title of the actual value window changes in the MCS.

Turning
66 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

Machine manufacturer
The softkey to changeover the coordinate system can be hidden. Please refer to the
machine manufacturer's specifications.

2.4.2 Switching the unit of measurement

You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measurement. Switching the unit of
measurement always applies to the entire machine. All required information is automatically
converted to the new unit of measurement, for example:
● Positions
● Tool offsets
● Work offsets

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Proceed as follows

1. Select <JOG> or <AUTO> mode in the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.

3. Press the "Switch to inch" softkey.

A prompt asks you whether you really want to switch over the unit of
measurement.
4. Press the "OK" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 67
Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

The softkey label changes to "Switch to metric".

The unit of measurement applies to the entire machine.
5. Press the "Switch to metric" softkey to set the unit of measurement of
the machine to metric again.

See also
Default settings for manual mode (Page 108)

2.4.3 Setting the work offset

You can enter a new position value in the actual value display for individual axes when a
settable work offset is active.
The difference between the position value in the machine coordinate system MCS and the
new position value in the workpiece coordinate system WCS is saved permanently in the
currently active work offset (e.g. G54).

Relative actual value

Further, you also have the possibility of entering position values in the relative coordinate
system.

Note
The new actual value is only displayed. The relative actual value has no effect on the axis
positions and the active work offset.

Resetting the relative actual value

Press the "Delete REL" softkey.

The actual values are deleted.

The softkeys to set the zero point in the relative coordinate system are only available if the
corresponding machine data is set.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
68 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

Precondition
The control is in the workpiece coordinate system.
The actual value can be set in both the Reset and Stop state.

Note
Setting the WO in the Stop state
If you enter the new actual value in the Stop state, the changes made are only visible and
only take effect when the program is continued.

Procedure

1. Select the "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the "Set WO" softkey.

- OR -
Press the ">>", "REL act. vals" and "Set REL" softkeys to set position
values in the relative coordinate system.

3. Enter the new required position value for Z, X or Y directly in the actual
value display (you can toggle between the axes with the cursor keys)
and press the <INPUT> key to confirm the entries.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 69
Setting up the machine
2.4 Settings for the machine

- OR -
Press softkey "Z=0", "X=0" or "Y=0" (if there is a Y axis), to set the
required position to zero.

Resetting the actual value

Press the "Delete active WO" softkey.

The offset is deleted permanently.

NOTICE
Irreversible active work offset
The current active work offset is irreversibly deleted by this action.

Turning
70 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.5 Measuring the tool

2.5 Measuring the tool

The geometries of the machining tool must be taken into consideration when executing a
part program. These are stored as tool offset data in the tool list. Each time the tool is called,
the control considers the tool offset data.
When programming the part program, you only need to enter the workpiece dimensions from
the production drawing. After this, the controller independently calculates the individual tool
path.
You can determine the tool offset data, i.e. the length and radius or diameter, either manually
or automatically with tool probes.

See also
Tool dimensioning (Page 578)
Measuring the tool (Page 589)

2.5.1 Measuring a tool manually

When measuring manually, traverse the tool manually to a known reference point in order to
determine the tool dimensions in the X and Z directions. The control system then calculates
the tool offset data from the position of the tool carrier reference point and the reference
point.

Reference point
The workpiece edge is used as the reference point when measuring length X and length Z.
The chuck of the main or counterspindle can also be used when measuring in the Z
direction.
You specify the position of the workpiece edge during the measurement.

Note
Lathes with B axis
For lathes with a B axis, execute the tool change and alignment in the T, S, M window before
performing the measurement.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 71
Setting up the machine
2.5 Measuring the tool

Procedure

1. Select the "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the "Meas. tool" softkey.

3. Press the "Manual" softkey.

4. Press the "Select tool” softkey.

The "Tool selection" window is opened.
5. Select the tool that you wish to measure.
The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool must
already be entered in the tool list.
6. Press the "In manual" softkey.
The tool is accepted into the "Length Manual" window.
7. Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to
measure.

8. Scratch the required edge using the tool.

9. If you do not wish to keep the tool at the workpiece edge, then press the
"Save position" softkey.
The tool position is saved and the tool can be retracted from the
workpiece. For instance, this can be practical if the workpiece diameter
still has to be subsequently measured.
If the tool can remain at the workpiece edge, then after scratching you
can directly continue with step 11.
10. Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0.
If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual
value display.
11. Press the "Set length" softkey.
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.
Whereby the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are
automatically taken into consideration as well.

Turning
72 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.5 Measuring the tool

Note
Tool measurement is only possible with an active tool.

2.5.2 Measuring a tool with a tool probe

During automatic measuring, you determine the tool dimensions in the directions X and Z
with the aid of a probe.
You have the possibility of measuring a tool using a tool holder that can be orientated (tool
carrier, swivel).
The function "Measure with tool carrier that can be orientated" is implemented for lathes with
a swivel axis around Y and associated tool spindle. The swivel axis can be used to align the
tool on the X/Z level. The swivel axis can assume any position around Y to measure turning
tools. Multiples of 90° are permitted for milling and drilling tools. Multiples of 180° are
possible when positioning the tool spindle.

Note
Lathes with B axis
For lathes with a B axis, execute the tool change and alignment in the T, S, M window before
performing the measurement.

References
For further information about lathes with B axis, please refer to the following reference:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate / SINUMERIK 840D sl
The tool offset data is then calculated from the known position of the tool carrier reference
point and the probe.
The corresponding windows can be adapted to the measurement tasks in order to
automatically measure tools.

Adapting the user interface to calibrating and measuring functions

The following selection options can be switched-in or switched-out:
● Calibration plane, measurement plane
● Probe
● Calibration feedrate (measuring feedrate)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 73
Setting up the machine
2.5 Measuring the tool

Preconditions
● If you wish to measure your tools with a tool probe, the machine manufacturer must
parameterize special measuring functions for that purpose.
● Enter the cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list before
performing the actual measurement. If the tool is measured using a tool carrier that can
be orientated, then the cutting edge position must be entered into the tool list
corresponding to the initial tool carrier position.
● Calibrate the probe first.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Insert the tool that you want to measure.

If the tool is to be measured using a tool carrier that can be orientated,
then at this position the tool should be aligned in the same way that it
will be subsequently measured.
2. Select the "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.

3. Press the "Meas. tool" and "Automatic" softkeys.

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to
measure.

4. Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the tool probe in such a way
that any collisions can be avoided when the tool probe is being
traversed in the corresponding direction.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The automatic measuring process is started, i.e. the tool is traversed at
the measurement feedrate to the probe and back again.
The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. Whereby the
cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken
into consideration as well.
If turning tools with tool carrier that can be oriented are measured
around Y using any positions (not multiples of 90°) of the swivel axis,
then it should be taken into consideration that the turning tool is
measured with the same tool position in both axes X/Z, assuming that
this is possible.

Turning
74 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.5 Measuring the tool

2.5.3 Calibrating the tool probe

To be able to measure your tools automatically, you must first determine the position of the
tool probe in the machine area in relation to the machine zero.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Sequence
The calibrating tool must be a turning tool type (roughing or finishing tool). Cutting edge
positions 1 - 4 can be used for the tool probe calibration. You must enter the length and the
radius or diameter of the calibrating tool in the tool list.
Calibrate the probe in all directions in which you wish to subsequently perform
measurements.

Procedure

1. Change the calibrating tool.

2. Select the "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.

3. Press the "Meas. tool" and "Calibrate probe" softkeys.

4. Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which point of the tool probe
you wish to determine first.

5. Select the direction (+ or -), in which you would like to approach the tool
probe.

6. Position the calibrating tool in the vicinity of the tool probe in such a way
that any collisions can be avoided when the first point of the tool probe
is being approached.
7. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The calibration process is started, i.e. the calibrating tool is
automatically traversed at the measurement feedrate to the probe and
back again. The position of the tool probe is determined and saved in an
internal data area.
8. Repeat the process for the other other points of the tool probe.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 75
Setting up the machine
2.5 Measuring the tool

2.5.4 Measuring a tool with a magnifying glass

You can also use a magnifying glass to determine the tool dimensions, if this is available on
the machine.
In this case, SINUMERIK Operate calculates the tool offset data from the known positions of
the tool carrier reference point and the cross-hairs of the magnifying glass.

Note
Lathes with B axis
For lathes with a B axis, execute the tool change and alignment in the T, S, M window before
performing the measurement.

Procedure

1. Select the "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the "Meas. tool" softkey.

3. Press the "Zoom" softkey.

4. Press the "Select tool” softkey.

The "Tool selection" window is opened.
5. Select the tool that you wish to measure.
The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool must
already be entered in the tool list.
6. Press the "In manual" softkey.
The tool is accepted in the "Zoom" window.
7. Traverse the tool towards the magnifying glass and align the tool tip P
with the magnifying glass cross-hairs.
Press the "Set length" softkey.

Turning
76 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the workpiece zero. To
determine this zero point, measure the length of the workpiece and save the position of the
cylinder's face surface in the direction Z in a work offset. This means that the position is
stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

Calculation
When the workpiece zero / work offset is calculated, the tool length is automatically taken
into account.

Measuring only
If you wish to measure the workpiece zero in "Measuring Only" mode, the measured values
are merely displayed without any changes being made to the coordinate system.

Adapting the user interface to the measurement functions

The following selection options can be switched-in or switched-out:
Activate the following selection options using setting data:
● Calibration plane, measurement plane
● Work offset as basis of the measuring process
● Number of the probe calibration data set
● Offset target, adjustable work offset
● Offset target, basis reference
● Offset target, global basis work offset
● Offset target, channel-specific basis work offset

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Precondition
The requirement for measuring the workpiece is that a tool with known lengths is in the
machining position.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 77
Setting up the machine
2.6 Measuring the workpiece zero

Procedure

1. Select "JOG" mode in the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the "Workpiece zero" softkey.

The "Set Edge" window opens.
3. Select "Measuring only" if you only want to display the measured
values.

- OR -
Select the desired work offset in which you want to store the zero point
(e.g. basis reference).

- OR -
Press the "Work offset" softkey and select the work offset in which the
zero point is to be saved in the "Work Offset – G54 … G599" window
that opens and press the "In Manual" softkey.
You return to the "Set Edge" window.

4. Traverse the tool in the Z direction and scratch the workpiece.

5. Enter the position setpoint of the workpiece edge Z0 and press the "Set
WO" softkey.

Note
Settable work offsets
The labeling of the softkeys for the adjustable work offsets varies, i.e. the selectable work
offsets configured at the machine are displayed (examples: G54…G57, G54…G505,
G54…G599).
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
78 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

2.7 Work offsets

Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis coordinates is
based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (Machine). The program
for machining the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece
coordinate system (Work). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily
identical. The distance between the machine zero and the workpiece zero depends on the
workpiece type and how it is clamped. This work offset is taken into account during
execution of the program and can be a combination of different offsets.
Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the axis coordinates is
based on the machine zero of the machine coordinate system (Machine).
The actual value display of the positions can also refer to the SZS coordinate system
(settable zero system). The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is
displayed.

: :&6

&RRUGLQDWHWUDQVIRUPDWLRQ
7RWDO 6=6
RIIVHW
:RUNRIIVHWILQH

:RUNRIIVHWFRDUVH

%DVLFRIIVHW 0&6

Figure 2-1 Work offsets

When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least one offset (base offset
or work offset) exists in which the position of the workpiece zero is saved.

Base offset
The base offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not defined a base offset,
its value will be zero. The base offset is specified in the "Work offset - Base" window.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 79
Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

Coarse and fine offsets

Every work offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse offset and a fine offset.
You can call the work offsets from any program (coarse and fine offsets are added together).
You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset
that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero
in the fine offset.

Note
Deselect fine offset
You have the option of deselecting the fine offset via machine data
$MN_MM_FRAM_FINE_TRANS.

See also
Actual value window (Page 40)

2.7.1 Display active zero offset

The following work offsets are displayed in the "Work Offset - Active" window:
● Work offsets, for which active offsets are included, or for which values are entered.
● adjustable work offsets
● Total work offset
This window is generally used only for monitoring.
The availability of the offsets depends on the setting.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
80 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Work offset" softkey.

The "Work Offset - Active" window is opened.

Note
Further details on work offsets
If you would like to see further details about the specified offsets or if you would like to
change values for the rotation, scaling or mirroring, press the "Details" softkey.

2.7.2 Displaying the work offset "overview"

The active offsets or system offsets are displayed for all set-up axes in the "Work Offset -
Overview" window.
In addition to the offset (course and fine), the rotation, scaling and mirroring defined using
this are also displayed.
This window is generally used only for monitoring.

Display of active work offsets

Work offsets
DRF Displays the handwheel axis offset.
Rotary table reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $
P_PARTFRAME.
Basic reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_SETFRAME.
Access to the system offsets is protected via a keyswitch.
External WO frame Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_EXTFRAME.
Total base WO Displays all effective basis offsets.
G500 Displays the work offsets activated with G54 - G599.
Under certain circumstances, you can change the data using "Set
WO", i.e. you can correct a zero point that has been set.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 81
Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

Work offsets
Tool reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with
$P_TOOLFRAME.
Workpiece reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_WPFRAME.
Programmed WO Displays the additional work offsets programmed with $P_PFRAME.
Cycle reference Displays the additional work offsets programmed with
$P_CYCFRAME.
Total WO Displays the active work offset, resulting from the total of all work
offsets.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2 Press the "Work offset" and "Overview" softkeys.

The "Work Offsets - Overview" window opens.

2.7.3 Displaying and editing base zero offset

The defined channel-specific and global base offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets,
are displayed for all set-up axes in the "Work offset - Base" window.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Work offset" softkey.

Turning
82 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

3. Press the "Base" softkey.

The "Work offset - Base" window is opened.
4. You can edit the values directly in the table.

Note
Activate base offsets
The offsets specified here are immediately active.

2.7.4 Displaying and editing settable zero offset

All settable offsets, divided into coarse and fine offsets, are displayed in the "Work Offset -
G54..G599" window.
Rotation, scaling and mirroring are displayed.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Work offset" softkey.

3. Press the "G54…G599" softkey.

The "Work Offset - G54..G599" window is opened.
Note
The labeling of the softkeys for the adjustable work offsets varies, i.e.
the selectable work offsets configured at the machine are displayed
(examples: G54…G57, G54…G505, G54…G599).
Please observe the machine manufacturer's specifications.
4. You can edit the values directly in the table.

Note
Activate settable work offsets
The settable work offsets must first be selected in the program before they have an impact.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 83
Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

2.7.5 Displaying the zero offset details.

For each work offset, you can display and edit all data for all axes. You can also delete work
offsets.
For every axis, values for the following data will be displayed:
● Coarse and fine offsets
● Rotation
● Scaling
● Mirroring

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Note
Settings for rotation, scaling and mirroring are specified here and can only be changed here.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Work offset" softkey.

3. Press the "Active", "Base" or "G54…G599" softkey.

The corresponding window appears.

4. Place the cursor on the desired work offset to view its details.
5. Press the "Details" softkey.

A window opens, depending on the selected work offset, e.g. "Work

Offset - Details: G54 to G599".
6. You can edit the values directly in the table.
- OR -
Press the "Clear offset" softkey to reset all entered values.

Turning
84 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

Press the "WO +" or "WO -" softkey to select the next or previous offset,
respectively, within the selected area ("Active", "Base", "G54 to G599")
without first having to switch to the overview window.
...
If you have reached the end of the range (e.g. G599), you will switch
automatically to the beginning of the range (e.g. G54).

These value changes are available in the part program immediately or after "Reset".

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Press the "Back" softkey to close the window.

2.7.6 Deleting a work offset

You have the option of deleting zero offsets. This resets the entered values.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Work offset" softkey.

3. Press the "Active", "Base" or "G54…G599" softkey.

4. Press the "Details" softkey.

5. Position the cursor on the zero offset you would like to delete.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 85
Setting up the machine
2.7 Work offsets

6. Press the "Clear Offset" soft key.

2.7.7 Measuring the workpiece zero

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area and press the "Work offset"
softkey.

2. Press the "G54...G599" softkey and select the work offset in which the
zero point is to be saved.

3. Press the "Workpiece zero" softkey.

You change to the "Set Edge" window in the "JOG" mode.

4. Traverse the tool in the Z direction and scratch it.

5. Enter the position setpoint of the workpiece edge Z0 and press the "Set
WO" softkey.

Turning
86 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data

2.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data

2.8.1 Specify working area limitations

The "Working area limitation" function can be used to limit the range within which a tool can
traverse in all channel axes. These commands allow you to set up protection zones in the
working area which are out of bounds for tool movements.
In this way, you are able to restrict the traversing range of the axes in addition to the limit
switches.

Preconditions
You can only make changes in "AUTO" mode when in the RESET condition. These changes
are then immediate.
You can make changes in "JOG" mode at any time. These changes, however, only become
active at the start of a new motion.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Setting data" softkey.

The "Working area limit." window appears.

3. Place the cursor in the required field and enter the new values via the
numeric keyboard.
The upper or lower limit of the protection zone changes according to
your inputs.
4. Click the checkbox to "active" to activate the protection zone.

Note
You will find all of the setting data in the "Start-up" operating area under "Machine data" via
the menu forward key.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 87
Setting up the machine
2.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data

2.8.2 Editing spindle data

The speed limits set for the spindles that must not be under- or overshot are displayed in the
"Spindles" window.
You can limit the spindle speeds in fields "Minimum" and "Maximum" within the limit values
defined in the relevant machine data.

Spindle speed limitation at constant cutting rate

In field "Spindle speed limitation at G96", the programmed spindle speed limitation at
constant cutting speed is displayed together with the permanently active limitations.
This speed limitation, for example, prevents the spindle from accelerating to the max. spindle
speed of the current gear stage (G96) when performing tapping operations or machining
very small diameters.

Note
The "Spindle data" softkey only appears if a spindle is configured.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press softkeys "Setting data" and "Spindle data".

The "Spindles" window opens.

3. If you want to change the spindle speed, place the cursor on the
"Maximum", "Minimum", or "Spindle speed limitation at G96" and enter a
new value.

Turning
88 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data

2.8.3 Spindle chuck data

You store the chuck dimensions of the spindles at your machine in the "Spindle chuck data"
window.

Manually measuring a tool

If you want to use the chuck of the main or counter spindle as a reference point during
manual measuring, specify the chuck dimension ZC.

Main spindle

=& =6

Dimensioning the main spindle

Counterspindle
You can measure either the forward edge or stop edge of the counter-spindle. The forward
edge or stop edge automatically serves as the valid reference point when traversing the
counter-spindle. This is especially important when gripping the workpiece using the counter-
spindle.

)URQWHGJH 6WRSHGJH
6WRSHGJH )URQWHGJH

=6

=6 =& =( =&

Dimensions, counterspindle jaw type 1 Dimensions, counterspindle jaw type 2

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 89
Setting up the machine
2.8 Monitoring axis and spindle data

Tailstock

;5

=5

Dimensioning the tailstock

The length of the tailstock (ZR) and the diameter of the tailstock (XR) of the spindle screen
are needed for the display of the tailstock in the simulation.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press softkeys "Setting data" and "Spindle chuck data".

The "Spindle chuck data" window opens.

3. Enter the desired parameters.

The settings become active immediately.

See also
Machining with the counterspindle (Page 483)

Turning
90 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.9 Displaying setting data lists

Parameter Description Unit

ZC1 Main spindle chuck dimensions (inc) mm
Endpiece type Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge
 Jaw type 1
 Jaw type 2
ZC3 Chuck dimension, counter-spindle (inc) - only for a counter-spindle that has been mm
set-up
ZS3 Stop dimension, counter-spindle (inc) - only for a counter-spindle that has been mm
set-up
ZE3 Jaw dimension, counter-spindle (inc) - only for a counter-spindle that has been mm
set-up and "Jaw type 1"
XR Tailstock diameter - only for tailstock that has been set-up mm
ZR Tailstock length - only for tailstock that has been set-up mm

2.9 Displaying setting data lists

You can display lists with configured setting data.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press "Setting data" and "Data lists" softkeys.

The "Setting data list" window opens.

3. Press the "Select data list" softkey and in the "View" list, select the
required list with setting data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 91
Setting up the machine
2.10 Handwheel assignment

2.10 Handwheel assignment

You can traverse the axes in the machine coordinate system (Machine) or in the workpiece
coordinate system (Work) via the handwheel.

Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the handwheel offset
(only for 828D).

All axes are provided in the following order for handwheel assignment:
● Geometry axes
When traversing, the geometry axes taken into account the actual machine status (e.g.
rotations, transformations). All channel machine axes, which are currently assigned to the
geometry axis, are in this case simultaneously traversed.
● Channel machine axes
Channel machine axes are assigned to the particular channel. They can only be
individually traversed, i.e. the actual machine state has no influence.
The also applies to channel machine axes, that are declared as geometry axes.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

Press the <JOG>, <AUTO> or <MDI> key.

2. Press the menu forward key and the "Handwheel" softkey.

The "Handwheel" window appears.
A field for axis assignment will be offered for every connected
handwheel.

3. Position the cursor in the field next to the handwheel with which you
wish to assign the axis (e.g. No. 1).

Turning
92 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.10 Handwheel assignment

4. Press the corresponding softkey to select the desired axis (e.g. "X").

- OR
Open the "Axis" selection box using the <INSERT> key, navigate to the
desired axis, and press the <INPUT> key.
Selecting an axis also activates the handwheel (e.g., "X" is assigned to
handwheel no. 1 and is activated immediately).

5. Press the "Handwheel" softkey again.

- OR -
Press the "Back" softkey.
The "Handwheel" window closes.

Deactivate handwheel

1. Position the cursor on the handwheel whose assignment you wish to

cancel (e.g. No. 1).
2. Press the softkey for the assigned axis again (e.g. "X").

- OR -
Open the "Axis" selection box using the <INSERT> key, navigate to the
empty field, and press the <INPUT> key.
Clearing an axis selection also clears the handwheel selection (e.g., "X"
is cleared for handwheel no. 1 and is no longer active).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 93
Setting up the machine
2.11 MDA

2.11 MDA
In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic mode), you can enter G-code commands block-by-
block and immediately execute them for setting up the machine.
You can load an MDA program straight from the Program Manager into the MDA buffer. You
may also store programs which were rendered or changed in the MDA operating window into
any directory of the Program Manager.

Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option to load and save MDA
programs (for 828D).

2.11.1 Loading an MDA program from the Program Manager

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <MDI> key.

The MDI editor opens.

3. Press the "Load MDI" softkey.

A changeover is made into the Program Manager.

The "Load in MDI" window opens. It shows you a view of the program
manager.
4. Position the cursor to the corresponding storage location, press the
"Search" softkey and enter the required search term in the search
dialog if you wish to search for a specific file.
Note: The place holders "*" (replaces any character string) and "?"
(replaces any character) make it easier for you to perform a search.
5. Select the program that you would like to edit or execute in the MDI
window.
6. Press the "OK" softkey.
The window closes and the program is ready for operation.

Turning
94 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up the machine
2.11 MDA

2.11.2 Saving an MDA program

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <MDI> key.

The MDI editor opens.

3. Create the MDI program by entering the G-code commands using the
operator's keyboard.
4. Press the "Store MDI" softkey.
The "Save from MDI: Select storage location" window opens. It shows
you a view of the program manager.
5. Select the drive to which you want to save the MDI program you
created, and place the cursor on the directory in which the program is to
be stored.
- OR -
Position the cursor to the required storage location, press the "Search"
softkey and enter the required search term in the search dialog if you
wish to search for a specific directory or subdirectory.
Note: The place holders "*" (replaces any character string) and "?"
(replaces any character) make it easier for you to perform a search.
6. Press the "OK" softkey.

When you place the cursor on a folder, a window opens which prompts
you to assign a name.
- OR -
When you place the cursor on a program, you are asked whether the
file should be overwritten.
7. Enter the name for the rendered program and press the "OK" softkey.
The program will be saved under the specified name in the selected
directory.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 95
Setting up the machine
2.11 MDA

2.11.3 Executing an MDA program

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <MDA> key.

The MDA editor opens.

3. Input the desired G-code commands using the operator’s keyboard.

4. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The control executes the input blocks.

When executing the G-code commands, you can control the sequence as follows:
● Executing the program block-by-block
● Testing the program
Settings under program control
● Setting the test-run feedrate
Settings under program control

2.11.4 Deleting an MDA program

Precondition
The MDA editor contains a program that you created in the MDI window or loaded from the
program manager.

Procedure

Press the "Delete blocks" softkey.

The program blocks displayed in the program window are deleted.

Turning
96 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Working in manual mode 3
3.1 General
Always use "JOG" mode when you want to set up the machine for the execution of a
program or to carry out simple traversing movements on the machine:
● Synchronize the measuring system of the controller with the machine (reference point
approach)
● Set up the machine, i.e. activate manually-controlled motions on the machine using the
keys and handwheels provided on the machine control panel.
● You can activate manually controlled motions on the machine using the keys and
handwheels provided on the machine control panel while a part program is interrupted.

3.2 Selecting a tool and spindle

3.2.1 T,S,M window

For the preparatory actions in manual mode, tool selection and spindle control are both
performed centrally in a screen form.
In addition to the main spindle (S1), there is another tool spindle (S2) for powered tools.
Your turning machine can also be equipped with a counterspindle (S3).
In manual mode, you can select a tool on the basis of either its name or its revolver location
number. If you enter a number, a search is performed for a name first, followed by a location
number. This means that if you enter "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists,
the tool is selected from location number "5".

Note
Using the revolver location number, therefore, you can swing around an empty space into
the machining position and then comfortably install a new tool.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 97
Working in manual mode
3.2 Selecting a tool and spindle

Display Meaning
T Input of the tool (name or location number)
You can select a tool from the tool list using the "Select tool" softkey.
D Cutting edge number of the tool (1 - 9)
Spindle Spindle selection, identification with spindle number
Spindle M function

Spindle off: Spindle is stopped

CCW rotation: Spindle rotates counterclockwise

CW rotation: Spindle rotates clockwise

Spindle positioning: Spindle is moved to the desired position.

Other M functions Input of machine functions
Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation between
the meaning and number of the function.
G work offset Selection of the work offset (basic reference, G54 - 57)
You can select work offsets from the tool list of settable work offsets via
the "Work offset" softkey.
Measurement unit Selection of the unit of measurement (inch, mm).
The setting made here has an effect on the programming.
Machining plane Selection of the machining plane (G17(XY), G18 (ZX), G19 (YZ))
Gear stage Specification of the gear stage (auto, I - V)
Stop position Input of the spindle position in degrees

Note
Spindle positioning
You can use this function to position the spindle at a specific angle, e.g. during a tool
change.
 A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
 A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.

Turning
98 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working in manual mode
3.2 Selecting a tool and spindle

3.2.2 Selecting a tool

Procedure

1. Select the "JOG" operating mode.

2. Press the "T, S, M" softkey.

3. Enter the name or the number of the tool T in the entry field.
- OR -
Press the "Tool" softkey to open the tool list, position the cursor on the
desired tool and press the "To Manual" softkey.
The tool is transferred to the "T, S, M... window" and displayed in the
field of tool parameter "T".

4. Select the tool cutting edge D or enter the number directly in the field.

5. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The tool is automatically swung into the machining position and the
name of the tool displayed in the tool status bar.

3.2.3 Starting and stopping the spindle manually

Procedure

1. Select the "T,S,M" softkey in the "JOG" mode.

2. Select the desired spindle (e.g. S1) and enter the desired spindle speed
or cutting speed in the right-hand entry field.

3. If the machine has a gearbox for the spindle, set the gearing step.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 99
Working in manual mode
3.2 Selecting a tool and spindle

4 Select a spindle direction of rotation (clockwise or counterclockwise) in

the "Spindle M function" field.

5. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The spindle rotates.

6. Select the "Stop" setting in the "Spindle M function" field.

Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The spindle stops.

Note
Changing the spindle speed
If you enter the speed in the "Spindle" field while the spindle is rotating, the new speed is
applied.

3.2.4 Positioning the spindle

Procedure

1. Select the "T,S,M" softkey in the "JOG" mode.

2. Select the "Stop Pos." setting in the "Spindle M function" field.

The "Stop Pos." entry field appears.

3. Enter the desired spindle stop position.

The spindle position is specified in degrees.
4. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The spindle is moved to the desired position.

Turning
100 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working in manual mode
3.3 Traversing axes

Note
You can use this function to position the spindle at a specific angle, e.g. during a tool
change.
 A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route.
 A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.

3.3 Traversing axes

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment or Axis keys or handwheels.
During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the selected axis moves at the programmed
setup feedrate. During an incremental traverse, the selected axis traverses a specified
increment.

Set the default feedrate

Specify the feedrate to be used for axis traversal in the set-up, in the "Settings for Manual
Operation" window.

3.3.1 Traverse axes by a defined increment

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis keys or handwheels.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <JOG> key.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 101
Working in manual mode
3.3 Traversing axes

3. Press keys 1, 10, etc. up to 10000 in order to move the axis in a defined
increment.
The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in micrometers or
micro-inches.
Example: Press the "100" button for a desired increment of 100 μm (=
0.1 mm).
4. Select the axis to be traversed.
;

5. Press the <+> or <-> key.

 Each time you press the key the selected axis is traversed by the
defined increment.
Feedrate and rapid traverse override switches can be operative.

Note
When the control is switched on, the axes can be traversed right up to the limits of the
machine as the reference points have not yet been approached and the axes referenced.
Emergency limit switches might be triggered as a result.
The software limit switches and the working area limitation are not yet operative!
The feed enable signal must be set.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

3.3.2 Traversing axes by a variable increment

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

Press the <JOG> key.

2. Press the "Settings" softkey.

The "Settings for manual operation" window is opened.

Turning
102 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working in manual mode
3.4 Positioning axes

3. Enter the desired value for the "Variable increment" parameter.

Example: Enter 500 for a desired increment of 500 μm (0.5 mm).
4. Press the <Inc VAR> key.

5. Select the axis to be traversed.

6. Press the <+> or <-> key.
 Each time you press the key the selected axis is traversed by the set
increment.
 Feedrate and rapid traverse override switches can be operative.

3.4 Positioning axes

In order to implement simple machining sequences, you can traverse the axes to certain
positions in manual mode.
The feedrate / rapid traverse override is active during traversing.

Procedure

1. If required, select a tool.

2. Select the "JOG" operating mode.

3. Press the "Positions" softkey.

4. Enter the target position or target angle for the axis or axes to be
traversed.
5. Specify the desired value for the feedrate F.
- OR -
Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey.
The rapid traverse is displayed in field "F".
6. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The axis is traversed to the specified target position.

If target positions were specified for several axes, the axes are
traversed simultaneously.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 103
Working in manual mode
3.5 Simple stock removal of workpiece

3.5 Simple stock removal of workpiece

Some blanks have a smooth or even surface. For example, you can use the stock removal
cycle to turn the face surface of the workpiece before machining actually takes place.
If you want to bore out a collet using the stock removal cycle, you can program an undercut
(XF2) in the corner.

CAUTION
Risk of collision
The tool moves along a direct path to the starting point of the stock removal. First move the
tool to a safe position in order to avoid collisions during the approach.

Note
You cannot use the "Repos" function during simple stock removal.

Prerequisite
To carry out simple stock removal of a workpiece in manual mode, a measured tool must be
in the machining position.

Procedure

1. Press the "Machine" operating area key

2. Press the <JOG> key.

3. Press the "Stock removal" softkey.

4. Enter desired values for the parameters.

5. Press the "OK" softkey.
The parameter screen is closed.
6. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The "Stock removal" cycle is started.

You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and
correct the inputs.

Turning
104 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working in manual mode
3.5 Simple stock removal of workpiece

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant cutting rate rpm
m/min
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)

Position Machining position

Machining  Face
direction  Longitudinal

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm
X1 End point X ∅ (abs) or end point X in relation to X0 (inc) mm
Z1 End point Z (abs) or end point Z in relation to X0 (inc) mm
FS1...FS3 or R1...R3 Chamfer width (FS1...FS3) or rounding radius (R1...R3) mm

XF2 Undercut (alternative to FS2 or R2) mm

D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

See also
Tool, offset value, feedrate and spindle speed (T, D, F, S, V) (Page 215)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 105
Working in manual mode
3.6 Thread synchronizing

3.6 Thread synchronizing

If you wish to re-machine a thread, it may be necessary to synchronize the spindle to the
existing thread turn. This is necessary as by reclamping the blank, an angular offset can
occur in the thread.

Note
Activating/deactivating thread synchronization
If a thread synchronization is active, then this is active for all of the following "Thread turning"
machining steps.
Thread synchronization remains effective without deactivation even after the machining has
been shutdown.

Precondition
The spindle is stationary.
One threading tool is active.

Procedure

1. Select the "JOG" operating mode.

2. Press the menu forward key and the "Thread synchr." softkey.

3. Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread turn as shown in the help
screen.
4. Press the "Teach-in main spindle" softkey if you are working at the main
spindle.

- OR -
Press the "Teach-in counterspindle" softkey if you are working at the
counterspindle.

Turning
106 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working in manual mode
3.6 Thread synchronizing

Note:
The thread synchronization is activated by teaching in a spindle. In this
case, the synchronizing positions of axes X and Z and the
synchronizing angle of spindle (Sn) are saved in the Machine and
displayed in the screen form.
The selection boxes for main spindle and counterspindle indicate
whether thread synchronization is active for the particular spindle (yes =
active / no = not active).
5. Now carry out the "thread turning" machining step.
6. For the main spindle or counterspindle, select the "no" entry to
deactivate thread synchronization.

See also
Thread turning (CYCLE99) (Page 303)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 107
Working in manual mode
3.7 Default settings for manual mode

3.7 Default settings for manual mode

Specify the configurations for manual mode in the "Settings for manual operation" window.

Presettings

Settings Description
Type of feedrate Here, you select the type of feedrate.
 G94: Axis feedrate/linear feedrate
 G95: Rev. feedrate
Default feedrate G94 Enter the desired feedrate in mm/min.
Default feedrate G95 Enter the desired feedrate in mm/r.
Variable increment Enter the desired increment for axis traversal by variable increments.
Spindle speed Enter the desired spindle speed in rpm.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <JOG> key.

3. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

The "Settings for manual operation" window is opened.

See also
Switching the unit of measurement (Page 67)

Turning
108 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Machining the workpiece 4
4.1 Starting and stopping machining
During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in accordance with the
programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece
machining is performed automatically.

Requirements
The following requirements must be met before executing a program:
● The measuring system of the controller is referenced with the machine.
● The necessary tool offsets and work offsets have been entered.
● The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine manufacturer are activated.

General sequence

1. Use the Program manager to select the desired program.

Select the desired program under "NC", "Local drive", "USB" or set-up
network drives.

3. Press the "Select" softkey.

The program is selected for execution and automatically switched to the
"Machine" operating area.
4. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The program is started and executed.

Note
Starting the program in any operating area
If the control is in "AUTO" mode, you can also start the selected program when you are in
any operating area.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 109
Machining the workpiece
4.2 Selecting a program

Stopping machining

Press the <CYCLE STOP> key.

Machining stops immediately. Individual program blocks are not
executed to the end. On the next start, machining is resumed
from the point where it left off.

Canceling machining

Press the <RESET> key.

Execution of the program is interrupted. On the next start, machining
will start from the beginning.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

4.2 Selecting a program

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

The directory overview is opened.

2. Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you want
to select.
3. Press the <INPUT> key

- OR -
Press the <Cursor right> key.

The directory contents are displayed.

Turning
110 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.3 Executing a trail program run

4. Place the cursor on the desired program.

5. Press the "Select" softkey.
The program is selected.
When the program has been successfully selected, an automatic
changeover to the "Machine" operating area occurs.

4.3 Executing a trail program run

When testing a program, the system can interrupt the machining of the workpiece after each
program block, which triggers a movement or auxiliary function on the machine. In this way,
you can control the machining result block-by-block during the initial execution of a program
on the machine.

Note
Settings for the automatic mode
Rapid traverse reduction and dry run feed rate are available to run-in or to test a program.

Move by single block

In "Program control" you may select from among several types of block processing:

SB mode Scope
SB1 Single block, The machining stops after every machine block (except for cycles)
coarse
SB2 Data block The machining stops after every block, i.e. also for data blocks (except for
cycles)
SB3 Single block, The machining stops after every machine block (also in cycles)
fine

Precondition
A program must be selected for execution in "AUTO" or "MDA" mode.

Procedure

1. Press the "Prog. ctrl." softkey and select the desired variant in the "SBL"
field.

2. Press the <SINGLE BLOCK> key.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 111
Machining the workpiece
4.3 Executing a trail program run

3. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

Depending on the execution variant, the first block will be executed.
Then the machining stops.
In the channel status line, the text “Stop: Block in single block ended"
appears.
4. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
Depending on the mode, the program will continue executing until the
next stop.
5. Press the <SINGLE BLOCK> key again, if the machining is not
supposed to run block-by-block.
The key is deselected again.
If you now press the <CYCLE START> key again, the program is
executed to the end without interruption.

See also
Setting for automatic mode (Page 154)

Turning
112 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.4 Displaying the current program block

4.4 Displaying the current program block

4.4.1 Current block display

The window of the current block display shows you the program blocks currently being
executed.

Display of current program

The following information is displayed in the running program:
● The workpiece name or program name is entered in the title row.
● The program block which is just being processed appears colored.

Editing a program directly

In the Reset state, you can edit the current program directly.

1. Press the <INSERT> key.

2. Place the cursor at the relevant position and edit the program block.
Direct editing is only possible for G code blocks in the NC memory, not
for external execution.
3. Press the <INSERT> key to exit the program and the edit mode again.

4.4.2 Displaying a basic block

If you want precise information about axis positions and important G functions during testing
or program execution, you can call up the basic block display. This is how you can check,
when using cycles, for example, whether the machine is actually traversing.
Positions programmed by means of variables or R parameters are resolved in the basic
block display and replaced by the variable value.
You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when machining the workpiece on
the machine. All G code commands that initiate a function on the machine are displayed in
the "Basic Blocks" window for the currently active program block:
● Absolute axis positions
● G functions for the first G group
● Other modal G functions

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 113
Machining the workpiece
4.4 Displaying the current program block

● Other programmed addresses

● M functions

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. A program is selected for execution and has been opened in the

"Machine" operating area.
2. Press the "Basic blocks" softkey.
The "Basic Blocks" window opens.
3. Press the <SINGLE BLOCK> key if you wish to execute the program
block-by-block.

4. Press the <CYCLE START> key to start the program execution.

The axis positions to be approached, modal G functions, etc., are
displayed in the "Basic Blocks" window for the currently active program
block.
5. Press the "Basic blocks" softkey once again to hide the window again.

4.4.3 Display program level

You can display the current program level during the execution of a large program with
several subprograms.

Several program run throughs

If you have programmed several program run throughs, i.e. subprograms are run through
several times one after the other by specifying the additional parameter P, then during
processing, the program runs still to be executed are displayed in the "Program Levels"
window.

Program example
N10 subprogram P25
If, in at least one program level, a program is run through several times, a horizontal scroll
bar is displayed that allows the run through counter P to be viewed in the righthand window
section. The scroll bar disappears if multiple run-through is no longer applicable.

Turning
114 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.5 Correcting a program

Display of program level

The following information will be displayed:
● Level number
● Program name
● Block number, or line number
● Remain program run throughs (only for several program run throughs)

Precondition
A program must be selected for execution in "AUTO" mode.

Procedure

Press the "Program levels" softkey.

The "Program levels" window appears.

4.5 Correcting a program

As soon as a syntax error in the part program is detected by the controller, program
execution is interrupted and the syntax error is displayed in the alarm line.

Correction possibilities
Depending on the state of the control system, you can make the following corrections using
the Program editing function.
● Stop mode
Only program lines that have not yet been executed can be edited.
● Reset mode
All program lines can be edited.

Note
The "program correction" function is also available for execute from external; however,
when making program changes, the NC channel must be brought into the reset state.

Requirement
A program must be selected for execution in "AUTO" mode.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 115
Machining the workpiece
4.5 Correcting a program

Procedure

1. The program to be corrected is in the Stop or Reset mode.

2. Press the "Prog. corr.” softkey
The program is opened in the editor.
The program preprocessing and the current block are displayed. The
current block is also updated in the running program, but not the
displayed program section, i.e. the current block moves out of the
displayed program section.
If a subprogram is executed, it is not opened automatically.
3. Make the necessary corrections.
4. Press the "NC Execute" softkey.
The system switches back to the "Machine" operating area and selects
"AUTO" mode.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key to resume program execution.

Note
Exit the editor using the "Close" softkey to return to the "Program manager" operating area.

Turning
116 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.6 Repositioning axes

4.6 Repositioning axes

After a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool breaks) you can move the
tool away from the contour in manual mode.
The coordinates of the interrupt position will be saved. The distances traversed in manual
mode are displayed in the actual value window. This path difference is called "Repos-offset".

Resuming program execution

Using the "Repos" function, you can return the tool to the contour in order to continue
executing the program.
You cannot traverse the interrupt position, because it is blocked by the control system.
The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect

WARNING

When repositioning, the axes move with the programmed feedrate and linear interpolation,
i.e. in a straight line from the current position to the interrupt point. Therefore, you must first
move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions.
If you do not use the "Repos" function and subsequently move the axes in manual mode
after a program interrupt, the control automatically moves the axes during the switch to
automatic mode and the subsequent start of the machining process in a straight line back
to the point of interruption.

Requirement
The following prerequisites must be met when repositioning the axes:
● The program execution was interrupted using <CYCLE STOP>.
● The axes were moved from the interrupt point to another position in manual mode.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 117
Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

Proceed as follows

1. Press the <REPOS> key.

2. Select the axes to be traversed one after the other.

;

3. Press the <+> or <-> key for the relevant direction.

 The axes are moved to the interrupt position.

4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

4.7.1 Use block search

If you would only like to perform a certain section of a program on the machine, then you
need not start the program from the beginning. You can also start the program from a
specified program block.

Applications
● Stopping or interrupting program execution
● Specify a target position, e.g. during remachining

Turning
118 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

Determining a search target

● User-friendly search target definition (search positions)
– Direct specification of the search target by positioning the cursor in the selected
program (main program)
– Search target via text search
– The search target is the interruption point (main program and subprogram)
The function is only available if there is an interruption point. After a program
interruption (CYCLE STOP or RESET), the controller saves the coordinates of the
interruption point.
– The search target is the higher program level of the interruption point (main program
and subprogram)
The level can only be changed if it was previously possible to select an interruption
point in a subprogram. It is then possible to change the program level up to the main
program level and back to the level of the interruption point.
● Search pointer
– Direct entry of the program path

Note
Searching for point in subprogram
You can search for a specific point in subprograms with the search pointer if there is
no interruption point.

Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the "Search pointer"
function (only for 828D).

Cascaded search
You can start another search from the "Search target found" state. The cascading can be
continued any number of times after every search target found.

Note
Another cascaded block search can be started from the stopped program execution only if
the search target has been found.

References
Function Manual Basic Functions; Block Search

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 119
Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

Preconditions
1. You have selected the desired program.
2. The control system is in the RESET condition.
3. The desired search mode is selected.

NOTICE
Collision-free start position
Pay attention to a collision-free start position and appropriate active tools and other
technological values.
If necessary, manually approach a collision-free start position. Select the target block
considering the selected block search type.

Toggling between search pointer and search positions

Press the "Search pointer" softkey again to exit the "Search Pointer"
window and return to the "Program" window to define search positions.

- OR -
Press the "Back" softkey.
You have now exited the block search function.

See also
Selecting a program (Page 110)

4.7.2 Continuing program from search target

To continue the program at the desired position, press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
● The first CYCLE START outputs the auxiliary functions collected during the search. The
program is then in the Stop state.
● Before the second CYCLE START, you can use the "Overstore" function to create states
that are required, but not yet available, for the further program execution.
By changing to the JOG REPOS mode, you can also manually traverse the tool from the
current position to the setpoint position, if the setpoint position is not to be automatically
approached after the program start

Turning
120 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

4.7.3 Simple search target definition

Requirement
The program is selected and the controller is in Reset mode.

Procedure

1. Press the "Block search" softkey.

2. Place the cursor on a particular program block.

- OR -
Press the "Find text" softkey, select the search direction, enter the
search text and confirm with "OK".

3. Press the "Start search" softkey.

The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into
account.
The current block will be displayed in the "Program" window as soon
as the target is found.
4. If the located target (for example, when searching via text) does not
correspond to the program block, press the "Start search" softkey
again until you find your target.
Press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
Processing is continued from the defined position.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 121
Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

4.7.4 Defining an interruption point as search target

Precondition
A program was selected in "AUTO" mode and interrupted during execution through CYCLE
STOP or RESET.

Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option (only for 828D).

Procedure

1. Press the "Block search" softkey.

2. Press the "Interrupt point" softkey.

The interruption point is loaded.
3. If the "Higher level" and "Lower level" softkeys are available, use these
to change the program level.

4. Press the "Start search" softkey.

The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into
account.
The search screen closes.
The current block will be displayed in the "Program" window as soon as
the target is found.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
The execution will continue from the interruption point.

Turning
122 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

4.7.5 Entering the search target via search pointer

Enter the program point which you would like to proceed to in the "Search Pointer" window.

Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the "Search pointer"
function (only for 828D).

Precondition
The program is selected and the controller is in Reset mode.

Screen form
Each line represents one program level. The actual number of levels in the program depends
on the nesting depth of the program.
Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all other levels correspond to
subprograms.
You must enter the target in the line of the window corresponding to the program level in
which the target is located.
For example, if the target is located in the subprogram called directly from the main program,
you must enter the target in program level 2.
The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means, for example, that if the
subprogram is called in the main program in two different places, you must also specify a
target in program level 1 (main program).

Procedure

1. Press the "Block search" softkey.

2. Press the "Search pointer" softkey.

3. Enter the full path of the program as well as the subprograms, if

required, in the input fields.
4. Press the "Start search" softkey.

The search starts. Your specified search mode will be taken into
account.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 123
Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

The Search window closes. The current block will be displayed in the
"Program" window as soon as the target is found.
5. Press the <CYCLE START> key twice.
Processing is continued from the defined location.

Note
Interruption point
You can load the interruption point in search pointer mode.

4.7.6 Parameters for block search in the search pointer

Parameter Meaning
Number of program level
Program: The name of the main program is automatically entered
Ext: File extension
P: Pass counter
If a program section is performed several times, you can enter the number of
the pass here at which processing is to be continued
Line: Is automatically filled for an interruption point
Type " " search target is ignored on this level
N no. Block number
Label Jump label
Text string
Subprg. Subprogram call
Line Line number
Search target Point in the program at which machining is to start

Turning
124 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

4.7.7 Block search mode

Set the desired search variant in the "Search Mode" window.
The set mode is retained when the the controller is shut down. When you activate the
"Search" function after restarting the controller, the current search mode is displayed in the
title row.

Search variants

Block search mode Meaning

With calculation It is used in order to be able to approach a target position in any
- without approach circumstance (e.g. tool change position).
The end position of the target block or the next programmed position is
approached using the type of interpolation valid in the target block. Only the
axes programmed in the target block are moved.
With calculation It is used to be able to approach the contour in any circumstance.
- with approach The end position of the block prior to the target block is found with <CYCLE
START>. The program runs in the same way as in normal program
processing.
With calculation This is used to speed-up a search with calculation when using EXTCALL
- skip extcall programs: EXTCALL programs are not taken into account.
Notice: Important information, e.g. modal functions, which are located in the
EXTCALL program, are not taken consideration. In this case, after the
search target has been found, the program is not able to be executed.
Information such as this should programmed in the main program.
Without calculation For a quick search in the main program.
Calculations will not be performed during the block search, i.e. the
calculation is skipped up to the target block.
All settings required for execution have to be programmed from the target
block (e.g. feedrate, spindle speed, etc.).
With program test Multi-channel block search with calculation (SERUPRO).
All blocks are calculated during the block search. Absolutely no axis motion
is executed, however, all auxiliary functions are output.
The NC starts the selected program in the program test mode. If the NC
reaches the specified target block in the actual channel, it stops at the
beginning of the target block and deselects program test mode again. After
continuing the program with NC start (after REPOS motion) the auxiliary
functions of the target block are output.
For single-channel systems, the coordination is supported with events
running in parallel, such as e.g. synchronized actions.
Note
The search speed depends on MD settings.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 125
Machining the workpiece
4.7 Starting machining at a specific point

References
For additional information, please refer to the following documentation:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> key.

3. Press the "Block search" and "Block search mode" softkeys.

The "Search Mode" window will open.

Turning
126 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.8 Intervening in the program sequence

4.8 Intervening in the program sequence

4.8.1 Program control

You can change the program sequence in the "AUTO" and "MDA" modes.

Abbreviation/program Scope
control
PRT The program is started and executed with auxiliary function outputs and dwell times. In this
no axis motion mode, the axes are not traversed.
The programmed axis positions and the auxiliary function outputs are controlled this way.
Note: Program processing without axis motion can also be activated with the function "Dry
run feedrate".
DRY The traversing velocities programmed in conjunction with G1, G2, G3, CIP and CT are
Dry run feedrate replaced by a defined dry run feedrate. The dry run feedrate also applies instead of the
programmed revolutional feedrate.
Caution: Workpieces must not be machined when "Dry run feedrate" is active because the
altered feedrates might cause the permissible tool cutting rates to be exceeded and the
workpiece or machine tool could be damaged.
RG0 In the rapid traverse mode, the traversing speed of the axes is reduced to the percentage
Reduced rapid traverse value entered in RG0.
Note: You define the reduced rapid traverse in the settings for automatic operation.
M01 The processing of the program stops at every block in which supplementary function M01 is
Programmed stop 1 programmed. In this way you can check the already obtained result during the processing of
a workpiece.
Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the <CYCLE START> key again.
Programmed stop 2 The processing of the program stops at every block in which the "Cycle end" is programmed
(e.g. M101) (e.g. with M101).
Note: In order to continue executing the program, press the <CYCLE START> key again.
Note: The display can be changed. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's
specifications.
DRF Enables an additional incremental zero offset while processing in automatic operation mode
Handwheel offset with an electronic handwheel.
This function can be used to compensate for tool wear within a programmed block.
Note: You require the "Extended operator functions" option to use the handwheel offset (for
828D).
SB Individual blocks are configured as follows.
Single block, coarse: The program stops only after blocks which perform a machine function.
Data block: The program stops after each block.
Single block, fine: The program also only stops after blocks which perform a machine function
in cycles.
Select the desired setting using the <SELECT> key.
SKP Skip blocks are skipped during machining.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 127
Machining the workpiece
4.8 Intervening in the program sequence

Activating program control

You can control the program sequence however you wish by selecting and clearing the
relevant check boxes.

Display / response of active program controls:

If a program control is activated, the abbreviation of the corresponding function appears in
the status display as response.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3. Press the "Prog. ctrl.” softkey.

The "Program control" window appears.

See also
Setting for automatic mode (Page 154)

4.8.2 Skip blocks

It is possible to skip program blocks, which are not to be executed every time the program
runs.
The skip blocks are identified by placing a "/" (forward slash) or "/x (x = number of skip level)
character in front of the block number. Several consecutive blocks can also be skipped.
The statements in the skipped blocks are not executed, i.e. the program continues with the
next block, which is not skipped.
The number of skip levels that can be used depends on a machine datum.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
128 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.8 Intervening in the program sequence

Software option
In order to have more than two skip levels, for 828D you require the
"Extended operator functions" option.

Skip levels, activate

Select the corresponding check box to activate the desired skip level.

Note
The "Program control - skip blocks" window is only available when more than one skip level
is set up.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3 Press the "Prog. ctrl." and "Skip blocks" softkeys.

The "Program control" window appears and shows a list of skip levels.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 129
Machining the workpiece
4.9 Overstore

4.9 Overstore
With overstore, you have the option of executing technological parameters (for example,
auxiliary functions, axis feed, spindle speed, programmable instructions, etc.) before the
program is actually started. The program instructions act as if they are located in a normal
part program. These program instructions are, however, only valid for one program run. The
part program is not permanently changed. When next started, the program will be executed
as originally programmed.
After a block search, the machine can be brought into another state with overstore (e.g. M
function, tool, feed, speed, axis positions etc.), in which the normal part program can be
successfully continued.

Software option
You require the "Extended operator functions" option for the overstore function
(for 828D).

Precondition
The program to be corrected is in the Stop or Reset mode.

Procedure

1. Open the program in the "AUTO" mode.

2. Press the "Overstore" softkey.

The "Overstore" window opens.
3. Enter the required data and NC block.
4. Press the <CYCLE START> key.
The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution in
the "Overstore" window.
After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks
again.
You cannot change the operating mode while you are in overstore
mode.
5. Press the "Back" softkey.
The "Overstore" window closes.
6. Press the <CYCLE START> key again.
The program selected before overstoring continues to run.

Turning
130 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

Note
Block-by-block execution
The <SINGLE BLOCK> key is also active in the overstore mode. If several blocks are
entered in the overstore buffer, then these are executed block-by-block after each NC start

Deleting blocks

Press the "Delete blocks" softkey to delete program blocks you have
entered.

4.10 Editing a program

With the editor, you are able to render, supplement, or change part programs.

Note
The maximum block length is 512 characters.

Calling the editor

● The editor is started via the "Program correction" function in the "Machine" operating
area.
● The editor is called via the "Open" softkey as well as with the <INPUT> or <Cursor right>
key in the "Program manager" operating area.
● The editor opens in the "Program" operating area with the last executed part program,
when this was not explicitly exited via the "Close" softkey.

Note
Please note that the changes to programs stored in the NC memory take immediate
effect. You can exit the editor only after you have saved the changes.
If you are editing on a local drive or external drives, you can also exit the editor without
saving, depending on the setting.
Exit the program correction mode using the "Close" softkey to return to the "Program
manager" operating area.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 131
Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

See also
Editor settings (Page 138)
Correcting a program (Page 115)
Opening and closing the program (Page 626)
Generating a G code program (Page 184)

4.10.1 Searching in programs

You can use the search function to quickly arrive at points where you would like to make
changes, e.g. in very large programs.

Note
Search with place holders
When searching for specific program locations, you have the option of using place holders:
 "*": replaces any character string
 "?": replaces any character

Precondition
The desired program is opened in the editor.

Procedure

1. Press the "Search" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.
The "Search" window opens at the same time.
2. Enter the desired search term in the "Text" field.
3. Select "Whole words" if you want to search for whole words only.
4. Position the cursor in the "Direction" field and choose the search
direction (forward, backward) with the <SELECT> key.

5. Press the "OK" softkey to start the search.

If the text you are searching for is found, the corresponding line is
highlighted.
6. Press the "Continue search" softkey if the text located during the search
does not correspond to the point you are looking for.

Turning
132 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey when you want to cancel the search.

Further search options

Softkey Function
The cursor is set to the first character in the program.

The cursor is set to the last character in the program.

4.10.2 Exchanging program text

You can find and replace text in one step.

Requirement
The desired program is opened in the editor.

Proceed as follows

1. Press the "Search" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.
2. Press the "Find + replace" softkey.
The "Find and replace" window appears.
3. In the "Text" field, enter the term you are looking for and in the "Replace
with" field, enter the text you would like to insert automatically during the
search.
4. Position the cursor in the "Direction" field and choose the search
direction (forward, backward) with the <SELECT> key.

5. Press the "OK" softkey to start the search.

If the text you are searching for is found, the corresponding line is
highlighted.
6. Press the "Replace" softkey to replace the text.

- OR -

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 133
Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

Press the "Replace all" softkey to replace all text in the file that
corresponds to the search term.

- OR -
Press the "Continue search" softkey if the text located during the search
should not be replaced.

- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey when you want to cancel the search.

4.10.3 Copying/pasting/deleting a program block

Precondition
The program is opened in the editor.

Procedure

1. Press the "Mark" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <SELECT> key.

2. Select the desired program blocks with the cursor or mouse.

3. Press the "Copy" softkey in order to copy the selection to the buffer
memory.

4. Place the cursor on the desired insertion point in the program and press
the "Paste" softkey.

The content of the buffer memory is pasted.

Deleting program blocks

Use the "Cut" softkey to delete selected program blocks.

Note: When editing a program, you cannot copy or cut more than 1024
lines. While a program that is not on the NC is opened (progress display
less than 100%), you cannot copy or cut more than 10 lines or insert more
than 1024 characters.

Turning
134 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

Note
The buffer memory contents are retained even after the editor is closed, enabling you to
paste the contents in another program, as well.

See also
Opening additional programs (Page 137)

4.10.4 Renumbering a program

You can modify the block numbering of programs opened in the editor at a later point in time.

Requirement
The program is opened in the editor.

Procedure

1. Press the ">>" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.
2. Press the "Renumber" softkey.
The "Renumbering" window appears.
3. Enter the values for the first block number and the increment to be used
for numbering.
4. Press the "OK" softkey.
The program is renumbered.

Note
If you only want to renumber a section, select the program blocks whose block numbering
you want to edit.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 135
Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

4.10.5 Creating a program block

In order to structure programs to achieve a higher degree of transparency, you have the
option of combining several blocks (G-code and/or ShopTurn machining steps) to form
program blocks.
You then have the option of opening and closing these blocks depending on your
requirement.

Structuring programs
● Before generating the actual program, generate a program frame using empty blocks.
● By forming blocks, structure existing G code or ShopTurn programs.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select the storage location and create a program or open a program.

The program editor is opened.

3. Select the required program blocks that you wish to combine to form a
block.
4. Press the "Build group" softkey.
The "Build new group" window is opened.
5. Enter a designation for the block and press the "OK" softkey.

6. Press the ">>" and "View" softkeys.

7. Press the "Open all blocks" softkey if you wish to display the program
with all blocks.

8. Press the "Close all blocks" softkey, if you wish to display the program
again in a structured form.

Turning
136 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

4.10.6 Opening additional programs

You have the option of viewing and editing two programs simultaneously in the editor.
For instance, you can copy program blocks or machining steps of a program and paste them
into another program.

Opening several programs

You have the option of opening up to 10 program blocks.

1. In the Program Manager, select the programs that you wish to open and
view in the dual editor and then press on the "Open" softkey.
The dual editor is opened and the first two programs are displayed.
2. Press the <NEXT WINDOW> key to change to the next opened
program.

3. Press the "Close" softkey to close the actual program.

Note
Pasting program blocks
JobShop machining steps cannot be copied into a G code program.

Precondition
You have opened a program in the Editor.

Procedure

1. Press the ">>" and "Open additional program" softkeys.

The "Select additional program" window is opened.

2. Select the program or programs that you wish to display in addition to

the already opened program.
3. Press the "OK" softkey.

The dual editor opens and displays both of the programs next to one
another.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 137
Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

See also
Copying/pasting/deleting a program block (Page 134)

4.10.7 Editor settings

Enter the default settings in the "Settings" window that are to take effect automatically when
the editor is opened.

Presettings

Setting Meaning
Number Yes: A new block number will automatically be assigned after every line
automatically change. In this case, the specifications provided under "First block number"
and "Increment" are applicable.
No: No automatic numbering.
First block number Specifies the starting block number of a newly created program.
The field is only editable when "Yes" is available under "Number
automatically".
Increment Defines the increment used for the block numbers.
The field is only editable when "Yes" is available under "Number
automatically".
Display hidden lines Hidden lines marked with "*HD" (hidden) will be displayed.
Display block end as The "CFLF" (line feed) symbol ¶ is displayed at the block end.
an icon
Scroll horizontally A horizontal scrollbar is displayed. In this way, you can scroll horizontally to
the end of long lines that would otherwise wrap.
Automatic save (only Yes: The changes are saved automatically when you change to another
local and external operating area.
drives) No: You are prompted to save when changing to another operating area.
Save or reject the changes with the "Yes" or "No" softkeys.
Visible programs  1 - 10

Select how many programs can be displayed next to one another in the
editor.
 Auto

Specifies that the number of programs entered in a job list will be visible
next to each other.
Width of the program Here, you enter the width of the selected program in the editor as a
with focus percentage of the window width.

Note
All entries that you make here are effective immediately.

Turning
138 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.10 Editing a program

Procedure

1. Select the "Program" operating area

You have activated the editor.

2. Press the ">>" and "Settings" softkeys.

The "Settings" window appears.

3. Make the desired changes here and press the "OK" softkey to confirm
your settings.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 139
Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

4.11 Mold making view

4.11.1 Mold making view

For large mold making programs, as provided by CAD systems, you have the option, using a
fast view, to display the machining paths. This allows you to obtain a fast overview of the
program and possibly correct it.

Checking the program

For instance, you can check whether
● the programmed workpiece has the correct form (shape),
● whether there are large traversing errors,
● if yes, which block must be corrected,
● how the approach and exits are.

Simultaneous view of the program and mold making view

In the editor, next to the program block display, switch-in the graphic view.
At the left in the editor, if you set the cursor to an NC block with position data, then this NC
block is selected in the graphic view.
If you select a point to the right in the graphic view - then the NC block is selected in the left-
hand part of the editor - i.e. in the other direction. This is how you jump directly to a position
in the program in order to edit a program block for example.

Turning
140 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

NC blocks that can be interpreted

Following NC blocks are supported for the mold building view.
● Types
– Lines
G0, G1 with X Y Z
– Circles
G2, G3 with center point I, J, K or radius CR, depending on the working plane G17,
G18, G19, CIP with circular point I1, J1, K1 or radius CR
– Polynomial
POLY with X, Y, Z or PO[X] PO[Y] PO[Z]
– B-splines
BSPLINE with degree SD (SD < 6) node PL weights PW
– Absolute data IC and incremental data are AC possible
– For G2, G3 and different radii at the start and end, an Archimedes spiral is used
● Orientation
– Rotary axis programming with ORIAXES or ORIVECT using ABC for G0, G1, G2, G3,
CIP, POLY
– Rotary axis programming with ORIAXES or ORIVECT using PO[A] POS[b] PO[C] for
POLY
– Orientation vector programming with ORIVECT using A3, B3, C3 for G0, G1, G2, G3,
CIP
– Orientation curve with ORICURVE using XH, YH, ZH, for G0, G1, G2, G3, CIP, POLY,
BSPLINE
– Orientation curve with ORICURVE using PO[XH] PO[YH] PO[ZH] for POLY
– Rotary axes can be specified using DC
● G codes
– Working planes (for circle definition G2, G3): G17 G18 G19
– Incremental or absolute data: G90 G91
Following NC blocks are not supported for the mold building view.
● Helix programming
● Rational polynomials
● Other G codes or language commands
All blocks that cannot be interpreted are simply ignored

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 141
Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

Changing and adapting the mold making view

Just the same as for simulation and simultaneous recording, you have the option of changing
and adapting the simulation graphical representation in order to achieve the optimum view.
● Increasing or reducing the size of the graphic
● Moving the graphic
● Rotating the graphic
● Changing the section

4.11.2 Starting the mold making view

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the
program that you would like to display in the mold making view.
3. Press the "Open" softkey.
The program is opened in the editor.
4. Press the ">>" and "Mold making view" softkeys.
The editor splits up into two areas.

The G code blocks are displayed in the left half of the editor.
The workpiece graphic is displayed in the right half of the editor.
All of the points and paths programmed in the part program are shown
in the graphical representation.
5. Press the "Graphic" softkey in order to hide the graphic and to view the
program as usual in the editor

- OR -
Press the "NC blocks" softkey in order to hide the G code blocks and
therefore only to display the graphic.

Turning
142 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

4.11.3 Specifically jump to the program block

If you notice anything peculiar in the graphic or identify an error, then from this location, you
can directly jump to the program block involved to possibly edit the program.

Preconditions
● The required program is opened in the mold making view.
● The "Graphic" softkey is active.

Procedure

1. Press the ">>" and "Select point" softkeys.

Cross-hairs for selecting a point is shown in the diagram.

2. Using the cursor keys, move the cross-hairs to the appropriate position
in the graphic.

3. Press the "Select NC block" softkey.

The cursor jumps to the associated program block in the editor.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 143
Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

4.11.4 Searching for program blocks

Using the "Search" function, you can search for specific program blocks as well as edit
programs; you can do this in one step by replacing the text that you are searching for by a
new text.

Precondition
● The required program is opened in the mold making view.
● The "NC blocks" softkey is active.

Procedure

1. Press the "Search" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.

See also
Searching in programs (Page 132)
Exchanging program text (Page 133)

4.11.5 Changing the view

4.11.5.1 Enlarging or reducing the graphical representation

Precondition
● The mold making view has been started.
● The "Graphic" softkey is active.

Procedure

1. Press the <+> and <-> keys if you wish to enlarge or reduce the graphic
 display.
The graphic display enlarged or reduced from the center.
...

- OR -

Turning
144 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

Press the "Details" and "Zoom +" softkeys if you wish to increase the
size of the segment.

- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Zoom -" softkeys if you wish to decrease the
size of the segment.

- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Auto zoom" softkeys if you wish to
automatically adapt the segment to the size of the window.
The automatic scaling function "Fit to size" takes account of the largest
expansion of the workpiece in the individual axes.

Note
Selected section
The selected sections and size changes are kept as long as the program is selected.

4.11.5.2 Modifying the viewport

Use the magnifying glass if you would like to move, increase or reduce the size of the
section of the mold making view, e.g. to view details or display the complete workpiece.
Using the magnifying glass, you can define your own segment and then increase or
decrease its size.

Precondition
● The mold making view has been started.
● The "Graphic" softkey is active.

Procedure

1. Press the "Details" softkey.

2. Press the "Zoom" softkey.

A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 145
Machining the workpiece
4.11 Mold making view

3. Press the "Magnify +" or <+> softkey to enlarge the frame.

- OR -
Press the "Magnify -" or <-> softkey to reduce the frame.

- OR -
Press one of the cursor keys to move the frame up, down, left or right.

4. Press the "Accept" softkey to accept the section.

Turning
146 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

4.12.1 Selected G functions

16 selected G groups are displayed in the "G Function" window.
Within a G group, the G function currently active in the controller is displayed.
Some G codes (e.g. G17, G18, G19) are immediately active after switching the machine
control on.
Which G codes are always active depends on the settings.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

G groups displayed by default

Group Meaning
G group 1 Modally active motion commands (e.g. G0, G1, G2, G3)
G group 2 Non-modally active motion commands, dwell time (e.g. G4, G74, G75)
G group 3 Programmable offsets, working area limitations and pole programming (e.g.
TRANS, ROT, G25, G110)
G group 6 Plane selection (e.g. G17, G18)
G group 7 Tool radius compensation (e.g. G40, G42)
G group 8 Settable work offset (e.g. G54, G57, G500)
G group 9 Offset suppression (e.g. SUPA, G53)
G group 10 Exact stop - continuous-path mode (e.g. G60, G641)
G group 13 Workpiece dimensioning inches/metric (e.g. G70, G700)
G group 14 Workpiece dimensioning absolute/incremental (G90)
G group 15 Feedrate type (e.g. G93, G961, G972)
G group 16 Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature (e.g. CFC)
G group 21 Acceleration profile (e.g. SOFT, DRIVE)
G group 22 Tool offset types (e.g. CUT2D, CUT2DF)
G group 29 Radius/diameter programming (e.g. DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF)
G group 30 Compressor ON/OFF (e.g. COMPOF)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 147
Machining the workpiece
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

G groups displayed by default (ISO code)

Group Meaning
G group 1 Modally active motion commands (e.g. G0, G1, G2, G3)
G group 2 Non-modally active motion commands, dwell time (e.g. G4, G74, G75)
G group 3 Programmable offsets, working area limitations and pole programming (e.g.
TRANS, ROT, G25, G110)
G group 6 Plane selection (e.g. G17, G18)
G group 7 Tool radius compensation (e.g. G40, G42)
G group 8 Settable work offset (e.g. G54, G57, G500)
G group 9 Offset suppression (e.g. SUPA, G53)
G group 10 Exact stop - continuous-path mode (e.g. G60, G641)
G group 13 Workpiece dimensioning inches/metric (e.g. G70, G700)
G group 14 Workpiece dimensioning absolute/incremental (G90)
G group 15 Feedrate type (e.g. G93, G961, G972)
G group 16 Feedrate override on inside and outside curvature (e.g. CFC)
G group 21 Acceleration profile (e.g. SOFT, DRIVE)
G group 22 Tool offset types (e.g. CUT2D, CUT2DF)
G group 29 Radius/diameter programming (e.g. DIAMOF, DIAMCYCOF)
G group 30 Compressor ON/OFF (e.g. COMPOF)

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <JOG>, <MDA> or <AUTO> key.

...

3. Press the "G functions" softkey.

The "G Functions" window is opened.
4. Press the "G functions" softkey again to hide the window again.

The G groups selection displayed in the "G Functions" window may differ.

Turning
148 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
For more information about configuring the displayed G groups, refer to the following
document:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

4.12.2 All G functions

All G groups and their group numbers are listed in the "G Functions" window.
Within a G group, only the G function currently active in the controller is displayed.

Additional information in the footer

The following additional information is displayed in the footer:
● Current transformations

Display Meaning
TRANSMIT Polar transformation active
TRACYL Cylinder surface transformation active
TRAORI Orientation transformation active
TRAANG Inclined axis transformation active
TRACON Cascaded transformation active
For TRACON, two transformations (TRAANG and TRACYL or TRAANG and
TRANSMIT) are activated in succession.

● Current zero offsets

● Spindle speed
● Path feedrate
● Active tool

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 149
Machining the workpiece
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <JOG>, <MDA> or <AUTO> key.

...

3. Press the ">>" and "All G functions" softkeys.

The "G Functions" window is opened.

4.12.3 Auxiliary functions

Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the machine manufacturer,
which transfer parameters to the PLC to trigger reactions defined by the manufacturer.

Displayed auxiliary functions

Up to five current M functions and three H functions are displayed in the "Auxiliary
Functions" window.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <JOG>, <MDA> or <AUTO> key.

...

Turning
150 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

3. Press the "H functions" softkey.

The "Auxiliary Functions" window opens.
4. Press the "H functions" softkey again to hide the window again.

You can display status information for diagnosing synchronized actions in the "Synchronized
Actions" window.
You get a list with all currently active synchronized actions.
In this list, the synchronized action programming is displayed in the same form as in the part
program.

References
Programming Guide Job Planning (PGA) Chapter: Motion-synchronous actions

Status of synchronized actions

You can see the status of the synchronized actions in the "Status" column.
● Waiting
● Active
● Blocked
Non-modal synchronized actions can only be identified by their status display. They are only
displayed during execution.

Synchronization types

Synchronization types Meaning

ID=n Modal synchronized actions in the automatic mode up to the end of
program, local to program; n = 1... 254
IDS=n Static synchronized actions, modally effective in every operating type,
also beyond the end of program; n = 1... 254
Without ID/IDS Non-modal synchronized actions in automatic mode

Note
Numbers ranging from 1 to 254 can only be assigned once, irrespective of the identification
number.

Display of synchronized actions

Using softkeys, you have the option of restricting the display to activated synchronized
actions.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 151
Machining the workpiece
4.12 Displaying G functions and auxiliary functions

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO>, <MDA> or <JOG> key.

3. Press the menu forward key and the "Synchron." softkey.

The "Synchronized Actions" window appears.
You obtain a display of all activated synchronized actions.

4. Press the "ID" softkey if you wish to hide the modal synchronized
actions in the automatic mode.

- AND / OR -
Press the "IDS" softkey if you wish to hide static synchronized actions.

- AND / OR -
Press the "Blockwise" softkey if you wish to hide the non-modal
synchronized actions in the automatic mode.

5. Press the "ID", "IDS" or "Blockwise" softkeys to re-display the

corresponding synchronized actions.
...

Turning
152 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.13 Displaying the program runtime and counting workpieces

4.13 Displaying the program runtime and counting workpieces

To gain an overview of the program runtime and the number of machined workpieces, open
the "Times, Counter" window.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Displayed times
● Program
Pressing the softkey the first time shows how long the program has already been running.
At every further start of the program, the time required to run the entire program the first
time is displayed.
If the program or the feedrate is changed, the new program runtime is corrected after the
first run.
● Program remainder
Here you can see how long the current program still has to run. In addition, you can
track how much of the current program has been completed as a percentage by using the
progress bar.
The display only appears when the program is run a second time.
If you are executing the program from an external location, the program loading progress
is displayed here.
● Influencing the time measurement
The time measurement is started with the start of the program and ends with the end of
the program (M30) or with an agreed M function.
When the program is running, the time measurement is interrupted with CYCLE STOP
and continued with CYCLE START.
The time measurement starts at the beginning with RESET and subsequent CYCLE
START.
The time measurement stops with CYCLE STOP or a feedrate override = 0.

Counting workpieces
You can also display program repetitions and the number of completed workpieces. For the
worpiece count, enter the actual and planned workpiece numbers.

Workpiece count
Completed workpieces can be counted via the end of program command (M30) or an M
command.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 153
Machining the workpiece
4.14 Setting for automatic mode

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> key.

3. Press the "Times, Counter" softkey.

The "Times, Counter" window opens.
4. Select "Yes" under "Count workpieces" if you want to count completed
workpieces.

5. Enter the number of workpieces needed in the "Desired workpieces"

field.
The number of workpieces already finished is displayed in "Actual
workpieces". This value can be corrected if necessary.
After the defined number of workpieces is reached, the current
workpieces display is automatically reset to zero.

See also
Entering the number of workpieces (Page 220)

4.14 Setting for automatic mode

Before machining a workpiece, you can test the program in order to identify programming
errors early on. Use the dry run feedrate for this purpose.
In addition, you have the option of additionally limiting the traversing speed for rapid traverse
so that when running-in a new program with rapid traverse, no undesirable high traversing
speeds occur.

Dry run feedrate

The feedrate defined here replaces the programmed feedrate during execution if you have
selected "DRY dry run feedrate" under program control.

Reduced rapid traverse

This value entered here reduces the rapid traverse to the entered percentage value if you
selected "RG0 reduced rapid traverse" under program control.

Turning
154 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Machining the workpiece
4.14 Setting for automatic mode

Displaying measurement results

Using an MMC command, you can display measurement results in a part program:
You set
● whether, when the control reaches the command, it automatically jumps into the
"Machine" operating area and the window with the measurement results is displayed,
or
● whether the window with the measurement results is opened by pressing the
"Measurement result" softkey.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> key.

3. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

The "Settings for Automatic Operation" window is opened.

4. In "DRY run feedrate," enter the desired dry run speed.

5. Enter the desired percentage in the "Reduced rapid traverse RG0" field.
RG0 has not effect if you do not change the specified amount of 100%.
6. Enter "Automatic" in the "Display measurement result" box if the
measurement result window should be automatically opened, or
"Manual", if the measurement result window should be opened by
pressing the "Measurement result" softkey.

References
Programming Manual Measuring Cycles / 840D sl/828D

Note
The feedrate can be changed while the operation is running.

See also
Program control (Page 127)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 155
Machining the workpiece
4.14 Setting for automatic mode

Turning
156 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Simulating a machining operation 5
5.1 Overview
During simulation, the current program is calculated in its entirety and the result displayed in
graphic form. The result of programming is verified without traversing the machine axes.
Incorrectly programmed machining steps are detected at an early stage and incorrect
machining on the workpiece prevented.

Graphic display
The simulation uses the correct proportions of the workpiece, tools, chuck, counterspindle
and tailstock for the screen display.
For the counter-spindle chuck and the tailstock, dimensions are used that are entered into
the "Spindle chuck data" window.
For non-cylindrical unmachined parts, the chuck closes up to the contour of the cube or
polygon.

Depth display
The depth infeed is color-coded. The depth display indicates the actual depth at which
machining is currently taking place. The following applies to the color-coded depth display:
"The deeper, the darker".

Definition of blank
The blank dimensions that are entered in the program editor are used for the workpiece.
The blank is clamped with reference to the coordinate system, which is valid at the time that
the blank was defined. This means that before defining the blank in G code programs, the
required output conditions must be established, e.g. by selecting a suitable work offset.

Programming a blank (example)

G54 G17 G90

WORKPIECE(,,,"Cylinder",112,0,-50,-80,00,155,100)
T="NC-SPOTDRILL_D16

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 157
Simulating a machining operation
5.1 Overview

Machine references
The simulation is implemented as workpiece simulation. This means that it is not assumed
that the work offset has already been precisely scratched or is known. In spite of this,
unavoidable Machine references are in the programming, such as for example, the tool
change point in the Machine, the park position for the counterspindle in the Machine or the
position of the counterspindle slide. Depending on the actual work offset - in the worst case -
these Machine references can mean that collisions are shown in the simulation that would
not occur for a realistic work offset - or vice versa, collisions are not shown, which could
occur for a realistic work offset. This is the reason that in ShopTurn programs, in the case of
a simulation, the program header calculates an appropriate work offset for the main spindle -
or where relevant for the counterspindle - from the specified chuck dimensions.

Display of the traversing paths

The traversing paths of the tool are shown in color. Rapid traverse is red and the feedrate is
green.

Note
Displaying the tailstock
The tailstock is only visible with the option "ShopMill/ShopTurn".

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Simulation display
You can choose one of the following types of display:
● Material removal simulation
During simulation or simultaneous recording you can follow stock removal from the
defined blank.
● Path display
You have the option of including the display of the path. The programmed tool path is
displayed.

Turning
158 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.1 Overview

Display variants
You can choose between three variants of graphical display:
● Simulation before machining of the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can perform a quick run-through in
order to graphically display how the program will be executed.
● Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece
Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display how the
program will be executed during the program test and dry run feedrate. The machine
axes do not move if you have selected "no axis motion".
● Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece
You can follow machining of the workpiece on the screen while the program is being
executed on the machine.

Views
The following views are available for all three variants:
● Side view
● Half section
● Front view
● 3D view
● 2-window

Status display
The current axis coordinates, the override, the current tool with cutting edge, the current
program block, the feedrate and the machining time are displayed.
In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The machining time is
displayed in hours, minutes and seconds. It is approximately equal to the time that the
program requires for processing including the tool change.

Software options
You require the option "3D simulation of the finished part" for the 3D view.
You require the option "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)" for the
"Simultaneous recording" function.

Determining the program runtime

The program runtime is determined when executing the simulation. The program runtime is
temporarily displayed in the editor at the end of the program.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 159
Simulating a machining operation
5.1 Overview

Properties of simultaneous recording and simulation

Traversing paths
For the simulation, the displayed traversing paths are saved in a ring buffer. If this buffer is
full, then the oldest traversing path is deleted with each new traversing path.

Optimum display
If simultaneous machining is stopped or has been completed, then the display is again
converted into a high-resolution screen. In some cases this is not possible. In this case, the
following message is output: "High-resolution image cannot be generated".

Working zone limiting

No working zone limits and software limit switches are effective in the tool simulation.

Constraint
● Spines and polynomials are not supported.
● Referencing: G74 from a program run does not function.
● Alarm 15110 "REORG block not possible" is not displayed.
● Compile cycles are not supported.
● No PLC support.
● Axis containers are not supported.
● Swivel tables with non-swiveling offset vectors are not supported.

Supplementary conditions
● All of the existing data records (toolcarrier / TRAORI, TRANSMIT, TRACYL) are
evaluated and must be correctly commissioned for correct simulation.
● Transformations with swiveled linear axis (TRAORI 64 - 69) as well as OEM
transformations (TRAORI 4096 - 4098) are not supported.
● Changes to the toolcarrier or transformation data only become effective after Power On.
● Transformation change and swivel data record change are supported. However, a real
kinematic change is not supported, where a swivel head is physically changed out.
● The simulation of mold building programs with extremely short block change times can
take longer than machining, as the computation time distribution for this application is
dimensioned in favor of the machining and to the detriment of simulation.

Example
An example for supported kinematics is a lathe with B axis:

Turning
160 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.1 Overview

Lathe with B axis

See also
Spindle chuck data (Page 89)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 161
Simulating a machining operation
5.2 Simulation before machining of the workpiece

5.2 Simulation before machining of the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you have the option of performing a quick
run-through in order to graphically display how the program will be executed. This provides a
simple way of checking the result of the programming.

Feedrate override
Feedrate override is also active during simulation.
You can change the feedrate during the simulation via the user interface.
0 %: The simulation stops.
100 %: The program is executed as quickly as possible.

See also
Changing the feedrate (Page 169)
Simulating the program block by block (Page 170)

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select the storage location and position the cursor on the program to be
simulated.
3. Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

- OR -
Double-click the required program.
The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area in the
editor.
4. Press the "Simulation" softkey.
The program execution is displayed graphically on the screen. The
machine axes do not move.

5. Press the "Stop" softkey if you wish to stop the simulation.

- OR -

Turning
162 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.3 Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece

Press the "Reset" softkey to cancel the simulation.

6. Press the "Start" softkey to restart or continue the simulation.

Note
Operating area switchover
The simulation is exited if you switch into another operating area. If you restart the
simulation, then this starts again at the beginning of the program.

Software option

You require the option "3D simulation of the finished part" for the 3D
view.

5.3 Simultaneous recording before machining of the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution
of the program on the screen to monitor the result of the programming.
You can replace the programmed feedrate with a dry run feedrate to influence the speed of
execution and select the program test to disable axis motion.
If you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of the graphical display,
you can switch to the program view.

Software option
You require the option "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)" for the
simultaneous recording.

Procedure

1. Load a program in the "AUTO" mode.

2. Press the "Prog. ctrl." softkey and activate the checkboxes "PRT no axis
movement" and "DRY run feedrate".
The program is executed without axis movement. The programmed
feedrate is replaced by a dry run feedrate.
3. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 163
Simulating a machining operation
5.4 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece

4. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The program execution is displayed graphically on the screen.

5. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey again to stop the recording.

5.4 Simultaneous recording during machining of the workpiece

If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while the workpiece is being
machined, you can also track the program execution on the screen.

Software option
You require the option "Simultaneous recording (real-time simulation)" for the
simultaneous recording.

Procedure

1. Load a program in the "AUTO" mode.

2. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey.

3. Press the <CYCLE START> key.

The machining of the workpiece is started and graphically displayed on
the screen.
4. Press the "Sim. rec." softkey again to stop the recording.

Note
 If you switch-on simultaneous recording after the unmachined part information has
already been processed in the program, only traversing paths and tool are displayed.
 If you switch-off simultaneous recording during machining and then switch-on the function
again at a later time, then the traversing paths generated in the intermediate time will not
be displayed.

Turning
164 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.5 Different views of a workpiece

5.5 Different views of a workpiece

In the graphical display, you can choose between different views so that you constantly have
the best view of the current workpiece machining, or in order to display details or the overall
view of the finished workpiece.
The following views are available:
● Side view
● Half section
● Front view
● 3D view
● 2-window

5.5.1 Side view

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "Side view" softkey.

The side view shows the workpiece in the Z-X plane.

Changing the display

You can increase or decrease the size of the simulation graphic and move it, as well as
change the segment.

5.5.2 Half section

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "Other views" and "Half section" softkeys.

The half view shows the workpiece cut in the Z-X plane.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 165
Simulating a machining operation
5.5 Different views of a workpiece

Changing the display

You can increase or decrease the size of the simulation graphic and move it, as well as
change the segment.

5.5.3 Face view

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "Other views" and "Face view" softkeys.

The side view shows the workpiece in the X-Y plane.

Changing the display

You can increase or decrease the size of the simulation graphic and move it, as well as
change the segment.

5.5.4 3D view

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "3D view" softkey.

Software option
You require the option "3D simulation (finished part)" for the simulation.

Changing the display

You can increase or decrease the size of the simulation graphic, move it, turn it, or change
the segment.

Displaying and moving cutting planes

You can display and move cutting planes X, Y, and Z.

See also
Defining cutting planes (Page 174)

Turning
166 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.6 Graphical display

5.5.5 2-window

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "Additional views" and "2-window view" softkeys.

The 2-window view contains a side view (left-hand window) and a front
view (right-hand window) of the workpiece. The viewing direction is
always from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be
performed from behind or from the back side.

Changing the display

You can increase or decrease the size of the simulation graphic and move it, as well as
change the segment.

5.6 Graphical display

Figure 5-1 2-window view

Active window
The currently active window has a lighter background than the other view windows.
Switch over the active window using the <Next Window> key.
You can change the workpiece display here, e.g. increase or decrease the size, turn it and
move it.
Some of the actions that you perform in the active window also have a simultaneous effect in
other view windows.

Display of the traversing paths

● Rapid traverse = red
● Feed = green

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 167
Simulating a machining operation
5.7 Editing the simulation display

5.7 Editing the simulation display

5.7.1 Blank display

You have the option of replacing the blank defined in the program or to define a blank for
programs in which a blank definition cannot be inserted.

Note
The unmachined part can only be entered if simulation or simultaneous recording is in the
reset state.

Procedure

1. The simulation or the simultaneous recording is started.

2. Press the ">>" and "Blank" softkeys.
The "Blank Input" windows opens and displays the pre-assigned values.

3. Enter the desired values for the dimensions.

4. Press the "Accept" softkey to confirm your entries. The newly defined
workpiece is displayed.

5.7.2 Showing and hiding the tool path

The path display follows the programmed tool path of the selected program. The path is
continuously updated as a function of the tool movement. The tool paths can be shown or
hidden as required.

Procedure

1. The simulation or the simultaneous recording is started.

2. Press the ">>" softkey.
The tool paths are displayed in the active view.
3. Press the softkey to hide the tool paths.
The tool paths are still generated in the background and can be shown
again by pressing the softkey again.
4. Press the "'Delete tool path" softkey.
All of the tool paths recorded up until now are deleted.

Turning
168 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.8 Program control during the simulation

5.8 Program control during the simulation

5.8.1 Changing the feedrate

You can change the feedrate at any time during the simulation.
You can track the changes in the status line.

Note
If you are working with the "Simultaneous recording" function, the rotary switch (override) on
the control panel is used.

Procedure

1. Simulation is started.
2. Press the "Program control" softkey.

3. Press the "Override +" or "Override -" softkey to increase or decrease

the feedrate by 5%.

- OR -
Press the "Override 100%" softkey to set the feedrate to the maximum
value.

- OR -
Press the "<<" softkey to return to the main screen and perform the
simulation with changed feedrate.

Note
Toggling between "Override +" and "Override -"

Press the <CTRL> and <Cursor down> or <Cursor up> keys to toggle
between the "Override +" and "Override -" softkeys.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 169
Simulating a machining operation
5.8 Program control during the simulation

5.8.2 Simulating the program block by block

You can control the program execution during simulation, i.e. execute a program block by
block, as when executing a program.

Procedure

1. Simulation is started.
2. Press the "Program control" and "Single block" softkeys.

3. Press the "Back" and "Start SBL" softkeys.

The pending block of the program is simulated and then stops.

4. Press "Start SBL" as many times as you want to simulate a single

program block.

5. Press the "Program control" and the "Single block" softkeys to exist the
single block mode.

Note
Enabling/disabling single block

Press the <CTRL> and <S> keys simultaneously to enable and disable
the single block mode.

Turning
170 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.9 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic

5.9 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic

5.9.1 Enlarging or reducing the graphical representation

Precondition
The simulation or the simultaneous recording is started.

Procedure

1. Press the <+> and <-> keys if you wish to enlarge or reduce the graphic
 display.
The graphic display enlarged or reduced from the center.
...

- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Zoom +" softkeys if you wish to increase the
size of the segment.

- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Zoom -" softkeys if you wish to decrease the
size of the segment.

- OR -
Press the "Details" and "Auto zoom" softkeys if you wish to
automatically adapt the segment to the size of the window.
The automatic scaling function "Fit to size" takes account of the largest
expansion of the workpiece in the individual axes.

Note
Selected section
The selected sections and size changes are kept as long as the program is selected.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 171
Simulating a machining operation
5.9 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic

5.9.2 Panning a graphical representation

Precondition
The simulation or the simultaneous recording is started.

Procedure

1. Press a cursor key if you wish to move the graphic up, down, left, or
right.

5.9.3 Rotating the graphical representation

In the 3D view you can rotate the position of the workpiece to view it from all sides.

Precondition
Simulation has been started and the 3D view is selected.

Procedure

1. Press the "Details" softkey.

2. Press the "Rotate view" softkey.

Turning
172 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.9 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic

2. Press the "Arrow right", "Arrow left", "Arrow up", "Arrow down", "Arrow
clockwise" and "Arrow counterclockwise" softkeys to change the
position of the workpiece.
...

- OR -
...

Keep the <Shift> key pressed and then turn the workpiece in the desired
direction using the appropriate cursor keys.

5.9.4 Modifying the viewport

If you would like to move, enlarge or decrease the size of the segment of the graphical
display, e.g. to view details or display the complete workpiece, use the magnifying glass.
Using the magnifying glass, you can define your own segment and then increase or
decrease its size.

Precondition
The simulation or the simultaneous recording is started.

Procedure

1. Press the "Details" softkey.

2. Press the "Magnifying glass" softkey.

A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.
3. Press the "Magnify +" or <+> softkey to enlarge the frame.

- OR -
Press the "Magnify -" or <-> softkey to reduce the frame.

- OR -

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 173
Simulating a machining operation
5.9 Editing and adapting a simulation graphic

Press one of the cursor keys to move the frame up, down, left or right.

4. Press the "Accept" softkey to accept the section.

5.9.5 Defining cutting planes

In the 3D view, you have the option of "cutting" the workpiece and therefore displaying
certain views in order to show hidden contours.

Precondition
The simulation or the simultaneous recording is started.

Procedure

1. Press the "Details" softkey.

2. Press the "Cut" softkey.

The workpiece is displayed in the cut state.

3. Press the corresponding softkey to shift the cutting plane in the required
direction.
…

Turning
174 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Simulating a machining operation
5.10 Displaying simulation alarms

5.10 Displaying simulation alarms

Alarms might occur during simulation. If an alarm occurs during a simulation run, a window
opens in the operating window to display it.
The alarm overview contains the following information:
● Date and time
● Deletion criterion
Specifies with which softkey the alarm is acknowledged
● Alarm number
● Alarm text

Precondition
Simulation is running and an alarm is active.

Procedure

1. Press the "Program control" and "Alarm" softkeys.

The "Simulation Alarms" window is opened and a list of all pending
alarms is displayed.

Press the "Acknowledge alarm" softkey to reset the simulation alarms

indicated by the Reset or Cancel symbol.
The simulation can be continued.
- OR -
Press the "Simulation Power On" softkey to reset a simulation alarm
indicated by the Power On symbol.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 175
Simulating a machining operation
5.10 Displaying simulation alarms

Turning
176 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Creating G code program 6
6.1 Graphical programming

Functions
The following functionality is available:
● Technology-oriented program step selection (cycles) using softkeys
● Input windows for parameter assignment with animated help screens
● Context-sensitive online help for every input window
● Support with contour input (geometry processor)

Call and return conditions

● The G functions active before the cycle call and the programmable frame remain active
beyond the cycle.
● The starting position must be approached in the higher-level program before the cycle is
called. The coordinates are programmed in a clockwise coordinate system.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 177
Creating G code program
6.2 Program views

6.2 Program views

You can display a G code program in various ways.
● Program view
● Parameter screen, either with help screen or graphic view

Program view
The program view in the editor provides an overview of the individual machining steps of a
program.

Figure 6-1 Program view of a G code program

In the program view, you can move between the program blocks using
the <Cursor up> and <Cursor down> keys.

Turning
178 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.2 Program views

Parameter screen with help display

Press the <Cursor right> key to open a selected program block or cycle
in the program view.
The associated parameter screen with help screen is then displayed.

Figure 6-2 Parameter screen with help display

The animated help displays are always displayed with the correct orientation to the selected
coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically displayed in the graphic. The selected
parameter is displayed highlighted in the graphic.

The color symbols

Red arrow = tool traverses in rapid traverse
Green arrow = tool moves with the machining feedrate

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 179
Creating G code program
6.2 Program views

Parameter screen with graphic view

Using the "Graphic view" softkey, you can toggle between the help
screen and the graphic view in the screen.

Figure 6-3 Parameter screen with a graphical view of a G code program block

Turning
180 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.3 Program structure

6.3 Program structure

G_code programs can always be freely programmed. The most important commands that
are included in the rule:
● Set a machining plane
● Call a tool (T and D)
● Call a work offset
● Technology values such as feedrate (F), feedrate type (G94, G95,....), speed and
direction of rotation of the spindle (S and M)
● Positions and calls, technology functions (cycles)
● End of program
For G code programs, before calling cycles, a tool must be selected and the required
technology values F, S programmed.
A blank can be specified for simulation.

See also
Blank input (Page 185)

6.4 Basic information

6.4.1 Machining planes

A plane is defined by means of two coordinate axes. The third coordinate axis (tool axis) is
perpendicular to this plane and determines the infeed direction of the tool (e.g. for 2½-D
machining).
When programming, it is necessary to specify the working plane so that the control system
can calculate the tool offset values correctly. The plane is also relevant to certain types of
circular programming and polar coordinates.

=
<
=
<
 
*
=
;
*

;
*  <


Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 181
Creating G code program
6.4 Basic information

Working planes
Working planes are defined as follows:

Plane Tool axis

X/Y G17 Z
Z/X G18 Y
Y/Z G19 X

6.4.2 Current planes in cycles and input screens

Each input screen has a selection box for the planes, if the planes have not been specified
by NC machine data.
● Empty (for compatibility reasons to screen forms without plane)
● G17 (XY)
● G18 (ZX)
● G19 (YZ)
There are parameters in the cycle screens whose names depend on this plane setting.
These are usually parameters that refer to positions of the axes, such as reference point of a
position pattern in the plane or depth specification when drilling in the tool axis.
For G17, reference points in the plane are called X0 Y0, for G18 they are called Z0 X0 - and
for G19, they are called Y0 Z0. The depth specification in the tool axis for G17 is called Z1,
for G18, Y1 and for G19, X1.
If the entry field remains empty, the parameters, the help screens and the broken-line
graphics are displayed in the default plane (can be set via machine data):
● Turning: G18 (ZX)
● Milling: G17 (XY)
The plane is transferred to the cycles as new parameter. The plane is output in the cycle, i.e.
the cycle runs in the entered plane. It is also possible to leave the plane fields empty and
thus create a plane-independent program.
The entered plane only applies for this cycle (not modal)! At the end of the cycle, the plane
from the main program applies again. In this way, a new cycle can be inserted in a program
without having to change the plane for the remaining program.

Turning
182 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.4 Basic information

6.4.3 Programming a tool (T)

Calling a tool
1. You are in a part program
2. Press the "Select tool” softkey.
The "Tool selection" window is opened.
3. Position the cursor on the desired tool and press the "To program"
softkey.
The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor. Text such as the
following is displayed at the current cursor position in the G code editor:
T="ROUGHINGTOOL100"
- OR -
4. Press the "Tool list" and "New tool" softkeys.

5. Then select the required tool using the softkeys on the vertical softkey
bar, parameterize it and then press the softkey "To program".
The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor.
6. Then program the tool change (M6), the spindle direction (M3/M4), the
spindle speed (S...), the feedrate (F), the feedrate type (G94, G95,...),
the coolant (M7/M8) and, if required, further tool-specific functions.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 183
Creating G code program
6.5 Generating a G code program

6.5 Generating a G code program

Create a separate program for each new workpiece that you would like to produce. The
program contains the individual machining steps that must be performed to produce the
workpiece.
Part programs in the G code can be created under the "Workpieces" folder or under the "Part
programs" folder.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the required archiving location.

Creating a new part program

3. Position the cursor on the folder "Part programs" and press the "New"
softkey.

The "New G Code Program" window opens.

4. Enter the required name and press the "OK" softkey.

The name can contain up to 28 characters (name + dot + 3-character
extension). You can use all letters (except accented), digits and
underscores (_).
The program type (MPF) is set by default.
The project is created and opened in the Editor.

Creating a new part program for a workpiece

5. Position the cursor on the folder "Workpieces" and press the "New"
softkey.

The "New G Code Program" window opens.

6. Select the file type (MPF or SPF), enter the desired name of the
program and press the "OK" softkey.
The project is created and opened in the Editor.
7. Enter the desired G code commands.

Turning
184 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.6 Blank input

See also
Changing a cycle call (Page 194)
Selection of the cycles via softkey (Page 188)
Creating a new workpiece (Page 630)

6.6 Blank input

6.6.1 Function

Function
The blank is used for the simulation and the simultaneous recording. A useful simulation can
only be achieved with a blank that is as close as possible to the real blank.
Create a separate program for each new workpiece that you would like to produce. The
program contains the individual machining steps that are performed to produce the
workpiece.
For the blank of the workpiece, define the shape (tube, cylinder, polygon or centered cuboid)
and your dimensions.

Manually reclamping the blank

If the blank is to be manually reclamped from the main spindle to the counterspindle for
example, then delete the blank.
Example
● Blank, main spindle, cylinder
● Machining
● M0 : Manually reclamping the blank
● Blank, main spindle, delete
● Blank, counterspindle, cylinder
● Machining
The blank entry always refers to the work offset currently effective at the position in the
program.

Note
Swiveling
For programs that use "Swiveling", a 0 swivel must first be made and then the blank defined.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 185
Creating G code program
6.6 Blank input

Procedure

1. Select the "Program" operating area.

2. Press the "Misc." and "Blank" softkeys.

The "Blank Input" window opens.

Parameter Description Unit

Data for Selection of the spindle for the blank
 Main spindle
 Counterspindle
Note:
If the machine does not have a counterspindle, then the entry field "Data for" is not
applicable.
Blank Selecting the blank
 Centered cuboid
 Tube
 Cylinder
 Polygon
 Delete
ZA Initial dimension
ZI Final dimension (abs) or final dimension in relation to ZA (inc)
ZB Machining dimension (abs) or machining dimension in relation to ZA (inc)
XA Outside diameter – (only for tube and cylinder) mm
XI Inside diameter (abs) or wall thickness (inc) – (only for tube) mm
N Number of edges – (only for polygon)
SW or L Width across flats or edge length – (only for polygon)
W Width of the blank - (only for centered cuboid) mm
L Length of the blank - (only for centered cuboid) mm

Turning
186 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.7 Machining plane, milling direction, retraction plane, safe clearance and feedrate (PL, RP, SC, F)

6.7 Machining plane, milling direction, retraction plane, safe clearance

and feedrate (PL, RP, SC, F)
In the program header, cycle input screens have general parameters that always repeat.
You will find the following parameters in every input screen for a cycle in a G code program.

Parameter Description Unit

PL Each input screen has a selection box for the planes, if the planes have not been
specified by NC machine data.
Machining plane:
 G17 (XY)
 G18 (ZX)
 G19 (YZ)
Milling direction When machining a pocket, a longitudinal slot or a spigot, the machining direction
- only for (climbing or conventional) and the spindle direction are taken into account in the tool
milling list. The pocket is then machined in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
During path milling, the programmed contour direction determines the machining
direction.
RP Retraction plane (abs) mm
During machining the tool traverses in rapid traverse from the tool change point to the
return plane and then to the safety clearance. The machining feedrate is activated at
this level. When the machining operation is finished, the tool traverses at the machining
feedrate away from the workpiece to the safety clearance level. It traverses from the
safety clearance to the retraction plane and then to the tool change point in rapid
traverse.
The retraction plane is entered as an absolute value.
Normally, reference point Z0 and retraction plane RP have different values. The cycle
assumes that the retraction plane is in front of the reference point.
SC Safety clearance (inc) mm
Acts in relation to the reference point. The direction in which the safety clearance is
active is automatically determined by the cycle.
The safety clearance must be entered as an incremental value (without sign).
F Feedrate
The feedrate F (also referred to as the machining feedrate) specifies the speed at which
the axes move when machining the workpiece. The unit of the feedrate (mm/min,
mm/rev, mm/tooth etc. ) always refers to the feedrate type programmed before the cycle
call.
The maximum feedrate is determined via machine data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 187
Creating G code program
6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey

6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey

Overview of the machining steps

The following machining steps are available.
All of the cycles/functions available in the control are shown in this display. However, at a
specific system, only the steps possible corresponding to the selected technology can be
selected.

⇒ ⇒

Turning
188 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ ⇒

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 189
Creating G code program
6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ ⇒

Turning
190 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ ⇒

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 191
Creating G code program
6.8 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ A menu tree with all of the available measuring versions of the measuring
cycle function "Measure workpiece" can be found in the following
reference:
Programming Manual Measuring cycles / SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D
⇒ A menu tree with all of the available measuring versions of the measuring
cycle function "Measure tool" can be found in the following reference:
Programming Manual Measuring cycles / SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D

See also
General (Page 255)
Generating a G code program (Page 184)

Turning
192 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.9 Calling technology cycles

6.9 Calling technology cycles

6.9.1 Hiding cycle parameters

The documentation describes all the possible input parameters for each cycle. Depending on
the settings of the machine manufacturer, certain parameters can be hidden in the screens,
i.e. not displayed. These are then generated with the appropriate default values when the
cycles are called.
For additional information, please refer to the following references:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Cycle support

Example
1. Use the softkeys to select whether you want support for programming
contours, turning, drilling or milling cycles.

...
2. Select the desired cycle using the softkey in the vertical softkey bar.
3. Enter the parameters and press the "Accept" softkey.

The cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

6.9.2 Setting data for cycles

Cycle functions can be influenced and configured using machine and setting data.
For additional information, please refer to the following references:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 193
Creating G code program
6.9 Calling technology cycles

6.9.3 Checking cycle parameters

The entered parameters are already checked during the program creation in order to avoid
faulty entries.
If a parameter is assigned an illegal value, this is indicated in the input screen and is
designated as follows:
● The entry field has a colored background (background color, pink).
● A note is displayed in the comment line.
● If the parameter input field is selected using the cursor, the not is also displayed as
tooltip.
The programming can only be completed after the incorrect value has been corrected.
Faulty parameter values are also monitored with alarms during the cycle runtime.

6.9.4 Changing a cycle call

You have called the desired cycle via softkey in the program editor, entered the parameters
and confirmed with "Accept".

Procedure

1. Select the desired cycle call and press the <Cursor right> key.
The associated input screen of the selected cycle call is opened.

- OR -
Press the <SHIFT + INSERT> key combination.
This starts the edit mode for this cycle call and you can edit it like a
normal NC block. This means that it is possible to generate an empty
block before the cycle is called. For instance, to insert something before
a cycle that is located at the beginning of the program.
Note: In edit mode, the cycle call can be changed in such a way that it
can no longer be recompiled in the parameter screen.
You exit the edit mode by pressing the <SHIFT + INSERT> key
combination.

- OR -
You are in the edit mode and press the <INPUT> key.
A new line is created after the cursor position.

See also
Generating a G code program (Page 184)

Turning
194 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating G code program
6.9 Calling technology cycles

6.9.5 Compatibility for cycle support

The cycle support is generally upwards compatible. This means that cycle calls in NC
programs can always be recompiled with a higher software version, changed and then run
again.
When transferring NC programs to a machine with a lower software version, it cannot be
guaranteed, however, that the program will be able to be changed by recompiling cycle calls.

6.9.6 Additional functions in the input screens

Selection of units

If, for example, the unit can be switched in a field, this is highlighted as soon as the
cursor is positioned on the element. In this way, the operator recognizes the
dependency.
The selection symbol is also displayed in the tooltip.

Display of abs or inc

The abbreviations "abs" and "inc" for absolute and incremental values are displayed behind
the entry fields when a switchover is possible for the field.

Help screens
2D and 3D graphics or sectional views are displayed for the parameterization of the cycles.

Online help
If you wish to obtain more detailed information about certain G code commands or cycle
parameters, then you can call a context-sensitive online help.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 195
Creating G code program
6.10 Measuring cycle support

6.10 Measuring cycle support

Measuring cycles are general subroutines designed to solve specific measurement tasks.
They can be adapted to specific problems via parameter settings.

Software option
You require the "Measuring cycles" option to use "Measuring cycles".

References
You will find a more detailed description on how to use measuring cycles in:
Programming Manual Measuring cycles / SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D

Turning
196 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Creating a ShopTurn program 7
7.1 Graphic program control, ShopTurn programs
The program editor offers graphic programming to generate machining step programs that
you can directly generate at the machine.

Software option
You require the "ShopMill/ShopTurn" option to generate ShopTurn machining
step programs.

Functions
The following functionality is available:
● Technology-oriented program step selection (cycles) using softkeys
● Input windows for parameter assignment with animated help screens
● Context-sensitive online help for every input window
● Support with contour input (geometry processor)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 197
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.2 Program views

7.2 Program views

You can display a ShopTurn program in various views:
● Machining schedule
● Programming graphics
● Parameter screen, either with help display or programming graphics

Machining schedule
The machining schedule in the editor provides an overview of the individual machining steps
of a program.

Figure 7-1 Machining schedule of a ShopTurn program

... 1. You can move between the program blocks in the machining
schedule using the <Cursor up> and <Cursor down> keys.

2. Press the "Graphics view" softkey to display the programming

graphics.

Turning
198 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.2 Program views

Programming graphics
The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece as a dynamic graphic with
dotted lines. The program block selected in the machining schedule is highlighted in color in
the programming graphics.

Figure 7-2 Programming graphics of a ShopTurn program

Parameter screen with help display and programming graphics

1. Press the <Cursor right> key to open a selected program block or

cycle in the machining schedule.
The associated parameter screen with help screen is then
displayed.
2. Press the "Graphic views" softkey.
The programming graphics of the selected program block is
displayed.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 199
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.2 Program views

Figure 7-3 Parameter screen with dynamic help display

The animated help displays are always displayed with the correct orientation to the selected
coordinate system. The parameters are dynamically displayed in the graphic. The selected
parameter is displayed highlighted in the graphic.

In the screen, you can toggle between the help display and the program
graphics using the "Graphic view".

Figure 7-4 Parameter screen with programming graphics

Turning
200 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.3 Program structure

7.3 Program structure

A machining step program is divided into three sub-areas:
● Program header
● Program blocks
● End of program
These sub-areas form a process plan.

Program header
The program header contains parameters that affect the entire program, such as blank
dimensions or retraction planes.

Program blocks
You determine the individual machining steps in the program blocks. In doing this, you
specify the technology data and positions, among other things.

Linked blocks
For the "Contour turning", "Contour milling", "Milling", and "Drilling" functions, program the
technology blocks and contours or positioning blocks separately. These program blocks are
automatically linked by the control and connected by brackets in the process plan.
In the technology blocks, specify how and in what form the machining should take place, e.g.
centering first, and then drilling. In the positioning blocks, determine the positions for the
drilling or milling machining, e.g. position the drill-holes in a full circle on the face surface.

End of program
End of program signals to the machine that the machining of the workpiece has ended.
Further, here you set whether program execute should be repeated.

Note
Number of workpieces
You can enter the number of required workpieces using the "Times, counters" window.

See also
Entering the number of workpieces (Page 220)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 201
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

7.4 Basic information

7.4.1 Machining planes

A workpiece can be machined on different planes. Two coordinate axes define a machining
plane. On lathes with X, Z, and C axes, three planes are available:
● Turning
● Face
● Peripheral

Machining planes, face and peripheral

The face and peripheral machining planes require the CNC-ISO functions "Front surface
machining" (Transmit) and "Cylindrical peripheral transformation" (Tracyl) to be set up.
These functions are a software option.

Additional Y axis
For lathes with an additional Y axis, the machining planes are expanded to include two more
planes:
● Face Y
● Peripheral Y
Therefore, the face and peripheral planes are called Face C and Peripheral C.

Inclined axis
If the Y axis is an oblique axis (i.e. the axis is not perpendicular to the others), you can also
select the "Face Y" and "Peripheral Y" machining planes and program the traversing
movements in Cartesian coordinates. The control system then automatically transforms the
programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate system into the traversing
movements of the oblique axis.
The CNC-ISO function "Oblique Axis" (Traang) is required for the purpose of transforming
the programmed traversing movements.
This function is a software option.

Selecting the machining plane

The machining plane selection is integrated into the parameter screen forms of the individual
drilling and milling cycles. For turning cycles and for "axial drilling" and "axial threads", the
turning plane is automatically selected. For the "straight" and "circle" functions, you must
specify the machining plane separately.
The settings for the machining plane always act modally, i.e. until you select another plane.
The machining planes are defined as follows:

Turning
202 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

Turning
The turning machining plane corresponds to the X/Z plane (G18).

Face/Face C
The Face/Face C machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). For machines
without a Y axis, however, the tools can only move in the X/Z plane. The X/Y coordinates
that have been entered are automatically transformed into a movement in the X and C axis.
You can use face surface machining with a C axis for drilling and milling if, for instance, you
want to mill a pocket on the face surface. You can choose between the forward or rear face
surface for this purpose.

Peripheral/Peripheral C
The Peripheral/Peripheral C machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). For
machines without a Y axis, however, the tools can only move in the Z/X plane. The Y/Z
coordinates that you entered are automatically transformed into a movement in the C and Z
axis.
You can use peripheral surface machining with a C axis for drilling and milling if, for instance,
you want to mill a slot with constant depth on the peripheral surface. You can choose
between the inner or outer surface for this purpose.

Face Y
The face Y machining plane corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). You can use the face
surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and milling if, for instance, you want to mill a
pocket on the face surface. You can choose between the forward or rear face surface for this
purpose.

Peripheral Y
The peripheral Y machining plane corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). You can use
peripheral surface machining with a Y axis for drilling and milling if, for instance, you want to
mill a pocket with a flat base on the peripheral surface or drill holes that do not point to the
center. You can choose between the inner or outer surface for this purpose.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 203
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

7.4.2 Machining cycle, approach/retraction

Approaching and retracting during the machining cycle always follows the same pattern if
you have not defined a special approach/retraction cycle.
If your machine has a tailstock, you can also take this into consideration when traversing.
The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety clearance. Only the subsequent cycle moves to
the retraction plane. This enables a special approach/retraction cycle to be used.

Note
When selecting the traversing paths, the tool tip is always taken into account; i.e. the tool
expansion is not considered. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes are an
appropriate distance away from the workpiece.

Approach/retraction sequence in a machining cycle

7RROFKDQJHSRLQW

5HWUDFWLRQSODQH

5DSLGWUDYHUVH
0DFKLQLQJIHHGUDWH

6DIHW\FOHDUDQFH

Figure 7-5 Machining cycle, approach/retraction

● The tool traverses in rapid traverse along the shortest path from the tool change point to
the retraction plane, which runs parallel to the machining plane.
● After this, the tool traverses in rapid traverse to the safety clearance.
● Following this, the workpiece is then machined with the programmed machining feedrate.
● After machining, the tool retracts with rapid traverse to the safety clearance.
● The tool then continues to traverse vertically in rapid traverse to the retraction plane.
● From there, the tool traverses in rapid traverse along the shortest path to the tool change
point. If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining processes, the tool
traverses from the retraction plane to the next machining cycle.
The spindle (main, tool, or counter-spindle) begins to rotate immediately after the tool
change.
You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, and the safety clearance in the
program header.

Turning
204 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

Taking into account the tailstock

7RROFKDQJHSRLQW

5HWUDFWLRQSODQH

;55

6DIHW\FOHDUDQFH

5DSLGWUDYHUVH
0DFKLQLQJIHHGUDWH

Figure 7-6 Approach/retraction taking into account the tailstock

● The tool traverses in rapid traverse from the tool change point along the shortest path to
the retraction plane XRR from the tailstock.
● After this, the tool traverses in rapid traverse on the retraction plane in the X direction.
● After this, the tool traverses in rapid traverse to the safety clearance.
● Following this, the workpiece is then machined with the programmed machining feedrate.
● After machining, the tool retracts with rapid traverse to the safety clearance.
● The tool then continues to traverse vertically in rapid traverse to the retraction plane.
● After this, the tool traverses in the X direction to the retraction plane XRR from the
tailstock.
● From there, the tool traverses in rapid traverse along the shortest path to the tool change
point. If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining processes, the tool
traverses from the retraction plane to the next machining cycle.
You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, the safety clearance, and the
retraction plane for the tailstock in the program header.

See also
Programming the approach/retraction cycle (Page 231)
Program header (Page 212)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 205
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

7.4.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions

When generating a machining step program, you can input positions in absolute or
incremental dimensions, depending on how the workpiece drawing is dimensioned.
You can also use a combination of absolute and incremental dimensions, i.e. one coordinate
as an absolute dimension and the other as an incremental dimension.
For the face axis (the X axis, in this case), in the machine data it is established whether the
diameter or radius is programmed in absolute or incremental dimensions.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Absolute dimensions (ABS)

With absolute dimensions, all position specifications refer to the zero point of the active
coordinate system.

3

3 3
š

3
š
š

 =




Figure 7-7 Absolute dimensions

The position specifications for the points P1 to P4 in absolute dimensions refer to the zero
point:
P1: X25 Z-7.5
P2: X40 Z-15
P3: X40 Z-25
P4: X60 Z-35

Turning
206 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

Incremental dimensions (INC)

With incremental dimensions (also referred to as sequential dimensions) a position
specification refers to the previously programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to
the path to be traversed. As a rule, the plus/minus sign does not matter when entering the
incremental value, only the absolute value of the increment is evaluated. For some
parameters, the plus/minus sign specifies the traversing direction. These exceptions are
identified in the parameter table of the individual functions.

3


3 3


3


=
   

Figure 7-8 Incremental dimensions

The position specifications for points P1 to P4 in incremental dimensions are as follows:

P1: X12.5 Z-7.5 (relative to the zero point)
P2: X7.5 Z-7.5 (relative to P1)
P3:X0 Z-10 (relative to P2)
P4: X10 Z-10 (relative to P3)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 207
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

7.4.4 Polar coordinates

You can specify positions using right-angled coordinates or polar coordinates.
If a point in a workpiece drawing is defined by a value for each coordinate axis, you can
easily input the position into the parameter screen form using right-angled coordinates. For
workpieces that are dimensioned with arcs or angular data, it is often easier if you input the
positions using polar coordinates.
You can only program polar coordinates for the functions "Straight circle" and "Contour
milling."
The point from which dimensioning starts in polar coordinates is called the "pole".

3
3
3
r 
r
r
3RO


=


Figure 7-9 Polar coordinates

The position specifications for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar coordinates are:
Pole: X30 Z30 (relative to the zero point)
P1: L30 α30° (relative to the pole)
P2: L30 α60° (relative to the pole)
P3: L30 α90° (relative to the pole)

Turning
208 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.4 Basic information

7.4.5 Clamping the spindle

The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Note for selecting the clamp spindle function under ShopTurn

The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle
automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for
which the spindle should be clamped.
If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the
following applies:
You should note that when machining in the end face/end face C and peripheral
surface/peripheral surface C planes, clamping only remains active for contour milling and
drilling operations. On the other hand, when machining in the end face Y/end face B and
peripheral surface Y planes, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains active until the machining
plane is changed.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 209
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.5 Creating a ShopTurn program

7.5 Creating a ShopTurn program

Create a separate program for each new workpiece that you would like to produce. The
program contains the individual machining steps that must be performed to produce the
workpiece.
If you create a new program, a program header and program end are automatically defined.
ShopTurn programs can be created in a new workpiece or under the folder "Part programs".

Procedure

Creating a ShopTurn program

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder
"Part programs" or under the folder "Workpieces" on the workpiece for
which you wish to create a program.
3. Press the "New" and "ShopTurn" softkeys.
The "New machining step programming" window opens.

4. Enter the required name and press the "OK" softkey.

The name can contain up to 28 characters (name + dot + 3-character
extension). You can use all letters (except accented), digits and
underscores (_). The "ShopTurn" program type is selected.
The editor is opened and the "Program header" parameter screen is
displayed.

Filling out the program header

5. Select a work offset.

6. Enter the dimensions of the blank and the parameter, which are
effective over the complete program, e.g. dimension units in mm or
inch, tool axis, retraction plane, safety clearance and machining
direction.
Press the "Teach TC position" softkey if you want to set the actual
position of the tool as a tool change point.
The tool’s coordinates are transferred into parameters XT and ZT.
Teaching in the tool change point is only possible if you have selected
the machine coordinate system (Machine).
7. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The process plan is displayed. Program header and end of program are
created as program blocks.
The end of program is automatically defined.

Turning
210 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.5 Creating a ShopTurn program

The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety clearance. Only the subsequent cycle moves to
the retraction plane. This enables a special approach/retraction cycle to be used.
Changes to the retraction plane therefore take effect when retracting from the previous
machining operation.
When selecting the traversing paths, the tool tip is always taken into account; i.e. the tool
expansion is not considered. Therefore, you should ensure that the retraction planes are an
appropriate distance away from the workpiece.

See also
Changing program settings (Page 222)
Programming the approach/retraction cycle (Page 231)
Creating a new workpiece (Page 630)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 211
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.6 Program header

7.6 Program header

In the program header, set the following parameters, which are effective for the complete
program.

Parameters Description Unit

Measurement unit The setting of the measurement unit in the program header only refers to the mm
position data in the actual program. inch
All other data, such as feedrate or tool offsets, are entered in the unit of measure
that you have set for the entire machine.
Work offset The work offset in which the zero point of the workpiece is saved.
You can also delete the default value of the parameter if you do not want to
specify a work offset.
Blank Define the form and dimensions of the workpiece:
 Cylinder
XA Outer diameter ∅ mm
 Polygon
N Number of edges
SW / L Width across flats
Edge length
 Centered cuboid
W Width of blank mm
L Length of blank mm
 Tube
XA Outer diameter ∅ mm
XI Inner diameter ∅ (abs) or wall thickness (inc) mm
ZA Initial dimension mm
ZI Final dimension (abs) or final dimension in relation to ZA (inc) mm
ZB Machining dimension (abs) or machining dimension in relation to ZA (inc) mm
Retraction The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free traversing of
the axes must be possible.
 simple
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI - only for "pipe" blank
Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
 extended - not for a "pipe" blank
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)

Turning
212 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.6 Program header

Parameters Description Unit

ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
 all
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plant Z rear
Tailstock  Yes
 No
XRR Retraction plane tailstock – (only "Yes" for tailstock)
Tool change point Tool change point, which must be approached by the revolver with its zero point.
 Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 Machine (Machine Coordinate System)
Notes
 The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it is
not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the revolver is
moving.
 Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the revolver
and not the tool tip.
XT Tool change point X ∅
ZT Tool change point Z
SC The safety clearance defines how close the tool can approach the workpiece in
rapid traverse.
Note
Enter the safety clearance without sign into the incremental dimension.
S Spindle speed (maximum main spindle speed) rev/min
If you want to machine the workpiece with a constant cutting rate, the spindle
speed must be increased as soon as the workpiece diameter becomes smaller.
Since the speed cannot be increased at will, you can set a speed limit for the main
spindle (S1) and for the counter-spindle (S3), depending on the shape, size, and
material of the workpiece or collet.
The machine manufacturer only sets one speed limit for the machine, i.e. none
that are dependent on the workpiece.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.
Mach. direction of Milling direction
rotation
 Conventional
 Climbing

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 213
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.7 Generating program blocks

7.7 Generating program blocks

After a new program is created and the program header is filled out, define the individual
machining steps in program blocks that are necessary to machine the workpiece.
You can only create the program blocks between the program header and the program end.

Procedure

Selecting a technological function

1. Position the cursor in the process plan on the line behind which a new
program block is to be inserted.
2. Using the softkeys, select the desired function.
The associated parameter screen is displayed.
...

3. First, program the tool, correction (offset) value, feedrate and spindle
speed (T, D, F, S, V) and then enter the values for the other
parameters.

Selecting a tool from the tool list

4. Press the "Select tools" softkey if you wish to select the tool for
parameter "T".
The "Tool selection" window is opened.
5. Position the cursor in the tool list on the tool that you wish to use for
machining and press the "To program" softkey.
The selected tool is accepted into the parameter screen form.
- OR -
Press the "Tool list" and "New tool" softkeys.
The "Tool selection" window is opened.

Using the softkeys on the vertical softkey bar, select the required tool
with the data and press the "To program" softkey.
The selected tool is accepted into the parameter screen form.
The process plan is displayed and the newly generated program block
is marked.

Turning
214 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.8 Tool, offset value, feedrate and spindle speed (T, D, F, S, V)

7.8 Tool, offset value, feedrate and spindle speed (T, D, F, S, V)

The following parameters should be entered for every program block.

Tool (T)
Each time a workpiece is machined, you must program a tool. Tools are selected by name,
and the selection is integrated in all parameter screen forms of the machining cycles (with
the exception for straight line/circle).
The tool length offsets become active as soon as the tool is changed.
Tool selection is modal for the straight line/circle, i.e. if the same tool is used to perform
several machining steps in succession, you only have to program one tool for the first
straight line/circle.

Cutting edge (D)

In the case of tools with several cutting edges, there is a separate set of individual tool offset
data for each edge. For these tools, you must select or specify the number of the cutting
edge that you would like to use for machining.

CAUTION

If, for tools with several cutting edges, you specify the incorrect cutting edge number and
move the tool, then collisions can occur. Always ensure that you enter the correct cutting
edge number.

Radius compensation
The tool radius compensation is automatically taken into account during all machining
cycles, with the exception of path milling and straight.
For path milling and straight lines, you have the option of programming the machining with or
without radius compensation. The tool radius compensation is modal for straight lines, i.e.
you have to deselect the radius compensation again if you want to traverse without radius
compensation.

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

Radius compensation remains as previously set

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 215
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.8 Tool, offset value, feedrate and spindle speed (T, D, F, S, V)

Feedrate (F)
The feedrate F (also referred to as the machining feedrate) specifies the speed at which the
axes move when machining the workpiece. The machining feedrate is entered in mm/min,
mm/rev or in mm/tooth.
It is only possible to enter the feedrate in mm/tooth during milling; this ensures that each
cutting edge of the milling cutter is cutting under the best possible conditions. The feedrate
per tooth corresponds to the linear path traversed by the milling cutter when a tooth is
engaged.
For milling and turning cycles, the feedrate during roughing is relative to the milling or cutting
center point. This is also applies to finishing, with the exception of contours with inner
curves. In this case, the feedrate is relative to the contact point between the tool and the
workpiece.
The maximum feedrate is determined via machine data.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Converting the feedrate (F) for drilling and milling

The feedrate entered for drilling cycles is automatically converted when switching from
mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa using the selected tool diameter.
The feedrate entered for milling cycles is automatically converted when switching from mm/Z
to mm/min and vice versa using the selected tool diameter.

Spindle speed (S)

The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle revolutions per minute (rpm) and is
programmed along with a tool. The speed specified relates to the main spindle (S1) or
counter-spindle (S3) when turning and axial drilling, and to the tool spindle (S2) when drilling
and milling.
The spindle starts immediately after the tool change. The spindle stops upon reset, program
end, or a tool change. The spindle's direction of rotation is specified in the tool list for each
tool.

Cutting rate (V)

The cutting rate V is a circumferential velocity (m/min) and is programmed together with a
tool, as an alternative to the spindle speed. The cutting rate is relative to the main spindle
(V1) or the counter-spindle (V3) for turning and axial drilling, and corresponds to the
circumferential velocity of the workpiece at the point that is currently being machined.
However, for drilling and milling, the cutting rate is relative to the tool spindle (V2) and
corresponds to the peripheral speed at which the cutting edge of the tool machines the
workpiece.

Turning
216 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.8 Tool, offset value, feedrate and spindle speed (T, D, F, S, V)

Converting the spindle speed (S) / cutting rate (V) when milling
As an alternative to the cutting rate, you can also program the spindle speed.
For the milling cycles, the cutting rate (m/min) that is entered is automatically converted into
the spindle speed (rpm) using the tool diameter - and vice versa.

Machining
When machining some cycles, you can choose between roughing, finishing, or complete
machining. For certain milling cycles, finishing edge or finishing base are possible.
● Roughing
One or more machining operations with depth infeed
● Finishing
Single machining operation
● Edge finishing
Only the edge of the object is finished
● Base finishing
Only the base of the object is finished
● Complete machining
Roughing and finishing with one tool in a
● machining step
If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you must call the machining cycle
twice (1st block = roughing; 2nd block = finishing). The programmed parameters are
retained when the cycle is called for the second time.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 217
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.9 Call work offsets

7.9 Call work offsets

You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.
You define work offsets in work offset lists. You can also view the coordinates of the selected
offset here.

Procedure

1. Press the "Various", "Transformations" and "Work offset" softkeys.

The "Work offset" window opens.

2. Select the desired work offset (e.g. G54).

3. Press the "Accept" softkey.

The work offset is transferred into the work plan.

7.10 Repeating program blocks

If certain steps when machining a workpiece have to be executed more than once, it is only
necessary to program these steps once. You have the option of repeating program blocks.

NOTICE
Machining several workpieces
The program repeat function is not suitable to program repeat machining of parts.
In order to repeatedly machine the same workpieces program this using end of program.

Start and end marker

You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start and end marker. You
can then call these program blocks up to 200 times within a program. The markers must be
unique, i.e. they must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used.
You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not within linked
program blocks.

Note
You can use one and the same marker as end marker for preceding program blocks and as
start marker for following program blocks.

Turning
218 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.10 Repeating program blocks

Procedure

1. Position the cursor at the program block, behind which a program block
that will be repeated should follow.
2. Press the "Various" softkey.

3. Press the ">>" and "Repeat progr." softkeys.

3. Press the "Set marker" and "Accept" softkeys.

A start marker is inserted behind the actual block.

4. Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.

5. Press the "Set marker" and "Accept" softkeys again.
An end marker is inserted after the actual block.

6. Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat the

program blocks.
7. Press the "Various" and "Repeat progr." softkeys.

8. Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of times
the blocks are to be repeated.
9. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The marked program blocks are repeated.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 219
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.11 Entering the number of workpieces

7.11 Entering the number of workpieces

If you wish to produce a certain quantity of the same workpiece, then at the end of the
program, specify that you wish to repeat the program.
If your machine has a bar loader for example, you can program the reloading of the
workpiece and then the actual machining at the beginning of the program. At the end, cut off
the completed workpiece.
Control the numbers of times that the program is repeated using the "Times, counters"
window. Enter the number of required workpieces using the target number. You can track
the number of machined and completed workpieces in the actual counter window.
Workpieces can be completely automatically produced in this fashion.

Controlling program repetition

End of program: Times, counter:

Repeat Counts the
workpieces
No No A CYCLE START is required for each workpiece.
No Yes A CYCLE START is required for each workpiece.
The workpieces are counted.
Yes Yes The program is repeated without a new CYCLE START
until the required number of workpieces have been
machined.
Yes No Without a new CYCLE START, the program is repeated
an infinite number of times.
You can interrupt program execution with <RESET>.

Procedure

1. Open the "Program end" program block, if you want to machine more
than one workpiece.
2. In the "Repeat" field, enter "Yes".
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.
If you start the program later, program execution is repeated.
Depending on the settings in the "Times, counters" window, the
program is repeated until the set number of workpieces has been
machined.

See also
Displaying the program runtime and counting workpieces (Page 153)

Turning
220 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.12 Changing program blocks

7.12 Changing program blocks

You can subsequently optimize the parameters in the programmed blocks or adapt them to
new situations, e.g. if you want to increase the feedrate or shift a position. In this case, you
can directly change all the parameters in every program block in the associated parameter
screen form.

Procedure

1. Select the program that you wish to change in the "Program Manager"
operating area.

2. Press the <Cursor right> or <INPUT> key.

The work plan of the program is displayed.

3. Position the cursor in the work plan at the desired program block and
press the <Cursor right> key.
The parameter screen for the selected program block is displayed.
4. Make the desired changes.
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <Cursor left> key.

The changes are accepted in the program.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 221
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.13 Changing program settings

7.13 Changing program settings

Function
All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of the blank shape and
the unit of measurement can be changed at any point in the program. It is also possible to
change the basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.
The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active until they are changed.

Retraction
A changed retraction plane takes effect starting with the safety clearance of the last cycle,
because the additional retraction from the next cycle is accepted.

Machining direction
The machining direction of rotation (climbing or conventional) is defined as the direction of
movement of the milling tooth with respect to the workpiece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this
parameter in conjunction with the direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the
exception of path milling.
The basic setting for the machining direction is programmed in a machine data.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program" operating area.

2. Press the "Various" and "Settings" softkeys.

The "Settings" input window opens.

Turning
222 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.13 Changing program settings

Parameters

Parameter Description Unit

Retraction Lift mode
 simple
 Extended
 all
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or retraction plane X referred to XA (inc) mm
XRI Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or retraction plane X referred to XI (inc) mm
- (only for retraction "extended" and "all")
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or mm
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plane Z rear – (only for retraction "all") mm
Tailstock Yes
 Tailstock is displayed for simulation / simultaneous recording
 When approaching/retracting, the retraction logic is taken into account
No
XRR Retraction plane – (only "Yes" for tailstock) mm
Tool change point Tool change point
 Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 Machine (Machine Coordinate System)
XT Tool change point X mm
ZT Tool change point Z mm
SC Safety clearance (inc) mm
Acts in relation to the reference point. The direction in which the safety clearance is
active is automatically determined by the cycle.
S1 Maximum speed, main spindle rev/min
Machining Milling direction:
direction
 Climbing
 Conventional

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 223
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey

7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey

Overview of the machining steps

The following machining steps are available.
All of the cycles/functions available in the control are shown in this display. However, at a
specific system, only the steps possible corresponding to the selected technology can be
selected.

⇒ ⇒

Turning
224 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ ⇒

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 225
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ ⇒

Turning
226 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 227
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.14 Selection of the cycles via softkey

⇒ ⇒

⇒ A menu tree with all of the available measuring versions of the measuring
cycle function "Measure workpiece" can be found in the following
reference:
Programming Manual Measuring cycles / SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D
⇒ A menu tree with all of the available measuring versions of the measuring
cycle function "Measure tool" can be found in the following reference:
Programming Manual Measuring cycles / SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D

Turning
228 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.15 Calling technology functions

7.15 Calling technology functions

7.15.1 Additional functions in the input screens

Selection of units

If, for example, the unit can be switched in a field, this is highlighted as soon as the
cursor is positioned on the element. In this way, the operator recognizes the
dependency.
The selection symbol is also displayed in the tooltip.

Display of abs or inc

The abbreviations "abs" and "inc" for absolute and incremental values are displayed behind
the entry fields when a switchover is possible for the field.

Help screens
2D and 3D graphics or sectional views are displayed for the parameterization of the cycles.

Online help
If you wish to obtain more detailed information about certain G code commands or cycle
parameters, then you can call a context-sensitive online help.

7.15.2 Checking cycle parameters

The entered parameters are already checked during the program creation in order to avoid
faulty entries.
If a parameter is assigned an illegal value, this is indicated in the input screen as follows:
● The entry field is displayed with a colored background (orange).
● The comment line displays a note.
● If the parameter entry field is selected with the cursor, the note is also displayed as a tool
tip.
The programming can only be completed after the incorrect value has been corrected.
Faulty parameter values are also monitored with alarms during the cycle runtime.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 229
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.15 Calling technology functions

7.15.3 Setting data for technological functions

Technological functions can be influenced and corrected using machine or setting data.
For additional information, please refer to the following documentation:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate / SINUMERIK 840D sl

7.15.4 Changing a cycle call

You have called the desired cycle via softkey in the program editor, entered the parameters
and confirmed with "Accept".

Procedure

1. Select the desired cycle call and press the <Cursor right> key.
The associated input screen of the selected cycle call is opened.

- OR -
Press the <SHIFT + INSERT> key combination.
This starts the edit mode for this cycle call and you can edit it like a
normal NC block. This means that it is possible to generate an empty
block before the cycle is called. For instance, to insert something before
a cycle that is located at the beginning of the program.
Note: In edit mode, the cycle call can be changed in such a way that it
can no longer be recompiled in the parameter screen.
You exit the edit mode by pressing the <SHIFT + INSERT> key
combination.

- OR -
You are in the edit mode and press the <INPUT> key.
A new line is created after the cursor position.

7.15.5 Compatibility for cycle support

The cycle support is generally upwards compatible. This means that cycle calls in NC
programs can always be recompiled with a higher software version, changed and then run
again.
When transferring NC programs to a machine with a lower software version, it cannot be
guaranteed, however, that the program will be able to be changed by recompiling cycle calls.

Turning
230 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.16 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

7.16 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

If you wish to shorten the approach/retraction for a machining cycle or solve a complex
geometrical situation when approaching/retracting, you can generate a special cycle. In this
case, the approach/retraction strategy normally used is not taken into account.
You can insert the approach/retraction cycle between any machining step program blocks,
but not within linked program blocks.

Starting point
The starting point for the approach/retraction cycle is the safety clearance approached after
the last machining operation.

Tool change
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1
to P3) to the tool change point and through a maximum of 3 additional positions (P4 to P6) to
the next starting point. If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of
6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.
If 3 or 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/retraction, you can call the cycle several
times in succession to program further positions.

CAUTION

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/retraction
cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.

See also
Machining cycle, approach/retraction (Page 204)

Procedure

Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

Press the "Approach/retract" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 231
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.16 Programming the approach/retraction cycle

Table 7- 1

Parameters Description Unit

F1 Feedrate to approach the first position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X1 1. position ∅ (abs) or 1st position (inc) mm (in)
Z1 1. position (abs or inc) mm
F2 Feedrate for approach to the second position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X2 2. position ∅ (abs) or 2nd position (inc) mm
Z2 2. position (abs or inc) mm
F3 Feedrate to approach the third position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X3 3. position ∅ (abs) or 3rd position (inc) mm
Z3 3. position (abs or inc) mm
Tool change TlChngPt: Approach the tool change point from the last programmed position and
carry out a tool change
direct: Tool is not changed at the tool change position, but at the last programmed
position
No: Tool is not changed
T Tool name - (only for "direct" tool change)
D Cutting edge number - (only for "direct" tool change)
F4 Feedrate for approach to the fourth position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X4 4. position ∅ (abs) or 4th position (inc) mm
Z4 4. position (abs or inc) mm
F5 Feedrate to approach the fifth position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X5 5. position ∅ (abs) or 5th position (inc) mm
Z5 5. position (abs or inc) mm
F6 Feedrate to approach the sixth position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X6 6. position ∅ (abs) or 6th position (inc) mm
Z6 6. position (abs or inc) mm

Turning
232 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.17 Measuring cycle support

7.17 Measuring cycle support

Measuring cycles are general subroutines designed to solve specific measurement tasks.
They can be adapted to specific problems via parameter settings.

Software option
You require the "Measuring cycles" option to use "Measuring cycles".

References
You will find a more detailed description on how to use measuring cycles in:
Programming Manual Measuring cycles / SINUMERIK 840D sl/828D

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 233
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

7.18 Example: Standard machining

General information
The following example is described in detail as ShopTurn program. A G code program is
generated in the same way; however, some differences must be observed.
If you copy the G code program listed below, read it into the control and open it in the editor,
then you can track the individual program steps.

Machine manufacturer
Under all circumstances, observe the machine manufacturer’s instructions.

Tools
The following tools are saved in the tool manager:

Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6

Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4
Finishing tool 35°, R0.4
Plunge cutter Plate width 4
Threading tool_2
Drill_D5 ∅5
Miller_D8 ∅8
Adapt the cutting data to the tools used and the specific application conditions at the
machine.

Blank
Dimensions: ∅90 x 120
Material: Aluminum

Turning
234 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

7.18.1 Workpiece drawing

)6

5
[ෘ  )6 
;

r

0[


ෘ 

ෘ
5

5
)6 )6 [r




ෘ 

ෘ 



;



r r

5 5

7.18.2 Programming

1. Program header

1. Specify the blank.

Measurement unit mm
Blank Cylinder
XA 90abs
ZA +1.0abs
ZI -120abs
ZB -100abs
Retraction simple

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 235
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

XRA 2inc
ZRA 5inc
Tool change point Machine
XT 160abs
ZT 409abs
SC 1
S1 4000rev/min
Machining direction Climbing
2. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The work plan is displayed. Program header and end of program are
created as program blocks.
The end of program is automatically defined.

2. Stock removal cycle for facing

1. Press the "Turning" and "Stock removal" softkeys.

2. Select the machining strategy.

3. Enter the following technology parameters:
T Roughing D1 F 0.300 mm/rev V 350 m/min
tool_80
4. Enter the following parameters:
Machining Roughing (∇)
Position

Direction Face (parallel to the X axis)

X0 90abs
Z0 2abs
X1 -1.6abs
Z1 0abs
D 2inc
UX 0inc
UZ 0.1inc
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
236 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

3. Input of blank contour with contour computer

1. Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" softkeys.

The "New Contour" input window opens.

2. Enter the contour name (in this case: Cont_1).

The contour calculated as NC code is written as internal subprogram
between a start and an end marker containing the entered name.
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The "Starting point" entry field opens.
4. Enter the starting point of the contour.
X 60abs Z 0abs
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.

6. Enter the following contour elements and acknowledge using the

"Accept" softkey.

6.1 Z -40abs

6.2 X 80abs Z -45abs

6.3 Z -65abs

6.4 X 90abs Z -70abs

6.5 Z -95abs

6.6 X 0abs

6.7 Z 0abs

6.8 X 60abs Z 0abs

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 237
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

7. Press the "Accept" softkey.

It is only necessary to enter the blank contour when using a pre-
machined blank.

Blank contour

4. Input of finished part with contour computer

1. Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" softkeys.

The "New Contour" input window opens.

2. Enter the contour name (in this case: Cont_2).

The contour calculated as NC code is written as internal subprogram
between a start and an end marker containing the entered name.
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The "Starting point" entry field opens.
4. Specify the contour starting point of the contour.
X 0abs Z 0abs
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
238 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

6. Enter the following contour elements and acknowledge using the

"Accept" softkey.

6.1 X 48abs FS 3

6.2 α2 90°

6.3 Direction of rotation

R 23abs X 60abs K -35abs I 80 abs

Afterwards, entry fields are inactive.
6.4 Using the "Dialog selection" softkey, select a required contour element
and confirm using the "Dialog accept" softkey. The entry fields are
active again. Enter the additional parameters.

FS 2
6.5 Z -80abs R 6

6.6 X 90abs Z -85abs FS3

6.7 Z -95abs

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 239
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

7. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Finished-part contour

5. Stock removal (roughing)

1. Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" softkeys.

The "Stock Removal" input window opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Roughing tool 80 D1 F 0.350 mm/rev V 400 m/min
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machining Roughing (∇)
Machining direction Longitudinal
Position external
Machining direction

(from front to back)

D 4.000inc
Cutting depth

Turning
240 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

UX 0.4inc
UZ 0.2inc
DI 0
BL Cylinder
XD 0inc
ZD 0inc
Relief cuts No
Set machining No
area limits
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

If a blank programmed under "CONT_1" is used, under parameter "BL",

the "Contour" blank description should be selected instead of "Cylinder".
When selecting "Cylinder", the workpiece is cut from the solid material.

Stock removal contour

6. Solid machine residual material

1. Press the "Cont. turn." and "St. remov. resid." softkeys.

The "Stock removal residual material" input window opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Roughing tool_55 D1 F 0.35 mm/rev V 400 m/min
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machining Roughing (∇)
Machining direction Longitudinal

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 241
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

Position external
Machining direction

D 2inc
Cutting depth

UX 0.4inc
UZ 0.2inc
DI 0
Relief cuts Yes
FR 0.200mm/rev
Set machining area limits No
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

7. Stock removal (finishing)

1. Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" softkeys.

The "Stock Removal" input window opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Finishing tool_D1 F 0.1 mm/rev V 450 m/min
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machining Finishing (∇∇∇)
Machining direction Longitudinal
Position external
Machining direction

(from front to back)

Allowance No
Relief cuts Yes
Set machining area limits No
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
242 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

8. Groove (roughing)

1. Press the "Turning", "Groove" and "Groove with inclines" softkeys.

The "Groove 1" entry field opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Grooving D1 F 0.150 mm/rev V 220 m/min
tool
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machining Roughing (∇)
Groove position

Reference point

X0 60abs
Z0 -70
B2 8inc
T1 4inc
α1 15Degrees
α2 15Degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
D 2inc
UX 0.4inc
UZ 0.2inc
N 1

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 243
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Contour, groove

9. Groove (finishing)

1. Press the "Turning", "Groove" and "Groove with inclines" softkeys.

The "Groove 2" entry field opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Grooving tool D1 F 0.1 mm/rev V 220 m/min
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machining Finishing (∇∇∇)
Groove position

Reference point

X0 60abs
Z0 -70

Turning
244 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

B1 5.856inc
T1 4inc
α1 15Degrees
α2 15Degrees
FS1 1
R2 1
R3 1
FS4 1
N 1
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

10. Longitudinal threads M48 x2 (roughing)

1. Press the "Turning", "Thread" and "Thread longitudinal" softkeys.

The "Longitudinal thread" entry field opens.

2. Enter the following parameters:

T Threading tool_2 D1
Table without
P 2mm/rev
G 0
S 995rev/min
Machining type Roughing (∇)
Infeed: Constant cutting Diminishing
cross-section
Thread External thread
X0 48abs
Z0 0abs
Z1 -25abs
LW 4inc
LR 4inc
H1 1.227inc
αP 30Degrees
Infeed
ND 5
U 0.150inc

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 245
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

VR 1inc
Multiple threads No
α0 0Degrees
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.

11. Longitudinal threads M48 x 2 (finishing)

1. Press the "Turning", "Thread" and "Thread longitudinal" softkeys.

The "Longitudinal thread" entry field opens.

2. Enter the following parameters:

T Threading tool_2 D1
Table without
P 2mm/rev
G 0
S 995rev/min
Machining type Finishing (∇∇∇)
Thread External thread
X0 48abs
Z0 0abs
Z1 -25abs
LW 4inc
LR 4inc
H1 1.227inc
αP 30Degrees
Infeed
NN 2
VR 1inc
Multiple threads No
α0 0Degrees
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
246 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

12. Drilling

1. Press the "Drilling", "Drilling reaming" and "Drilling" softkeys.

The "Drilling" input window opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Drill_D5 D1 F 0.1 mm/rev V 50 m/min
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machined surface Face C
Drilling depth Tip
Z1 10inc
DT 0s
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

13. Positioning

1. Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable Positions"

softkeys.
The "Positions" input window opens.

2. Enter the following parameters:

Machined surface Face C
Coordinate system Polar
Z0 0abs
C0 0abs
L0 16abs
C1 90abs
L1 16abs
C2 180abs
L2 16abs
C3 270abs
L3 16abs
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 247
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

14. Milling the rectangular pocket

1. Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" softkeys.

The "Rectangular Pocket" input window opens.

2. Enter the following technology parameters:

T Miller_D8 D1 F 0.030 mm/tooth V 200 m/min
3. Enter the following parameters:
Machined surface Face C
Machining type Roughing (∇)
Machining position Single position
X0 0abs
Y0 0abs
Z0 0abs
W 23
L 23
R 8
α0 4Degrees
Z1 5inc
DXY 50%
DZ 3
UXY 0.1mm
UZ 0
Insertion Vertical
FZ 0.015mm/tooth
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
248 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

7.18.3 Results/simulation test

Figure 7-10 Programming graphics

Figure 7-11 Process plan

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 249
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

Program test by means of simulation

During simulation, the current program is calculated in its entirety and the result displayed in
graphic form.

Figure 7-12 3D view

Turning
250 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

7.18.4 G code machining program

N1 G54
N2 WORKPIECE(,,"","CYLINDER",192,2,-120,-100,90)
N3 G0 X200 Z200 Y0
;*****************************************
N4 T="ROUGHING TOOL_80" D1
N5 M06
N6 G96 S350 M04
N7 CYCLE951(90,2,-1.6,0,-1.6,0,1,2,0,0.1,12,0,0,0,1,0.3,0,2,1110000)
N8 G96 S400
N9 CYCLE62(,2,"E_LAB_A_CONT_2","E_LAB_E_CONT_2")
N10 CYCLE952("STOCK
REMOVAL_1",,"BLANK_1",2301311,0.35,0.15,0,4,0.1,0.1,0.4,0.2,0.1,0,1,0,0,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,12,1110110)
N11 G0 X200 Z200
;*****************************************
N12 T="ROUGHING TOOL_55" D1
N13 M06
N14 G96 S400 M04
N15 CYCLE952("STOCK
REMOVAL_2","BLANK_1","Blank_1",1301311,0.35,0.2,0,2,0.1,0.1,0.4,0.2,0.1,0,1,0,,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,112,1
100110)
N16 G0 X200 Z200
;*****************************************
N17 T="FINISHING TOOL" D1
N18 M06
N19 G96 S450 M04
N20 CYCLE952("STOCK
REMOVAL_3",,"",1301321,0.1,0.5,0,1.9,0.1,0.1,0.2,0.1,0.1,0,1,0,0,,,,,2,2,,,0,1,,0,12,1000110)
N21 G0 X200 Z200
;*****************************************
N22 T="GROOVING TOOL" D1
N23 M06
N24 G96 S220 M04
N25 CYCLE930(60,-70,5.856406,8,4,,0,15,15,1,1,1,1,0.2,2,1,10110,,1,30,0.15,1,0.4,0.2,2,1001010)
N26 CYCLE930(60,-70,5.856406,8,4,,0,15,15,1,1,1,1,0.2,2,1,10120,,1,30,0.1,1,0.1,0.1,2,1001110)
N27 G0 X200 Z200
;*****************************************
N28 T="THREADING TOOL_2" D1
N29 M06
N30 G97 S995 M03
N31 CYCLE99(0,48,-25,,4,4,1.226,0.1,30,0,5,0,2,1100103,4,1,0.2815,0.5,0,0,1,0,0.707831,1,,,,2,0)
N32 CYCLE99(0,48,-25,,4,4,1.226,0.02,30,0,3,2,2,1210103,4,1,0.5,0.5,0,0,1,0,0.707831,1,,,,2,0)
N33 G0 X200 Z200

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 251
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

;*****************************************
N34 T="DRILL_D5" D1
N35 M06
N36 SPOS=0
N37 SETMS(2)
N38 M24 ; couple-in driven tool, machine-specific
N39 G97 S3183 M3
N40 G94 F318
N41 TRANSMIT
N42 MCALL CYCLE82(1,0,1,,10,0,0,1,11)
N43 HOLES2(0,0,16,0,30,4,1010,0,,,1)
N44 MCALL
N45 M25 ; couple out driven tool, machine-specific
N46 SETMS(1)
N47 TRAFOOF
N48 G0 X200 Z200
;*****************************************
N49 T="MILLER_D8"
N50 M6
N51 SPOS=0
N52 SETMS(2)
N53 M24
N54 G97 S1989 M03
N55 G95 FZ=0.15
N56 TRANSMIT
N57 POCKET3(20,0,1,5,23,23,8,0,0,4,3,0,0,0.12,0.08,0,11,50,8,3,15,0,2,0,1,2,11100,11,111)
N58 M25
N59 TRAFOOF
N60 DIAMON
N61 SETMS(1)
N62 G0 X200 Z200
N63 M30
;*****************************************
N64 E_LAB_A_CONT_1: ;#SM Z:3
;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
G18 G90 DIAMOF;*GP*
G0 Z0 X30 ;*GP*
G1 Z-40 ;*GP*
Z-45 X40 ;*GP*
Z-65 ;*GP*
Z-70 X45 ;*GP*
Z-95 ;*GP*
X0 ;*GP*
Z0 ;*GP*

Turning
252 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

X30 ;*GP*
;CON,2,0.0000,1,1,MST:0,0,AX:Z,X,K,I;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;S,EX:0,EY:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LL,EX:-40;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LA,EX:-45,EY:40;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LL,EX:-65;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LA,EX:-70,EY:45;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LL,EX:-95;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LD,EY:0;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LR,EX:0;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LA,EX:0,EY:30;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
E_LAB_E_CONT_1:
N65 E_LAB_A_CONT_2: ;#SM Z:4
;#7__DlgK contour definition begin - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
G18 G90 DIAMOF;*GP*
G0 Z0 X0 ;*GP*
G1 X24 CHR=3 ;*GP*
Z-18.477 ;*GP*
G2 Z-55.712 X30 K=AC(-35) I=AC(40) ;*GP*
G1 Z-80 RND=6 ;*GP*
Z-85 X45 CHR=3 ;*GP*
Z-95 ;*GP*
;CON,V64,2,0.0000,0,0,MST:0,0,AX:Z,X,K,I;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;S,EX:0,EY:0,ASE:90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LU,EY:24;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;F,LFASE:3;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LL,DIA:225/0,AT:90;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;ACW,DIA:210/0,EY:30,CX:-35,CY:40,RAD:23;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LL,EX:-80;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;R,RROUND:6;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LA,EX:-85,EY:45;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;F,LFASE:3;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;LL,EX:-95;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
;#End contour definition end - Don't change!;*GP*;*RO*;*HD*
E_LAB_E_CONT_2:

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 253
Creating a ShopTurn program
7.18 Example: Standard machining

Turning
254 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Programming technology functions (cycles) 8
8.1 Drilling

8.1.1 General

General geometry parameters

● Retraction plane RP and reference point Z0
Normally, reference point Z0 and retraction plane RP have different values. The cycle
assumes that the retraction plane is in front of the reference point.

Note
If the values for reference point and retraction planes are identical, a relative depth
specification is not permitted. Error message "Reference plane defined incorrectly" is
output and the cycle is not executed.
This error message is also output if the retraction plane is located after the reference
point, i.e. its distance to the final drilling depth is smaller.

● Safety clearance SC
Acts in relation to the reference point. The direction in which the safety clearance is active
is automatically determined by the cycle.
● Drilling depth
Depending on the selection of the drill shank or drill tip or the centering diameter, the
programmed drilling depth refers to the following for cycles with a selection field:
– Tip (drilling depth in relation to the tip)
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value programmed
for Z1.
– Shank (drilling depth in relation to the shank)
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The angle entered in the tool list is taken into account.
– Diameter (centering in relation to the diameter, only for CYCLE81)
The diameter of the centering hole is programmed at Z1. In this case, the tip angle of
the tool must be specified in the tool list. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until
the specified diameter is reached.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 255
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Drilling positions
The cycle assumes the tested hole coordinates of the plane.
The hole centers should therefore be programmed before or after the cycle call as follows
(see also Section, Cycles on single position or position pattern (MCALL)):
● A single position should be programmed before the cycle call
● Position patterns (MCALL) should be programmed after the cycle call
– as drilling pattern cycle (line, circle, etc.) or
– as a sequence of positioning blocks for the hole centers

See also
Selection of the cycles via softkey (Page 188)

8.1.2 Centering (CYCLE81)

8.1.2.1 Function

Function
With the "Centering" function, the tool drills with the programmed spindle speed and feedrate
either:
● Down to the programmed final drilling depth or
● So deep until the programmed diameter of the centering is reached
The tool is retracted after a programmed dwell time has elapsed.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Turning
256 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Approach/retraction
1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. Inserted into the workpiece with G1 and the programmed feedrate F until the depth or the
centering diameter is reached.
3. On expiry of a dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse G0 to the retraction
plane.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Centering" softkey.

The "Centering" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number
SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev

S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Single position
position (only
for G code) Drill hole at programmed position
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

Z0 (only for G Reference point Z mm
code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 257
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Centering  Diameter (centered with reference to the diameter)

The angle for the center drill entered in the tool list is applied.
 Tip (centered with reference to the depth)
The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the programmed insertion depth is reached.
∅ It is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter is correct. - (for diameter centering mm
only)
Z1 Drilling depth (abs) or drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1. - (for tip centering only)

DT  Dwell time (at final drilling depth) in seconds s

rev
 Dwell time (at final drilling depth) in revolutions

8.1.3 Drilling (CYCLE82)

Function
With the "Drilling" function, the tool drills with the programmed spindle speed and feedrate
down to the specified final drilling depth (shank or tip).
The tool is retracted after a programmed dwell time has elapsed.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
258 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. The tool is inserted into the workpiece with G1 and the programmed feedrate F until it
reaches the programmed final depth Z1.
3. When a dwell time DT expires, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse G0 to the retraction
plane.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Drilling Reaming" softkey.

4. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

The "Drilling" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number
SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev

S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Single position
position (only
for G code) Drill hole at programmed position
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

Z0 (only for G Reference point Z mm
code)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 259
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Drilling depth  Shank (drilling depth in relation to the shank)

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The angle entered in the tool list is taken into account.
 Tip (drilling depth in relation to the tip)

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1.
Note: If it is not possible to define an angle for the drill in the tool management, it will
not be possible to select tip or shank (always tip, 0 field)
Z1 Drilling depth (abs) or drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1.

DT  Dwell time (at final drilling depth) in seconds s

rev
 Dwell time (at final drilling depth) in revolutions

Turning
260 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.4 Reaming (CYCLE85)

Function
With the "Reaming" cycle, the tool is inserted in the workpiece with the programmed spindle
speed and the feedrate programmed at F.
If Z1 has been reached and the dwell time expired, the reamer is retracted at the
programmed retraction feedrate to the retraction plane.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. The tool is inserted into the workpiece with the programmed feedrate F until it reaches
the final depth Z1.
3. Dwell time DT at final drilling depth.
4. Retraction to retraction plane with programmed retraction feedrate FR.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Drilling Reaming" softkey.

4. Press the "Reaming" softkey.

The "Reaming" input window opens.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 261
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number
SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev

F Feedrate * S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Single position
position (only
for G code) Drill hole at programmed position
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

Z0 (only for G Reference point Z mm
code)
FR (only for G Feedrate during retraction *
code)
FR (only for Feedrate during retraction mm/min
ShopTurn) mm/rev
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Z1 Drilling depth (abs) or drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1.
DT  Dwell time (at final drilling depth) in seconds s
rev
 Dwell time (at final drilling depth) in revolutions

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
262 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.5 Boring (CYCLE86)

Function
With the "Boring" cycle, the tool approaches the programmed position in rapid traverse,
allowing for the retraction plane and safety clearance. It is then inserted into the workpiece at
the feedrate programmed under F until it reaches the programmed depth (Z1). There is an
oriented spindle stop with the SPOS command. After the dwell time has elapsed, the tool is
retracted either with or without lift of the tool.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Lift
For "lift off contour", the retraction distance D and the tool orientation angle α can either be
defined via machine data or in the parameter screen. If both parameters are pre-assigned
via machine data, they do not appear in the parameter screen.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

NOTICE

The "Boring" cycle can be used if the spindle to be used for the boring operation is
technically able to go into position-controlled spindle operation.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. Travel to the final drilling depth with G1 and the speed and feedrate programmed before
the cycle call.
3. Dwell time at final drilling depth.
4. Oriented spindle hold at the spindle position programmed under SPOS.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 263
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

5. With the "Lift" selection, the cutting edge retracts from the hole edge with G0 in up to
three axes.
6. Retraction with G0 to the safety clearance of the reference point.
7. Retraction to retraction plane with G0 to drilling position in the two axes of the plane
(coordinates of the hole center point).

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the softkey "Boring" for G code.

- OR -
3. Press the softkeys "Drilling Reaming" and "Boring" for ShopTurn

The "Boring" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number

SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev

S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Turning
264 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Single position
position
Drill hole at programmed position.
 Position pattern
(only for G code)
Position with MCALL
DIR Direction of rotation


(only for G code) 

Z0 (only for G Reference point Z mm

code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Z1 Drilling depth (abs) or drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
DT  Dwell time at final drilling depth in seconds s
rev
 Dwell time at final drilling depth in revolutions

SPOS Spindle stop position Degrees

Lift mode  Do not lift off contour

The cutting edge is not fully retracted, but traverses back to the safety clearance in
rapid traverse.
 Lift

The cutting edge is retracted from the hole edge and then moved back to the
retraction plane.
DX (only G Code) Retraction distance in the X direction (incremental) - (for lift-off only) mm
DY (only G code) Retraction distance in the Y direction (incremental) - (for lift-off only) mm
DZ (only G code) Retraction distance in the Z direction (incremental) - (for lift-off only) mm
D (only Retraction distance (incremental) - (for lift only) mm
ShopTurn)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 265
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.6 Deep-hole drilling (CYCLE83)

Function
With the "Deep-hole drilling" cycle, the tool is inserted in the workpiece with the programmed
spindle speed and feedrate in several infeed steps until the depth Z1 is reached. The
following can be specified:
● Number of infeed steps constant or decreasing (via programmable degression factor)
● Chip breaking without lifting or swarth removal with tool retraction
● Feedrate factor for 1st infeed to reduce the feedrate or increase the feedrate (e.g. if a
hole has already be predrilled)
● Dwell times
● Depth in relation to drill shank of drill tip

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction during chipbreaking

1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. The tool drills with the programmed spindle speed and feedrate F = F · FD1 [%] up to the
1st infeed depth.
3. Dwell time at drilling depth DTB.
4. The tool is retracted by retraction distance V2 for chipbreaking and drills up to the next
infeed depth with programmed feedrate F.
5. Step 4 is repeated until the final drilling depth Z1 is reached.
6. Dwell time at final drilling depth DT.
7. The tool retracts to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

Turning
266 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Approach/retraction during stock removal

1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. The tool drills with the programmed spindle speed and feedrate F = F · FD1 [%] up to the
1st infeed depth.
3. Dwell time at drilling depth DTB.
4. The tool retracts from the workpiece for the stock removal with rapid traverse to the safety
clearance.
5. Dwell time at starting point DTS.
6. Approach of the last drilling depth with G0, reduced by the clearance distance V3.
7. Drilling is then continued to the next drilling depth.
8. Steps 4 to 7 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.
9. The tool retracts to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Deep-hole drilling" softkey.

The "Deep-hole Drilling" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number

SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev

S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 267
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Single position
position (only
for G code) Drill hole at programmed position
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

Z0 (only for G Reference point Z mm
code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for  Peripheral surface C

ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining  Chip removal

The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.

 Chipbreaking

The drill is retracted by the retraction distance V2 for chipbreaking.

Drilling depth  Shank (drilling depth in relation to the shank)

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value
programmed for Z1. The angle entered in the tool list is taken into account.
 Tip (drilling depth in relation to the tip)

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value
programmed for Z1.
Note: If it is not possible to define an angle for the drill in the tool management, it will
not be possible to select tip or shank (always tip, 0 field)
Z1 Drilling depth (abs) or drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1.

D 1. Drilling depth (abs) or 1st drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm

(only for G code)
D (only for Maximum depth infeed mm
ShopTurn)
FD1 Percentage for the feedrate for the first infeed %

Turning
268 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

DF Infeed:
 Amount for each additional infeed mm
%
 Percentage for each additional infeed
DF = 100%: Infeed increment remains constant
DF < 100%: Infeed increment is reduced in direction of final drilling depth.
Example: last infeed was 4 mm; DF is 80%
next infeed = 4 x 80% = 3.2 mm
next infeed = 3.2 x 80% = 2.56 mm etc.
V1 Minimum infeed - (only for DF in %) mm
Parameter V1 is only available if DF< 100 has been programmed.
If the infeed increment becomes very small, a minimum infeed can be programmed in
parameter "V1".
V1 < Infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed increment
V1 > Infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed value programmed under V1.
V2 Retraction distance after each machining step – (for chipbreaking only) mm
Distance by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2 = 0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.
Limit distance (for  Manual
stock removal
only) The limit distance must be entered manually.
 Automatic

The limit distance is calculated by the cycle.

V3 Limit distance – (for stock removal only and manual limit distance) mm
Distance to the last infeed depth that the drill approaches in rapid traverse after stock
removal.
DTB (only for G  Dwell time at drilling depth in seconds s
code) rev
 Dwell time at drilling depth in revolutions

DT  Dwell time at final drilling depth in seconds s

rev
 Dwell time at final drilling depth in revolutions
DTS (only for G  Dwell time for stock removal in seconds s
code) rev
 Dwell time for stock removal in revolutions

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 269
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.7 Tapping (CYCLE84, 840)

Function
You can machine an internal thread with the "tapping" cycle.
The tool moves to the safety clearance with the active speed and rapid traverse. The spindle
stops, spindle and feedrate are synchronized. The tool is then inserted in the workpiece with
the programmed speed (dependent on %S).
You can choose between drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for
stock removal.
Depending on the selection in the "Compensating chuck mode" field, alternatively the
following cycle calls are generated:
● With compensating chuck: CYCLE840
● Without compensating chuck: CYCLE84
When tapping with compensating chuck, the thread is produced in one cut. CYCLE84
enables tapping to be performed in several cuts if the spindle is equipped with a measuring
system.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction - CYCLE840 - with compensating chuck

1. The tool moves with G0 to safety clearance of the reference point.
2. The tool drills with G1 and the programmed spindle speed and direction of rotation to
depth Z1. The feedrate F is calculated internally in the cycle from the speed and pitch.
3. The direction of rotation is reversed.
4. Dwell time at final drilling depth.
5. Retraction to safety clearance with G1.
6. Reversal of direction of rotation or spindle stop.
7. Retraction to retraction plane with G0.

Turning
270 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Approach/retraction - CYCLE84 - without compensating chuck

One cut:
1. Travel with G0 to the safety clearance of the reference point.
2. Spindle is synchronized and started with the programmed speed (dependent on %S).
3. Tapping with spindle-feedrate synchronization to Z1.
4. Spindle stop and dwell time at drilling depth.
5. Spindle reverse after dwell time has elapsed.
6. Retraction with active spindle retraction speed (dependent on %S) to safety clearance
7. Spindle stop.
8. Retraction to retraction plane with G0.

Approach/retraction during stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S (dependent on %S) as far as the first
infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. Spindle stop and dwell time DT.
3. The tool retracts from the workpiece for the stock removal with spindle speed SR to the
safety clearance.
4. Spindle stop and dwell time DT.
5. The tool then drills with spindle speed S as far as the next infeed depth.
6. Steps 2 to 5 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.
7. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted with spindle speed SR to the safety
clearance. The spindle stops and retracts to the retraction plane.

Approach/retraction during chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S (dependent on %S) as far as the first
infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. Spindle stop and dwell time DT.
3. The tool retracts by the retraction distance V2 for chipbreaking.
4. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S (dependent on %S).
5. Steps 2 to 4 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.
6. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted with spindle speed SR to the safety
clearance. The spindle stops and retracts to the retraction plane.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 271
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Thread" and "Tapping" softkeys.

The "Tapping" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Compensating  with compensating chuck
chuck mode
 without compensating chuck
(only for G
code)
Machining  Single position
position (only
for G code) Drill hole at programmed position
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

Z0 (only for G Reference point Z mm
code)
Machining - (with You can select the following technologies for tapping:
compensating
 with encoder
chuck)
Tapping with spindle encoder
(only for G code)  without encoder

Tapping without spindle encoder;

– Define "Pitch" parameter
SR (only for Spindle speed for retraction - (only for spindle speed "S") rev/min
ShopTurn)
VR (only for Constant cutting rate for retraction - (only for constant cutting rate "V") m/min
ShopTurn)

Turning
272 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Z1 End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) - only for G code and "ShopTurn mm
machining surface face")
It is inserted into the workpiece until it reaches Z1.
Pitch - (only  User input
machining without
encoder) Pitch is obtained from the input
 Active feedrate
(only for G code)
Pitch is obtained from the feedrate
Thread Direction of rotation of the thread
(only for G code)  Righthand thread
 Lefthand thread
(only in mode "without compensating chuck")
Table Thread table selection:
 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
Selection Selection, table value: e.g.
 M3; M10; etc. (ISO metric)
 W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)
 G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)
 1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 273
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

P Pitch ...
- (selection  in MODULUS: MODULUS = Pitch/π MODULUS
only possible for Turns/"
 in turns per inch: Used with pipe threads, for example.
table selection
"without") When entered per inch, enter the integer number in front of the decimal point in the
first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the mm/rev
second and third field.
in/rev
 in mm/rev
 in inch/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used.
αS Starting angle offset - (only for tapping without compensating chuck) Degrees
(only for G code)
S Spindle speed - (only for tapping without compensating chuck) rev/min
(only for G code)
Machining (not for The following machining technologies can be selected:
G code "with
 1 cut
compensating
chuck") The thread is drilled in one cut without interruption.
 Chipbreaking

The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

 Chip removal

The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.

D Maximum depth infeed - (only when used without compensating chuck, stock removal mm
or chipbreaking)
Retraction Retraction distance - (for chipbreaking only)
 Manual

Retraction distance after each machining step (V2)

 Automatic
Without retraction distance after each machining step
V2 Retraction distance after each machining step – (only without compensating chuck, mm
chipbreaking and manual retraction)
Distance by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2 = automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.
DT Dwell time at final drilling depth in seconds s
(only for G code)
SR Spindle speed for retraction - (only for when a compensating chuck is not used) rev/min
(only for G code)
SDE Direction of rotation after end of cycle:
(only for G code)




Turning
274 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Technology  Yes
– Exact stop
– Precontrol
– Acceleration
– Spindle
 No
Exact stop (only  Behavior the same as it was before the cycle was called
for technology,
 G601: Block advance for exact stop fine
yes)
 G602: Block advance for exact stop coarse
 G603: Block advance if the setpoint is reached
Precontrol (only  Behavior the same as it was before the cycle was called
for technology,
 FFWON: with precontrol
yes)
 FFWOF: without precontrol
Acceleration (only  Behavior the same as it was before the cycle was called
for technology,
 SOFT: Jerk-limited (soft) acceleration of the axes
yes)
 BRISK: Abrupt acceleration of the axes
 DRIVE: Reduced axis acceleration
Spindle (only for  Speed controlled: Spindle for MCAL; speed controlled operation
technology, yes)
 Position controlled: Spindle for MCALL; position controlled operation

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 275
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.8 Drill and thread milling (CYCLE78)

Function
You can use a drill and thread milling cutter to manufacture an internal thread with a specific
depth and pitch in one operation. This means that you can use the same tool for drilling and
thread milling, a change of tool is superfluous.
The thread can be machined as a right- or left-hand thread.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool traverses with rapid traverse to the safety clearance.
2. If pre-drilling is required, the tool traverses at a reduced drilling feedrate to the predrilling
depth defined in a setting data (ShopMill/ShopTurn). When programming in G code, the
predrilling depth can be programmed using an input parameter.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

1. The tool bores at drilling feedrate F1 to the first drilling depth D. If the final drilling depth
Z1 is not reached, the tool will travel back to the workpiece surface in rapid traverse for
stock removal. Then the tool will traverse with rapid traverse to a position 1 mm above the
drilling depth previously achieved - allowing it to continue drilling at drill feedrate F1 at the
next infeed. Parameter "DF" is taken into account from the 2nd infeed and higher (refer to
the table "Parameters").
2. If another feedrate FR is required for through-boring, the residual drilling depth ZR is
drilled with this feedrate.
3. If required, the tool traverses back to the workpiece surface for stock removal before
thread milling with rapid traverse.
4. The tool traverses to the starting position for thread milling.
5. The thread milling is carried out (climbing, conventional or conventional + climbing) with
milling feedrate F2. The thread milling acceleration path and deceleration path is
traversed in a semicircle with concurrent infeed in the tool axis.

Turning
276 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Thread" and "Cut thread" softkeys.

The "Drilling and thread milling" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number

SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev

S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Single position
position
Drill hole at programmed position
(only for G code)
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

F1 Drilling feedrate mm/min
(only for G code) mm/rev
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 277
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Z1 Thread length (inc) or end point of the thread (abs) mm
D Maximum depth infeed mm
DF  Percentage for each additional infeed %

DF=100: Infeed increment remains constant

DF<100: Infeed increment is reduced in direction of final drilling depth Z1.

Example: last infeed 4 mm; DF 80% mm

next infeed = 4 x 80% = 3.2 mm

next but one infeed = 3.2 x 80% = 2.56 mm etc.

 Amount for each additional infeed
V1 Minimum infeed - (only for DF, percentage for each additional infeed) mm
Parameter V1 is only available if DF< 100 has been programmed.
If the infeed increment becomes very small, a minimum infeed can be programmed in
parameter "V1".
V1 < Infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed increment
V1 > Infeed increment: The tool is inserted by the infeed value programmed under V1.
Predrilling Predrilling with reduced feedrate
 Yes
 No
The reduced drilling feedrate is obtained as follows:
Drilling feedrate F1 < 0.15 mm/rev: Predrilling feedrate = 30% of F1
Drilling feedrate F1 ≥ 0.15 mm/rev: Predrilling feedrate = 0.1 mm/rev
AZ Predrilling depth with reduced drilling feedrate - ("yes", only for predrilling) mm
(only for G code)
Through boring Remaining drilling depth with drilling feedrate
 Yes
 No
ZR Residual drilling depth for through boring - ("yes", only for through boring) mm
FR Drilling feedrate for remaining drilling depth - ("yes", only for through boring) mm/min
mm/rev
Chip removal Stock removal before thread milling
 Yes
 No
Return to workpiece surface for stock removal before thread milling.
Thread Direction of rotation of the thread
 Righthand thread
 Lefthand thread

Turning
278 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

F2 Feedrate for thread milling mm/min
mm/tooth
Table Thread table selection:
 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
Selection - (not Selection, table value: e.g.
for table
 M3; M10; etc. (ISO metric)
"Without")
 W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)
 G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)
 N1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)
P Pitch ...
- (selection MODULUS
 in MODULUS: MODULUS = Pitch/π
only possible for
 in turns per inch: Used with pipe threads, for example. Turns/"
"Table
without selection")
When entered per inch, enter the integer number in front of the decimal point in the
first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the
mm/rev
second and third field.
in/rev
 in mm/rev
 in inch/rev
The pitch is determined by the tool used.
Z2 Retraction amount before thread milling mm
The thread depth in the direction of the tool axis is defined using Z2. Z2 is relative to
the tool tip.
∅ Nominal diameter mm
Milling direction  Climbing: Mill thread in one cycle.
 Conventional: Mill thread in one cycle.
 Climbing - conventional: Mill thread in two cycles: rough cutting is performed by
conventional milling with defined allowances, then finish cutting is performed with
climb milling with milling feedrate FS.
FS Finishing feedrate rate - (only for climbing - conventional milling) mm/min
mm/tooth

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 279
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.9 Positioning and position patterns

Function
After you have programmed the technology (cycle call), you must program the positions.
Several position patterns are available:
● Arbitrary positions
● Position on a line, on a grid or frame
● Position on a full or pitch circle

Programming a position pattern in ShopTurn

Several position patterns can be programmed in succession (up to 20 technologies and
position patterns in total). They are executed in the order in which you program them.
The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed positions are automatically
linked by the control.

Displaying and hiding positions

You can display or hide any positions (Chapter"Displaying and hiding positions (Page 289)").

8.1.9.1 Approach/retraction

Approach/retraction
1. Within a position pattern, or while approaching the next position pattern, the tool is
retracted to the retraction plane and the new position or position pattern is then
approached at rapid traverse.
2. With technological follow-up operations (e.g. centering - drilling - tapping), the respective
drilling cycle must programmed after calling the next tool (e.g. drill) and immediately
afterwards the call of the position pattern to be machined.

Tool traverse path

● ShopTurn
The programmed positions are machined with the previously programmed tool (e.g.
center drill). Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point. In the case of
a grid, machining is performed first in the direction of the 1st axis and then meandering
back and forth. The frame and hole circle are machined counterclockwise.
● G codes
For G code, for lines/frames/grids, a start is always made at the next corner of the frame
or grid or the end of the row. The frame and hole circle are machined counterclockwise.

Turning
280 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.10 Arbitrary positions (CYCLE802)

8.1.10.1 Function

Function
The "Arbitrary positions" cycle allows you to program positions freely, i.e. rectangular or
polar. Individual positions are approached in the order in which you program them. Press
softkey "Delete all" to delete all positions programmed in X/Y.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Positions" and "Arbitrary positions" softkeys.

The "Positions" input window opens.

Parameter Description Unit

LAB Repeat jump label for position
(only for G code)
PL Machining plane
(only for G code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for  Peripheral surface C

ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface Y

Position  At the front (face)

(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 281
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Coordinate  right-angled or polar
system
Dimensions in right-angled coordinates or polar coordinates (only for face C and
(only for
ShopTurn) face Y)
 right-angled or cylindrical

Dimensions in right-angled coordinates or cylindrical coordinates - (only for

peripheral surface C)
X0 X coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
X1 ...X8 X coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
Y1 ...Y8 Y coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
(only for G code)
Face C and face Y - at right angles:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area (only for face Y) Degrees
X0 X coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
X1 ... X7 X coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Y1 ... Y7 Y coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
(only for Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
ShopTurn)
Face C and face Y - polar:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area (only for face Y) Degrees
C0 C coordinate of 1st position (abs) Degrees
L0 1. Position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs) mm
C1 ... C7 C coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) Degrees
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
L1 ... L7 Distance to position (abs or inc) mm
(only for Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface - at right angles:
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
Z0 Z coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
Y1 ...Y7 Y coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Z1 ...Z7 Z coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
(only for Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
ShopTurn)

Turning
282 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Peripheral surface C - cylindrical:
C0 C coordinate of 1st position (abs) Degrees
Z0 1. Position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs) mm
C1 ...C7 C coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) Degrees
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Z1 ... Z7 Additional positions in the Z axis (abs or inc) mm
(only for Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y:
X0 Reference point in X direction (abs) mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
Y0 Y coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
Z0 Z coordinate of 1st position (abs) mm
Y1 ...Y7 Y coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Z1 ...Z7 Z coordinate for additional positions (abs or inc) mm
(only for Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
ShopTurn

8.1.11 Position pattern line (HOLES1), grid or frame (CYCLE801)

Function
You can program the following pattern using the "Position pattern" cycle:
● Line (HOLES1)
In the "Line" selection option you can program any number of positions at equal distances
along a line.
● Grid (CYCLE801)
You can use the "Grid" selection option to program any number of positions spaced at an
equal distance along one or several parallel lines.
If you want to program a rhombus-shaped grid, enter angle αX or αY.
● Frame (CYCLE801)
You can use the "Frame" selection option to program any number of positions spaced at
an equal distance on a frame. The spacing may be different on both axes.
If you want to program a rhombus-shaped frame, enter angle αX or αY.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 283
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Positions" and "Line" softkeys.

The "Position Pattern" input window opens.

Parameter Description Unit

LAB Repeat jump label for position
(only for G code)
PL Machining plane
(only for G code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for  Peripheral surface C
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Position pattern Selection option for the following patterns:
 Line
 Matrix
 Box
X0 X coordinate of the reference point X (abs) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the 1st call.
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point Y (abs) mm
This position must be programmed absolutely in the 1st call.
α0 Angle of rotation of the line referred to the X axis Degrees
(only for G-Code) Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.
Face C:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
X0 X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Degrees
(only for Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
ShopTurn)
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

Turning
284 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y:
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
X0 X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Degrees
(only for Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
ShopTurn)
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.
Peripheral surface C:
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Degrees
(only for Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
ShopTurn)
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.
Peripheral surface Y:
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs) mm
α0 Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Degrees
(only for Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise.
ShopTurn)
Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.
Line
L0 Distance of the 1st position to reference point mm
L Distance between the positions mm
N Number of positions - (for line position pattern only)
Grid or frame
αX Shear angle X Degrees
αY Shear angle Y Degrees
L1 Distance between columns mm
L2 Distance between rows mm
N1 Number of columns
N2 Number of rows

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 285
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.12 Circle position pattern (HOLES2)

Function
You can program holes on a full circle or pitch circle with defined radius with the "Circle
position pattern" cycle. The basic angle of rotation (α0) for the 1st position is relative to the X
axis. The control calculates the angle of the next hole position as a function of the total
number of holes. The angle it calculates is identical for all positions.
The tool can approach the next position along a linear or circular path.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

3. Press the "Positions" and "Full circle" softkeys.

The "Position circle" input window opens.
In the "Full/pitch circle" field, use the cursor to select "Full circle".

Parameter Description Unit

LAB Repeat jump label for position
(only for G code)
PL Machining plane
(only for G code)
Circular pattern Selection option for the following patterns:
 Pitch circle
 Full circle
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
α0 Starting angle for first position referred to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Circle is rotated clockwise.
α1 Advance angle - (for pitch circle only) Degrees
R Radius mm
N Number of positions
Positioning  Straight line: Next position is approached linearly in rapid traverse.
(only for G code)  Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
the machine data.

Turning
286 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
(only for  At the rear (face)
ShopTurn)
 Outside (peripheral surface)
 Inside (peripheral surface)
Selection options for the following positions - (only for face C/Y)
Position
 center
(only for
ShopTurn)  off-center
Face C:
center/ Position circle center on the face surface
off-center Position circle off-center on the face surface
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) – (only for off-center) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs) – (only for off-center) mm
α0 Starting angle for first position referred to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Circle is rotated clockwise.
α1 Advance angle - (for pitch circle only) Degrees
R Radius mm
N Number of positions
Positioning  Straight line: Next position is approached linearly in rapid traverse.
(only for
 Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
ShopTurn)
the machine data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 287
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y:
center/ Position circle center on the face surface
off-center Position circle off-center on the face surface
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
X0 or L0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) or reference point length, polar mm
– (only for off-center)
Y0 or C0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs) or mm
reference point angle, polar – (only for off-center) Degrees
α0 Starting angle for first position referred to the X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Circle is rotated clockwise.
α1 Advance angle - (for pitch circle only) Degrees
R Radius
N Number of positions mm
Positioning
 Straight line: Next position is approached linearly in rapid traverse.
(only for
ShopTurn)  Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
the machine data.
Peripheral surface C:
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs) mm
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
α0 Starting angle for first position referred to the Y axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Circle is rotated clockwise.
α1 Advance angle - (for pitch circle only) Degrees
N Number of positions
only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y:
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
α0 Starting angle for first position referred to the Y axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Circle is rotated clockwise.
α1 Advance angle - (for pitch circle only) Degrees
N Number of positions
R Radius mm
Positioning  Straight line: Next position is approached linearly in rapid traverse.
(only for
 Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in
ShopTurn)
the machine data.

Turning
288 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.13 Displaying and hiding positions

Function
You can hide any positions in the following position patterns:
● Position pattern line
● Position pattern grid
● Position pattern frame
● Full circle position pattern
● Pitch circle position pattern
The hidden positions are skipped when machining.

Display
The programmed positions of the position pattern are shown as follows in the programming
graphic:

x Position is activated = displayed (position is shown as a cross)

o Position deactivated = hidden (position shown as a circle)

Selecting positions
You have the option of either displaying or hiding positions - by activating the checkbox in
the displayed position table either using the keyboard or mouse.

Procedure:

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

3. Press the "Line/Grid/Frame" or "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 289
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

4. Press the "Hide position" softkey.

The "Hide position" window opens on top of the input form of the
position pattern.
The positions are displayed in a table.
The numbers of the positions, their coordinates (X, Y) as well as a
checkbox with the state (activated = on / deactivated = off) are
displayed.
The actual position in the graphic is highlighted in color.
5. Using the mouse, select the required position and deactivate or activate
the checkbox in order to hide the position or display it again.
In the diagram, skipped positions are shown in the form of a circle and
displayed (active) positions are shown in the form of a cross.
Note: You have the option of selecting individual positions using the
<Cursor up> or <Cursor down> keys – and hiding and displaying using
the <SELECT> key.

Display or hide all positions at once

1. Press the "Hide all" softkey to hide all positions.

2. Press the "Show all" softkey to display all positions again.

Turning
290 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.1 Drilling

8.1.14 Repeating positions

8.1.14.1 Function

Function
If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed again, you can do this
quickly with the function "Repeat position".
You must specify the number of the position pattern. The cycle automatically assigns this
number (for ShopTurn). You will find this position pattern number in the work plan (program
view) or G-code program after the block number.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" softkeys.
The "Repeat positions" input window opens.

3. After you have entered the label or the position pattern number, e.g. 1,
press the "Accept" softkey. The position pattern you have selected is
then approached again.

Parameter Description Unit

LAB Repeat jump label for position
(only for G code)
Position (only for Enter the number of the position pattern
ShopTurn)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 291
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

8.2 Rotate

8.2.1 General
In all turning cycles apart from contour turning (CYCLE95), in the combined roughing and
finishing mode, when finishing it is possible to reduce the feedrate as a percentage.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

8.2.2 Stock removal (CYCLE951)

Function
You can use the "Stock removal" cycle for longitudinal or transverse stock removal of
corners at outer or inner contours.

Note
Removing stock from corners
For this cycle, the safety clearance is additionally limited using setting data. The lower value
is taken for machining.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Machining method
● Roughing
In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the finishing allowance that has
been programmed. If no finishing allowance has been programmed, the workpiece is
roughed down to the final contour.
During roughing, the cycle reduces the programmed infeed depth D if necessary so that it
is possible for cuts of an equal size to be made. For example, if the overall infeed depth is
10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1.
The cycle would reduce the infeed depth to 2.5 to create 4 equally sized cuts.
The angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge determines whether the tool
rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the infeed depth D, in order to remove
residual corners, or is raised immediately. The angle beyond which rounding is performed
is stored in a machine data element.

Turning
292 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised by the safety distance
or a value specified in the machine data at rapid traverse. The cycle always observes the
lower value; otherwise, stock removal at inner contours, for example, could cause the
contour to be damaged.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

● Finishing
Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing. The cycle automatically selects
and deselects tool radius compensation during finishing.

Approach/retraction
1. The tool first moves at rapid traverse to the starting point of the machining operation
calculated internally in the cycle (reference point + safety distance).
2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse.
3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate.
4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at rapid traverse (see
"Roughing").
5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next infeed depth.
6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate.
7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached.
8. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Stock removal" softkey.

The "Stock Removal" input window opens.
4. Select one of the three stock removal cycles via the softkeys:
Simple straight stock removal cycle.
The "Stock removal 1" input window opens.
- OR

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 293
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Straight stock removal cycle with radii or chamfers.

The "Stock removal 2" input window opens.
- OR
Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii, or chamfers.
The "Stock Removal 3" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)

Position Machining position:

Machining Stock removal direction (transverse or longitudinal) in the coordinate system

direction Parallel to the Z axis (longitudinal) Parallel to the X axis (transverse)
External Internal External internal

X0 Reference point in X ∅ (abs, always diameter) mm

Z0 Reference point in Z (abs) mm
X1 End point X (abs) or end point X in relation to X0 (inc)
Z1 End point Z (abs) or end point Z in relation to Z0 (inc)
D Maximum depth infeed – (not for finishing) mm

Turning
294 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

UX Finishing allowance in X – (not for finishing) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (not for finishing) mm
FS1...FS3 or R1...R3 Chamfer width (FS1...FS3) or rounding radius (R1...R3) - (not for mm
stock removal 1)
Parameter selection of intermediate point
The intermediate point can be determined through position specification or angle.
The following combinations are possible - (not for stock removal 1 and 2)
 XM ZM
 XM α1
 XM α2
 α1 ZM
 α2 ZM
 α1 α2
XM Intermediate point X ∅ (abs) or intermediate point X in relation to X0 (inc) mm
ZM Intermediate point Z (abs or inc) mm
α1 Angle of the 1st edge Degrees
α2 Angle of the 2nd edge Degrees

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.2.3 Groove (CYCLE930)

Function
You can use the "Groove" cycle to manufacture symmetrical and asymmetrical grooves on
any straight contour elements.
You can machine outer or inner grooves in the longitudinal or transverse directions. Use the
"Groove width" and "Groove depth" parameters to determine the shape of the groove. If a
groove is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by a
maximum of 80% of the tool width for each groove.
You can specify a finishing allowance for the groove base and the flanks; roughing is then
performed down to this point.
The dwell time between recessing and retraction is stored in a setting data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 295
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Approach/retraction during roughing

Infeed depth D > 0
1. The tool first moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse.
2. The tool cuts a groove in the center of infeed depth D.
3. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance with rapid traverse.
4. The tool cuts a groove next to the first groove with infeed depth 2 · D.
5. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance with rapid traverse.
6. The tool cuts alternating in the first and second groove with the infeed depth 2 · D, until
the final depth T1 is reached.
Between the individual grooves, the tool moves back by D + safety clearance with rapid
traverse. After the last groove, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety
distance.
7. All subsequent groove cuts are made alternating and directly down to the final depth T1.
Between the individual grooves, the tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid
traverse.

Approach/retraction during finishing

1. The tool first moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse.
2. The tool moves at the machining feedrate down one flank and then along the bottom to
the center.
3. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
4. The tool moves at the machining feedrate along the other flank and then along the bottom
to the center.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Groove" softkey.

The "Groove" input window opens.
4. Select one of the three groove cycles with the softkey:
Simple groove cycle
The "Groove 1" input window opens.
- OR
Groove cycle with inclines, radii, or chamfers.
The "Groove 2" input window opens.

Turning
296 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

- OR
Groove cycle on an incline with inclines, radii or chamfers.
The "Groove 3" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Position Groove position:

X0 Reference point in X ∅ mm
Z0 Reference point in Z mm
B1 Groove width mm
T1 Groove depth ∅ (abs) or groove depth referred to X0 or Z0 (inc) mm
D  Maximum depth infeed for insertion – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
 For zero: Insertion in a cut – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇)
D = 0: 1. cut is made directly to final depth T1
D > 0: 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D, in order to achieve
a better chip flow and prevent the tool from breaking, refer to
approaching/retraction when roughing.
Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the groove base at one
position.
UX or U Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇ and ∇ + mm
∇∇∇)
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (for UX, only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
N Number of grooves (N = 1....65535)
DP Distance between grooves (inc) mm
DP is not displayed when N = 1

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 297
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

α1, α2 Flank angle 1 or flank angle 2 - (only for grooves 2 and 3) Degrees
Asymmetric grooves can be described by separate angles. The angles can be
between 0 and < 90°.
FS1...FS4 or R1...R4 Chamfer width (FS1...FS4) or rounding radius (R1...R4) - (only for grooves 2 and mm
3)
α0 Angle of the incline – (only for groove 3) Degrees

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.2.4 Undercut form E and F (CYCLE940)

Function
You can use the "Undercut form E" or "Undercut form F" cycle to turn form E or F undercuts
in accordance with DIN 509.

Approach/retraction
1. The tool first moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse.
2. The undercut is made in one cut at the machining feedrate, starting from the flank
through to the cross-feed VX.
3. The tool moves back to the starting point at rapid traverse.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Undercut" softkey.

The "Undercut" input window opens.
4. Select one of the following undercut cycles via the softkeys:
Press the "Undercut form E" softkey.
The "Undercut form E (DIN 509)" input window opens.
- OR
Press the "Undercut form F" softkey.
The "Undercut form F (DIN 509)" input window opens.

Turning
298 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameters, G code program (undercut, form E) Parameters, ShopTurn program (undercut, form E)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Position Form E machining position:

Undercut size according to DIN table:

E.g.: E1.0 x 0.4 (undercut form E)
X0 Reference point X ∅ mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
X1 Allowance in X ∅ (abs) or allowance in X (inc) mm

VX Cross feed ∅ (abs) or cross feed (inc) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Parameters, G code program (undercut, form F) Parameters, ShopTurn program (undercut, form F)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 299
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

Position Form F machining position:

Undercut size according to DIN table:

e.g.: F0.6 x 0.3 (undercut form F)
X0 Reference point X ∅ mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
X1 Allowance in X ∅ (abs) or allowance in X (inc) mm
Z1 Allowance in Z (abs) or allowance in Z (inc) – (for undercut form F only) mm
VX Cross feed ∅ (abs) or cross feed (inc) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.2.5 Thread undercuts (CYCLE940)

Function
You can use the "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" cycle to program thread
undercuts to DIN 76 for workpieces with a metric ISO thread, or freely definable thread
undercuts.

Approach/retraction
1. The tool first moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse.
2. The first cut is made at the machining feedrate, starting from the flank and traveling along
the shape of the thread undercut as far as the safety distance.
3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished.
5. The tool moves back to the starting point at rapid traverse.
During finishing, the tool travels as far as cross-feed VX.

Turning
300 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Undercut" softkey.

4. Press the "Thread undercut DIN" softkey.

The "Thread Undercut (DIN 76)" input window opens.
- OR -
Press the "Thread undercut" softkey.
The "Thread Undercut" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

(undercut, thread DIN) (undercut, thread DIN)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Position Machining position:

Machining  Longitudinal
direction
 Parallel to the contour
Form  Normal (form A)
 Short (form B)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 301
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

P Thread pitch (select from the preset DIN table or enter) mm/rev
X0 Reference point X ∅ mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
α Insertion angle Degrees
VX Cross feed ∅ (abs) or cross feed (inc) - (only for ∇∇∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
D Maximum depth infeed – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
U or UX Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇ and ∇ + mm
∇∇∇)
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for UX, ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Parameters, G code program (undercut, thread) Parameters, ShopTurn program (undercut, thread)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Machining  Longitudinal
direction
 Parallel to the contour
Position Machining position:

X0 Reference point X ∅ mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
X1 Undercut depth referred to X ∅ (abs) or undercut depth referred to X (inc) mm
Z1 Allowance Z (abs or inc) mm
R1 Rounding radius 1 mm
R2 Rounding radius 2 mm

Turning
302 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

α Insertion angle Degrees
VX Cross feed ∅ (abs) or cross feed (inc) - (only for ∇∇∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇)
D Maximum depth infeed – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
U or UX Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇ and ∇ + mm
∇∇∇)
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for UZ, ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.2.6 Thread turning (CYCLE99)

Function
You can use the "Longitudinal thread", "Tapered thread" or "Face thread" cycle to turn
external or internal threads with a constant or variable pitch.
There may be single or multiple threads.
For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev), the cycle assigns a value (calculated on the
basis of the thread pitch) to the thread depth H1 parameter. You can change this value.
The default must be activated via setting data SD 55212
$SCS_FUNCTION_MASK_TECH_SET.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position measuring system.

Interruption of thread cutting

You have the option to interrupt thread cutting (for example if the cutting tool is broken).
1. Press the <CYCLE STOP> key.
The tool is retracted from the thread and the spindle is stopped.
2. Replace the tool and press the <CYCLE START> key.
The aborted thread cutting is started again with the interrupted cut at the same depth.

Thread re-machining
You have the option of subsequently machining threads. To do this, change into the "JOG"
operating mode and carry out a thread synchronization.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 303
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

See also
Setting data for cycles (Page 193)
Thread synchronizing (Page 106)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse.
2. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position displaced by the thread
advance LW.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the starting position displaced by the thread run-in
LW2.
3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-out LR.
4. Thread with advance:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance VR and then to the next starting
position.
Thread with run-in:
The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance VR and then back to the starting
position.
5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished.
6. The tool moves back to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.
Thread machining can be stopped at any time with the "Rapid lift" function. It ensures that
the tool does not damage the thread when it is raised.

Procedure for longitudinal thread, tapered thread, or face thread

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Thread" softkey.

The "Thread" input window opens.
4. Press the "Longitudinal thread" softkey.
The "Longitudinal Thread" input window opens.
- OR -
Press the "Tapered thread" softkey.
The "Tapered Thread" input window opens.

Turning
304 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

- OR -
Press the "Face thread" softkey.
The "Face Thread" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program (thread, longitudinal) Parameters, ShopTurn program (thread, longitudinal)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Table Thread table selection:
 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
Selection - (not for Data, table value, e.g. M10, M12, M14, ...
table "Without")
P Select the thread pitch / turns for table "without" or specify the thread pitch/turns mm/rev
corresponding to the selection in the thread table: in/rev
turns/"
 Thread pitch in mm/revolution
MODULUS
 Thread pitch in inch/revolution
 Thread turns per inch
 Thread pitch in MODULUS
G Change in thread pitch per revolution - (only for P = mm/rev or in/rev) mm/rev2
G = 0: The thread pitch P does not change.
G > 0: The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution.
G < 0: The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution.
If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be
programmed can be calculated as follows:
|Pe2 - P2 |
G = ----------------- [mm/rev2]
2 * Z1
The meanings are as follows:
Pe: End pitch of thread [mm/rev]
P: Start pitch of thread [mm/rev]
Z1: Thread length [mm]
A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the thread turns on the
workpiece.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 305
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Infeed (only for ∇ and ∇  Linear:
+ ∇∇∇)
Infeed with constant cutting depth
 Degressive:

Infeed with constant cutting cross-section

Thread  Internal thread
 External thread

X0 Reference point X from thread table ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point Z (abs) mm
Z1 End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) mm
Incremental dimensions: The sign is also evaluated.
LW Thread advance (inc) mm
The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) brought forward by
the thread advance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the
individual cuts slightly earlier in order to also produce a precise start of thread.
or Thread run-in (inc)
LW2 The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side and mm
instead have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc)
or
LW2 = LR mm

LR Thread run-out (inc) mm

The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end
of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
H1 Thread depth from thread table (inc) mm
DP Infeed slope as flank (inc) – (alternative to infeed slope as angle) mm
DP > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
DP < 0: Infeed along the front flank
or
Infeed slope as angle – (alternative to infeed slope as flank) Degrees
αP
α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
α < 0: Infeed along the front flank
α = 0: Infeed at right angle to cutting direction
If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the maximum absolute value of this
parameter may be half the flank angle of the tool.
Infeed along the flank
Infeed with alternating flanks (alternative)
Instead of infeed along one flank, you can infeed along alternating flanks to avoid
always loading the same tool cutting edge. This means that you can increase the
tool life.
α > 0: Start at the rear flank
α < 0: Start at the front flank

Turning
306 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

D1 or ND First infeed depth or number of roughing cuts mm
(only for ∇ and The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of
∇ + ∇∇∇) roughing cuts and the first infeed.
U Finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
NN Number of noncuts - (only for ∇∇∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇)
VR Return distance (inc) mm
Multiple threads No
α0 Starting angle offset Degrees
Yes
N Number of thread turns
The thread turns are distributed evenly across the periphery of the
turned part; the 1st thread turn is always located at 0°.
DA Thread changeover depth (inc) mm
First machine all thread turns sequentially to thread changeover
depth DA, then machine all thread turns sequentially to depth 2 ·
DA, etc. until the final depth is reached.
DA = 0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e.
finish machining each thread before starting the next thread.
Machining:  Complete, or
 from turn N1

N1 (1...4) start thread N1 = 1...N or

 only thread NX

NX (1...4) 1 from N threads

Parameters, G code program (thread, conical) Parameters, ShopTurn program (thread, conical)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 307
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

P  Thread pitch in mm/revolution mm/rev
in/rev
 Thread pitch in inch/revolution
turns/"
 Thread turns per inch MODULUS
 Thread pitch in MODULUS
G Change in thread pitch per revolution - (only for P = mm/rev or in/rev) mm/rev2
G = 0: The thread pitch P does not change.
G > 0: The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution.
G < 0: The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution.
If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be
programmed can be calculated as follows:
|Pe2 - P2 |
G = ----------------- [mm/rev2]
2 * Z1
The meanings are as follows:
Pe: End pitch of thread [mm/rev]
P: Start pitch of thread [mm/rev]
Z1: Thread length [mm]
A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the thread turns on the
workpiece.
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Infeed (only for ∇ and ∇  Linear:
+ ∇∇∇)
Infeed with constant cutting depth
 Degressive:

Infeed with constant cutting cross-section

Thread  Internal thread
 External thread

X0 Reference point X ∅ (abs, always diameter) mm

Z0 Reference point Z (abs) mm
X1 or End point X ∅ (abs) or end point in relation to X0 (inc) or mm or
X1α Thread taper degrees
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.

Z1 End point Z (abs) or end point in relation to Z0 (inc) mm

Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.

Turning
308 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

LW Thread advance (inc) mm
The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) brought forward by
the thread advance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the
individual cuts slightly earlier in order to also produce a precise start of thread.
or Thread run-in (inc)
LW2 The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side and mm
instead have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc)
or
LW2 = LR mm

LR Thread run-out (inc) mm

The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end
of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
H1 Thread depth (inc) mm
DP Infeed slope as flank (inc) – (alternative to infeed slope as angle) mm
DP > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
DP < 0: Infeed along the front flank
or
Infeed slope as angle – (alternative to infeed slope as flank) Degrees
αP
α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
α < 0: Infeed along the front flank
α = 0: Infeed at right angle to cutting direction
If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the maximum absolute value of this
parameter may be half the flank angle of the tool.
Infeed along the flank
Infeed with alternating flanks (alternative)
Instead of infeed along one flank, you can infeed along alternating flanks to avoid
always loading the same tool cutting edge. This means that you can increase the
tool life.
α > 0: Start at the rear flank
α < 0: Start at the front flank
D1 or ND First infeed depth or number of roughing cuts mm
(only for ∇ and The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of
∇ + ∇∇∇) roughing cuts and the first infeed.
U Finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
NN Number of noncuts - (only for ∇∇∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇)
VR Return distance (inc) mm
Multiple threads No
α0 Starting angle offset Degrees
Yes
N Number of thread turns
The thread turns are distributed evenly across the periphery of
the turned part; the 1st thread turn is always located at 0°.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 309
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

DA Thread changeover depth (inc) mm
First machine all thread turns sequentially to thread changeover
depth DA, then machine all thread turns sequentially to depth 2 ·
DA, etc. until the final depth is reached.
DA = 0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e.
finish machining each thread before starting the next thread.
Machining:  Complete, or
 from turn N1

N1 (1...4) start thread N1 = 1...N or

 only thread NX

NX (1...4) 1 from N threads

Parameters, G code program (thread, face) Parameters, ShopTurn program (thread, face)
PL Machining plane T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

P  Thread pitch in mm/revolution mm/rev
in/rev
 Thread pitch in inch/revolution
turns/"
 Thread turns per inch MODULUS
 Thread pitch in MODULUS
G Change in thread pitch per revolution - (only for P = mm/rev or in/rev) mm/rev2
G = 0: The thread pitch P does not change.
G > 0: The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution.
G < 0: The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution.
If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be
programmed can be calculated as follows:
|Pe2 - P2 |
G = ----------------- [mm/rev2]
2 * Z1
The meanings are as follows:
Pe: End pitch of thread [mm/rev]
P: Start pitch of thread [mm/rev]
Z1: Thread length [mm]
A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the thread turns on the
workpiece.

Turning
310 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Infeed (only for ∇ and ∇  Linear:
+ ∇∇∇)
Infeed with constant cutting depth
 Degressive:

Infeed with constant cutting cross-section

Thread  Internal thread
 External thread
X0 Reference point X ∅ (abs, always diameter) mm
Z0 Reference point Z (abs) mm
X1 End point of the thread ∅ (abs) or thread length (inc) mm
Incremental dimensions: The sign is also evaluated.
LW Thread advance (inc) mm
The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) brought forward by
the thread advance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the
individual cuts slightly earlier in order to also produce a precise start of thread.
or Thread run-in (inc)
LW2 The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side and mm
instead have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc)
or
LW2 = LR mm

LR Thread run-out (inc) mm

The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end
of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).
H1 Thread depth (inc) mm
DP Infeed slope as flank (inc) – (alternative to infeed slope as angle)
DP > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
DP < 0: Infeed along the front flank
or
Infeed slope as angle – (alternative to infeed slope as flank) Degrees
αP
α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank
α < 0: Infeed along the front flank
α = 0: Infeed at right angle to cutting direction
If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the maximum absolute value of this
parameter may be half the flank angle of the tool.
Infeed along the flank
Infeed with alternating flanks (alternative)
Instead of infeed along one flank, you can infeed along alternating flanks to avoid
always loading the same tool cutting edge. This means that you can increase the
tool life.
α > 0: Start at the rear flank
α < 0: Start at the front flank

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 311
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

D1 or ND First infeed depth or number of roughing cuts mm
(only for ∇ and The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of
∇ + ∇∇∇) roughing cuts and the first infeed.
U Finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
NN Number of noncuts - (only for ∇∇∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇)
VR Return distance (inc) mm
Multiple threads No
α0 Starting angle offset Degrees
Yes
N Number of thread turns
The thread turns are distributed evenly across the periphery of the
turned part; the 1st thread turn is always located at 0°.
DA Thread changeover depth (inc) mm
First machine all thread turns sequentially to thread changeover
depth DA, then machine all thread turns sequentially to depth 2 ·
DA, etc. until the final depth is reached.
DA = 0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e.
finish machining each thread before starting the next thread.
Machining:  Complete, or
 from turn N1

N1 (1...4) start thread N1 = 1...N or

 only thread NX

NX (1...4) 1 from N threads

8.2.7 Thread chain (CYCLE98)

Function
With this cycle, you can produce several concatenated cylindrical or tapered threads with a
constant pitch in longitudinal and face machining, all of which can have different thread
pitches.
There may be single or multiple threads. With multiple threads, the individual thread turns
are machined one after the other.
You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle rotation and the feed
direction.
The infeed is performed automatically with a constant infeed depth or constant cutting cross-
section.

Turning
312 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

● With a constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases from cut to cut. The
finishing allowance is machined in one cut after roughing.
A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at small thread depths.
● With a constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure remains constant over all
roughing cuts and the infeed depth is reduced.
The feedrate override has no effect during traversing blocks with thread. The spindle
override must not be changed during the thread machining.

Interruption of thread cutting

You have the option to interrupt thread cutting (for example if the cutting tool is broken).
1. Press the <CYCLE STOP> key.
The tool is retracted from the thread and the spindle is stopped.
2. Replace the tool and press the <CYCLE START> key.
The aborted thread cutting is started again with the interrupted cut at the same depth.

Approach/retraction
1. Approach of the starting point determined in the cycle at the beginning of the run-in path
for the first thread with G0
2. Infeed for roughing according to the defined infeed type.
3. Thread cutting is repeated according to the programmed number of roughing cuts.
4. The finishing allowance is removed in the following step with G33.
5. This cut is repeated according to the number of noncuts.
6. The whole sequence of motions is repeated for each further thread.

Procedure for thread chain

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Thread" softkey.

The "Thread" input window opens.
4. Press the "Thread chain" softkey.
The "Thread Chain" input window opens.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 313
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇ + ∇∇∇ (roughing and finishing)
Infeed (only for ∇ and ∇  Linear:
+ ∇∇∇)
Constant cutting depth infeed
 Degressive:

Constant cutting cross-section infeed

Thread  Internal thread
 External thread

X0 Reference point X ∅ (abs, always diameter) mm

Z0 Reference point Z (abs) mm
P0 Thread pitch 1 mm/rev
in/rev
turns/"
MODULUS
X1 or X1α  Intermediate point 1 X ∅ (abs) or mm
 Intermediate point 1 in relation to X0 (inc) or
Degrees
 Thread taper 1
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Z1  Intermediate point 1 Z (abs) or mm
 Intermediate point 1 in relation to Z0 (inc)
P1 Thread pitch 2 (unit as parameterized for P0) mm/rev
in/rev
turns/"
MODULUS
X2 or X2α  Intermediate point 2 X ∅ (abs) or mm
 Intermediate point 2 in relation to X1 (inc) or
Degrees
 Thread taper 2
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Z2  Intermediate point 2 Z (abs) or mm
 Intermediate point 2 in relation to Z1 (inc)

Turning
314 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameter Description Unit

P2 Thread pitch 3 (unit as parameterized for P0) mm/rev
in/rev
turns/"
MODULUS
X3  End point X ∅ (abs) or mm
 End point 3 in relation to X2 (inc) or
Degrees
 Thread taper 3
Z3  End point Z ∅ (abs) or mm
 End point with reference to Z2 (inc)
LW Thread run-in mm
LR Thread run-out mm
H1 Thread depth mm
DP or αP Infeed slope (flank) or infeed slope (angle) mm or
degrees
 Infeed along a flank
 Infeed with alternating flanks

D1 or ND First infeed depth or number of roughing cuts - (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
U Finishing allowance in X and Z - (only for ∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇) mm
NN Number of noncuts - (only for ∇∇∇ and ∇ + ∇∇∇)
VR Return distance mm
Multiple threads No
α0 Starting angle offset Degrees
Yes
N Number of thread turns
DA Thread changeover depth (inc) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 315
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

8.2.8 Cut-off (CYCLE92)

Function
The "Cut-off" cycle is used when you want to cut off dynamically balanced parts (e.g. screws,
bolts, or pipes).
You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined part. You can machine
at a constant cutting rate V or speed S up to a depth X1, from which point the workpiece is
machined at a constant speed. As of depth X1, you can also program a reduced feedrate FR
or a reduced speed SR, in order to adapt the velocity to the smaller diameter.
Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with the cut-off. With pipes,
for example, you do not need to cut-off until you reach the center; cutting off slightly more
than the wall thickness of the pipe is sufficient.

Approach/retraction
1. The tool first moves to the starting point calculated internally in the cycle at rapid traverse.
2. The chamfer or radius is machined at the machining feedrate.
3. Cut-off down to depth X1 is performed at the machining feedrate.
4. Cut-off is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and reduced speed SR.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.
If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a workpiece drawer (part
catcher) to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the workpiece drawer must be enabled
in a machine data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Cut-off” softkey.

The "Cut-off" input window opens.

Turning
316 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.2 Rotate

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
SC Safety clearance mm D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate * F Feedrate mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

DIR Direction of spindle rotation
(only for G code)

S Spindle speed rev/min

V Constant cutting rate m/min
SV Maximum speed limit - (only for constant cutting rate V) rev/min
X0 Reference point in X ∅ (abs, always diameter) mm
Z0 Reference point in Z (abs) mm
FS or R Chamfer width or rounding radius mm
X1 Depth for speed reduction ∅ (abs) or depth for speed reduction in relation to X0 mm
(inc)
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
(only for ShopTurn)
FR *
(only for G code)
SR Reduced speed rev/min
X2 Final depth ∅ (abs) or final depth in relation to X1 (inc) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 317
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3 Contour turning

8.3.1 General information

Function
You can machine simple or complex contours with the "Contour turning" cycle. A contour
comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in
a defined contour.
You can program chamfers, radii, undercuts or tangential transitions between the contour
elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the individual contour
elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter
incompletely dimensioned elements.
When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank contour which must be
entered before the finished-part contour. You then choose one of the following machining
technologies:
● Stock removal
● Grooving
● Plunge-turning
You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the three technologies above.

Programming
For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as follows:

Note
When programming in G code, it must be ensured that the contours are located after the end
of program identifier!

1. Enter the unmachined-part contour

If, when removing stock along the contour, you want to take into account an unmachined
part contour (and no cylinder or no allowance) as unmachined part shape, then you must
define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the finished-part contour.
Compile the unmachined-part contour step-by-step from various contour elements.
2. Enter finished-part contour
You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of different contour
elements.
3. Contour call - only for G code program

Turning
318 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

4. Stock removal along the contour (roughing)

The contour is machined longitudinally, transversely or parallel to the contour.
5. Remove residual material (roughing)
When removing stock along the contour, ShopTurn automatically detects residual
material that has been left. For G code programming, when removing stock, it must first
be decided whether to machine with residual material detection - or not. A suitable tool
will allow you to remove this without having to machine the contour again.
6. Stock removal along the contour (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

8.3.2 Representation of the contour

G code program
In the editor, the contour is represented in a program section using individual program
blocks. If you open an individual block, then the contour is opened.

ShopTurn program
The cycle represents a contour as a program block in the program. If you open this block,
the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation
The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent to the graphics
window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Symbol Meaning

Starting point Starting point of the contour

Straight line up Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line down Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line left Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line right Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line in any direction Straight line with any gradient

Arc right Circle

Arc left Circle

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 319
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Contour element Symbol Meaning

Pole Straight diagonal or circle in
polar coordinates
Finish contour END End of contour definition

The different colors of the symbols indicate their status:

Foreground Background Meaning

Black Blue Cursor on active element
Black Orange Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated
when it is selected with the
cursor)

Graphic display
The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour
elements are being entered.
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and
colors:
● Black: Programmed contour
● Orange: Current contour element
● Green dashed: Alternative element
● Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete
contour.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.

Turning
320 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3.3 Creating a new contour

Function
For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.
The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point. Enter the contour element.
The contour processor then automatically defines the end of the contour.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Contour" and "New contour" softkeys.

The "New Contour" input window opens.

4. Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The input window for the starting point of the contour appears.
Enter the individual contour elements (see Section "Creating contour
elements").

Parameter Description Unit

Z Starting point Z (abs) mm
X Starting point X ∅ (abs) mm
Transition to Type of transition
contour start
 Radius
 Chamfer
FS=0 or R=0: No transition element
R Transition to following element – radius mm
FS Transition to following element – chamfer mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 321
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

Direction in front Direction of the contour element towards the starting point:
of the contour

 In the negative direction of the horizontal axis

 In the positive direction of the horizontal axis

 In the negative direction of the vertical axis

 In the positive direction of the vertical axis

Additional You can enter additional commands in the form of G code for each contour element.
commands You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended
parameter screens ("All parameters" softkey). The softkey is always available at the
starting point, it only has to be pressed when entering additional contour elements.
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code
commands. However, carefully ensure that the additional commands do not collide with
the generated G code of the contour and are compatible with the machining type
required. Therefore, do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no
coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a
separate block.
The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result, contour transitions
such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.
If you wish to avoid this, then it is possible to use additional commands when
programming.
Example: For a contour, first program the straight X parallel and then enter "G9" (non-
modal exact stop) for the additional command parameter. Then program the Z-parallel
straight line. The corner will be machined exactly, as the feedrate at the end of the X-
parallel straight line is briefly zero.
Note:
The additional commands are only effective for finishing!

Turning
322 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3.4 Creating contour elements

Creating contour elements

After you have created a new contour and specified the starting point, you can define the
individual elements that make up the contour.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a contour:
● Straight vertical line
● Straight horizontal line
● Diagonal line
● Circle/arc
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate parameter screen. Parameter
entry is supported by various help screens that explain the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, the cycle assumes that the values are unknown and
attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a
contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing the cycle to calculate as
many parameters as possible.

Contour transition elements

As transition element between two contour elements, you can select a radius or a chamfer
or, in the case of linear contour elements, an undercut. The transition element is always
attached at the end of a contour element. The contour transition element is selected in the
parameter screen of the respective contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two
successive elements which can be calculated from the input values. Otherwise you must use
the straight/circle contour elements.

Additional commands
You can enter additional commands in the form of G code for each contour element. You
can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameter screens
("All parameters" softkey).
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code
commands. However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the
generated G code of the contour. Therefore, do not use any G code commands of group 1
(G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be
programmed in a separate block.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 323
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Additional functions
The following additional functions are available for programming a contour:
● Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as tangent.
● Selecting a dialog box
If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the
options must be selected.
● Close contour
From the actual position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.

Producing exact contour transitions

The axis moves in the continuous path mode (G64). As a result, contour transitions such as
corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.
If you wish to avoid this, there are two different options when programming. Use the
additional programs or program the special feedrate for the transition element.
● Additional command
For a contour, first program the vertical straight line and then enter "G9" (non-modal exact
stop) for the additional command parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line. The
corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end of the vertical straight line is
briefly zero.
● Feedrate, transition element
If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition element, enter a reduced feedrate
in the "FRC" parameter. The slower machining rate means that the transition element is
machined more accurately.

Procedure for entering contour elements

1. The part program is opened. Position the cursor at the required input
position, this is generally at the physical end of the program after M02
or M30.
2. Contour input using contour support:
2.1 Press the "Contour turning", "Contour" and "New contour" softkeys.

2.2 In the opened input window, enter a name for the contour, e.g.
contour_1.
Press the "Accept" softkey.

Turning
324 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

2.3 The input screen to enter the contour opens, in which you initially enter
a starting point for the contour. This is marked in the lefthand navigation
bar using the "+" symbol.
Press the "Accept" softkey.
3. Enter the individual contour elements of the machining direction.
Select a contour element via softkey.
The "Straight line (e.g. Z)" input window opens.

- OR
The "Straight line (e.g. X)" input window opens.

- OR
The "Straight line (e.g. ZX)" input window opens.

- OR
The "Circle" input window opens.

4. Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input
screen (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next
element, angle of lead, etc.).
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The contour element is added to the contour.
6. When entering data for a contour element, you can program the
transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey. The "tangential" selection
appears in the parameter α2 entry field.
7. Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
8. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The programmed contour is transferred into the process plan (program
view).
9. If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 325
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Contour element "Straight line e.g. Z"

Parameters Description Unit

Z End point Z (abs or inc) mm
α1 Starting angle to Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Undercut
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Undercut Form E Undercut size
e.g. E1.0x0.4
Form F Undercut size
e.g. F0.6x0.3
DIN thread P Thread pitch mm/rev
α Insertion angle Degrees
Thread Z1 Length Z1 mm
Z2 Length Z2 mm
R1 Radius R1 mm
R2 Radius R2 mm
T Insertion depth mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
CA Grinding allowance mm
 Grinding allowance to right of contour
 Grinding allowance to left of contour
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "Straight line e.g. X"

Parameters Description Unit

X End point X ∅ (abs) or end point X (inc) mm
α1 Starting angle to Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Undercut
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Undercut Form E Undercut size
e.g. E1.0x0.4
Form F Undercut size
e.g. F0.6x0.3

Turning
326 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameters Description Unit

DIN thread P Thread pitch mm/rev
α Insertion angle Degrees
Thread Z1 Length Z1 mm
Z2 Length Z2 mm
R1 Radius R1 mm
R2 Radius R2 mm
T Insertion depth mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
CA Grinding allowance mm
 Grinding allowance to right of contour
 Grinding allowance to left of contour
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "Straight line e.g. ZX"

Parameters Description Unit

Z End point Z (abs or inc) mm
X End point X ∅ (abs) or end point X (inc) mm
α1 Starting angle to Z axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
CA Grinding allowance mm
 Grinding allowance to right of contour
 Grinding allowance to left of contour
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "Circle"

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of rotation  Clockwise direction of rotation

 Counterclockwise direction of rotation

Z End point Z (abs or inc) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 327
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameters Description Unit

X End point X ∅ (abs) or end point X (inc) mm
K Circle center point K (abs or inc) mm
I Circle center point I ∅ (abs or circle center point I (inc) mm
α1 Starting angle to Z axis Degrees
β1 End angle to Z axis Degrees
β2 Opening angle Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
CA Grinding allowance mm
 Grinding allowance to right of contour
 Grinding allowance to left of contour
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "End"

The data for the transition at the contour end of the previous contour element is displayed in
the "End" parameter screen.
The values cannot be edited.

8.3.5 Entering the master dimension

If you would like to finish your workpiece to an exact fit, you can input the master dimension
directly into the parameter screen form during programming.
Specify the master dimension as follows:
F<Diameter/Length> <Tolerance class> <Tolerance quality>
"F" identifies that a master dimension follows, i.e. in this case, a hole.
Example: F20h7
Possible tolerance classes:
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, T, U, V, X, Y, Z
Upper-case characters: Holes
Lower case letters: Shafts
Possible tolerance qualities:
1 to 18, if they are not restricted by DIN standard 7150.

Turning
328 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Fit calculator
A fit calculator supports you when making entries.

Procedure

1. Position the cursor on the desired entry field.

2. Press the <=> key.
The calculator is displayed.

3. Press the "Fit shaft" or "Fit hole" softkey.

"F" (for hole) or "f" (for shaft) is automatically inserted in front of the
entry fields for diameter or length data, tolerance class and tolerance
quality.

4. Enter the diameter or length value in the first field.

5. In the second field, select the tolerance class and in the third field, enter
the tolerance quality.
6. Press the equals symbol on the calculator.

- OR -
Press the "Calculate" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <INPUT> key.

The new value is calculated and displayed in the entry field of the
calculator.
Press the "Accept" softkey.
The calculated value is accepted and displayed in the entry field of the
window.

Rejecting entries
Press the "Delete" softkey to reject your entries.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 329
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3.6 Changing the contour

Function
You can change a previously created contour later.
Individual contour elements can be
● added,
● changed,
● inserted or
● deleted.

Procedure for changing a contour element

1. Open the part program or ShopTurn program to be executed.

2. With the cursor, select the program block where you want to change the
contour. Open the geometry processor.
The individual contour elements are listed.
3. Position the cursor at the position where a contour element is to be
inserted or changed.
4. Select the desired contour element with the cursor.
5. Enter the parameters in the input screen or delete the element and
select a new element.
6. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The desired contour element is inserted in the contour or changed.

Procedure for deleting a contour element

1. Open the part program or ShopTurn program to be executed.

2. Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.
3. Press the "Delete element" softkey.

4. Press the "Delete" softkey.

Turning
330 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3.7 Contour call (CYCLE62) - only for G code program

Function
The input creates a reference to the selected contour.
There are four ways to call the contour:
1. Contour name
The contour is in the calling main program.
2. Labels
The contour is in the calling main program and is limited by the labels that have been
entered.
3. Subprogram
The contour is located in a subprogram in the same workpiece.
4. Labels in the subprogram
The contour is in a subprogram and is limited by the labels that have been entered.

Procedure

1. The part program to be executed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Contour" and "Contour call" softkeys.

The "Contour Call" input window opens.

4. Assign parameters to the contour selection.

Parameter Description Unit

Contour selection  Contour name
 Labels
 Subprogram
 Labels in the subprogram
Contour name CON: Contour name
Labels  LAB1: Label 1
 LAB2: Label 2

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 331
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

Subprogram PRG: Subprogram
Labels in the  PRG: Subprogram
subprogram
 LAB1: Label 1
 LAB2: Label 2

8.3.8 Stock removal (CYCLE952)

Function
For stock removal, the cycle takes into account a blank that can comprise a cylinder, an
allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour. You must define an
unmachined-part contour as a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part
contour.

Precondition
For a G-code program, at least one CYCLE62 is required before CYCLE952.
If CYCLE62 is only present once, then this involves the finished part contour.
If CYCLE62 is present twice, then the first call is the unmachined part contour and the
second call is the finished-part contour (also see Chapter "Programming").

Rounding the contour

In order to avoid residual corners during roughing, you can enable the "Always round the
contour" function. This will remove the protrusions that are always left at the end with each
cut (due to the cut geometry). The "Round to the previous intersection" setting accelerates
machining of the contour. However, any resulting residual corners will not be recognized or
machined. Thus, it is imperative that you check the behavior before machining using the
simulation.
When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle between the cutting edge
and the contour exceeds a certain value. The angle is set in a machine data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
332 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Alternating cutting depth

Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an alternating cutting depth to
vary the load on the tool edge, As a consequence you can increase the tool life.
The percentage for the alternating cutting depth is saved in a machine data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Cut segmentation
To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to contour edges, you can
align the cut segmentation to the contour edges. During machining the contour is then
divided by the edges into individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately
for each section.

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you
can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour
you have selected. You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.

Feedrate interruption
To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a
feedrate interruption. Parameter DI specifies the distance after which the feedrate
interruption should occur.

Residual material machining / naming conventions

G Code program
For multi-channel systems, cycles attach a "_C" and a two-digit number of the specific
channel to the names of the programs to be generated, e.g. for channel 1 "_C01".
This is the reason that the name of the main program must not end with "_C" and a two-digit
number. This is monitored by the cycles.
For programs with residual machining, when specifying the name for the file, which includes
the updated blank contour, it must be ensured that this does not have the attached
characters ("_C" and double-digit number).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 333
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

For single-channel systems, cycles do not extend the name for the programs to be
generated.

Note
G code programs
For G code programs, the programs to be generated, which do not include any path data,
are saved in the directory in which the main program is located. In this case, it must be
ensured that programs, which already exist in the directory and which have the same name
as the programs to be generated, are overwritten.

See also
General information (Page 318)

Machining type
You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During contour roughing, parallel
cuts of maximum programmed infeed depth are created. Roughing is performed to the
programmed allowance.
You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing operations, which allows
you to either finish several times (positive allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative
allowance). Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Stock removal" softkey.

The "Stock Removal" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number
RP Retraction plane – (only for mm F Feedrate mm/rev
machining direction,
longitudinal, inner)
SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant cutting m/min
rate

F Feedrate *

Turning
334 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

Residual With subsequent residual material removal
material
 Yes
 No

CONR Name to save the updated unmachined-part

contour for residual material removal

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
Machining  Face  From inside to outside
direction
 Longitudinal
 Parallel to the contour
 From outside to inside

 From end face to rear side

 From rear side to end face

The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.
Position  front
 back
 internal
 external
D Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇) mm
DX Maximum depth infeed - (only for parallel to the contour, as an alternative to D) mm
Always round on the contour.
Never round on the contour.
Only round to the previous intersection.

Uniform cut segmentation

Round cut segmentation at the edge

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 335
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

Constant cutting depth
Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation at edge)

DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for position parallel to the contour and UX) mm
UX or U Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for UX) mm
DI For zero: Continuous cut - (only for ∇) mm
BL Blank (unmachined part) description (only for ∇)
 Cylinder (described using XD, ZD)
 Allowance (XD and ZD on the finished part contour)
 Contour (additional CYCLE62 call with blank contour – e.g. cast iron mold)
XD - (only for ∇ machining) mm
- (only for unmachined part description, cylinder and allowance)
 For unmachined part description, cylinder
– Version, absolute:
Cylinder dimension ∅ (abs)
– Version incremental:
Allowance (inc) to maximum values of the CYCLE62 finished part contour
 For unmachined part description, allowance
– Allowance on the CYCLE62 finished part contour (inc)
ZD - (only for ∇ machining) mm
- (only for unmachined part description, cylinder and allowance)
 For unmachined part description, cylinder
– Version, absolute:
Cylinder dimension (abs)
– Version incremental:
Allowance (inc) to maximum values of the CYCLE62 finished part contour
 For unmachined part description, allowance
– Allowance on the CYCLE62 finished part contour (inc)
Allowance Allowance for pre-finishing - (only for ∇∇∇)
 Yes

U1 contour allowance
 No
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (only for allowance) mm
 Positive value: Compensation allowance is kept
 Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance

Turning
336 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

Set machining area Set machining area limits
limits
 Yes
 No
with limited machining area only, yes: mm
XA 1. Limit XA ∅
XB 2. Limit XB ∅ (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA 1. Limit ZA
ZB 2. Limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA (inc)
Relief cuts Machine relief cuts
 Yes
 No
FR Insertion feedrate, relief cuts

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.3.9 Stock removal rest (CYCLE952)

Function
Using the "Stock removal residual" function, you remove material that has remained for stock
removal along the contour.
During stock removal along the contour, the cycle automatically detects any residual material
and generates an updated blank contour. for ShopTurn, the updated unmachined-part
contour is automatically generated. For a C code program, for stock removal residual
material, "Yes" must be programmed. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance
is not residual material. Using the "Stock removal residual material" function, you can
remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

Software option
For stock removal of residual material, you require the option "residual
material detection and machining".

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Stock removal residual material" softkey.

The "Stock removal residual material" input window opens.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 337
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number
RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/rev
SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant cutting rpm
rate m/min

F Feedrate *
CON Name of the updated blank contour for
residual material machining (without the
attached character "_C" and double-
digit number)
Residual With subsequent residual material
material removal
 Yes
 No
CONR Name to save the updated unmachined-
part contour for residual material
removal - (only "Yes" for residual
material removal)

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
Machining  Face  From inside to outside
direction
 Longitudinal  From outside to inside
 Parallel to the contour  From end face to rear side
 From rear side to end face
The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.
Position  front
 back
 internal
 external
D Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇) mm
XDA 1. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
XDB 2. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
DX Maximum depth infeed - (only for parallel to the contour, as an alternative to D) mm
Do not round contour at end of cut.
Always round contour at end of cut.

Uniform cut segmentation

Round cut segmentation at the edge

Turning
338 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

only for align cut segmentation at the edge:
Constant cutting depth
alternating cutting depth
Allowance Allowance for pre-finishing - (only for ∇∇∇) s
 Yes

U1 contour allowance
 No
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (only for allowance) mm
 Positive value: Compensation allowance is kept
 Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
Set machining area Set machining area limits
limits
 Yes
 No
with limited machining area only, yes: mm
XA 1. Limit XA ∅
XB 2. Limit XB ∅ (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA 1. Limit ZA
ZB 2. Limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA (inc)
Relief cuts Machine relief cuts
 Yes
 No
FR Insertion feedrate, relief cuts

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 339
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3.10 Plunge-cutting (CYCLE952)

Function
The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.
Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.
If a groove is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by a
maximum of 80% of the tool width for each groove.

Blank
When grooving, the cycle takes into account a blank that can consist of a cylinder, an
allowance on the finished-part contour or any other blank contour.

Precondition
For a G-code program, at least one CYCLE62 is required before CYCLE952.
If CYCLE62 is only present once, then this involves the finished part contour.
If CYCLE62 is present twice, then the first call is the unmachined part contour and the
second call is the finished-part contour (also see Chapter "Programming").

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you
can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour
you have selected.

Feedrate interruption
To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a
feedrate interruption.

See also
General information (Page 318)

Machining type
You can freely select the machining type (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal".

Turning
340 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Grooving" softkey.

The "Grooving" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number
RP Retraction plane – (only for mm F Feedrate mm/rev
machining direction,
longitudinal, inner)
SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant cutting rpm
rate m/min

F Feedrate *
Residual With subsequent residual material removal
material
 Yes
 No

CONR Name to save the updated unmachined-part

contour for residual material removal - (only
"Yes" for residual material removal)

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
Machining  Face
direction
 Longitudinal

Position  front
 back
 internal
 external
D Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇) mm
XDA 1. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
XDB 2. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
UX or U Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for UX) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 341
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

DI For zero: Continuous cut - (only for ∇) mm
BL Blank (unmachined part) description (only for ∇)
 Cylinder (described using XD, ZD)
 Allowance (XD and ZD on the finished part contour)
 Contour (additional CYCLE62 call with blank contour – e.g. cast iron mold)
XD - (only for ∇ machining) mm
- (only for unmachined part description, cylinder and allowance)
 For unmachined part description, cylinder
– Version, absolute:
Cylinder dimension ∅ (abs)
– Version incremental:
Allowance (inc) to maximum values of the CYCLE62 finished part contour
 For unmachined part description, allowance
– Allowance on the CYCLE62 finished part contour (inc)
ZD - (only for ∇ machining) mm
- (only for unmachined part description, cylinder and allowance)
 For unmachined part description, cylinder
– Version, absolute:
Cylinder dimension (abs)
– Version incremental:
Allowance (inc) to maximum values of the CYCLE62 finished part contour
 For unmachined part description, allowance

Allowance on the CYCLE62 finished part contour (inc)

Allowance Allowance for pre-finishing - (only for ∇∇∇) mm
 Yes

U1 contour allowance
 No
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (only for allowance) mm
 Positive value: Compensation allowance is kept
 Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
Set machining area Set machining area limits
limits
 Yes
 No
with limited machining area only, yes: mm
XA 1. Limit XA ∅
XB 2. Limit XB ∅ (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA 1. Limit ZA
ZB 2. Limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA (inc)

Turning
342 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

N Number of grooves
DP Distance between grooves (inc) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.3.11 Plunge-cutting rest (CYCLE952)

Function
The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material
that remained after grooving along the contour.
During grooving, the cycle automatically detects any residual material and generates an
updated blank contour. For a G code program, the function must have been previously
selected. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The
"Grooving residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable
tool.

Software option
To machine residual material, you require the "Residual material detection
and machining" option.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Grooving residual material" softkey.

The "Grooving residual material" input window is opened.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 343
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

RP Retraction plane – (only for mm F Feedrate mm/rev
longitudinal machining
direction)
SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *
CON Name of the updated blank contour for residual
material machining (without the attached
character "_C" and double-digit number)
Residual With subsequent residual material removal
material
 Yes
 No

CONR Name to save the updated unmachined-part

contour for residual material removal - (only
"Yes" for residual material removal)

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)

Machining  Face
direction
 Longitudinal

Position  front
 back
 internal
 external
D Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇) mm
XDA 1. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
XDB 2. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
UX or U Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for UX) mm
DI For zero: Continuous cut - (only for ∇) mm
Allowance Allowance for pre-finishing - (only for ∇∇∇) mm
 Yes

U1 contour allowance
 No

Turning
344 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (only for allowance) mm
 Positive value: Compensation allowance is kept
 Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
Set machining area Set machining area limits
limits
 Yes
 No
with limited machining area only, yes: mm
XA 1. Limit XA ∅
XB 2. Limit XB ∅ (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA 1. Limit ZA
ZB 2. Limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA (inc)
N Number of grooves
DP Distance between grooves (inc) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.3.12 Plunge-turning (CYCLE952)

Function
Using the "Plunge turning" function, you can machine any shape of groove.
Contrary to grooving, the plunge turning function removes material on the sides after the
groove has been machined in order to reduce machining time. Contrary to stock removal, the
plunge turning function allows you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.
You will need a special tool for plunge turning. Before you program the "Plunge turning"
cycle, you must define the contour.

Blank
For plunge turning, the cycle takes into account a blank that can consist of a cylinder, an
allowance on the finished-part contour or any other blank contour.

Precondition
For a G-code program, at least one CYCLE62 is required before CYCLE952.
If CYCLE62 is only present once, then this involves the finished part contour.
If CYCLE62 is present twice, then the first call is the unmachined part contour and the
second call is the finished-part contour (also see Chapter "Programming (Page 318)").

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 345
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you
can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour
you have selected.

Feedrate interruption
To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a
feedrate interruption.

Machining type
You can freely select the machining type (roughing or finishing).
For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal".

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Plunge turning" softkey.

The "Plunge turning" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number
RP Retraction plane – (only for mm S/V Spindle speed or constant cutting rpm
longitudinal machining rate m/min
direction)
SC Safety clearance mm
Residual With subsequent residual material removal
material
 Yes
 No

CONR Name to save the updated unmachined-part

contour for residual material removal - (only
"Yes" for residual material removal)

Turning
346 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

FX (only ShopTurn) Feedrate in X direction mm/rev
FZ (only ShopTurn) Feedrate in Z direction mm/rev
FX (only G Code) Feedrate in X direction *
FZ (only for G code) Feedrate in Z direction *
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
Machining  Face
direction
 Longitudinal

Position  front
 back
 internal
 external
D Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇) mm
XDA 1. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
XDB 2. Grooving limit tool (abs) – (only for face machining direction) mm
UX or U Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for ∇) mm
DI For zero: Continuous cut - (only for ∇) mm
BL Blank (unmachined part) description (only for ∇)
 Cylinder (described using XD, ZD)
 Allowance (XD and ZD on the finished part contour)
 Contour (additional CYCLE62 call with blank contour – e.g. cast iron mold)
XD - (only for ∇ machining) mm
- (only for unmachined part description, cylinder and allowance)
 For unmachined part description, cylinder
– Version, absolute:
Cylinder dimension ∅ (abs)
– Version incremental:
Allowance (inc) to maximum values of the CYCLE62 finished part contour
 For unmachined part description, allowance

Allowance on the CYCLE62 finished part contour (inc)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 347
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

ZD - (only for ∇ machining) mm
- (only for unmachined part description, cylinder and allowance)
 For unmachined part description, cylinder
– Version, absolute:
Cylinder dimension (abs)
– Version incremental:
Allowance (inc) to maximum values of the CYCLE62 finished part contour
 For unmachined part description, allowance
– Allowance on the CYCLE62 finished part contour (inc)
Allowance Allowance for pre-finishing - (only for ∇∇∇) mm
 Yes

U1 contour allowance
 No
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (only for allowance) mm
 Positive value: Compensation allowance is kept
 Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
Set machining area Set machining area limits
limits
 Yes
 No
with limited machining area only, yes: mm
XA 1. Limit XA ∅
XB 2. Limit XB ∅ (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA 1. Limit ZA
ZB 2. Limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA (inc)
N Number of grooves
DP Distance between grooves mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
348 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

8.3.13 Plunge-turning rest (CYCLE952)

Function
The "Plunge turning residual material" function is used when you want to machine the
material that remained after plunge turning.
For plunge turning, the cycle automatically detects any residual material and generates an
updated blank contour. For a G code program, the function must have been previously
selected in the screen. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual
material. The "Plunge turning residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted
material with a suitable tool.

Software option
To machine residual material, you require the "Residual material detection
and machining" option.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Contour turning" softkey.

3. Press the "Plunge turning residual material" softkey.

The "Plunge turning residual material" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number
RP Retraction plane – (only for mm F Feedrate mm/rev
longitudinal machining
direction)
SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

CON Name of the updated blank contour for residual

material machining (without the attached
character "_C" and double-digit number)
Residual With subsequent residual material removal
material
 Yes
 No

CONR Name to save the updated unmachined-part

contour for residual material removal - (only
"Yes" for residual material removal)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 349
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.3 Contour turning

Parameter Description Unit

FX (only ShopTurn) Feedrate in X direction mm/rev
FZ (only ShopTurn) Feedrate in Z direction mm/rev
FX (only G Code) Feedrate in X direction *
FZ (only for G code) Feedrate in Z direction *
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)

Machining direction  Face

 Longitudinal

Position  front
 back
 internal
 external
D Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇) mm
UX or U Finishing allowance in X or finishing allowance in X and Z – (only for ∇) mm
UZ Finishing allowance in Z – (only for ∇) mm
XDA 1. Grooving limit tool ∅ (abs) – (end face or rear face only) mm
XDB 2. Grooving limit tool ∅ (abs) – (end face or rear face only) mm
Allowance Allowance for prefinishing
 Yes

U1 contour allowance
 No
DI For zero: Continuous cut - (only for ∇) mm
U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (only for allowance) mm
 Positive value: Compensation allowance is kept
 Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing
allowance
Set machining area Set machining area limits
limits
 Yes
 No

with limited machining area only, yes: mm

XA 1. Limit XA ∅
XB 2. Limit XB ∅ (abs) or 2nd limit referred to XA (inc)
ZA 1. Limit ZA
ZB 2. Limit ZB (abs) or 2nd limit referred to ZA (inc)
N Number of grooves
DP Distance between grooves (inc) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
350 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4 Milling

8.4.1 Face milling (CYCLE61)

Function
You can face mill any workpiece with the "Face milling" cycle.
A rectangular surface is always machined. The rectangle is obtained from corner points 1
and 2 - which for a ShopTurn program - are pre-assigned with the values of the blank part
dimensions from the program header.
Workpieces with and without limits can be face-milled.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. For vertical machining, the starting point is always at the top or bottom. For horizontal
machining, it is at the left or right.
The starting point is marked in the help display.
2. Machining is performed from the outside to the inside.

Machining type
The cycle makes a distinction between roughing and finishing:
● Roughing:
Milling the surface
Tool turns above the workpiece edge
● Finishing:
Milling the surface once
Tool turns at safety distance in the X/Y plane
Retraction of milling cutter

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 351
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Depth infeed always takes place outside the workpiece.

For a workpiece with edge breaking, select the rectangular spigot cycle.
In face milling, the effective tool diameter for a tool of type "Milling cutter" is stored in a
machine data item.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Selecting the machining direction

Toggle the machining direction in the "Direction" field until the symbol for the required
machining direction appears.
● Same direction of machining
● Alternating direction of machining

Selecting limits
Press the respective softkey for the required limit.

Left

Top

Bottom

Right

The selected limits are shown in the help screen and in the broken-line graphics.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Face milling" softkey.

The "Face Milling" input window opens.

Turning
352 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Parameter Description Unit

Machining surface  Face Y
 Peripheral surface Y

(only for
ShopTurn)
Clamp/release spindle
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
Direction Same direction of machining


Alternating direction of machining



(only for G code) The positions refer to the reference point:

X0 Corner point 1 in X mm
Y0 Corner point 1 in Y mm
Z0 Height of blank mm
X1 Corner point 2X (abs) or corner point 2X in relation to X0 (inc) mm
Y1 Corner point 2Y (abs) or corner point 2Y in relation to Y0 (inc) mm
Z1 Height of blank (abs) or height of blank in relation to Z0 (inc) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 353
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

(only ShopTurn) Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area - only for face Y Degrees
X0 Corner point 1 in X mm
Y0 Corner point 1 in Y mm
Z0 Height of blank mm
X1 Corner point 2 in X (abs) or corner point 2X in relation to X0 (inc) mm
Y1 Corner point 2 in Y (abs) or corner point 2Y in relation to Y0 (inc) mm
Z1 Height of blank (abs) or height of blank in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
(only ShopTurn) Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining area - (only for peripheral surface Y) Degrees
Y0 Corner point 1 in Y mm
Z0 Corner point 1 in Z mm
X0 Height of blank mm
Y1 Corner point 2 in Y (abs) or corner point 2X in relation to Y0 (inc) mm
Z1 Corner point 2 in Z (abs) or corner point 2Y in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
X1 Height of blank (abs) or height of blank in relation to X0 (inc) mm
DXY Maximum plane infeed mm
Alternately, you can specify the plane infeed in %, as a ratio → plane infeed (mm) to %
milling cutter diameter (mm).
DZ Maximum depth infeed – (for roughing only) mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Note
The same finishing allowance must be entered for both roughing and finishing. The finishing
allowance is used to position the tool for retraction.

Turning
354 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.2 Rectangular pocket (POCKET3)

Function
You can use the "Mill rectangular pocket" cycle to mill any rectangular pockets on the face or
peripheral surface. .
The following machining variants are available:
● Mill rectangular pocket from solid material.
● Pre-drill rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example, the milling cutter does not
cut in the center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks in
succession).
● Machine pre-machined rectangular pocket (see "Solid machining" parameter).

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the center point of the rectangular pocket in rapid traverse at the
height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the chosen strategy.
3. The rectangular pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type from inside
out.
4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Machining type
● Roughing
Roughing involves machining the individual planes of the pocket one after the other from
the center out, until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.
● Finishing
During finishing, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on
the quadrant that joins the corner radius. During the last infeed, the base is finished from
the center out.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 355
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

● Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (base
finishing) is omitted.
● Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the rectangular pocket.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" softkeys.

The "Rectangular Pocket" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Turning
356 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Reference point The following different reference point positions can be selected:
(only for G code)
 (center)
 (bottom left)
 (bottom right)
 (top left)
 (top right)
The reference point (highlighted in blue) is displayed in the Help screen.
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)

Position  At the front (face)

 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
Machining  Single position
position
Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 357
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
W Pocket width mm
L Pocket length mm
R Corner radius mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
Z1 Pocket depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 (inc) – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ or ∇∇∇ edge) mm

DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm

%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
- (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
DZ Maximum depth infeed – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ or ∇∇∇ edge) mm
UXY Plane finishing allowance – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ or ∇∇∇ edge) mm
UZ Depth finishing allowance – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇) mm

Turning
358 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Insertion The following insertion modes can be selected – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ or ∇∇∇ edge):
 Predrilled: (only for G code)

With G0, the pocket center point is approached at the retraction plane level, and
then, from this position, also with G0, the axis travels to the reference point brought
forward by the safety clearance. The machining of the rectangular pocket is then
performed according to the selected insertion strategy, taking into account the
programmed blank dimensions.
 Perpendicular: Insert vertically at center of pocket

The tool executes the calculated actual depth infeed at the pocket center in a single
block. This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the
pocket has been predrilled.
 Helical: Insert along helical path

The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
and depth per revolution (helical path). If the depth for one infeed has been
reached, a full-circle motion is executed to remove the slope caused by insertion.
 Oscillating: Insert with oscillation along center axis of rectangular pocket(only for G
code)

The cutter center point oscillates back and forth along a linear path until it reaches
the depth infeed. When the depth has been reached, the path is traversed again
without depth infeed in order to remove the slope caused by insertion.
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face C/peripheral surface C, if inserted vertically)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
FZ Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) *
(only for G code)
FZ Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) mm/min
mm/tooth

(only for
ShopTurn)
EP Maximum pitch of helix – (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Radius of helix – (for helical insertion only) mm
The radius cannot be any larger than the milling cutter radius; otherwise, material will
remain.
EW Maximum insertion angle – (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees
Solid machining  Complete machining
(for roughing only)
The rectangular pocket is milled from the solid material.
 Remachining

The size of any existing smaller rectangular pocket or hole is increased in several
axes. You must program parameters AZ, W1 and L1 for this purpose.
AZ Depth of premachining – (for remachining only) mm
W1 Width of premachining – (for remachining only) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 359
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

L1 Length of premachining – (for remachining only) mm
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfering only) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.4.3 Circular pocket (POCKET4)

Function
You can use the "Circular pocket" cycle to mill circular pockets on the face or peripheral
surface.
The following machining variants are available:
● Mill circular pocket from solid material.
● Pre-drill circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the milling cutter does not cut in
the center (program the drilling, circular pocket and position program blocks in
succession).
For milling with the "Circular pocket" function two methods are available: the plane-by-plane
method and the helical method.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction during plane-by-plane machining

In plane-by-plane machining of the circular pocket, the material is removed horizontally, one
layer at a time.
1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the
retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method selected.
3. The circular pocket is always machined from inside out using the selected machining
method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Turning
360 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Approach/retraction during helical machining

In helical machining, the material is removed down to pocket depth in a helical movement.
1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the
retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. Infeed to the first machining diameter.
3. The circular pocket is machined to pocket depth using the selected machining method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Machining type: Plane by plane

When milling circular pockets, you can select these methods for the following machining
types:
● Roughing
Roughing involves machining the individual planes of the circular pocket one after the
other from the center out, until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.
● Finishing
During finishing, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on
the quadrant that joins the pocket radius. During the last infeed, the base is finished from
the center out.
● Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (base
finishing) is omitted.

Machining type: Helical

When milling circular pockets, you can select these methods for the following machining
types:
● Roughing
During roughing, the circular pocket is machined downward with helical movements.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual material.
The tool is removed from the edge and base in the quadrant and retracted with rapid
traverse to the safety distance.
This process is repeated layer by layer, from inside out, until the circular pocket has been
completely machined.
● Finishing

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 361
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

During finishing, machining begins at the edge and continues in a helical movement until
the bottom is reached.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual material.
The base is milled from outside in, using a spiral movement.
The tool is retracted with rapid traverse from the center of the pocket to a safety distance.
● Edge finishing
During edge finishing, machining begins at the edge and continues in a helical movement
until the bottom is reached.
A full circle is made at pocket depth to remove the residual material.
The tool is removed from the edge and base in the quadrant and retracted with rapid
traverse to the safety distance.

Chamfering machining
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the circular pocket.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" softkeys.

The "Circular Pocket" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name
Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Turning
362 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining  ∇ (roughing, plane-by-plane or helical)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing, plane-by-plane or helical)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing, plane-by-plane or helical)
 Chamfering
Machining type  Plane by plane

Solid machine circular pocket plane-by-plane

 Helical

Solid machine circular pocket helically

Machining  Single position
position
A circular pocket is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Several circular pockets are machined in a position pattern

(e.g. full circle, pitch circle, grid, etc.).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)
Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 363
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
∅ Diameter of pocket mm
Z1 Pocket depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0/X0 (inc) – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm

DXY  Maximum plane infeed in

%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
- (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
UXY Plane finishing allowance - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
UZ Depth finishing allowance – (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm

Turning
364 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Insertion Various insertion modes can be selected – (only for plane-by-plane machining method
and for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge):
 Predrilled (only for G code)
 Perpendicular: Insert vertically at center of pocket

The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically at the center of the pocket.

Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ

 Helical: Insert along helical path

The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle
motion is executed to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Feedrate: Machining feedrate

Note: The vertical insertion into pocket center method can be used only if the tool
can cut across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face C/peripheral surface C, if inserted vertically)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
FZ Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) *
(only for G code)
FZ Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) mm/min
mm/tooth

(only for
ShopTurn)
EP Maximum pitch of helix - (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
The helix pitch may be lower due to the geometrical situation.
ER Radius of helix - (only for helical insertion) mm
The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain.
Also make sure the circular pocket is not violated
Solid machining  Complete machining

The circular pocket must be milled from a solid workpiece (e.g. casting).
(only for G code)  Remachining

A small pocket or hole has already been machined in the workpiece, which needs
to be enlarged. Parameters AZ, and ∅1 must be programmed.
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm
AZ Depth of premachining - (for remachining only) mm
(only for G code)
∅1 Diameter of premachining - (for remachining only) mm
(only for G code)

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 365
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.4 Rectangular spigot (CYCLE76)

Function
You can mill various rectangular spigots with the "Rectangular spigot" cycle.
You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner radius:

In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also define a blank spigot, i.e. the
outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank
spigot must not overlap adjacent blank spigots and is automatically placed by the cycle in a
central position on the finished spigot.
The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using
multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular spigot" function several times, with a
continually decreasing finishing allowance.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction
plane and adjusts to the safety distance. The starting point is on the positive X axis
rotated through α0.
2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at the machining feedrate.
The tool first executes the infeed at machining depth, followed by the movement in the
plane. Depending on the machining direction that has been programmed (up-
cut/synchronism), the spigot is machined in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool is removed from the contour in
a semicircle; the infeed to the next machining depth is then executed.
4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavigated once. This process
is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
5. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Turning
366 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Machining type
● Roughing
Roughing involves moving around the rectangular spigot until the programmed finishing
allowance has been reached.
● Finishing
If you have programmed a finishing allowance, the rectangular spigot is moved around
until depth Z1 is reached.
● Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the rectangular spigot.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Multi-edge spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" softkeys.

The "Rectangular Spigot" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 367
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

FZ Depth infeed rate (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) *
(only for G code)
Reference point The following different reference point positions can be selected:
 (center)

(only for  (bottom left)

ShopTurn)  (bottom right)
 (top left)
 (top right)
Machining surface  Face C
 Face Y

(only for  Peripheral surface Y

ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 Chamfering
Machining  Single position
position
Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)
Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)

Turning
368 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
W Width of spigot mm
L Length of spigot mm
R Corner radius mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
Z1 Spigot depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 or X0 (inc) - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm

DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm

UXY Plane finishing allowance for the length (L) and width (W) of the rectangular spigot. mm
Smaller rectangular spigot dimensions are obtained by calling the cycle again and
programming it with a lower finishing allowance. - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
UZ Depth finishing allowance (tool axis) - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm
W1 Width of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) - (only for ∇ and mm
∇∇∇)
L1 Length of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) - (only for ∇ and mm
∇∇∇)
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 369
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.5 Circular spigot (CYCLE77)

Function
You can mill various circular spigots with the "Circular spigot" function.
In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank spigot, i.e. the outer
limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot
must not overlap adjacent blank spigots and is automatically placed on the finished spigot in
a centered position.
The circular spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot
using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular spigot" function several times with a
reducing finishing allowance.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction
plane and is fed in to the safety clearance. The starting point is always on the positive X
axis.
2. The tool approaches the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at machining feedrate.
The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The
circular spigot is machined depending on the programmed machining direction (up-
cut/down-cut) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
3. When the circular spigot has been traversed once, the tool retracts from the contour in a
semicircle and then infeed to the next machining depth is performed.
4. The circular spigot is approached again in a semicircle and traversed once. This process
is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Turning
370 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Machining type
You can select the machining mode for milling the circular spigot as follows:
● Roughing
Roughing involves moving round the circular spigot until the programmed finishing
allowance has been reached.
● Finishing
If you have programmed a finishing allowance, the circular spigot is moved around until
depth Z1 is reached.
● Chamfering
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the circular spigot.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Multi-edge spigot" and "Circular spigot" softkeys.

The "Circular Spigot" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 371
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

FZ Depth infeed rate *
(only for G code)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 Chamfering
Machining  Single position
position
Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)
Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)

Turning
372 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
∅ Diameter of spigot mm
Z1 Spigot depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 or X0 (inc) - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm

DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm

UXY Plane finishing allowance for the length (L) and width (W) of the circular spigot. mm
Smaller circular spigot dimensions are obtained by calling the cycle again and
programming it with a lower finishing allowance. - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
UZ Depth finishing allowance (tool axis) - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm
∅1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) - (only for ∇ and mm
∇∇∇)
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm
(ZFS for machining surface, face C/Y or XFS for peripheral surface C/Y)

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 373
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.6 Multi-edge (CYCLE79)

Function
You can mill a multi-edge with any number of edges with the "Multi-edge" cycle.
You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner radius or chamfer:

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction
plane and is fed in to the safety clearance.
2. The tool traverses the multi-edge in a quadrant at machining feedrate. The tool first
executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The multi-edge is
machined depending on the programmed machining direction (up-cut/down-cut) in a
clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the contour in a quadrant
and then infeed to the next machining depth is performed.
4. The multi-edge is traversed again in a quadrant. This process is repeated until the depth
of the multi-edge has been reached.
5. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Note
A multi-edge with more than two edges is traversed helically; with a single or double
edge, each edge is machined separately.

Turning
374 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Multi-edge spigot" and "Multi-edge" softkeys.

The "Multi-edge" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for
ShopTurn)
Position  Front
 back

(only for
ShopTurn)
Clamp/release spindle (only for face Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 375
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
Machining  Single position
position
A multiple edge is milled at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern
(only for G code)
Several multiple edges are milled at the programmed position pattern (e.g. pitch
circle, grid, line).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 (only G code) Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 (only G code) Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
∅ Diameter of blank spigot mm
N Number of edges
SW or L Width across flats or edge length mm
α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
R1 or FS1 Rounding radius or chamfer width mm
Z1 Multi-edge depth (abs) or depth in relation to Z0 (inc) - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
- (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm
UXY Plane finishing allowance - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
UZ Depth finishing allowance – (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm
%

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
376 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.7 Longitudinal groove (SLOT1)

Function
You can use the "Longitudinal groove" function to mill any longitudinal groove.
The following machining methods are available:
● Mill longitudinal groove from solid material.
● Pre-drill longitudinal groove in the center first if, for example, the milling cutter does not
cut in the center (program the drilling, longitudinal groove and position program blocks in
succession).

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Longitudinal slot with the width of the tool

When milling a longitudinal slot, which is located in parallel with the spindle axis, and which
should be machined with the width of the tool, then the clamping remains active after
insertion in order to achieve more accurate results.
The cycles identify this special case and do not cancel clamping after insertion if the
following secondary conditions are fulfilled.
After machining, the clamping in the cycles is canceled again.

Supplementary conditions
● Finishing longitudinal slot with width = tool diameter
● Roughing longitudinal slot with (width - 2 * finishing allowance) = tool diameter

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the
retraction plane and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the method selected.
3. The longitudinal slot is always machined from inside out using the selected machining
method.
4. The tool moves back to the safety distance at rapid traverse.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 377
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Machining method
You can select any of the following machining methods for milling the longitudinal slot:
● Roughing
Roughing involves machining the individual planes of the slot one after the other from the
inside out, until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.
● Finishing
During finishing, the edge is always machined first. The slot edge is approached on the
quadrant that joins the corner radius. During the last infeed, the base is finished from the
center out.
● Edge finishing
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (base
finishing) is omitted.
● Chamfering
Chamfering involves breaking the upper edge of the slot.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Groove" and "Longitudinal groove" softkeys.

The "Longitudinal Groove (SLOT1)" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Turning
378 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Reference point Position of the reference point:
 (lefthand edge)

(only for G code)  (inside left)

 (center)
 (inside right)
 (righthand edge)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
Machining  Single position
position
Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Position with MCALL

The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)
Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 379
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot Degrees
Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point
Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis
Z1 Slot depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 or X0 (inc) - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
- (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
(only ShopTurn)
DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
UXY Plane finishing allowance for the length (L) and width (W) of the slot. mm
- (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇)
UZ Depth finishing allowance (tool axis) - (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm

Turning
380 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Insertion The following insertion modes can be selected – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ or ∇∇∇ edge):
 Predrilled (only for G code)

Approach reference point shifted by the amount of the safety clearance with G0.
 Vertical
Insert vertically in longitudinal groove center:

The tool is inserted to infeed depth in the pocket center.

Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
 Helical(only for G code) insertion on helical path:

The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
and depth per revolution (helical path). If the depth for one infeed has been
reached, a full longitudinal slot is machined to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
 Oscillating
Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:

The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth
infeed. When the depth has been reached, the path is traversed again without
depth infeed in order to remove the slope caused by insertion.
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face C/peripheral surface C, if inserted vertically)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
FZ Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) *
(only for G code)
FZ Depth infeed rate - (only for insertion, predrilled and perpendicular) mm/min
mm/tooth

(only for
ShopTurn)
EP Maximum pitch of helix – (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
(only for G code)
ER Radius of helix – (for helical insertion only) mm
(only for G code) The radius cannot be any larger than the milling cutter radius; otherwise, material will
remain.
EW Maximum insertion angle – (for insertion with oscillation only) Degrees
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 381
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.8 Circumferential groove (SLOT2)

Function
You can mill one or several circumferential grooves of equal size on a full or pitch circle with
the "circumferential groove" cycle.

Tool size
Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to machine the
circumferential groove:
● Roughing:
1⁄2 groove width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
● Finishing:
1⁄2 groove width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
● Edge finishing:
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

Annular groove
To create an annular groove, you must enter the following values for the "Number N" and
"Aperture angle α1" parameters:
N=1
α1 = 360°

Approach/retraction
1. At the height of the retraction plane, the tool approaches the center point of the semicircle
at the end of the groove at rapid traverse and adjusts to the safety distance.
2. It is then inserted into the workpiece at the machining feedrate, allowing for the maximum
Z direction infeed (for face machining), X direction infeed (for peripheral machining), and
the finishing allowance. Depending on the machining direction (up-cut or down-cut), the
circumferential groove is machined in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.
3. When the first circumferential groove is finished, the tool moves to the retraction plane at
rapid traverse.
4. The next circumferential groove is approached along a straight line or circular path and
then machined.
5. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is specified in a machine
data element.

Turning
382 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Machining type
You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot as follows:
● Roughing
During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after the other from
center point of the semicircle at the end of the slot until depth Z1 is reached.
● Finishing
In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth Z1 is reached. The slot
edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is
finished from the center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.
● Finishing of edge
Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed
(finish base) is omitted.
● Chamfer
Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the circumferential groove.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Groove" and "Circumferential groove" softkeys.

The "Circumferential Groove" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate *

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 383
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
FZ (only for G Depth infeed rate *
code)
Circular pattern  Full circle

The circumferential slots are positioned around a full circle. The distance from one
circumferential slot to the next circumferential slot is always the same and is
calculated by the control.
 Pitch circle

The circumferential slots are positioned around a pitch circle. The distance from
one circumferential slot to the next circumferential slot can be defined using angle
α2.
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for G code)
Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)

Turning
384 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
N Number of slots
R Radius of circumferential slot mm
α0 Starting angle Degrees
α1 Opening angle of the slot Degrees
α2 Advance angle - (for pitch circle only) Degrees
W Slot width mm
Z1 Slot depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 or X0 (inc) - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇) mm
DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ ) mm
UXY Plane finishing allowance – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇) mm
Positioning Positioning motion between the slots:
 Straight line:

Next position is approached linearly in rapid traverse.

 Circular:

Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate

defined in a machine data code.

FS Chamfer width for chamfering (inc) - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 385
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8.4.9 Open groove (CYCLE899)

Function
Use the "Open slot" function if you want to machine open slots.
For roughing, you can choose between the following machining strategies, depending on
your workpiece and machine properties.
● Vortex milling
● Plunge cutting
The following machining types are available to completely machine the slot:
● Roughing
● Rough-finishing
● Finishing
● Base finishing
● Edge finishing
● Chamfering

Vortex milling
Particularly where hardened materials are concerned, this process is used for roughing and
contour machining using coated VHM milling cutters.
Vortex milling is the preferred technique for HSC roughing, as it ensures that the tool is
never completely inserted. This means that the set overlap is precisely maintained.

Plunge cutting
Plunge cutting is the preferred method of machining slots for "unstable" machines and
workpiece geometries. This method generally only exerts forces along the tool axis, i.e.
perpendicular to the surface of the pocket/slot to be machined (with the XY plane in Z
direction). Therefore, the tool is subject to virtually no deformation. As a result of the axial
loading of the tool, there is hardly any danger of vibration occurring for unstable workpieces.
The cutting depth can be considerably increased. The plunge cutter, as it is known, ensures
a longer service life due to less vibration for long overhangs.

Approach/retraction for vortex milling

1. The tool approaches the starting point in front of the slot in rapid traverse and maintains
the safety clearance.
2. The tool goes to the cutting depth.
3. The open slot is always machined along its entire length using the selected machining
method.
4. The tool retracts to the safety clearance in rapid traverse.

Turning
386 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Approach/retraction for plunge cutting

1. The tool moves in rapid traverse to the starting point in front of the slot at the safety
clearance.
2. The open slot is always machined along its entire length using the selected machining
method.
3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance in rapid traverse.

Machining type, roughing vortex milling

Roughing is performed by moving the milling cutter along a circular path.
While performing this motion, the milling cutter is continuously fed into the plane. Once the
milling cutter has traveled along the entire slot, it returns to its starting point, while continuing
to move in a circular fashion. By doing this, it removes the next layer (infeed depth) in the Z
direction. This process is repeated until the set slot depth plus the finishing allowance has
been reached.

Vortex milling: Climbing or conventional Vortex milling: Climbing - conventional milling

milling

Supplementary conditions for vortex milling

● Roughing
1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
● Slot width
minimum 1.15 x milling cutter diameter + finishing allowance
maximum, 2 x milling cutter diameter + 2 x finishing allowance

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 387
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

● Radial infeed
minimum, 0.02 x milling cutter diameter
maximum, 0.25 x milling cutter diameter
● Maximum infeed depth ≤ cutting height of milling cutter
Please note that the cutting height of the milling cutter cannot be checked.
The maximum radial infeed depends on the milling cutter.
For hard materials, use a lower infeed.

Machining type, roughing plunge cutting

Roughing of the slot takes place sequentially along the length of the groove, with the milling
cutter performing vertical insertions at the machining feedrate. The milling cutter is then
retracted and repositioned at the next insertion point.
The milling cutter moves along the length of the slot, at half the infeed rate, and inserts
alternately at the left-hand and right-hand walls.
The first insertion motion takes place at the slot edge, with the milling cutter inserted at half
the infeed, less the safety clearance. (if the safety clearance is greater than the infeed, this
will be on the outside). For this cycle, the maximum width of the slot must be less than
double the width of the milling cutter + the finishing allowance.
Following each insertion, the milling cutter is lifted by the height of the safety clearance at the
machining feedrate. As far as possible, this occurs during what is known as the retraction
process, i.e. if the milling cutter's wrap angle is less than 180°, it is lifted at a 45- angle from
the base in the opposite direction to the bisector of the wrap area.
The milling cutter then traverses over the material in rapid traverse.

Turning
388 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Supplementary conditions for plunge cutting

● Roughing
1/2 slot width W - finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
● Maximum radial infeed
The maximum infeed depends on the cutting edge width of the milling cutter.
● Increment
The lateral increment is calculated on the basis of the required slot width, milling cutter
diameter and finishing allowance.
● Retraction
Retraction involves the milling cutter being retracted at a 45° angle if the wrap angle is
less than 180°. Otherwise, retraction is perpendicular, as is the case with drilling.
● Retraction
Retraction is performed perpendicular to the wrapped surface.
● Safety clearance
Traverse through the safety clearance beyond the end of the workpiece to prevent
rounding of the slot walls at the ends.
Please note that the milling cutter’s cutting edge cannot be checked for the maximum radial
infeed.

Machining type, rough finishing

If there is too much residual material on the slot walls, unwanted corners are removed to the
finishing dimension.

Machining type, finishing:

When finishing walls, the milling cutter travels along the slot walls, whereby just like for
roughing, it is again fed in the Z direction, increment by increment. During this process, the
milling cutter travels through the safety clearance beyond the beginning and end of the slot,
so that an even slot wall surface can be guaranteed across the entire length of the slot.

Machining type, edge finishing

Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish
base) is omitted.

Machining type, finishing base:

When finishing the base, the milling cutter moves backwards and forwards once in the
finished slot.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 389
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Machining type, chamfering

Chamfering involves breaking the edge at the upper slot edge.

Additional supplementary conditions

● Finishing
1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter
● Edge finishing
Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter
● Chamfering
The tip angle must be entered into the tool table.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Slot" and "Open slot" softkeys.

The "Open slot" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number

SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/tooth

F Feedrate * S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Turning
390 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Reference point Position of the reference point:
 (lefthand edge)
 (center)
 (righthand edge)
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇ (pre-finishing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 ∇∇∇ base (base finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
Technology  Vortex milling
The milling cutter performs circular motions along the length of the slot and back
again.
 Plunge cutting
Sequential drilling motion along the tool axis.
Milling direction: - (except plunge cutting).
 Climbing
 Conventional
 Climbing - conventional milling
Machining  Single position
position
Mill a slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Mill slots at a programmed position pattern (e.g. full circle or grid).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 391
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for G code)
Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area – (only single position) Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar – (only for single position) mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar - (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z - (only for single position) mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z – (only for single position) mm
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
(only for
ShopTurn)
W Slot width mm
L Slot length mm
α0 Angle of rotation of slot Degrees
Z1 Slot depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 (abs) – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇, ∇∇∇ base and ∇∇) mm
(only for G code)
Z1 or X1 Slot depth (abs) or depth relative to Z0 or X0 (abs) – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇, ∇∇∇ base and mm
(only for ∇∇)
ShopTurn) (Z1 for machining surface, face C/Y or X1 for peripheral surface C/Y)
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
- (only for ∇)
DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for ∇, ∇∇, ∇∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
- (only for vortex milling)

Turning
392 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

UXY Plane finishing allowance (slot edge) - (only for ∇, ∇∇ and ∇∇∇ base) mm
UZ Depth finishing allowance (slot base) - (only for ∇, ∇∇ and ∇∇∇ edge) mm
FZ Chamfer width for chamfering (inc) - (for chamfering only) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering only) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.4.10 Long hole (LONGHOLE) - only for G code program

Function
In contrast to the groove, the width of the elongated hole is determined by the tool diameter.
Internally in the cycle, an optimum traversing path of the tool is determined, ruling out
unnecessary idle passes. If several depth infeeds are required to machine an elongated
hole, the infeed is carried out alternately at the end points. The path to be traversed in the
plane along the longitudinal axis of the elongated hole changes its direction after each
infeed. The cycle searches for the shortest path when changing to the next elongated hole.

NOTICE

The cycle requires a milling cutter with a "face tooth cutting over center" (DIN 844).

Approach/retraction
1. Using G0, the starting position for the cycle is approached. In both axes of the current
plane, the closest end point of the first elongated hole to be machined is approached at
the level of the retraction plane in the tool axis and then lowered to the reference point
shifted by the amount of the safety clearance.
2. Each elongated hole is milled in a reciprocating motion. The machining in the plane is
performed using G1 and the programmed feedrate. At each reversal point, the infeed to
the next machining depth calculated internally in the cycle is performed with G1 and the
feedrate, until the final depth is reached.
3. Retraction to the retraction plane using G0 and approach to the next elongated hole on
the shortest path.
4. After the last elongated hole has been machined, the tool at the position reached last in
the machining plane is moved with G0 to the retraction plane, and the cycle terminated.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 393
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Procedure

1. The part program to be executed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Groove" and "Elongated hole" softkeys.

The "Elongated Hole" input window opens.

Parameter Description Unit

PL Machining plane
RP Retraction plane (abs)
SC Safety clearance (inc)
F Feedrate *
Machining type  Plane-by-plane mm

The tool is inserted to infeed depth in the pocket center.

Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center.
 Oscillating
Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot:

The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth
infeed. When the depth has been reached, the path is traversed again without
depth infeed in order to eliminate the inclined insertion path.
Reference point Position of the reference point:

Machining  Single position

position
An elongated hole is machined at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0).
 Position pattern

Several elongated holes are machined in the programmed position pattern (e.g.
pitch circle, grid, line).
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 Reference point X – (for single position only) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (for single position only) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
L Elongated hole length mm

Turning
394 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

α0 Angle of rotation Degrees
Z1 Elongated hole depth (abs) or depth in relation to Z0 (inc) mm
DZ Maximum depth infeed mm
FZ Depth infeed rate *

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.4.11 Thread milling (CYCLE70)

Function
Using a thread cutter, internal or external threads can be machined with the same pitch.
Threads can be machined as right-hand or left-hand threads and from top to bottom or vice
versa.
For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev), the cycle assigns a value (calculated on the
basis of the thread pitch) to the thread depth H1 parameter. You can change this value. The
default selection must be activated via a machine data code.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

The entered feedrate acts on the workpiece contour, i.e. it refers to the thread diameter.
However the feedrate of the cutter center point is displayed. That is why a smaller value is
displayed for internal threads and a larger value is displayed for external threads than was
entered.

Approach/retraction when milling internal threads

1. Positioning on retraction plane with rapid traverse.
2. Approach of starting point of the approach circle in the current plane with rapid traverse.
3. Infeed to a starting point in the tool axis calculated internally in the controller with rapid
traverse.
4. Approach motion to thread diameter on an approach circle calculated internally in the
controller with the programmed feedrate, taking into account the finishing allowance and
maximum plane infeed.
5. Thread cutting along a spiral path in clockwise or counterclockwise direction (depending
on whether it is left-hand/right-hand thread, for number of cutting teeth of a milling plate
(NT) ≥ 2 only 1 rotation, offset in the Z direction).
6. Exit motion along a circular path in the same rotational direction at programmed feedrate.
7. With a programmed number of threads per cutting edge NT > 2, the tool is fed in (offset)
by the amount NT-1 in the Z direction. Points 4 to 7 are repeated until the programmed
thread depth is reached.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 395
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

8. If the plane infeed is less than the thread depth, points 3 to 7 are repeated until the thread
depth + programmed allowance is reached.
9. Retract on the thread center point and then to retraction plane in the tool axis in rapid
traverse.
Please note that when milling an internal thread the tool must not exceed the following value:
Milling cutter diameter < (nominal diameter - 2 · thread depth H1)

Approach/retraction when milling external threads

1. Positioning on retraction plane with rapid traverse.
2. Approach of starting point of the approach circle in the current plane with rapid traverse.
3. Infeed to a starting point in the tool axis calculated internally in the controller with rapid
traverse.
4. Approach motion to thread core diameter on an approach circle calculated internally in
the controller with the programmed feedrate, taking into account the finishing allowance
and maximum plane infeed.
5. Cut thread along a spiral path in clockwise or counterclockwise direction (depending on
whether it is left-hand/right-hand thread, with NT ≥ 2 only one rotation, offset in Z
direction).
6. Exit motion along a circular path in opposite rotational direction at programmed feedrate.
7. With a programmed number of threads per cutting edge NT > 2, the tool is fed in (offset)
by the amount NT-1 in the Z direction. Points 4 to 7 are repeated until the programmed
thread depth is reached.
8. If the plane infeed is less than the thread depth, points 3 to 7 are repeated until the thread
depth + programmed allowance is reached.
9. Retraction on the retraction plane in the tool axis with rapid traverse.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Thread milling" softkey.

The "Thread Milling" input window opens.

Turning
396 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/rev

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate mm/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
Machining direction:
 Z0 → Z1

Machining from top to bottom

 Z1 → Z0

Machining from bottom to top

Direction of rotation of the thread:
 Righthand thread

A righthand thread is cut.

 Lefthand thread

A lefthand thread is cut.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 397
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Position of the thread:
 Internal thread

An internal thread is cut.

 External thread

An external thread is cut.

NT Number of teeth per cutting edge
Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are
executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling tool
cutting edge corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end
position is reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the
retraction path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.
Machining position:
 Single position
(only for G code)
 Position pattern (MCALL)
The positions refer to the center point:
X0 Reference point X – (only for single position) mm
Y0 Reference point Y – (only for single position) mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)
Z1 End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) mm
Table Thread table selection:
 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC
Selection - (not Selection, table value: e.g.
for table "without")
 M3; M10; etc. (ISO metric)
 W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)
 G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)
 N1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)
P Display of the thread pitch for the parameter input in the input field "Table" and MODULUS
"Selection". turns/"
mm/rev
in/rev

Turning
398 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

P Pitch ...
- (selection MODULUS
 in MODULUS: For example, generally used for worm gears that mesh with a gear
option only for Turns/"
wheel.
table selection
"without")  per inch: Used with pipe threads, for example.

When entered per inch, enter the integer number in front of the decimal point in the mm/rev
first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the in/rev
second and third field.
 in mm/rev
 in inch/rev
The tool used depends on the thread pitch.
∅ Nominal diameter mm
Example: Nominal diameter of M12 = 12 mm
H1 Thread depth mm
DXY Maximum plane infeed mm
U Finishing allowance in X and Y - (only for ∇) mm
αS Starting angle Degrees

8.4.12 Engraving (CYCLE60)

Function
The "Engraving" function is used to engrave a text on a workpiece along a line or arc.
You can enter the text directly in the text field as "fixed text" or assign it via a variable as
"variable text".
Engraving uses a proportional font, i.e., the individual characters are of different widths.

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction
plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.
2. The tool moves to the machining depth FZ at the infeed feedrate Z1 and mills the
characters.
3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and moves along a straight line
to the next character.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.
5. The tool moves to the retraction plane in rapid traverse.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 399
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Engraving" softkey.

The "Engraving" input window opens.

Entering the engraving text

4. Press the "Special characters" softkey if you need a character that does
not appear on the input keys.
The "Special characters" window appears.
 Position the cursor on the desired character.
 Press the "OK" softkey.
The selected character is inserted into the text at the cursor position.
5. If you wish to delete the complete text, press the "Delete text" and
"Delete" softkeys one after the other.

6. Press the "Lowercase" softkey to enter lowercase letters. Press it again

to enter uppercase letters.

7. Press the "Variable" and "Date" softkeys if you want to engrave the
current date.

The data is inserted in the European date format

(<DD>.<MM>.<YYYY>).
To obtain a different date format, you must adapt the format specified in
the text field. For example, to engrave the date in the American date
format (month/day/year => 8/16/04), change the format to
<M>/<D>/<YY> .
7. Press the "Variable" and "Time" softkeys if you want to engrave the
current time.

The time is inserted in the European format (<TIME24>).

To have the time in the American format, change the format to
<TIME12>.
Example:
Text entry: Time: <TIME24> Execute: Time: 16.35
Time: <TIME12> Execute: Time: 04.35 PM

Turning
400 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

7.  Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece count 000123" softkeys to

engrave a workpiece count with a fixed number of digits and leading
zeroes.
The format text <######,_$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS> is inserted and
you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

 Define the number of digits by adjusting the number of place holders

(#) in the engraving field.
If the specified number of positions (e.g. ##) is not sufficient to
represent the unit quantity, then the cycle automatically increases
the number of positions.
- OR
7.  Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece count 123" softkeys if you want
to engrave a workpiece count without leading zeroes.
The format text <#,_$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS> is inserted and you
return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

 Define the number of digits by adjusting the number of place holders

in the engraving field.
If the specified number of digits is not enough to display the
workpiece count (e.g. 123), the cycle will automatically increase the
number digits.

7.  Press the "Variable" and "Number 123.456" softkeys if you want to

engrave a any number in a certain format.
The format text <#.###,_VAR_NUM> is inserted and you return to
the engraving field with the softkey bar.

 The place holders #.### define the digit format in which the number
defined in _VAR_NUM will be engraved.
For example, if you have stored 12.35 in _VAR_NUM, you can
format the variable as follows.
Input Output Meaning
<#,_VAR_NUM> 12 Places before decimal point
unformatted, no places after the
decimal point
<####,_VAR_NUM> 0012 4 places before decimal point,
leading zeros, no places after the
decimal point
<#,_VAR_NUM> 12 4 places before decimal point,
leading blanks, no places after the
decimal point
<#.,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Places before and after the
decimal point not formatted.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 401
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

<#.#,_VAR_NUM> 12.4 Places before decimal point

unformatted,
1 place after the decimal point
(rounded)
<#.##,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Places before decimal point
unformatted,
2 places after the decimal point
(rounded)
<#.####,_VAR_NUM> 12.3500 Places before decimal point
unformatted,
4 places after the decimal point
(rounded)
If there is insufficient space in front of the decimal point to display the
number entered, it is automatically extended. If the specified number of
digits is larger than the number to be engraved, the output format is
automatically filled with the appropriate number of leading and trailing
zeroes.
You can optionally use blanks to format before the decimal place.
Instead of _VAR_NUM you can use any other numeric variable (e.g.
R0).
7. Press the "Variable" and "Variable text" softkeys if you want to take the
text to be engraved (up to 200 characters) from a variable.

The format text <Text, _VAR_TEXT> is inserted and you return to the
engraving field with the softkey bar.
You can use any other text variable instead of _VAR_TEXT.

Note
Entering the engraving text
Only single-line entries without line break are permissible!

Variable texts
There are various ways of defining variable text:
● Date and time
For example, you can engrave the time and date of manufacture on a workpiece. The
values for date and time are read from the NCK.
● Quantity

Turning
402 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Using the workpiece variables you can assign a consecutive number to the workpieces.
You can define the format (number of digits, leading zeroes).
The place holder (#) is used to format the number of digits at which the workpiece counts
output will begin.
If you do not want to output a count of 1 for the first workpiece, you can specify an
additive value (e.g., <#,$AC_ACTUAL_PARTS + 100>). The workpiece count output is
then incremented by this value (e. g. 101, 102, 103,...).
● Numbers
When outputting number (e. g. measurement results), you can select the output format
(digits either side of the point) of the number to be engraved.
● Text
Instead of entering a fixed text in the engraving text field, you can specify the text to be
engraved via a text variable (e. g., _VAR_TEXT="ABC123").

Mirror writing
You can engrave the text mirrored on the workpiece.

Full circle
If you want to distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, enter the arc angle
α2=360°. The cycle then distributes the characters evenly around the full circle.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

Milling direction D Cutting edge number

RP Retraction plane mm F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth

SC Safety clearance mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

F Feedrate mm/min

Parameter Description Unit

FZ Depth infeed rate *
(only for G code)
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/min
(only for mm/tooth
ShopTurn)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 403
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
 Peripheral surface C
(only for  Peripheral surface Y
ShopTurn)
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Alignment  (linear alignment)
 (curved alignment)
 (curved alignment)
Reference point Position of the reference point

 bottom left

 bottom center
 bottom right
 top left
 top center
 top right
 left-hand edge
 center
 right-hand edge
Mirror writing  Yes

The mirrored text is engraved on the workpiece.

 No

The text is engraved on the workpiece without mirroring.

Engraving text maximum 100 characters
The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or R Reference point X or reference point length polar mm
Y0 or α0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only for G code)

Turning
404 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.4 Milling

Parameter Description Unit

Face C: The positions refer to the reference point:
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only ShopTurn)
Face Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
X0 or L0 Reference point X or reference point length polar mm
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z mm
(only ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface C: The positions refer to the reference point:
Y0 or C0 Reference point Y or reference point angle polar – (only for single position) mm or
degrees
Z0 Reference point Z mm
X0 Cylinder diameter ∅ mm
(only ShopTurn)
Peripheral surface Y: The positions refer to the reference point:
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface – (only for single position) Degrees
Y0 Reference point Y mm
Z0 Reference point Z mm
X0 Reference point X mm
(only ShopTurn)
Z1 Engraving depth (abs) or referenced depth (inc) mm
W Character height mm
DX1 or α2 Distance between characters or angle of opening – (for curved alignment only) mm or
Degrees
DX1 or DX2 Distance between characters or total width – (for linear alignment only) mm
α1 Text direction (for linear alignment only) Degrees
XM or LM Center point X (abs) or center point length polar mm
(only G code) – (for curved alignment only)
YM or αM Center point Y (abs) or center point angle polar mm
(only G code) – (for curved alignment only)
YM or CM Center point Y or C (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm or
(only ShopTurn) - (only for machining surface, peripheral surface C/Y) degrees
ZM Center point Z (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) mm
(only ShopTurn) - (only for machining surface, peripheral surface C/Y)

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 405
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

8.5 Contour milling

8.5.1 General information

Function
You can mill simple or complex contours with the "Contour milling" cycle. You can define
open contours or closed contours (pockets, islands, spigots).
A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two and up to 250
elements result in a defined contour. Radii, chamfers and tangential transitions are available
as contour transition elements.
The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the individual contour
elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter
incompletely dimensioned elements.
With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the contour before you
program the technology.

8.5.2 Representation of the contour

G code program
In the editor, the contour is represented in a program section using individual program
blocks. If you open an individual block, then the contour is opened.

ShopTurn program
The cycle represents a contour as a program block in the program. If you open this block,
the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation
The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent to the graphics
window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Symbol Meaning

Starting point Starting point of the contour

Straight line up Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line down Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line left Straight line in 90° grid

Turning
406 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Contour element Symbol Meaning

Straight line right Straight line in 90° grid

Straight line in any direction Straight line with any gradient

Arc right Circle

Arc left Circle

Pole Straight diagonal or circle in

polar coordinates
Finish contour END End of contour definition

The different colors of the symbols indicate their status:

Foreground Background Meaning

Black Blue Cursor on active element
Black Orange Cursor on current element
Black White Normal element
Red White Element not currently evaluated
(element will only be evaluated
when it is selected with the
cursor)

Graphic display
The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour
elements are being entered.
When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and
colors:
● Black: Programmed contour
● Orange: Current contour element
● Green dashed: Alternative element
● Blue dotted: Partially defined element
The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete
contour.
The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 407
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

8.5.3 Creating a new contour

Function
For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new contour.
The contours are stored at the end of the program.

Note
When programming in the G code, it must be ensured that the contours are located after the
end of program identifier!

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point. Enter the contour element.
The contour processor then automatically defines the end of the contour.
If you alter the tool axis, the cycle will automatically adjust the associated starting point axes.
You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the
starting point.

Additional commands
You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code
commands. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended
parameter screens ("All parameters" softkey). However, make sure that the additional
commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore, do not use
any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G
code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Contour milling" and "New contour" softkeys.

The "New Contour" input window opens.

4. Enter a contour name.

5. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The input screen for the starting point of the contour appears. You can
enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.

Turning
408 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Cartesian starting point

1. Enter the starting point for the contour.

2. Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.

4. Enter the individual contour elements.

Polar starting point

1. Press the "Pole" softkey.

2. Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.

3. Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.
4. Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.

6. Enter the individual contour elements.

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for ShopTurn)  Face B

 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
PL Machining plane
(only for G code)
 G17 (XY)
 G19 (YZ)
ϕ Cylinder diameter mm
(only ShopTurn) (only peripheral surface C)
G17 G19
or or
face C/Y/B peripheral
surface C/Y
Cartesian:
X Y Starting point X or Y (abs) mm
Y Z Starting point Y or Z (abs) mm
Polar:
X Y Position pole (abs) mm
Y Z Position pole (abs) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 409
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Starting point
L1 Distance to pole, end point (abs) mm
ϕ1 Polar angle to the pole, end point (abs) Degrees
Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G
code commands. However, carefully ensure that the additional commands do
not collide with the generated G code of the contour and are compatible with
the machining type required. Therefore, do not use any G code commands of
group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code
commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.
The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result, contour
transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.
If you wish to avoid this, then it is possible to use additional commands when
programming.
Example: For a contour, first program the straight X parallel and then enter
"G9" (non-modal exact stop) for the additional command parameter. Then
program the Y-parallel straight line. The corner will be machined exactly, as the
feedrate at the end of the X-parallel straight line is briefly zero.
Note:
The additional commands are only effective for path milling!

8.5.4 Creating contour elements

After you have created a new contour and specified the starting point, you can define the
individual elements that make up the contour.
The following contour elements are available for the definition of a contour:
● Straight vertical line
● Straight horizontal line
● Diagonal line
● Circle/arc
● Pole
For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate parameter screen.
The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in Cartesian format; however, for
the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and
polar coordinates. If you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you
have already defined a pole for the starting point, you can also refer the polar coordinates to
this pole. Therefore, in this case, you do not have to define an additional pole.

Turning
410 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Cylinder surface transformation

For contours (e.g. slots) on cylinders, lengths are frequently specified in the form of angles. If
the "Cylinder surface transformation" function is activated, you can also define on a cylinder
the length of contours (in the circumferential direction of the cylinder surface) using angles.
This means instead of X, Y and I, J, you enter Xα, Yα and Iα, Jα.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Parameter input
Parameter entry is supported by various help screens that explain the parameters.
If you leave certain fields blank, the geometry processor assumes that the values are
unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.
Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a
contour. In such a case, try to enter fewer parameters and allow the geometry processor to
calculate as many parameters as possible.

Contour transition elements

As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a radius or a chamfer. The
transition element is always attached at the end of a contour element. The contour transition
element is selected in the parameter screen of the respective contour element.
You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two
successive elements which can be calculated from the input values. Otherwise you must use
the straight/circle contour elements.
The contour end is an exception. Although there is no intersection to another element, you
can still define a radius or a chamfer as a transition element for the blank.

Additional functions
The following additional functions are available for programming a contour:
● Tangent to preceding element
You can program the transition to the preceding element as tangent.
● Dialog box selection
If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the
options must be selected.
● Close contour
From the actual position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting
point.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 411
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Procedure for entering or changing contour elements

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be executed is created.

2. Select the file type (MPF or SPF), enter the desired name of the
program and press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.
This editor is opened.

3. Select a contour element via softkey.

The input window "Straight (e.g. X)" opens.

- OR
The input window "Straight (e.g. Y)" opens.

- OR
The input window "Straight (e.g. XY)" opens.

- OR
The "Circle" input window opens.

- OR
The "Pole Input" input window opens.

4. Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input
screen (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next
element, angle of lead, etc.).
5. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The contour element is added to the contour.
6. When entering data for a contour element, you can program the
transition to the preceding element as a tangent.
Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey. The angle to the preceding
element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the
parameter input field.
7. Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.
8. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan (program
view).
9. If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements,
e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.

Turning
412 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Contour element "Straight line, e.g. X"

Parameters Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for ShopTurn)  Face B

 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
X End point X (abs or inc) mm
α1 Starting angle e.g. to the X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "straight line, e.g. Y"

Parameters Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for ShopTurn)  Face B

 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Y End point Y (abs or inc) mm
α1 Starting angle to X axis Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 413
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Contour element "Straight line e.g. XY"

Parameters Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for ShopTurn)  Face B

 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
X End point X (abs or inc) mm
Y End point Y (abs or inc) mm
L Length mm
α1 Starting angle e.g. to the X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "Circle"

Parameters Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for ShopTurn)  Face B

 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Direction of rotation  Clockwise direction of rotation

 Counterclockwise direction of rotation

R Radius mm
e.g. X End point X (abs or inc) mm
e.g. Y End point Y (abs or inc) mm
e.g. I Circle center point I (abs or inc) mm
e.g. J Circle center point J (abs or inc) mm
α1 Starting angle to X axis Degrees
α2 Angle to the preceding element Degrees

Turning
414 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameters Description Unit

β1 End angle to Z axis Degrees
β2 Opening angle Degrees
Transition to next Type of transition
element
 Radius
 Chamfer
Radius R Transition to following element - radius mm
Chamfer FS Transition to following element - chamfer mm
Additional commands Additional G code commands

Contour element "Pole"

Parameters Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y

(only for ShopTurn)  Face B

 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
X Position pole (abs) mm (in)
Y Position pole (abs) Degrees

Contour element "End"

The data for the transition at the contour end of the previous contour element is displayed in
the "End" parameter screen.
The values cannot be edited.

8.5.5 Changing the contour

Function
You can change a previously created contour later.
If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the
existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements.
Individual contour elements can be
● added,
● changed,
● inserted or
● deleted.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 415
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Procedure for changing a contour element

1. Open the part program or ShopTurn program to be executed.

2. With the cursor, select the program block where you want to change the
contour. Open the geometry processor.
The individual contour elements are listed.
3. Position the cursor at the position where a contour element is to be
inserted or changed.
4. Select the desired contour element with the cursor.
5. Enter the parameters in the input screen or delete the element and
select a new element.
6. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The desired contour element is inserted in the contour or changed.

Procedure for deleting a contour element

1. Open the part program or ShopTurn program to be executed.

2. Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.
3. Press the "Delete element" softkey.

4. Press the "Delete" softkey.

8.5.6 Contour call (CYCLE62) - only for G code program

Function
The input creates a reference to the selected contour.
There are four ways to call the contour:
1. Contour name
The contour is in the calling main program.
2. Labels
The contour is in the calling main program and is limited by the labels that have been
entered.
3. Subprogram
The contour is located in a subprogram in the same workpiece.
4. Labels in the subprogram
The contour is in a subprogram and is limited by the labels that have been entered.

Turning
416 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" and "Contour milling" softkeys.

3. Press the "Contour" and "Contour call" softkeys.

The "Contour Call" input window opens.

4. Assign parameters to the contour selection.

Parameter Description Unit

Contour selection  Contour name
 Labels
 Subprogram
 Labels in the subprogram
Contour name CON: Contour name
Labels  LAB1: Label 1
 LAB2: Label 2
Subprogram PRG: Subprogram
Labels in the  PRG: Subprogram
subprogram
 LAB1: Label 1
 LAB2: Label 2

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 417
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

8.5.7 Path milling (CYCLE72)

Function
You can machine open or closed contours with the "Path milling" cycle. Before you can mill
the contour, you must enter the contour. Machining can be performed in either direction, i.e.
in the direction of the programmed contour or in the opposite direction.
For machining in the opposite direction, contours must not consist of more than 170 contour
elements (incl. chamfers/radii). Special aspects (except for feed values) of free G code input
are ignored during path milling in the opposite direction to the contour.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Programming of arbitrary contours

The machining of arbitrary open or closed contours is generally programmed as follows:
1. Enter contour
You build up the contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.
2. Contour call (CYCLE62)
You select the contour to be machined.
3. Path milling (roughing)
The contour is machined taking into account various approach and retract strategies.
4. Path milling (finishing)
If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.
5. Path milling (chamfering)
If you have planned edge breaking, chamfer the workpiece with a special tool.

Path milling on right or left of the contour

A programmed contour can be machined with the cutter radius compensation to the right or
left. You can also select various modes and strategies of approach and retraction from the
contour.

Turning
418 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Approach/retraction mode
The tool can approach or retract from the contour along a quadrant, semi-circle or straight
line.
● With a quadrant or semi-circle, you must specify the radius of the cutter center point path.
● With a straight line, you must specify the distance between the cutter outer edge and the
contour starting or end point.
You can also program a mixture of modes, e.g. approach along quadrant, retract along semi-
circle.

Approach/retraction strategy
You can choose between planar approach/retraction and spatial approach/retraction:
● Planar approach:
Approach is first at depth and then in the machining plane.
● Spatial approach:
Approach is at depth and in machining plane simultaneously.
● Retraction is performed in reverse order.
Mixed programming is possible, for example, approach in the machining plane, retract
spatially.

Path milling along center-point path.

A programmed contour can also be machined along the center-point path if the radius
correction was switched-out. In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a
straight line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for closed contours, for
example.

Machining type
You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer) for path milling. If you
want to "rough" and then "finish", you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 =
roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is
called for the second time.
It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a cutter radius offset or
traversing on the center-point path.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 419
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Slot side compensation

When you mill a contour on the peripheral surface (peripheral machining surface C), you can
work with or without a slot wall compensation.
● Slot side compensation off
ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is equal to the slot
width. If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will not be parallel.
● Slot side compensation on
ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width is larger than the tool
diameter. If you want to work with a slot wall compensation, you must not program the
contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt inserted in the slot
whereby the bolt touches both walls. Parameter D is used to specify the slot width.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling" softkey.

3. Press the "Contour milling" and "Path milling" softkeys.

The "Path Milling" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

RP Retraction plane mm D Cutting edge number

SC Safety clearance mm F Feedrate mm/min
mm/tooth

F Feedrate * S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

Turning
420 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Position  At the front (face)
 At the rear (face)

(only for  Outside (peripheral surface)

ShopTurn)  Inside (peripheral surface)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 Chamfering
Machining Machining in the programmed contour direction
direction
 Forward:

Machining is performed in the programmed contour direction

 Backward:

Machining is performed in the opposite direction to the programmed contour

Radius  Left (machining to the left of the contour)
compensation

 Right (machining to the right of the contour)

 off

A programmed contour can also be machined on the center-point path. In this case,
approaching and retraction is only possible along a straight line or vertical. Vertical
approach/retraction can be used for closed contours, for example.
Slot side Slot side compensation on or off (only for machining surface, peripheral surface C)
compensation

(only ShopTurn)
D Offset to programmed path
- (only for slot side compensation on)
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 421
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
Z0 Reference point Z mm
Z1 Final drilling depth (abs) or final drilling depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) mm
DZ Maximum depth infeed - (only for machining ∇ and ∇∇∇) mm
UZ Depth finishing allowance - (only for machining ∇) mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
Approach Planar approach mode:
 Quadrant:

Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
 Semi-circle:

Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
 Straight line:

Slope in space
 Perpendicular:

Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center-point path)
Approach strategy  axis-by-axis - (only for "quadrant, semi-circle or straight line" approach)

 spatial - (only for "quadrant, semi-circle or straight line" approach)

R1 Approach radius - (only for "quadrant or semi-circle" approach) mm

L1 Approach distance - (only for "straight line" approach) mm
FZ Depth infeed rate *
(only for G code)
FZ Depth infeed rate mm/min
(only for mm/tooth
ShopTurn)
Retraction Planar retraction mode:
 Quadrant:

Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
 Semi-circle:

Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour)
 Straight line:

Turning
422 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Retraction  axis-by-axis
strategy

 spatial

R2 Retraction radius - (only for "quadrant or semi-circle" retraction) mm

L2 Retraction distance - (only for "straight line" retraction) mm
Lift mode If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the
tool retracts between the individual infeeds (at the transition from the end of the contour
to the start).
Lift mode before new infeed
 No retraction
 to RP
 Z0 + safety clearance
 By the safety clearance
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (only for chamfering machining) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering machining only) mm

* Unit of feedrate as programmed before the cycle call

8.5.8 Contour pocket/contour spigot (CYCLE63/64)

Contours for pockets or islands

Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the starting point and end point of the
contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that contain one or more islands. The islands
can also be located partially outside the pocket or overlap each other. The first contour you
specify is interpreted as the pocket contour and all the others as islands.

Automatically calculating/Manually entering the starting point

Using "Automatic starting point" you have the option of calculating the optimum plunge point.
By selecting "Manual starting point", you define the plunge point in the parameter screen.
If the islands and the miller diameter, which must be plunged at various locations, are
obtained from the pocket contour, then the manual entry only defines the first plunge point;
the remaining plunge points are automatically calculated.

Contours for spigots

Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the starting point and end point of the contour are
identical. You can define multiple spigots, which can also overlap. The first contour specified
is interpreted as a blank contour and all others as spigots.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 423
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Machining
You program the machining of contour pockets with islands/blank contour with spigots e.g.
as follows:
1. Enter the pocket contour/blank contour
2. Enter the island/spigot contour
3. Call the contour for pocket contour/blank contour or island/spigot contour (only for G code
program)
4. Center (this is only possible for pocket contour)
5. Predrill (this is only possible for pocket contour)
6. Solid machine/machine pocket / spigot - roughing
7. Solid machine/machine remaining material - roughing
8. Finishing (base/edge)
9. Chamfering

Software option
For solid machining residual material, you require the option "residual material
detection and machining".

Name convention
For multi-channel systems, cycles attach a "_C" and a two-digit number of the specific
channel to the names of the programs to be generated, e.g. for channel 1 "_C01". This is the
reason that the name of the main program must not end with "_C" and a two-digit number.
This is monitored by the cycles.
For single-channel systems, cycles do not extend the name for the programs to be
generated.

Note
G code programs
For G code programs, the programs to be generated, which do not include any path data,
are saved in the directory in which the main program is located. In this case, it must be
ensured that programs, which already exist in the directory and which have the same name
as the programs to be generated, are overwritten.

Turning
424 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

8.5.9 Predrilling contour pocket (CYCLE64)

Function
In addition to predrilling, the cycle can be used for centering. For this purpose, the centering
or predrilling program generated by the cycle is called.
To prevent the drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.
Before you predrill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you want to center
before predrilling, you have to program the two machining steps in separate blocks.
The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend on the specific
circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane infeed, finishing allowance) and are
calculated by the cycle.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, predrill all the
pockets first and then remove the stock.
In this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the parameters that appear
when you press the "All parameters" softkey. These parameters must correspond to the
parameters from the previous stock removal step. Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Centering
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Centering
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Predrilling
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Predrilling
9. Contour pocket 1
10.Solid machining
11.Contour pocket 2
12.Solid machining
If you are doing all the machining for the pocket at once, i.e. centering, predrilling and
removing stock directly one after the other, and do not set the additional parameters for
centering/predrilling, the cycle will take these parameter values from the stock removal
(roughing) machining step. When programming in G code, these values must be specifically
re-entered again.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 425
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Procedure when centering

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling", "Mill contour", "Predrilling" and "Centering" softkeys.
The "Centering" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Milling direction  Climbing F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth
 Conventional

RP Retraction plane mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

SC Safety clearance mm
F Feedrate mm/min

Turning
426 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

TR Reference tool Tool, which is used in the "solid machining" machining step. This is
used to determine the plunge position.
Machining  Face C
surface
 End face Y (only when Y axis exists)
(only for
ShopTurn)  Face B
 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/B and peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Z0 Reference point in the tool axis Z mm
Z1 Pocket depth ∅ (abs) or depth referred to Z0 mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm

Lift mode Lift mode before new infeed

If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height can
be programmed:
 To retraction plane mm
 Z0 + safety clearance mm
When making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance" can be
selected as the lift mode.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 427
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Predrilling procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling", "Contour milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling"
softkeys.
The "Predrilling" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Milling direction  Climbing F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth
 Conventional

RP Retraction plane mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

SC Safety clearance mm
F Feedrate mm/min

Parameter Description Unit

TR Reference tool Tool, which is used in the "solid machining" machining step. This is
used to determine the plunge position.
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Face B
 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/B and peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Z0 Reference point in the tool axis Z mm

Turning
428 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Z1 Pocket depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Lift mode Lift mode before new infeed
If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height can
be programmed:
 To retraction plane mm
 Z0 + safety clearance mm
When making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, then Z0 (X0) + safety
clearance can be programmed as the lift mode.

8.5.10 Milling contour pocket (CYCLE63)

Function
You can use the "Mill pocket" function to mill a pocket on the face or peripheral surface.
Before you solid machine the pocket, you must first enter the contour of the pocket and, if
applicable, the contour of an island. Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour
from the inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining direction
(climbing or conventional). If an island is located in the pocket, the cycle automatically takes
this into account during stock removal.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 429
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Machining type
For solid machining, you can select the machining type (roughing or finishing). If you want to
rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (block 1 = roughing, block 2
= finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle is called for the
second time.
During insertion with oscillation, the message “Ramp path too short” will appear if the tool is
less than the milling cutter diameter away from the insertion point along the ramp. If this
occurs, please reduce the angle of insertion.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket" softkeys.
The "Mill pocket" input window opens.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Milling direction  Climbing F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth
 Conventional

RP Retraction plane mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

SC Safety clearance mm
F Feedrate mm/min

Turning
430 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Face B
 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/B and peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ base (base finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
Z0 Reference point in the tool axis Z mm
Z1 Pocket depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
DZ Maximum depth infeed mm
UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
Starting point  Manual

Starting point is entered

 Automatic

Starting point is automatically calculated

XS Starting point X - (only for "manual" starting point) mm
YS Starting point X - (only for "manual" starting point) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 431
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Insertion The following insertion modes can be selected – (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ base or ∇∇∇ edge):
 Vertical insertion

The calculated current infeed depth is executed at the calculated position for
"automatic" starting point – or at the specified position for "manual" starting point.
 Note
This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the pocket has
been predrilled.
 Helical insertion
Insertion along a helical path.

The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius
and depth per revolution (helical path). If the depth for one infeed has been
reached, a full-circle motion is executed to remove the slope caused by insertion.
 Oscillating insertion
Oscillating insertion at the center axis of the rectangular pocket.

The cutter center point oscillates back and forth along a linear path until it reaches
the depth infeed. When the depth has been reached, the path is traversed again
without depth infeed in order to remove the slope caused by insertion.
FZ (only for Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) mm/min
ShopTurn) mm/tooth
FZ (only for G Depth infeed rate – (for vertical insertion only) mm/min
code)
EP Maximum pitch of helix – (for helical insertion only) mm/rev
ER Radius of helix – (for helical insertion only) mm
The radius cannot be any larger than the milling cutter radius; otherwise, material will
remain.
EW Note: Degrees
During insertion with oscillation, the message “Ramp path too short” will appear if the
tool is less than the milling cutter diameter away from the insertion point along the
ramp. If this occurs, please reduce the angle of insertion.
Lift mode Lift mode before new infeed
If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height can
be programmed:
 To retraction plane mm
 Z0 + safety clearance mm
When making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, then Z0 (X0) + safety
clearance can be programmed as the lift mode.
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (only for chamfering machining) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering machining only) mm

Turning
432 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

8.5.11 Contour pocket residual material (CYCLE63, option)

Function
When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands) and there is residual
material, then this is automatically detected. You can use a suitable tool to remove this
residual material without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e. avoiding
unnecessary non-productive motion. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance
is not residual material.
The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter used for stock removal.
If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, remove stock
from all the pockets first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the
residual material, you also have to enter a value for the reference tool TR parameter, which,
for the ShopTurn program, additionally appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey.
Then program as follows:
1. Contour pocket 1
2. Solid machining
3. Contour pocket 2
4. Solid machining
5. Contour pocket 1
6. Solid machine residual material
7. Contour pocket 2
8. Solid machine residual material

Software option
For solid machining residual material, you require the option "residual material
detection and machining".

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 433
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat." softkeys.

The "Pocket Res. Mat." input window opens.

3. For the ShopTurn program, press the "All parameters" softkey if you
want to enter additional parameters.

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Milling direction  Climbing F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth
 Conventional

RP Retraction plane mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

SC Safety clearance mm
F Feedrate mm/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Face B
 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/B and peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
TR Reference tool Tool, which is used in the "solid machining" machining step. This is
used to determine the residual corners.
D Cutting edge number
Z0 Reference point in the tool axis Z mm

Turning
434 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Z1 Pocket depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
DXY  Maximum plane infeed mm
%
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
DZ Maximum depth infeed
Lift mode Lift mode before new infeed
If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height can
be programmed:
 To retraction plane mm
 Z0 + safety clearance mm
When making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, then Z0 (X0) + safety
clearance can be programmed as the lift mode.

8.5.12 Milling contour spigot (CYCLE63)

Function
You can use the "Mill spigot" function to mill any spigots on the face or peripheral surface.
Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and then one or more spigot
contours. The blank contour defines the area, outside of which there is no material, i.e. there,
the tool moves with rapid traverse. Material is then removed between the blank contour and
spigot contour.

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 435
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Machining type
You can select the machining type (roughing, base finishing, edge finishing, chamfer) for
milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (block
1 = roughing, block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained when the cycle
is called for the second time.

Approach/retraction
1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction
plane and is fed in to the safety clearance. The cycle calculates the starting point.
2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches the spigot contour from
the side in a quadrant at machining feedrate.
3. The spigot is machined in parallel with the contours from the outside in. The direction is
determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program
settings").
4. When the first plane of the spigot has been machined, the tool retracts from the contour
in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.
5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and machine in parallel with the contours
from outside in.
6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.
7. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot" softkeys.
The "Mill spigot" input window opens.

3. Select the "Roughing" machining type.

Turning
436 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Milling direction  Climbing F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth
 Conventional

RP Retraction plane mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

SC Safety clearance mm
F Feedrate mm/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Face B
 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/B and peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇∇ base (base finishing)
 ∇∇∇ edge (edge finishing)
 Chamfering
Z0 Reference point in tool axis Z mm
Z1 Pocket depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 or X0 (inc) mm
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
 Maximum plane infeed mm
DXY %
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
- (only for ∇ and ∇∇∇ base)
DZ Maximum depth infeed mm
– (only for ∇ or ∇∇∇ edge)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 437
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

UXY Finishing allowance, plane mm
– (only for ∇, ∇∇∇ base or ∇∇∇ edge)
UZ Finishing allowance, depth mm
– (only for ∇ or ∇∇∇ base)
Lift mode Lift mode before new infeed
If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height can
be programmed:
 To retraction plane mm
 Z0 + safety clearance mm
When making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If mm
there are no elements larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, then Z0 (X0) + safety
clearance can be programmed as the lift mode.
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (only for chamfering machining) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering machining only) mm

8.5.13 Contour spigot residual material (CYCLE63, option)

Function
When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains, then this is
automatically detected. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without
having to machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary non-productive motion.
Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.
The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter used for clearing.
If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, clear all the
spigots first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual
material, you also have to enter a value for the reference tool TR parameter, which, for the
ShopTurn program, additionally appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then
program as follows:
1. Contour blank 1
2. Contour spigot 1
3. Clear spigot 1
4. Contour blank 2
5. Contour spigot 2
6. Clear spigot 2
7. Contour blank 1
8. Contour spigot 1
9. Clear residual material spigot 1
10.Contour blank 2

Turning
438 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

11.Contour spigot 2
12.Clear residual material spigot 2

Software option
For solid machining residual material, you require the option "residual material
detection and machining".

Clamping the spindle

For ShopTurn, the "Clamp spindle" function can be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
Clamping the spindle (Page 209)

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat." softkeys.

The "Spigot Res. Mat." input window opens.

3. For the ShopTurn program, press the "All parameters" softkey if you
want to enter additional parameters.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 439
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PRG Name of the program to be generated T Tool name
PL Machining plane D Cutting edge number

Milling direction  Climbing F Feedrate mm/min

mm/tooth
 Conventional

RP Retraction plane mm S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm

cutting rate m/min

SC Safety clearance mm
F Feedrate mm/min

Parameter Description Unit

Machining The following machining technologies can be selected:
 ∇ (roughing)
Machining  Face C
surface
 Face Y
(only for
ShopTurn)  Face B
 Peripheral surface C
 Peripheral surface Y
Clamp/release spindle (only for end face Y/B and peripheral surface Y)
The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

(only for
ShopTurn)
TR Reference tool Tool, which is used in the "solid machining" machining step. This is
used to determine the residual corners.
D Cutting edge number
Z0 Reference point in tool axes Z mm
Pocket depth (abs) or depth referred to Z0 mm
Z1
CP Positioning angle for machining area Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, face Y)
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
- (only for ShopTurn, machining surface, peripheral surface Y)
 Maximum plane infeed mm
DXY %
 Maximum plane infeed as a percentage of the milling cutter diameter
DZ Maximum depth infeed

Turning
440 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.5 Contour milling

Parameter Description Unit

Lift mode Lift mode before new infeed
If the machining operation requires several points of insertion, the retraction height can
be programmed:
 To retraction plane mm
 Z0 + safety clearance mm
When making the transition to the next insertion point, the tool returns to this height. If
there are no elements larger than Z0 in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance" can be
selected as the lift mode.
FS Chamfer width for chamfering - (only for chamfering machining) mm
ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) - (for chamfering machining only) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 441
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

8.6 Further cycles and functions

8.6.1 Swiveling plane / aligning tool (CYCLE800)

The CYCLE800 swivel cycle is used to swivel to any surface in order to either machine or
measure it. In this cycle, the active workpiece zeros and the work offsets are converted to
the inclined surface taking into account the kinematic chain of the machine by calling the
appropriate NC functions and rotary axes (optionally) are positioned.
Swiveling can be realized:
● axis-by-axis
● via solid angle
● via projection angle
● directly
Before the rotary axes are positioned, the linear axes can be retracted if desired.
Swiveling always means three geometry axes.
In the basic version, the following functions
● 3 + 2 axes, inclined machining and
● Toolholder with orientation capability
are available.

Setting/aligning tools for a G code program

The swivel function also includes the "Setting tool", "Align milling tool" and "Align turning tool"
functions. When setting and aligning, contrary to swiveling, the coordinate system (WCS) is
not rotated at the same time.

Prerequisites before calling the swivel cycle

A tool (tool cutting edge D > 0) and the work offset (WO), with which the workpiece was
scratched or measured, must be programmed before the swivel cycle is first called in the
main program.
Example:

N1 T1D1
N2 M6
N3 G17 G54
N4 CYCLE800(1,"",0,57,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,0,1)) ;swivel ZERO to
;initial position of the
;machine kinematics
N5 WORKPIECE(,,,,"BOX",0,0,50,0,0,0,100,100) ;blank declaration for
;simulation and
;simultaneous recording

Turning
442 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

For machines where swivel is set-up, each main program with a swivel should start in the
initial position of the machine.
The definition of the blank (WORKPIECE) always refers to the currently effective work offset.
For programs that use "swivel", a swivel to zero must be made before the blank is defined.
For ShopTurn programs, the blank in the program header is automatically referred to the
unswiveled state.
In the swivel cycle, the work offset (WO) as well as the shifts and rotations of the parameters
of the CYCLE800 are converted to the corresponding machining plane. The work offset is
kept. Shifts and rotations are saved in system frames - the swivel frames (displayed under
parameter/work offsets):
● Tool reference ($P_TOOLFRAME)
● Rotary table reference ($P_PARTFRAME)
● Workpiece reference ($P_WPFRAME)
The swivel cycle takes into account the actual machining plane (G17, G18, G19).
Swiveling on a machining or auxiliary surface always involves 3 steps:
● Shifting the WCS before rotation
● Rotating the WCS (axis-by-axis, ...)
● Shifting the WCS after rotation
The shifts and rotations refer to the coordinate system X, Y, Z of the workpiece and are
therefore independent of the machine (with the exception of swivel "rotary axis direct").
No programmable frames are used in the swivel cycle. The frames programmed by the user
are taken into account for additive swiveling.
On the other hand, when swiveling to a new swivel plane, the programmable frames are
deleted. Any type of machining operation can be performed on the swivel plane, e.g. by
calling standard or measuring cycles.
The last swivel plane remains active after a program reset or when the power fails. The
behavior at reset and power on can be set using machine data.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Block search when swiveling the plane / swiveling the tool

For block search with calculation, after NC start, initially, the automatic rotary axes of the
active swivel data set are pre-positioned and then the remaining machine axes are
positioned. This does not apply if a type TRACYL or TRANSMIT transformation is active
after the block search. In this case, all axes simultaneously move to the accumulated
positions.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 443
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Aligning tools
The purpose of the "Align turning tool" function is to support turning machines with a swivel-
mounted B axis. The position and orientation of the turning tool can be changed by rotating
swivel axis B (around Y) and the tool spindle.
In contrast to "Swivel plane", no rotation is operative in the active work offsets in the
workpiece coordinate system in the case of "Align tool".
The maximum angular range for "Align milling tool" is limited by the traversing range of the
participating rotary axes. Technological limits are also placed on the angular range
depending on the tool used.
When aligning the tool, using the CUTMOD NC command, the tool data are calculated online
based on the tool orientation (positions of the B axis and the tool spindle). For a turning tool,
this involves the cutting edge position, the holder angle and the cut direction.

Name of swivel data set

Selecting the swivel data set or deselecting the swivel data set.
The selection can be hidden by the machine data.
For "Swivel plane" and "Swivel tool" / "Set tool", only the swivel data sets are available for
selection where no B axis kinematics, turning technology has been set.
"Swivel tool" / "Align tool", only the swivel data sets are available for selection where B axis
kinematics, turning technology has been set.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Approaching a machining operation

When approaching the programmed machining operation in the swiveled plane, under worst
case conditions, the software limit switches could be violated. In this case, the system travels
along the software limit switches above the retraction plane. In the event of violation below
the retraction plane, for safety reasons, the program is interrupted with an alarm. To avoid
this, before swiveling, e.g. move the tool in the X/Y plane and position it as close as possible
to the starting point of the machining operation or define the retraction plane closer to the
workpiece.

Retraction
Before swiveling the axes you can move the tool to a safe retraction position. The retraction
versions available are defined when starting up the system (commissioning).
The retraction mode is modal. When a tool is changed or after a block search, the retraction
mode last set is used.

Turning
444 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

WARNING
Risk of collision
You must select a retraction position that avoids a collision between the tool and workpiece
when swiveling.

Swivel plane (only for G code programming)

● New
Previous swivel frames and programmed frames are deleted and a new swivel frame is
formed according to the values specified in the input screen.
Every main program must begin with a swivel cycle with the new swivel plane, in order to
ensure that a swivel frame from another program is not active.
● Additive
The swivel frame is added to the swivel frame from the last swivel cycle.
If several swivel cycles are programmed in a program and programmable frames are also
active between them (e.g., AROT ATRANS), these are taken into account in the swivel
frame.
If the currently active WO contains rotations, e.g., due to previous workpiece measuring
operations, they will be taken into account in the swivel cycle.

Swivel mode
Swiveling can either be realized axis-by-axis, using the angle in space, using the projection
angle or directly. The machine manufacturer determines when setting up the "Swivel
plane/swivel tool" function which swivel methods are available.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 445
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

● Axis by axis
In the case of axis-by-axis swiveling, the coordinate system is rotated about each axis in
turn, with each rotation starting from the previous rotation. The axis sequence can be
freely selected.
● Solid angle
With the solid angle swiveling option, the tool is first rotated about the Z axis and then
about the Y axis. The second rotation starts from the first.
● Projection angle
When swiveling using the projection angle, the angle value of the swiveled surface is
projected onto the first two axes of the right-angle coordinate system. The user can freely
select the axis rotation sequence.
The 3rd rotation is based on the previous rotation. The active plane and the tool
orientation must be taken into consideration when the projection angle is used:
– For G17 projection angle XY, 3rd rotation around Z
– For G18 projection angle ZX, 3rd rotation around Y
– For G19 projection angle YZ, 3rd rotation around X
When projection angles around XY and YX are programmed, the new X-axis of the swiveled
coordinate system lies in the old ZX plane.
When projection angles around XZ and ZX are programmed, the new Z-axis of the swiveled
coordinate system lies in the old Y-Z plane.
When projection angles around YZ and ZY are programmed, the new Y-axis of the swiveled
coordinate system lies in the old X-Y plane.
● directly
For direct swiveling, the required positions of the rotary axes are specified. The HMI
calculates a suitable new coordinate system based on these values. The tool axis is
aligned in the Z direction. You can derive the resulting direction of the X and Y axis by
traversing the axes.

Note
Direction of rotation
The positive direction of each rotation for the different swivel versions is shown in the
help displays.

Axis sequence
Sequence of the axes which are rotated around:
XYZ or XZY or YXZ or YZX or ZXY or ZYX

Turning
446 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Direction (minus/plus)
Direction reference of traversing direction of rotary axis 1 or 2 of the active swivel data set
(machine kinematics). The NC calculates two possible solutions of the rotation / offset
programmed in CYCLE800 using the angle traversing range of the rotary axes of the
machine kinematics. Usually, only one of these solutions is technologically suitable. The
solutions differ by 180 degrees in each case. Selecting the "minus" or "plus" direction
determines which of the two possible solutions is to be applied.
● "Minus" → Lower rotary axis value
● "Plus" → Higher rotary axis value
Also in the basic setting (pole setting) of the machine kinematics, the NC calculates two
solutions and these are approached by CYCLE800. The reference is the rotary axis that was
set as direction reference when commissioning the "swivel" function.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

If one of the two positions cannot be reached for mechanical reasons, the alternative position
is automatically selected irrespective of the setting of the "Direction" parameter.
Example:
● Machine kinematics with swivel head and swivel table.
Swivel head with rotary axis 1 (B) rotates around machine axis Y.
● Angular traversing range of rotary axis B from -90 to +90 degrees.
● Swivel table with rotary axis 2 (C) rotates around machine axis Z.
● Angle traversing range of rotary axis 2 (C) from 0 to 360 degrees (modulo 360).
● Machine manufacturer has set the direction reference to rotary axis 1 (B) when he
commissioned the swivel function.
● A rotation around X (WCS) of 10 degrees is programmed in the swivel cycle.
The machine in the basic setting (pole setting) of the kinematics (B = 0 C = 0) is shown in the
following diagram.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 447
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

● Direction "-" (minus)

– Rotary axis B moves to -10 degrees in the negative direction (red arrow).
– Rotary axis C moves to 90 degrees (rotation around X!).
● Direction "+" (plus)
– Rotary axis B moves to +10 degrees in the positive direction (red arrow).
– Rotary axis C moves to 270 degrees.
The two "Minus" or "Plus" direction settings enable a workpiece to be machined with
swiveled planes. The two solutions calculated by the NC differ by 180 degrees (see rotary
axis C).

Tool
To avoid collisions, you can use the 5-axis transformation (software option) to define the
position of the tool tip during swiveling.
● Correct
The position of the tool tip is corrected during swiveling (tracking function).
● No correction
The position of the tool tip is not corrected during swiveling.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Select the "Miscellaneous" softkey.

3. Press the "Swivel plane" softkey.

The "Swivel plane" input window opens.
4. Press the "Initial position" if you wish to reestablish the basic setting, i.e.
you wish to set the values back to 0.
This is done, for example, to swivel the coordinate system back to its
original orientation.

Turning
448 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Parameters, G code program Parameters, ShopTurn program

PL Machining plane T Tool name

D Cutting edge number

Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or constant rpm
cutting rate m/min

Parameter Description Unit

TC Name of swivel data set
Retract  No: No retraction before swiveling
- (only for G
 Z: Retraction in the direction of machine axis Z
code)
 Z, X, Y: Move machining axis to retraction position before swiveling
 Tool direction, max.: Maximum retraction (up to the software end position) in the
tool direction
 Tool direction, inc.: Retraction, incremental (up to the software end position) in the
tool direction

When retracting in the tool direction, in the swiveled machine state, several axes
can move (travel).
ZR Retraction path - (only for incremental retraction in the tool direction) mm
Swivel plane  New: New swivel plane
- (only for G
 Additive: Additive swivel plane
code)
RP - (only for Retraction plane for face B
ShopTurn)
C0 - (only for Position angle for machining surface Degrees
ShopTurn)
X0 Reference point for rotation X
Y0 Reference point for rotation Y
Z0 Reference point for rotation Z
Swivel mode  axis-by-axis: Swivel coordinate system axis-by-axis
 Solid angle: Swivel via solid angle
 Proj. angle: Swiveling via projection angle
 Direct: Position rotary axes directly
Axis sequence Sequence of the axes which are rotated around - (only for axis-by-axis swivel mode)
XYZ or XZY or YXZ or YZX or ZXY or ZYX
X Rotation around X - (only for axis sequence) Degrees
Y Rotation around Y Degrees
Z Rotation around Z Degrees

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 449
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Parameter Description Unit

Projection Position of the projection in space - (only for swivel mode, projection angle)
position Xα, Yα, Zβ or Yα, Zα, Zβ or Zα, Xα, Zβ
Xα Projection angle - (only for projection position) Degrees
Yα Projection angle Degrees
Zβ Angle of rotation in the plane Degrees
Z Angle of rotation in the plane Degrees
X1 Zero point of rotated surface X
Y1 Zero point of rotated surface Y
Z1 Zero point of rotated surface Z
Direction - (only Preferred direction, rotary axis 1 - (not for swivel mode direct)
for G code)
 +
 -
Tool - (only for Tool tip when swiveling
G code)
 Follow up

The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.

 No follow up

The position of the tool tip is not maintained during swiveling.

8.6.2 Swiveling tool (CYCLE800)

8.6.2.1 Orienting turning tools - only for G code program (CYCLE800)

Function
The purpose of the "Align milling tool" or "Align turning tool" function is to support combined
milling machines - lathes with a B axis that can be swiveled.
This functionality is specifically addressing certain configurations of milling machines, which
have been expanded by turning functionality. Tool orientation in the turning mode is realized
using a swivel axis B (swiveling around Y) with an associated milling spindle (e.g. C1). It is
designed to be compatible with both turning and milling tools.
In contrast to "Swivel plane", no rotation is operative in the active work offsets in the
workpiece coordinate system in the case of "Align tool". Only the offsets calculated by the
NC and the corresponding tool orientation are effective.
The maximum angular range for "Align tool" is + 360 degrees or it is limited by the traversing
range of the participating rotary axes. Technological limits are also placed on the angular
range depending on the tool used. When aligning the tool, the data of the tool is calculated
based on the tool orientation using the CUTMOD NC command. For a turning tool, this
involves the cutting edge position, the holder angle and the cut direction.

Turning
450 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

The use of the "Align milling tool" function is restricted to milling operations in parallel with
the axis (face, peripheral machining) at a machine with a B axis that can be swiveled. If
milling is to be possible on any swiveled machining plane, then the "swivel plane" function
must be used.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The part program to be executed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Select the "Miscellaneous" softkey.

3. Press the "Swivel tool" and "Align turning tool" softkeys.

The "Align turning tool" input window opens.

Parameters Description Unit

TC Name of the swivel data set
Retract  No: No retraction before swiveling
 Z: Retraction in the direction of machine axis Z
 Tool direction, max.: Maximum retraction in tool direction
 Tool direction, inc.: Incremental retraction in tool direction
ZR Retraction path - (only for incremental retraction in the tool direction)
β Rotation around the 3rd geometry axis (for G18 Y) Degrees
γ Rotation around the turning tool Degrees
Tool  Follow up

The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.

 No follow up

The position of the tool tip is not maintained during swiveling.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 451
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

8.6.2.2 Orienting milling tools - only for G code program (CYCLE800)

Procedure

1. The part program to be executed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Press the "Various" softkey.

3. Press the "Swivel tool" and "Align milling tool" softkeys.

The "Align milling tool" input window opens.

Parameter Description Unit

TC Name of the swivel data set
Retract  No: No retraction before swiveling
 Z: Retraction in the direction of machine axis Z
 Tool direction, max.: Maximum retraction in tool direction
 Tool direction, inc.: Incremental retraction in tool direction
ZR Retraction path - (only for incremental retraction in the tool direction)
β Rotation around the 3rd geometry axis (for G18 Y) Degrees
Tool Tool tip when swiveling
 Correct

The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.

 No correction

The position of the tool tip is not maintained during swiveling.

Turning
452 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

8.6.2.3 Preloading milling tools - only for G code program (CYCLE800)

After "Swivel plane", the tool orientation is always perpendicular on the machining plane.
When milling with radial cutters, it can make technological sense to set the tool at an angle
to the normal surface vector. In the swivel cycle, the setting angle is generated by an axis
rotation (max. +/- 90 degrees) to the active swivel plane. When setting, the swivel plane is
always “additive”. With "Setting tool", only rotations are displayed on the swivel cycle input
screen form. The user can freely select the rotation sequence.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

7RROOHQJWK

7&3

5 7&3

Figure 8-1 The length up to the TCP (Tool Center Point) must be entered as tool length of the radial
cutter.

Procedure

1. The part program to be executed has been created and you are in the
editor.
2. Press the "Various" softkey.

3. Press the "Swivel tool" and "Setting milling tool" softkeys.

The "Setting tool" input window opens.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 453
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Parameter Description Unit

TC Name of the swivel data set
Retraction  No: No retraction before swiveling
 Z: Retraction in the direction of machine axis Z
 Z, X, Y: Move machining axis to retraction position before swiveling
 Tool direction, max.: Maximum retraction in tool direction
 Tool direction, inc.: Incremental retraction in tool direction
ZR Retraction path - (only for incremental retraction in the tool direction)
Axis sequence Sequence of the axes which are rotated around
XY or XZ or YX or YZ or ZX or ZY
X Rotation around X Degrees
Y Rotation around Y Degrees
Tool Tool tip when swiveling
 Correct

The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.

 No correction

The position of the tool tip is not maintained during swiveling.

8.6.3 High-speed settings (CYCLE832)

Function
Machining of free-form surfaces involves high requirements regarding velocity, precision and
surface quality.
You can achieve optimum velocity control depending on the type of processing (roughing,
rough-finishing, finishing) very simply with the "High Speed Settings" cycle.
Program the cycle in the technology program before the geometry program is called.
The "High Speed Settings" cycle is also in conjunction with the "Advanced Surface" function.

Software option
You require the software option in order to use this function:
"Advanced Surface"

Turning
454 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Machining methods
With the "High Speed Settings" function, you can select between four technological
machining types:
● "Finishing"
● "Rough-finishing"
● "Roughing"
● "Deselected" (default setting)
For CAM programs in the HSC range, the four machining types directly relate to the
accuracy and speed of the path contour (see help screen).
The operator/programmer uses the tolerance value to give a corresponding weighting.
Corresponding to the appropriate G commands, the four machining types are assigned to
technology G group 59:

Machining type Technology G group 59

Deselection DYNNORM
Finishing DYNFINISH
Rough-finishing DYNSEMIFIN
Roughing DYNROUGH

Additional G commands that are available in conjunction with machining free-form surfaces,
are also activated in the High Speed Settings cycle.
When deselecting CYCLE832, the G groups are programmed to the settings - during the
program run time - that are declared in the machine data for the reset state.

References
For additional information, please refer to the following documentation:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 455
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Procedure

1. The part program or ShopTurn program to be processed has been

created and you are in the editor.
2. Select the "Miscellaneous" softkey.

3. Press the ">>" softkey.

4. Press the "High Speed Settings" softkey.

The "High Speed Settings" input window is opened.

Parameter Description Unit

Tolerance Tolerance of the machining axis
Machining  ∇ (roughing)
 ∇∇ (pre-finishing)
 ∇∇∇ (finishing)
 Deselection

8.6.4 Subroutines
If you require the same machining steps in the programming of different workpieces, you can
define these machining steps in a separate subprogram. You can then call this subprogram
in any program.
Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.
ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and subprograms. This means that
you can call a "standard" machining step or G code program in another machining step
program as subprogram. In the subprogram, you can also call another subprogram. The
maximum nesting depth is 8 subprograms.

Note
You cannot insert subprograms in linked blocks.

If you want to call a machining step program as subprogram, the program must already have
been calculated once (load or simulate program in the "Machine Auto" mode). This is not
necessary for G code subprograms.
The subprogram must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory
"XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", and “Subprograms" directories).
If you want to call a subprogram located on another drive, you can use G code command
"EXTCALL".

Turning
456 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Program header
Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program header of the
subprogram, excluding the blank settings, when the subprogram is called. These settings
also remain active even after the subprogram has been exited.
If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you
can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subprogram.

Procedure

1. Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call as a

subprogram in another program.
2. Position the cursor in the work plan or in the program view of the main
program on the program block after which you wish to call the
subprogram.
3. Press the "Various" and "Subprogram" softkeys.

4. Enter the path of the subprogram if the desired subprogram is not

stored in the same directory as the main program.
5. Enter the name of the subprogram that you want to insert.
You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the
subprogram does not have the file extension specified for the directory
in which the subprogram is stored.
6. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The subprogram call is inserted in the main program.

Parameter Description
Path/workpiece Path of the subprogram if the desired subprogram is not stored in the same
directory as the main program.
Program name Name of the subprogram that is to be inserted.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 457
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.6 Further cycles and functions

Programming example

N10 T1 D1 ;Load tool

N11 M6
N20 G54 G710 ;Select work offset
N30 M3 S12000 ;Switch-on spindle
N40 CYCLE832(0.05,3,1) ;Tolerance value 0.05 mm, machining type,
roughing
N50 EXTCALL"CAM_SCHRUPP" Externally call subprogram CAM_SCHRUPP
N60 T2 D1 ;Load tool
N61 M6
N70 CYCLE832(0.005,1,1) ;Tolerance value 0.005 mm, machining
type, finishing
N80 EXTCALL"CAM_SCHLICHT" ;Call subprogram CAM_SCHLICHT
N90 M30 ;End of program

The subprograms CAM_SCHRUPP.SPF, CAM_SCHLICHT.SPF contain the workpiece

geometry and the technological values (feedrates). These are externally called due to the
program size.

Turning
458 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.1 Drilling centric

Function
Using the "Drill centric" cycle, you can perform drilling operations at the center of a face
surface.
You can choose between chip breaking during drilling or retraction from the workpiece for
stock removal. During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.You can
use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.
The tool is moved with rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the return
plane and safety clearance.

Approach/retraction during chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.
2. For chipbreaking, the tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the next
infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.
3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has
expired.
4. The tool retracts to the safety clearance with rapid traverse.

Approach/retraction during stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.
2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece with rapid traverse to the safety clearance for
swarth removal and is then re-inserted at the 1st infeed depth in the automatic mode
reduced by an anticipation distance calculated by the control system.
3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF
and the tool retracts again to Z0 + safety clearance for stock removal.
4. Step 3 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has
expired.
5. The tool retracts to the safety clearance with rapid traverse.
For example, if you want to drill very deep holes, you can also employ a rotating tool spindle.
First specify the required tool and tool spindle speed under "Straight/Circle" → "Tool". Then
program the "Drill centered" function.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 459
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be edited has been created and you are in
the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" and "Drill centric" softkeys.
The "Drilling centered" input window opens.

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
S/V Spindle speed or rpm
constant cutting rate m/min
Machining  Chipbreaking
 Stock removal
Z0 Reference point Z
Drilling depth Referred to
 Shank
The drill is inserted until the drill shank reaches the value programmed for Z1. The
angle entered in the tool list is taken into account.
 Tip
The drill is inserted until the drill tip reaches the value programmed for Z1.
Z1 Final drilling depth X (abs) or final drilling depth in relation to Z0 (inc)
D Maximum depth infeed
FD1 Percentage for the feedrate for the first infeed %
DF  Percentage for each additional infeed or %
mm
 Amount for each additional infeed
DF = 100: Infeed increment remains constant
DF < 100: Infeed increment is reduced in direction of final drilling depth.
Example: DF = 80
Last infeed was 4 mm;
4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm
3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.
V1 Minimum depth infeed
Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed.
A minimum infeed is programmed using parameter V1.
V2 Retraction distance after each machining step – (only for "chipbreaking" operation)

Turning
460 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Clearance - (only for "stock removal" operation)
distance
 Manual
 Automatic
V3 Clearance distance – (for "manual" clearance distance only)
DT  Dwell time in seconds s
rev
 Dwell time in revolutions

8.7.2 Thread centered

Function
Using the "Centered tapping" cycle, tap a righthand or lefthand thread at the center of the
face surface.
During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.You can alter the spindle
speed via the spindle override; feedrate override is not operative.
You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock
removal.
The tool is moved with rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction
plane and safety clearance.

Approach/retraction in one cut

1. The tool drills in the direction of the longitudinal axis at the programmed spindle speed S
or cutting rate V as far as the final drilling depth Z1.
2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety
clearance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cutting rate VR.

Approach/retraction for stock removal

1. The tool drills in the direction of the longitudinal axis at the programmed spindle speed S
or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or
cutting rate VR for stock removal.
3. Then the tool is inserted again at spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next
infeed depth.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety
clearance at spindle speed SR or cutting rate VR.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 461
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Approach/retraction for chipbreaking

1. The tool drills in the direction of the longitudinal axis at the programmed spindle speed S
or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).
2. The tool retracts by the retraction clearance V2 for chipbreaking.
3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or feedrate V.
4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.
5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety
clearance at spindle speed SR or cutting rate VR.
The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for centered tapping in a
machine data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the "Drilling" and "Drill centric" and "Thread centric" softkeys.
The "Centric tapping" input window opens.

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
F Feedrate mm/min
mm/rev
Table Thread table selection:
 without
 ISO metric
 Whitworth BSW
 Whitworth BSP
 UNC

Turning
462 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Selection Selection, table value:
 M1 - M68 (ISO metric)
 W3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSW)
 G3/4"; etc. (Whitworth BSP)
 1" - 8 UNC; etc. (UNC)
P Pitch ...
- (selection  in MODULUS: MODULUS = Pitch/π MODULUS
only possible for mm/rev
 in mm/rev
table selection in/rev
"without")  in inch/rev turns/"
 in turns per inch: Used with pipe threads, for example.

When entered per inch, enter the integer number in front of the decimal point in the
first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the
second and third field.
The pitch is determined by the tool used.
S/V Spindle speed or rpm
constant cutting rate m/min
SR Spindle speed for retraction rev/min
VR Constant cutting rate for retraction m/min
Machining  1. Cut
The thread is drilled in one cut without interruption.
 Chipbreaking
The drill is retracted by the retraction distance V2 for chipbreaking.
 Stock removal
The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal.
Z0 Reference point Z) mm
Z1 End point of the thread (abs) or thread length (inc) mm
D Maximum depth infeed - (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm
Retraction - (only for "chipbreaking" operation)
Retraction distance
 Manual
 Automatic
V2 Retraction distance (only for "manual" retraction) mm
Distance through which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking.
V2 = automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 463
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.3 Transformations
To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate system. Use this possibility,
for example, to rotate the coordinate system.
Coordinate transformations only apply in the actual program.
You can define the following transformations:
● Offset
● Rotation
● Scaling
● Mirroring
● Rotation C axis
You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation.
In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined coordinate
transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation acts in addition to the
currently selected coordinate transformations.

Note
Transformations with virtual axes
Please note that when selecting TRANSMIT or TRACYL offsets, scaling and mirroring, the
real Y axis is not transferred into the virtual Y axis.
Offsets, scalings and mirroring of the virtual Y axis are deleted for TRAFOOF.

Procedure for work offset, offset, rotation, scaling, mirroring or rotation C axis.

1. The ShopTurn program has been created and you are in the editor.
2. Press the "Various" and "Transformation" softkeys.

3. Press the "Work offsets” softkey.

The "Work offsets" input window opens.
- OR -
Press the "Offset" softkey.
The "Offset" input window opens.
- OR -
Press the "Rotation" softkey.
The "Rotate" input window opens.
- OR -

Turning
464 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Press the "Scaling" softkey.

The "Scaling" input window opens.
- OR -
Press the "Mirroring" softkey.
The "Mirroring" input window opens.
- OR -
Press the "Rotation C axis" softkey.
The "Rotation C axis" input window opens.

8.7.4 Translation
For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.

New offset Additive offset

Parameters Description Unit

Offset  New

New offset
 Additive

Additive offset
Z Offset Z mm
X Offset X mm
Y Offset Y mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 465
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.5 Rotation
You can rotate every axis through a specific angle. A positive angle corresponds to
counterclockwise rotation.

New rotation Additive rotation

Parameters Description Unit

Rotation  New
 New rotation
Z Rotation around Z Degrees
X Rotation around X Degrees
Y Rotation around Y Degrees

Turning
466 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.6 Scaling
You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The
programmed coordinates are then multiplied by this factor.

New scaling Additive scaling

Parameters Description Unit

Scaling  New

New scaling
 Additive

Additive scaling
ZX Scale factor ZX
Y Scale factor Y

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 467
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.7 Mirroring
Furthermore, you can mirror all axes. Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.

Note
Travel direction of the milling cutter
Note that with mirroring, the travel direction of the cutting tool (conventional/climb) is also
mirrored.

New mirroring Additive mirroring

Table 8- 1

Parameters Description Unit

Mirroring  New

New mirroring
 Additive

Additive mirroring
Z Mirroring of the Z axis, on/off
X Mirroring of the X axis, on/off
Y Mirroring of the Y axis, on/off

Turning
468 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.8 Rotation C
You can rotate the C axis through a specific angle to enable subsequent machining
operations to be performed at a particular position on the face or peripheral surface.
The direction of rotation is set in a machine data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

New C axis rotation Additive C axis rotation

Parameters Description Unit

Rotation  New

New rotation
 Additive

Additive rotation
C Rotation C Degrees

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 469
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.9 Straight and circular machining

If you want to perform simple, i.e. straight or circular path movements or machining without
defining a complete contour, you can use the functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.

General sequence
To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:
● Specify the tool and the spindle speed
● Program the machining operations

Machining options
The following machining options are available:
● Straight line
● Circle with known center point
● Circle with known radius
● Straight line with polar coordinates
● Circle with polar coordinates
If you want to program a straight line or a circle using polar coordinates, you must define the
pole first.

CAUTION

If you retract the tool to the retraction area defined in the program header using either
straight or circular path motion, then you must carefully ensure that a collision cannot occur
as a result of the normal retraction logic.
To be on the safe side, you should also move the tool back out of the retraction area again.

Turning
470 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.10 Selecting a tool and machining plane

Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool, spindle, spindle speed
and machining plane.
If you program a sequence of different straight or circular path motions, the settings for the
tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane remain active until you change them again.
If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the coordinates of the
programmed path motion are automatically adjusted to the new machining plane. The
originally programmed coordinates remain unchanged only for a straight motion (right-
angled, not polar).

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.

2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Tool" softkey.

The "Tool" window is opened.
4. Enter a tool into parameter field "T".
- OR -
Press the "Select tool" softkey if you want to select a tool from the tool
list, position the cursor on the tool that you wish to use for the machining
operation and press the "To program" softkey.
The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.
5. Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several cutting
edges.
6. In the lefthand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main spindle,
tool spindle or counterspindle.
7. Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate.
8. In the selection box "Plane selection", select between the machining
planes.
9. Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane
peripheral surface C.
- OR -
Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you selected
machining plane face Y.
- OR -
Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane peripheral
surface Y.
- OR -

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 471
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or whether

there should be no change (input field left blank).
Press the "Accept" softkey.
The values are saved and the window is closed. The process plan is
displayed and the newly generated program block is marked.

Parameters Description Unit

T Tool name
D Cutting edge number
S1 / V1 Spindle speed or rpm
constant cutting rate m/min
Plane selection Select between the following machining surfaces:
 Peripheral surface/Peripheral C
 Peripheral surface Y - only if there is a Y axis
 Face/Face C
 Face Y - only if there is a Y axis
 Turning
∅ Diameter of the cylinder (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C) mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining area (for peripheral surface Y) Degrees
CP Positioning angle for machining area (for face Y) Degrees

8.7.11 Programming a straight line

When you want to program a straight line in right-angled coordinates, you can use the
"Straight" function.
The tool moves along a straight line at the programmed feedrate or at rapid traverse from its
actual position to the programmed end position.

Radius compensation
Alternately, you can implement the straight line with radius compensation. The radius
compensation acts modally, therefore you must deactivate the radius compensation again
when you want to traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks
with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius
compensation only in the first program block.
When executing the first path motion with radius compensation, the tool traverses without
compensation at the starting point and with compensation at the end point. This means that
if a vertical path is programmed, the tool traverses an oblique path. The compensation is not
applied over the entire traversing path until the second programmed path motion with radius
compensation is executed. The reverse effect occurs when radius compensation is
deactivated.

Turning
472 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

3URJUDPPHG
3URJUDPPHG
3DWK
3DWK

7UDYHUVLQJ 7UDYHUVLQJ
SDWK SDWK

Straight line when selecting radius Straight line when deselecting radius
compensation compensation

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first
straight line with radius compensation or with deactivated radius compensation outside the
workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Straight" softkey.

4. Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid traverse
instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

Parameters Description Unit

X Target position X ∅ (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position Z referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
U Target position (abs) or target position referred to the actual position (inc) mm
C Target angle (abs) or target angle referred to the actual position (inc) Degrees
C1 Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) mm
C3 Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs or inc) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 473
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Z3 Target position of special axis (abs or inc) mm
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
AWZ Target angle (abs) or target angle referred to the actual position (inc) Degrees
GS Target angle (abs) or target angle referred to the actual position (inc) Degrees
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
Alternatively, rapid traverse mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius compensation Input defining which side of the contour the cutter travels in the traversing
direction:
Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used.

8.7.12 Programming a circle with known center point

To program a circle or arc with a known center point, use the "Circle center point" function.
The tool traverses a circular path from its actual position to the programmed target position
at the machining feedrate. The system calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of
the entered interpolation parameter settings I and K.

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Circle center point" softkey.

Turning
474 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of rotation Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the
circle end point:
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

Machining plane, peripheral surface C

Y Target position Y (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
J Circle center point J (ink). mm

K Circle center point K (inc). mm

Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane, peripheral surface Y
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
J Circle center point J (ink). mm

K Circle center point K (inc) mm

Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane face C
X Target position X ∅ (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
I Circle center point I (ink) mm

J Circle center point J (inc) mm

Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane face Y
X Target position X (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
I Circle center point I (inc). mm

J Circle center point J (inc). mm

Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 475
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Machining plane rotation
X Target position X ∅ (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
I Circle center point I (ink). mm

K Circle center point K (inc) mm

Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth

8.7.13 Programming a circle with known radius

To program a circle or arc with a known radius, use the "Circle radius" function.
The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its actual position to the
programmed target position at the machining feedrate. To do this, the system calculates the
position of the circle center point.
You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise direction. Depending on
the direction of rotation, there are two options for approaching the target position from the
current position via an arc of the specified radius.
You can select the arc of your choice by entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.

7DUJHW

 2SHQLQJDQJOHXSWRr
6WDUW 2SHQLQJDQJOHJUHDWHUWKDQr

Figure 8-2 Opening angle

Turning
476 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Circle radius" softkey.

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of rotation Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the
circle end point
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

Machining plane peripheral surface/peripheral surface C

Y Target position Y (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated
Machining plane, peripheral surface Y
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane face/face C
X Target position X (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated
Machining plane face Y
X Target position X (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Y Target position Y (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 477
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Machining plane rotation
X Target position X ∅ (abs) or target position Y referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Z Target position Z (abs) or target position X referred to the last programmed mm
position (inc)
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
R Radius of circular arc mm
The sign determines the type of arc traversed. mm
F Machining feedrate. mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth

8.7.14 Polar coordinates

If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with radius and angles, you
will find it helpful to program these dimensions as polar coordinates.
Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you must define the pole,
i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate system.

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Polar" and "Pole" softkeys.

Turning
478 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Machining plane peripheral surface/peripheral surface C
Y Pole Y (abs) mm
Z Pole Z (abs) or pole Z referred to the last programmed position (inc) mm
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane, peripheral surface Y
Y Pole Y (abs) mm
Z Pole Z (abs) or pole Z referred to the last programmed position (inc) mm
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane face/face C
X Pole X ∅ (abs) mm
Y Pole Y (abs) or pole Y referred to the last programmed position (inc) mm
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane face Y
X Pole X (abs) mm
Y Pole Y (abs) or pole Y referred to the last programmed position (inc) mm
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.
Machining plane rotation
X Pole X (abs) or pole X referred to the last programmed position (inc) mm
Z Z position pole (abs) mm
Note:
Incremental dimension: The sign is also evaluated.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 479
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.15 Straight line polar

When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you can use the "Straight
Polar" function.
A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L and the angle α.
Depending on the selected machining plane, the angle refers to another axis. The direction
in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Rotate Face Peripheral

Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the programmed end point at the
machining feedrate or at rapid traverse.
The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be programmed in absolute
dimensions. You can program any additional lines or arcs also in incremental dimensions.

Radius compensation
Alternately, you can implement the straight line with radius compensation. The radius
compensation acts modally, therefore you must deactivate the radius compensation again
when you want to traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks
with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius
compensation only in the first program block.
For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool approaches the starting point
without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical
path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the
entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The
reverse effect occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

3URJUDPPHG
3URJUDPPHG
3DWK
3DWK

7UDYHUVLQJ 7UDYHUVLQJ
SDWK SDWK

Straight line with selected radius Straight line with deselected radius
compensation compensation

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first
straight line with radius compensation or with deactivated radius compensation outside the
workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

Turning
480 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Polar" and "Straight Polar" softkeys.

4. Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid traverse
instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

Parameters Description Unit

L Distance to the pole, end point mm
α Polar angle to the pole, end point (abs) or Degrees
Polar angle change to the pole, end point (inc)
The sign specifies the direction.
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth
Radius compensation Input defining which side of the contour the cutter travels in the traversing
direction:

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation off

The set radius compensation remains as previously set

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 481
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.16 Circle polar

If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can use the "Circle Polar"
function.
A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by the angle α. Depending on the selected
machining plane, the angle refers to another axis. The direction in which a positive angle
points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Rotate Face Peripheral

Reference axis for angle Z X Y
Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a circular path from its actual position to the programmed end point
(angle) at the machining feedrate. The radius is obtained from the distance between the
actual tool position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point positions are at the
same distance from the pole.
The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be programmed in absolute
dimensions. You can program any additional lines or arcs also in incremental dimensions.

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program to be processed has been created and you are
in the editor.
2. Press the menu forward key and the "Straight Circle" softkey.

3. Press the "Polar" and "Circle Polar" softkeys.

Turning
482 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Direction of rotation Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the
circle end point
Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

α Polar angle to the pole, end point (abs) or Degrees

Polar angle change to the pole, end point (inc)
The sign specifies the direction.
F Machining feedrate mm/rev
mm/min
mm/tooth

8.7.17 Machining with the counterspindle

If your lathe has a counterspindle, you can machine workpieces using turning, drilling and
milling functions on the front and rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually.
Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle must grip the workpiece,
remove it from the main spindle and move it to the new machining position. You can program
these operations with the "Counterspindle" function.

Operations
The following steps are available to program the operations:
● Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle (with limit stop if necessary)
● Withdrawing: Withdrawing the workpiece out of the main spindle with the counterspindle
● Rear side: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the new machining position
● Complete: Gripping, withdrawing (optionally with cutting-off) and rear face
● Front side: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)
If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle machining operation, the
counterspindle is first retracted to the return position defined in a machine data element.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 483
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Teaching in the parking position and angle offset

Teaching the park position is possible only if you have selected the machine coordinate
system (MCS).

1. Manually rotate the counterspindle chuck to the desired position, and

move the tool to the desired position.
2. Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" softkeys.

3. Select the “Gripping” or “Complete” programming step.

4. Select “MCS” tool under the park position.

5. Press the “Teach park pos.” softkey.

The actual tool park position is saved.
6. Press the “Teach angl. offset" softkey.
The actual angular difference between the main and counter spindles
will be saved.

8.7.17.1 Programming example: Machining main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machining

counterspindle
The programming for this operation might look like this:

Programming steps - alternative 1:

● Machining, main spindle
● Gripping
● Withdrawing
● Rear face
● Machining, counterspindle

Programming steps - alternative 2:

● Machining, main spindle
● Complete (gripping, withdrawing and rear face)
● Machining, counterspindle

Turning
484 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

8.7.17.2 Programming example: Machining, counterspindle - without previous transfer

Programming steps
● Rear face
– Work offset
Work offset is only activated
– ZV:
Parameter is not evaluated.
● Machining, counterspindle

Note
Special feature regarding "rear face":
The work offset that you choose in the parameter screen is only activated and not calculated.
This means that the workpiece zero for counterspindle machining should be stored in the
work offset. In addition, parameter ZV is not evaluated.

8.7.17.3 Programming example: Machining bar material

If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several workpieces on the
front and rear face by starting the program just once.

Programming steps - alternative 1:

● Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece zero is stored
● Machining, main spindle
● Complete (withdraw blank: yes; cut-off cycle: yes)
● Cutting-off
● Machining, counterspindle
● End of program with number of workpieces to be machined

Programming steps - alternative 2:

● Start marker
● Machining, main spindle
● Complete (withdraw blank: yes; cutting-off cycle: yes)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 485
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

● Cutting-off
● Machining, counterspindle
● Front face
● End marker
● Repeat from start to end marker

8.7.17.4 Parameters, counterspindle

Parameters Description Unit

Function You can select between 5 different functions:
 Complete
 Gripping
 Withdrawing
 Rear face
 Front face
Function, complete Gripping
Coordinate  Machine coordinate system
system
The park position is specified in the machine coordinate system. Teaching
in the park position and angular offset is only possible in the machine
coordinate system.
 Workpiece coordinate system

The park position is specified in the workpiece coordinate system.

XP Park position of tool in X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm
Flush chuck Flush counterspindle chuck
 Yes
 No
DIR Direction of rotation
 Spindle rotates clockwise
 Spindle rotates counterclockwise
 Spindle does not rotate
S Spindle speed – (only when the spindle rotates) rev/min
α1 Angular offset Degrees
Z1 Transfer position (abs.)
ZR Position, feedrate reduction (abs or inc)
Position from which a reduced feedrate is used.
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev

Turning
486 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Fixed Travel to fixed stop
stop
 Yes

The counterspindle stops at a defined distance away from transfer position

Z1 and then traverses with a defined feedrate up to the fixed stop.
 No

The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Function, complete Withdrawing
Withdraw blank Withdraw complete plank:
 Yes
 No
F Feedrate mm/min
Cutting-off Cutting-off cycle in the following block
cycle
 Yes
 No
Function, complete Rear face
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW
and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved:
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...
ZW Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinate system mm
ZV Offset Z = 0 mm
Workpiece zero is offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

Parameters Description Unit

Function, gripping Teaching in the park position and angular offset is possible
Coordinate  Machine coordinate system
system
The park position is specified in the machine coordinate system. Teaching in
the park position and angular offset is only possible in the machine coordinate
system.
 Workpiece coordinate system

The park position is specified in the workpiece coordinate system.

XP Park position of tool in X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 487
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Flush chuck Flush counterspindle chuck
 Yes
 No
DIR Direction of rotation
 Spindle rotates clockwise
 Spindle rotates counterclockwise
 Spindle does not rotate
S Spindle speed – (only when the spindle rotates) rev/min
α1 Angular offset Degrees
Z1 Transfer position (abs.)
ZR Position, feedrate reduction (abs or inc)
Position from which a reduced feedrate is used.
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
Fixed Travel to fixed stop
stop
 Yes

The counterspindle stops at a defined distance away from transfer position Z1

and then traverses with a defined feedrate up to the fixed stop.
 No

The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Parameters Description Unit

Function, withdrawing
Also take zero point Also take zero point
 Yes
 No
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system offset by Z1 must be saved.
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...
Z1 Amount by which the workpiece is withdrawn from the main spindle (inc)
F Feedrate mm/min

Turning
488 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Parameters Description Unit

Function, rear face
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW
and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved:
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...
ZW Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinate system mm
ZV Offset Z = 0 mm
Workpiece zero is offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

Parameters Description Unit

Function, front face
Work offset Work offset for machining the next front face:
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 489
Programming technology functions (cycles)
8.7 Further cycles and functions ShopTurn

Turning
490 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Multi-channel view 9
9.1 Multi-channel view
The multi-channel view allows you to simultaneously view several channels in the following
operating areas:
● "Machine" operating area
● "Program" operating area

9.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

When a multi-channel machine, you have the option of simultaneously monitoring and
influencing the execution of several programs.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Displaying the channels in the "Machine" operating area

In the "Machine" operating area, you can display 2 - 4 channels simultaneously.
Using the appropriate settings, you can define the sequence in which channels are
displayed. Here, you can also select if you wish to hide a channel.

Note
The sub operating mode "REF POINT" is only shown in the single channel view.

Multi-channel view
2 - 4 channels are simultaneously displayed in channel columns on the user interface.
● 2 windows are displayed one above the other for each channel.
● The actual value display is always in the upper window.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 491
Multi-channel view
9.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

● The same window is displayed for both channels in the lower window.
● You can select the display in the lower window using the vertical softkey bar.
The following exceptions apply when making a selection using the vertical softkeys:
– The "Actual values Machine" softkey switches over the coordinate systems of both
channels.
– The "Zoom actual value" and "All G functions" softkeys switch into the single-channel
view.

Single channel view

If, for your multi-channel machine, you always only wish to monitor one channel, then you
can set a permanent single-channel view.

Horizontal softkeys
● Block search
When selecting the block search, the multi-channel view is kept. The block display is
displayed as search window.
● Program control
The "Program control" window is displayed for the channels configured in the multi-
channel view. The data entered here apply for these channels together.
● If you press an additional horizontal softkey in the "Machine" operating area (e.g.
"Overstore", "Synchronized actions"), then you change into a temporary single-channel
view. If you close the window again, then you return to the multi-channel view.

Switching between single and multi-channel view

Press the <MACHINE> key in order to briefly switch between the single
and multi-channel display in the machine area.

Press the <NEXT WINDOW> key in order to switch between the upper
and lower window within a channel column.

Editing a program in the block display

You can perform simple editing operations as usual in the actual block display.
If there is not sufficient space, you switch over into the single-channel view.

Running-in a program
You select individual channels to run-in the program at the machine.

Turning
492 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel view
9.2 Multi-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

Precondition
● Several channels have been set-up.
● The setting "2 channels", "3 channels" or "4 channels" is selected.

Displaying/hiding a multi-channel view

1. Select the "Machine" operating area

2. Select the operating mode "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO".

...

3. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

4. Press the "Multi-channel view" softkey.

5. In the window "Settings for multi-channel view" in the selection

box "View", select the required entry (e.g. "2 channels") and
define the channels as well as the sequence in which they are
displayed.
In the basic screen for the "AUTO", "MDA" and JOG" operating
modes, the upper window of the lefthand and righthand channel
columns are occupied by the actual value window.
6. Press the "T,S,F" softkey if you wish to view the "T,F,S" window.
The "T,F,S" window is displayed in the lower window of the
lefthand and righthand channel column.

See also
Setting the multi-channel view (Page 496)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 493
Multi-channel view
9.3 Multi-channel view for large operator panels

9.3 Multi-channel view for large operator panels

For the large OP15, OP019 operator panels as well as at the PC, there is more space in the
"Machine", "Program" and "Parameter" operating areas – as well as in all lists – to display
NC blocks, tools etc.
Further, you also have the option of simultaneously displaying more than 2 channels.
This makes it easier for you to identify the machine situation for machines with 3 and more
channels. Further, it makes it simpler for you to generate and run-in three or four-channel
programs.

Supplementary conditions
● OP15, OP19 or PC with a display of at least 1280x1024 pixels
● For operating an OP019, at least one NCU720.2 or 730.2 with 1 GB of RAM or a PCU50
is required

3 / 4-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

If you have selected 3 channels via settings, then 3 or 4 channel columns are displayed next
to one another.

Channel view Display in the "Machine" operating area

3-channel view The following windows are displayed one above the other for each channel:
 Actual value window
 T,F,S window
 Block display window

4-channel view The following windows are displayed one above the other for each channel:
 Actual value window
 T,S,F window
 G functions (the "G functions" softkey is omitted)
 Block display window

Turning
494 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel view
9.3 Multi-channel view for large operator panels

Displaying functions

Channel view Display in the "Machine" operating area

Selection using vertical softkeys:
3-channel view  The T,F,S window is overlaid by pressing one of the vertical softkeys.
4-channel view  The window showing the G codes is overlaid if you press one of the
vertical softkeys.

Selection using horizontal softkeys:

3-channel view /  The block display is overlaid if you press the "Overstore" horizontal softkey
4 channel view
 If you press the "Block search" softkey, then the block display changes
into the single-channel view.

 If you press the "Prog. control" softkey, then the window changes into the
single-channel view.

 If you press one of the horizontal softkeys in the "JOG" operating mode
(e.g. "T,S,M", "Meas. tool", "Positions" etc.), then you change into the
single-channel view.

Toggling between the channels

Press the <CHANNEL> key to toggle between the channels.

Press the <NEXT WINDOW> key to toggle within a channel column

between the three or four windows arranged one above the other.

Note
2-channel display
Contrary to the smaller operator panels, in the "Machine" operating area, for a 2-channel
view, the TFS window is visible.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 495
Multi-channel view
9.4 Setting the multi-channel view

Program operating area

In the editor, just as many programs are displayed next to one another as in the "Machine"
operating area.

Displaying a program
You can define the width of the program in the editor window using the settings in the editor.
This means that you can distribute programs evenly - or you can display the column with the
active program wider.

Channel status
When required, channel messages are displayed in the status display.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

9.4 Setting the multi-channel view

Setting Meaning
View Here, you specify how many channels are displayed.
 1 channel
 2 channels
 3 channels
 4 channels
Channel selection and You specify which channels in which sequence are displayed in the multi-
sequence channel view.
(for "2 - 4 channels"
view)
Visible Here, you specify which channels are displayed in the multi-channel view.
(for "2 - 4 channels" You can quickly hide channels from the view.
view)

Example
Your machine has 6 channels.
You configure channels 1 - 4 for the multi-channel view and define the display sequence
(e.g. 1,3,4,2).

Turning
496 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel view
9.4 Setting the multi-channel view

In the multi-channel view, for a channel switchover, you can only switch between the
channels configured for the multi-channel view; all others are not taken into consideration.
Using the <CHANNEL> key, advance the channel in the "Machine" operating area - you
obtain the following views: Channels "1" and "3", channels "3" and "4", channels "4" and "2".
Channels "5" and "6" are not displayed in the multi-channel view.
In the single-channel view, toggle between all of the channels (1...6) without taking into
account the configured sequence for the multi-channel view.
Using the channel menu, you can always select all channels, also those not configured for
multi-channel view. If you switch to another channel, which is not configured for the
multiview, then the system automatically switches into the single-channel view. There is no
automatic switchback into the multi-channel view, even if a channel is again selected, which
has been configured for multi-channel view.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Select the operating mode "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO".

3. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

4. Press the "Multi-channel view" softkey.

The "Settings for multi-channel view" window is opened.
5. Set the multi-channel or single-channel view and define which channels
are to be seen in the "Machine" operating area - and in the editor - in
which sequence.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 497
Multi-channel view
9.4 Setting the multi-channel view

Turning
498 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Multi-channel support 10
10.1 Working with several channels
Multi-channel support
SINUMERIK Operate supports you when generating the program, the simulation and when
running-in a program on multi-channel machines.

Software options
For the multi-channel functionality and support, i.e. for generating and editing
synchronized programs in the multi-channel editor as well as the block search,
you require the "programSYNC" option.

Software options
You require the "ShopMill/ShopTurn" option to generate and edit ShopTurn
machining step programs.

Multi-channel view
With the multi-channel view, you have the option of viewing several channels in parallel on
the display. This means that for multi-channel machines, the execution of several programs -
simultaneously started - can be monitored and controlled.

View of the channels

In the window "Settings for multi-channel view" or "Settings for multi-channel functionality",
you set which channels are important for the program execution and which channels are
displayed simultaneously. In so doing, you also define the channel sequence.

Note
Hidden channels
Hidden channels still belong to the group of channels that are handled together. They are
only temporarily excluded from the multi-channel view.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 499
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

10.2 Multi-channel editor

In the multi-channel editor, you have the option of simultaneously opening several programs
and editing them. In this case, the multi-channel editor supports you regarding program
synchronization from a time perspective.

Software options
You require the "programSYNC" option to generate and edit synchronized
programs in the multi-channel editor.

10.2.1 Creating a multi-channel program

All of the programs involved in a multi-channel machining operation are combined in one
workpiece.
In a job list, enter the program names, define the program type - G code or ShopTurn
program - and assign these to a channel.

Software options
You require the "ShopMill/ShopTurn" option to generate and edit ShopTurn
programs.

Machine manufacturer
If you only program G code programs, then you can switch-out the multi-channel
view.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Precondition
● "programSYNC" option

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Press the "NC" softkey and select the "Workpieces" folder.

Turning
500 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

3. Press the "New" and "programSYNC multi-channel" softkeys.

The "New job list" window opens.

4. Enter the required name and press the "OK" softkey.

The "Job list *.JOB" window opens.
For each channel that has been set-up, the window has one line to
input or select the assigned program.
5. Position the cursor on the required channel line, enter the required
program name and select the program type (G code or ShopTurn).

6. Press the "OK" softkey.

The "Multi-channel data" parameter screen opens in the editor.

10.2.2 Entering multi-channel data

In the parameter screen "multi-channel data", enter the following data, which apply for all
channels for G code and ShopTurn programs:
● Measurement unit
● Work offset (e.g. G54)
● Z value of the work offset (optional)
● Blank
● Speed limitation
● if required, data for the counter spindle
The data defined here are saved as cycle call in the job list.

Machine manufacturer
If you are working with pure G code programming, it is possible that the parameter
screen "multi-channel data" does not open.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 501
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameters Description Unit

Measurement unit Selecting the measurement unit mm
inch

Main spindle
Work offset Selecting the work offset
Write to the  Yes
work offset
Parameter ZV is displayed
 No

Parameter ZV is not displayed

ZV Z value of the work offset
For G54, the Z value is entered into the work offset.
Note:
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Blank  Tube
 Cylinder
 Polygon
 Centered cuboid
XA Outside diameter ∅ – for tube and cylinder mm
XI Inside diameter (abs) or wall thickness (inc) – only for tube mm
ZA Initial dimension
ZI Final dimension (abs) or final dimension in relation to ZA (inc)

ZB Machining dimension (abs) or machining dimension in relation to ZA (inc)

N Number of edges – only for polygon

SW or L Width across flats or edge length – only for polygon

W Width of the blank - only for centered cuboid mm

L Length of the blank - only for centered cuboid mm
S Speed limitation of the main spindle rev/min
Counterspindle
Work offset Selecting the work offset
Write to the  Yes
work offset
Parameter ZV is displayed
 No

Parameter ZV is not displayed

ZV Z value of the work offset
For G54, the Z value is entered into the work offset.

Turning
502 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameters Description Unit

Blank  Tube
 Cylinder
 Polygon
 Centered cuboid
ZA Initial dimension
ZI Final dimension (abs) or final dimension in relation to ZA (inc)
ZB Machining dimension (abs) or machining dimension in relation to ZA (inc)
XA Outside diameter – (only for tube and cylinder) mm
XI Inside diameter (abs) or wall thickness (inc) – (only for tube) mm
N Number of edges – (only for polygon)
SW or L Width across flats or edge length – (only for polygon)
W Width of the blank - (only for centered cuboid) mm
L Length of the blank - (only for centered cuboid) mm
S Speed limitation of the counterspindle rev/min

Procedure

1. You have created programs for the multi-channel machining in

the job list and the parameter screen "multi-channel data" is open
in the editor.
2. Enter the data for the cross-channel data.
3. Press the "Accept" softkey.
The multi-channel editor is opened and displays the programs
that have been created.
The cursor is positioned on an empty line before the cycle for the
job list (CYCLE208). This means that you have the option to
enter initializations for the G code program that are immediately
required.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 503
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

10.2.3 Editing the multi-channel program

10.2.3.1 Changing the job list

You now have the option to change the composition of the programs and/or the assignment
of the channel and program in a job list.

Precondition
● "programSYNC" option

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select where the multi-channel program should be archived

3. Position the cursor in the "Workpieces" folder on a job list and press the
"Open" softkey.
The window "Job list * JOB" is opened and the program assignment to
the channels is displayed.
4. Select the channel to which you wish to assign a new program and
press the softkey "Select program".
The "Program" window is opened and displays all of the programs
created in the workpiece.
- OR -
Press the "Open job list" softkey.

Turning
504 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

10.2.3.2 Editing a G code multi-channel program

Editing a G code multi-channel program

Precondition
● The "programSYNC" option is set.
● In order to display the machining at the counterspindle at the correct position in the
simulation, the linear axis of the counterspindle must be positioned before CYCLE208
(multi-channel data).

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Position the cursor in the "Workpieces" folder on a job list and press the
"Open" softkey.
Note:
If the cursor is located on a workpiece, then a search is made for a job
list with the same name.
The "Job list ..." window opens and the program assignment to the
channels is displayed.
2. Press the "OK" softkey.
The programs are displayed next to one another in the editor.
3. Position the cursor on the first block of the program (multi-channel data)
and press the <Cursor right> key.

The parameter screen "Multi-channel data" is opened.

4. Enter the required values if you wish to change cross-channel data.

Adding multi-channel data in a G code program

You have the possibility of adding the multi-channel cycle (CYCLE208) subsequently.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 505
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Procedure

1. The double editor is opened and the cursor is positioned in the G

code program.
2. Press the "Misc." and "Multi-channel data" softkeys.
The "Call multi-channel data" input window opens.
A field for specifying the job list appears.
This field is read-only.
3. Press the "Accept job list" softkey.
The name of the job list is entered in the field.
4. Press the "Accept" softkey.
CYCLE208 is taken over into the program. The name of the job
list is indicated in brackets.

Modify blank

Parameter Description Unit

Data for Here, you specify the spindle selected for the blank.
 Main spindle
 Counterspindle
Blank The following blanks can be selected:
 Tube
 Cylinder
 Polygon
 Centered cuboid
 Delete
W Width of the blank - (only for centered cuboid) mm
L Length of the blank - (only for centered cuboid) mm
N Number of edges – (only for polygon)
SW or L Width across flats or edge length – (only for polygon)

ZA Initial dimension
ZI Final dimension (abs) or final dimension in relation to ZA (inc)

ZB Machining dimension (abs) or machining dimension in relation to ZA (inc)

Turning
506 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

XA Outside diameter – (only for tube and cylinder) mm
XI Inside diameter (abs) or wall thickness (inc) – for tube only mm

Procedure

1. The double editor is opened and the cursor is positioned in the G

code program.
2. Press the "Misc." and "Blank" softkeys.
The "Blank Input" window opens.

3. Select the desired blank and enter the corresponding values.

4. Press the "Accept" softkey.

10.2.3.3 Editing a ShopTurn multi-channel program

Precondition
The "programSYNC" option is set.

Procedure

1. Position the cursor in the "Workpieces" folder on a job list and press the
"Open" softkey.
Note:
If the cursor is located on a workpiece, then a search is made for a job
list with the same name.
The "Job list ..." window opens and the program assignment to the
channels is displayed.
2. Press the "OK" softkey.
The programs are displayed next to one another in the editor.
3. Open the program header if you wish to define cross-program or cross-
channel entries.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 507
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Program header with multi-channel data

In the program header, set the following parameters, which are effective for the complete
program.
In the parameter screen, you have the following options to save cross-program data:
● You can enter values in a common data set for the main and counterspindle
● You can enter values for the main and counter spindle
● You can enter values for the counterspindles

Parameter Description Unit

Multi-channel Yes
data Name of the job list in which the channel data are saved.
Data for  Main+counterspindle

All values for the main and counterspindle are saved in one data set
 Main spindle

Data set for the main spindle

 Counterspindle

Data set for the counterspindle

Note:
If the machine does not have a counterspindle, then the entry field "Data for" is not
applicable.
Retraction The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free traversing of
the axes must be possible.
 simple
 Extended
 all
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI - not for "basic" retraction
retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc) - not for "pipe" blank
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plane Z rear – only for retraction "all"

Tailstock  Yes
 No
XRR Retraction plane tailstock – only "Yes" for tailstock
For "Main+counterspindle", the tailstock only refers to the main spindle (tailstock
on the counterspindle side)

Turning
508 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

Tool change point Tool change point, which must be approached by the revolver with its zero point.
 Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 Machine (Machine Coordinate System)
Notes
 The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it is
not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the revolver is
moving.
 Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the revolver
and not the tool tip.
XT Tool change point X ∅
ZT Tool change point Z
Data for  Main spindle
 Counterspindle

If several spindles have been set-up, the program can operate at both spindles
 Empty

The program only operates at one spindle

Retraction The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free traversing of
the axes must be possible.
 simple
 extended – (not for a pipe blank)
 all
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI - only for a pipe blank
retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or rev/min
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plane Z rear – only for retraction "all"
Tailstock  Yes
 No
XRR Retraction plane tailstock – only "Yes" for tailstock
Tool change point Tool change point, which must be approached by the revolver with its zero point.
 Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 Machine (Machine Coordinate System)
Notes
 The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it is
not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the revolver is
moving.
 Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the revolver
and not the tool tip.
XT Tool change point X ∅

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 509
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

ZT Tool change point Z
SC The safety clearance defines how close the tool can approach the workpiece in
rapid traverse.
Note
Enter the safety clearance without sign into the incremental dimension.
Mach. direction of Milling direction
rotation
 Conventional
 Climbing

Program header without multi-channel data

If a program is to be executed through one channel, then deselect multi-channel data. You
then have the option of entering cross-program values into the program header as usual.

Parameter Description Unit

Multi-channel  No
data
This is only possible if you are not using a job list.
Unit of measurement The setting of the measurement unit in the program header only refers to the mm
position data in the actual program. inch
All other data, such as feedrate or tool offsets, are entered in the unit of
measure that you have set for the entire machine.
Data for  Main+counterspindle

All values for the main and counterspindle are saved in one data set
 Main spindle

Data set for the main spindle

 Counterspindle

Data set for the counterspindle

If the machine does not have a counterspindle, then the entry field "Data for" is
not applicable.
Work offset The work offset in which the zero point of the workpiece is saved.
You can also delete the default value of the parameter if you do not want to
specify a work offset.
write to  Yes

Parameter ZV is displayed
 No

Parameter ZV is not displayed

ZV Z value of the work offset
For G54, the Z value is entered into the work offset.
Note:
Please observe the machine manufacturer's data
Blank Define the form and dimensions of the workpiece:

Turning
510 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

 Cylinder
XA Outer diameter ∅ mm
 Polygon
N Number of edges
SW / L Width across flats
Edge length
 Centered cuboid
W Width of blank mm
L Length of blank mm
 Tube
XA Outer diameter ∅ mm
Inner diameter ∅ (abs) or wall thickness (inc) mm
ZA Initial dimension mm
ZI Final dimension (abs) or final dimension in relation to ZA (inc) mm
ZB Machining dimension (abs) or machining dimension in relation to ZA (inc)
Retraction The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free traversing
of the axes must be possible.

 simple
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI - only for "pipe" blank
Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
 extended - not for a "pipe" blank
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
 all
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plant Z rear

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 511
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

Tailstock  Yes
 No
XRR Retraction plane tailstock – only "Yes" for tailstock
Tool change point Tool change point, which must be approached by the revolver with its zero point.
 WCS (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 MCS (Machine Coordinate System)
Notes
 The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it
is not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the
revolver is moving.
 Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the revolver
and not the tool tip.
XT Tool change point X ∅
ZT Tool change point Z
S Spindle speed rev/min
Data for  Main spindle
 Counterspindle.
 Empty

If several spindles have been set-up, the program can operate at both
spindles.
Retraction The retraction area indicates the area outside of which collision-free traversing
of the axes must be possible.
 simple
 extended – not for a "pipe" blank
 all
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XA (inc)
XRI - for "basic" retraction, only for a "pipe" blank
retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or
retraction plane X referred to XI (inc)
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plane Z rear – only for retraction "all"
Tailstock  Yes
 No
XRR Retraction plane tailstock – only "Yes" for tailstock

Turning
512 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

Tool change point Tool change point, which must be approached by the revolver with its zero point.
 WCS (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 MCS (Machine Coordinate System)
Notes
 The tool change point must be far enough outside the retraction area that it
is not possible for any tool to protrude into the retraction area while the
revolver is moving.
 Ensure that the tool change point is relative to the zero point of the revolver
and not the tool tip.
XT Tool change point X ∅
ZT Tool change point Z
S Spindle speed rev/min
SC The safety clearance defines how close the tool can approach the workpiece in
rapid traverse.
Note
Enter the safety clearance without sign into the incremental dimension.
Mach. direction of rotation Milling direction
 Conventional
 Climbing

Changing program settings

Under settings, the settings for the main and/or counterspindle can be changed while the
program is being executed.

Parameter Description Unit

Data for You define the spindle selection for processing the data here - (this is only available if
the machine has a counterspindle)
 Main spindle

Data set for the main spindle

 Counterspindle

Data set for the counterspindle

 Main+counterspindle

All values for the main and counterspindle are saved in one data set
Retraction Lift mode
 simple
 Extended
 all
 Empty
XRA Retraction plane X external ∅ (abs) or retraction plane X referred to XA (inc) mm

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 513
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Parameter Description Unit

XRI Retraction plane X internal ∅ (abs) or retraction plane X referred to XI (inc) mm
- (only for retraction "extended" and "all")
ZRA Retraction plane Z front (abs) or mm
retraction plane Z referred to ZA (inc)
ZRI Retraction plane Z rear – (only for retraction "all") mm
Tailstock Yes
 Tailstock is displayed for simulation / simultaneous recording
 When approaching/retracting, the retraction logic is taken into account
No
XRR Retraction plane – (only "Yes" for tailstock) mm
Tool change point Tool change point
 Work (Workpiece Coordinate System)
 Machine (Machine Coordinate System)
 Empty
XT Tool change point X mm
ZT Tool change point Z mm
SC Safety clearance (inc) mm
Acts in relation to the reference point. The direction in which the safety clearance is
active is automatically determined by the cycle.
S1 Maximum speed, main spindle rev/min
Machining Milling direction:
direction
 Climbing
 Conventional
 Empty

Procedure

1. The ShopTurn program has been created.

2. Position the cursor on the program header.
3. Press the "Various" and "Settings" softkeys.
The "Settings" input window opens.

Turning
514 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

10.2.3.4 Creating a program block

In order to structure programs in order to achieve a higher degree of transparency when
preparing for the synchronized view, you have the possibility of combining several blocks (G
code and/or ShopTurn machining steps) to form program blocks.

Structuring programs
● Before generating the actual program, generate a program frame using empty blocks.
● By forming blocks, structure existing G code or ShopTurn programs.

 

 

1) Cross-channel data from the "Multi-channel data" window.

2) "Multi-channel programs" program opened in channel 1.
3) "Multi-channel programs" program opened in channel 2.
4) Actual program with block name "Stock removal".
The program block has been opened and an Addit. run-in code has been activated.
The program block is assigned to the main spindle.
5) Program block with block name "Peripheral surface".
The program block is closed. In order to identify whether an Addit. run-in code is activated or
automatic retraction is activated, open the block using the <Cursor right> key.
6) Program block with block name "Face milling"
The program block is assigned to the counterspindle. The spindle assignment is color coded in
order to make a distinction.

Figure 10-1 Structured programs in the multi-channel editor

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 515
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Settings for a program block

Display Meaning
Text Block designation
Spindle  S1
 S2

Spindle assignment. Defines at which spindle a program block is to be

executed.
Addit. run-in code  Yes

For the case that the block is not executed, as the specified spindle should
not be processed, then it is possible to temporarily activate a so-called
"Addit. run-in code".
 No
Automat. Retraction  Yes

Block start and block end are moved to the tool change point, i.e. the tool
is brought into a safe range.
 No

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the storage location and create a program or open a program.

The program editor is opened.

3. Select the required program blocks, which you wish to combine to form
a block.
4. Press the "Build group" softkey.
The "Build group" window is opened.
5. Enter a designation for the block, assign the spindle, if required, select
the Addit. run-in code and the automatic retraction and then press the
"OK" softkey.

Turning
516 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Opening and closing blocks

1. Position the cursor on the desired program block.

2. Press the <+> key or the <Cursor right> key.
 The block is opened.

...

3. Press the <-> key or the <Cursor left> key.

 The block is closed again.

...

Shifting blocks
You have the option of using "Select", "Copy", "Cut-out" and "Paste" softkeys to move
individual or several blocks within the program.

10.2.4 Synchronizing programs

Using the synchronized view, you have the possibility of obtaining an overview of the time
sequence of a program. In this case, program instructions are evaluated to coordinate
channels and are arranged in parallel in the editor view.
As a result of the synchronized view of the programs, you can easily identify at which
locations the programs are synchronized in the various channels.

Synchronizing commands

Commands Meaning
START Starts another program
WAITM Sets a mark and waits for the specified channels (with exact stop)
WAITMC Sets a mark and waits for the specified channels (without exact stop)
WAITE Waits for the end of program of the specified channels
SETM Sets a mark
CLEARM Clears a mark
GET Fetches an axis
RELEASE Releases an axis

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 517
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Note
Identifying program errors
The error can only be identified if the appropriate program is displayed. If a WAIT mark
involves a channel to which a program is not assigned in the job list, then this is marked as
having an error.

If you have enabled the synchronized view, then the following symbols are displayed at the
top right in the program title bar:

Symbol Meaning
Synchronized view: Error
Errors were identified after enabling "synchronized view" or new
"synchronization" (e.g. WAIT marks not found in other programs).
Synchronized view: checked
No error was detected after enabling "synchronized view" or new
"synchronization".

Wait marks can also be used within blocks.

● Closed block
– If there is a WAIT mark within a closed block, the clock of this WAIT mark is displayed
in front of the block name.
In the synchronized view, the closed block is synchronized.
– If there are several WAIT marks within a closed block, then a clock is displayed in
front of the block name. It is yellow, if all clocks of the WAIT marks in the block are
yellow, otherwise it is red.
In the synchronized view, the closed block is synchronized to the last WAIT mark in
the block.
● Opened block
– If there is a WAIT mark, the clock is displayed in front of the WAIT mark.
In front of the WAIT mark, the clock is displayed in either yellow or red. The program is
synchronized at the WAIT mark.
– If there are several WAIT marks, the clocks are displayed in either yellow or red at the
WAIT marks. The program is synchronized at the WAIT marks.

Determining program runtimes

After a simulation, the required processing time for the program blocks is displayed in the
editor. For multi-channel programs, the delay time is displayed at the wait points.

Turning
518 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Spindle transfer between the channels

If you use the spindles alternating in several channels (e.g. main and counterspindle), then it
may be necessary to exit the active plane "Face C" (TRANSMIT) or "Peripheral C"
(TRACYL):

1 Press the menu forward key and the "Straight/Circle" softkey.

2. Press the "Tool" softkey.

3. In the "Plane selection" field, select the "Turning" setting

(TRAFOOF).

Procedure

1. Select the required job list.

2. Press the "Open" softkey.

The job list is opened in the editor.
3. Press the ">>" and "View" softkeys.

4. Press the "Synchron. view" softkey.

5. Press the "Synchronizing" softkey if you wish to update the view

after changes.

6. Press the "Open all blocks" softkey if you wish to view all of the
program blocks in the synchronized display.

7. Press the "Close all blocks" softkey, if you wish to close the
blocks to achieve a higher degree of transparency.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 519
Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

8. Select the required program.

9. Press the "Full screen" softkey.

The two-channel display is changed into a single-channel display
and the selected program is displayed using the complete editor
window.

See also
Optimizing the machining time (Page 520)

10.2.5 Optimizing the machining time

After simulating a program, the machining time is displayed for the blocks.
For a multi-channel display, the wait times that occur are displayed at the wait points (wait
marks). This provides you with an overview of the time sequence of the program and you
can perform the first optimization runs.

Shifting blocks
For instance, you have the option of shifting program blocks to longer wait points - assuming
that the machining technology permits this - therefore reducing the machining time.

1. Select the block that you wish to shift.

2. Press the "Mark" softkey.

3. Press the "Copy" softkey if you wish to repeat the machining step at
another position.

- OR -
Press the "Cut-out" softkey if you wish to execute the machining step at
another position.

4. Position the cursor at the required program position and press the
"Paste" softkey.
Insert the program block at the required position.

Turning
520 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.2 Multi-channel editor

Time-related view
The wait time at the wait marks is displayed in seconds.
The total runtime is displayed at the end of the program.
If you change the program, time data is still displayed at the corresponding wait marks or the
corresponding blocks dimmed.
The determined times are kept if you change, shift or copy the program blocks.
The determined times are lost if you exit the editor using the "Close" softkey or you open or
select another program. The data must be determined again through simulation.

Time bars

&XUVRUSRVLWLRQ

7LPHD[LV
&KDQQHO
:DLWWLPHIRU
&KDQQHO WKHSDUDOOHO
SURJUDP
:DLWWLPH
\HOORZ
:DLWWLPH
WKDWRIIHUVWKH
0DFKLQLQJ RSWLRQRIVDYLQJ
WLPH EODFN PDFKLQLQJ
VWHSVWREH
H[HFXWHG

Figure 10-2 Time synchronous view

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 521
Multi-channel support
10.3 Simulating a machining operation

10.3 Simulating a machining operation

10.3.1 Simulation
For classic lathes with main and counterspindle, up to 2 channels can be simultaneously
simulated.
You have the option of executing the programs together before the actual machining. In this
case, start, stop and reset - as well as the functions to control the program, act
simultaneously on all of the simulated channels.

Software options
You require the "programSYNC" option to simultaneously simulate several
channels.
Without this option, all of the channels are considered to be an autonomous
system and are individually simulated.

Correction of the work offsets for multi-channel data

If you use multi-channel data in the simulation, then the work offsets are corrected so that
they match the blank and the spindle chuck data.

Preconditions
● The function of the individual spindles and special axes, must be specified in the channel-
specific display machine data set-up for the purpose.
● The zero point of the counter spindle must be the same as that of the main spindle.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Tool paths
Only the tool paths of the presently selected channel are displayed.

Turning
522 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.3 Simulating a machining operation

Procedure

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "Main spindle" softkey if you wish to view the main spindle.

- OR -
3. Press the "Counterspindle" softkey if you wish to view the
counterspindle.

4. If you have pressed the "Main spindle" and "Counterspindle" softkeys,

the simulation view is split into two and you can see the main spindle
and counterspindle simultaneously.

5. To toggle between the various channels, press the ">>" softkey and the
"Channel +" or "Channel -" softkey.

The status line informs you about the channel presently being
processed.

10.3.2 Different workpiece views for multi-channel support

In the graphical display, you can choose between different views so that you constantly have
the best view of the current workpiece machining, or in order to display details or the overall
view of the finished workpiece.
The following views are available:
● Side view
● Half section
● Front view
● 3D view
● 2-window

Procedure

1. Start the simulation.

2. Press the "Views" softkey.

3. Press the "Side view" softkey if you wish to view the workpiece in
the Z-X plane.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 523
Multi-channel support
10.4 Display / edit the multi-channel functionality in the "Machine" operating area

- OR -
Press the "Half section" softkey if you wish to view the workpiece
cut in the Z-X plane.

- OR -
Press the "Front view" softkey if you wish to view the workpiece
in the X-Y plane.

- OR -
Press the "3D view" softkey if you wish to view the workpiece as
a three-dimensional model.

- OR -
Press the 2-window softkey if you wish to simultaneously view the
side view (left-hand window) and front view (right-hand window)
of the workpiece.

Note
The 2 window view cannot be activated if you have simultaneously selected the main spindle
and the counterspindle.

10.4 Display / edit the multi-channel functionality in the "Machine"

operating area

10.4.1 Running-in a program

You have various options to run-in programs.

Running-in channel-by-channel
Select the channels that you wish to process using the "Running-in" function in the "Program
control" window. The channels not selected here are brought into the "Program test (PRT)"
state. As a consequence, the channels are only calculated, but are not processed.
No M and auxiliary functions or tool functions are output. Spindle commands are only output
for selected spindles.

Turning
524 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.4 Display / edit the multi-channel functionality in the "Machine" operating area

Running-in spindle-by-spindle
Only machining operations are executed for a spindle selected under program control /
running-in. When programming, using the block formation, allocate the corresponding
machining operations to a spindle.
When generating a block, a complete block can be assigned to a spindle. For the case that
the block is not executed, as the specified spindle cannot be processed, then save a so-
called "running-in – supplementary code"

Software options
You require the "programSYNC" option for cross-channel program control.

Precondition
● Multi-channel machine
● You have selected the multi-channel view via "Settings for channel functionalities".

Procedure

1. Select the "AUTO" operating area.

2. Press the "Prog. ctrl." softkey.

The "Program control - General" window appears on the screen.

3. Press the "Run-in" softkey.

The "Program control - Running-in" window is displayed.
4. Select the channels and the associated spindles to run-in the program.

10.4.2 Block search and program control

You define a group of channels that belong to one another from the "Settings for multi-
channel functionality" window. Here, you specify which channel numbers should be
displayed for a multi-channel view.
This group results in a common behavior for a block search and for program control.
Vertical softkeys for a block search
● The "Block search" and "Search mode" functions act on all channels, which you
configured for the multi-channel view.
● All other vertical softkeys (e.g. "Search text", "Interrupt position", etc.). act on the current
program.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 525
Multi-channel support
10.4 Display / edit the multi-channel functionality in the "Machine" operating area

If you selected the single-channel view in the multi-channel function settings, then all of the
actions only act on the actual channel.

Software options
You require the "programSYNC" option for the multi-channel block search and
the multi-channel program control in the multi-channel editor.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Press the "Block search" softkey.

Press the "Search mode" softkey.

The "Search mode" window is displayed.
2. Select the required mode for the channel group.
3. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the setting.

4. Press the "Search text" softkey if you wish to enter the search
target using a text.

- OR -
Press the "Interrupt position" softkey if you wish to search for the
search target using a program interrupt.

- OR -
Press the "Search pointer" softkey if you wish to enter a search
target, that you cannot enter using the editor (e.g. no interrupt
position, search target is located in the subprogram) and enter
the program path.
5. Press the "Start search" softkey.
The search starts.
All channels of the group are started corresponding to the search
mode that has been set.
During the block search, the search states are displayed in a
message window (e.g. "Block search running").
You receive a message if the search target has been reached - or
an error message if the search target was not found.

Turning
526 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.4 Display / edit the multi-channel functionality in the "Machine" operating area

Note
Search target via "Search pointer"
The "Search point" window is displayed - as usual - over the complete lower part of the
screen. The upper contents of the window remain multi-channel.
The actual channel is displayed in the title bar of the "Search pointer" window.
The "Delete search pointer" also only acts on this channel.

Note
Search target via "Search text"
If, for a block search, you approach the program position using "Search text", please note
that a search is only made in the selected channel column.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 527
Multi-channel support
10.5 Multi-channel functionality for large operator panels

10.5 Multi-channel functionality for large operator panels

For the large OP15, OP019 operator panels as well as at the PC, there is more space in the
"Machine", "Program" and "Parameter" operating areas – as well as in all lists – to display
NC blocks, tools etc.
Further, you also have the option of simultaneously displaying more than 2 channels.
This makes it easier for you to identify the machine situation for machines with 3 and more
channels. Further, it makes it simpler for you to generate and run-in three or four-channel
programs.

Software options
If you require the option "programSYNC" for the views described here.

Supplementary conditions
● OP15, OP19 or PC with a display of at least 1280x1024 pixels
● For operating an OP019, at least one NCU720.2 or 730.2 with 1 GB of RAM or a PCU50
is required

3 / 4-channel view in the "Machine" operating area

If you have selected 3 channels via settings, then 3 or 4 channel columns are displayed next
to one another.

Channel view Display in the "Machine" operating area

3-channel view The following windows are displayed one above the other for each channel:
 Actual value window
 T,F,S window
 Block display window

4-channel view The following windows are displayed one above the other for each channel:
 Actual value window
 T,S,F window
 G functions (the "G functions" softkey is omitted)
 Block display window

Turning
528 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.5 Multi-channel functionality for large operator panels

Displaying functions

Channel view Display in the "Machine" operating area

Selection using vertical softkeys:
3-channel view  The T,F,S window is overlaid by pressing one of the vertical softkeys.
4-channel view  The window showing the G codes is overlaid if you press one of the
vertical softkeys.

Selection using horizontal softkeys:

3-channel view /  The block display is overlaid if you press the "Overstore" horizontal softkey
4 channel view
 The block display is overlaid by pressing the softkey "block search".

 The window is shown as a pop-up if you press the "Prog. control" softkey.

 If you press one of the horizontal softkeys in the "JOG" operating mode
(e.g. "T,S,M", "Meas. tool", "Positions" etc.), then you change into the
single-channel view.

Toggling between the channels

Press the <CHANNEL> key to toggle between the channels.

Press the <NEXT WINDOW> key to toggle within a channel column

between the three or four windows arranged one above the other.

Note
2-channel display
Contrary to the smaller operator panels, in the "Machine" operating area, for a 2-channel
view, the TFS window is visible.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 529
Multi-channel support
10.5 Multi-channel functionality for large operator panels

Program operating area

In the editor, just as many programs are displayed next to one another as in the "Machine"
operating area.

Displaying a program
You can define the width of the program in the editor window using the settings in the editor.
This means that you can distribute programs evenly - or you can display the column with the
active program wider.

Simulation
In the simulation window, actual values are displayed for a maximum of 4 channels
simultaneously as well as the actual block.
You can toggle between displaying the traversing paths and the channel zero point using the
"Channel+" and "Channel-" softkeys.
Axes, which are located in several channels, are displayed grayed-out if the setpoint comes
from a different channel.

Channel status
When required, channel messages are displayed in the status display.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
530 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.6 Setting the multi-channel function

10.6 Setting the multi-channel function

Setting Meaning
View Here, you define whether one or two channels are displayed.
 1 channel
 2 channels
 3 channels
 4 channels
Channel selection and Here, you create the channel group, i.e. you specify which channels and
sequence in which sequence are displayed in the multi-channel view.
(for "2 - 4 channels"
view)
Visible Here, you specify which channels are displayed in the two-channel view.
(for "2 - 4 channels"
view)

Precondition

Software options
You require the "programSYNC" option to generate and edit synchronized
programs in the multi-channel editor as well as for the multi-channel functions
in the "Machine" operating area.

Example
Your machine has 6 channels.
You configure channels 1 - 4 for the multi-channel view and define the display sequence
(e.g. 1,3,4,2).
Using the <CHANNEL> key, advance the channel in the "Machine" operating area - you
obtain the following views: Channels "1" and "3", channels "3" and "4", channels "4" and "2".
Channels "5" and "6" are not displayed in the multi-channel view.
In the single-channel view, toggle between all of the channels (1...6) without taking into
account the configured sequence for the multi-channel view.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 531
Multi-channel support
10.6 Setting the multi-channel function

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Select the operating mode "JOG", "MDA" or "AUTO".

3. Press the menu forward key and the "Settings" softkey.

4. Press the "Multi-channel function" softkey.

The "Settings for the multi-channel functionality" window is opened.

Turning
532 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

For multi-channel machines, the counterspindle steps must be synchronized across all
channels.
You program handling the counterspindle in one channel. This channel controls the motion
of the counterspindle and adapts the work offset of the channel.
In the synchronization step, the other channels park their tools in order to avoid collisions.
The work offset is also accepted.




1 Synchronization step
2 Counterspindle step

The following counterspindle steps, which implicitly contain WAIT marks, are identified using
a symbol:
● Pulling (take zero point = yes)
● Rear face
● Front face
● Complete
● Synchronizing

Parameters Description Unit

Function You can select one of the following functions:
 Synchronizing
 Complete
 Gripping
 Withdrawing
 Rear face
 Front face

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 533
Multi-channel support
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

Synchronization function Synchronizes with the counterspindle in the other channel.

Coordinate  Machine coordinate system
system
The park position is specified in the machine coordinate system. Teaching
in the park position and angular offset is only possible in the machine
coordinate system.
 Workpiece coordinate system
The park position is specified in the workpiece coordinate system.
XP Park position of tool in X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm

Function, complete Gripping

Coordinate  Machine coordinate system
system
The park position is specified in the machine coordinate system. Teaching
in the park position and angular offset is only possible in the machine
coordinate system.
 Workpiece coordinate system

The park position is specified in the workpiece coordinate system.

XP Park position of tool in X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm
Flush chuck Flush counterspindle chuck
 Yes
 No
DIR Direction of rotation
 Spindle rotates clockwise
 Spindle rotates counterclockwise
 Spindle does not rotate
S Spindle speed – (only when the spindle rotates) rev/min
α1 Angular offset Degrees
Z1 Transfer position (abs.)
ZR Position, feedrate reduction (abs or inc)
Position from which a reduced feedrate is used.
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
Fixed Travel to fixed stop
stop
 Yes

The counterspindle stops at a defined distance away from transfer position

Z1 and then traverses with a defined feedrate up to the fixed stop.
 No

The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Turning
534 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

Function, complete Withdrawing

Withdraw blank Withdraw complete plank:
 Yes
 No
F Feedrate mm/min
Cutting-off Cutting-off cycle in the following block
cycle
 Yes
 No
Function, complete Rear face
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW
and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved:
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...
ZW Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinate system mm
ZV Offset Z = 0 mm
Workpiece zero is offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

Parameters Description Unit

Function, gripping Teaching in the park position and angular offset is possible
Coordinate  Machine coordinate system
system
The park position is specified in the machine coordinate system. Teaching in
the park position and angular offset is only possible in the machine coordinate
system.
 Workpiece coordinate system

The park position is specified in the workpiece coordinate system.

XP Park position of tool in X direction (abs) mm
ZP Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) mm
Flush chuck Flush counterspindle chuck
 Yes
 No
DIR Direction of rotation
 Spindle rotates clockwise
 Spindle rotates counterclockwise
 Spindle does not rotate
S Spindle speed – (only when the spindle rotates) rev/min
α1 Angular offset Degrees

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 535
Multi-channel support
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

Parameters Description Unit

Z1 Transfer position (abs.)
ZR Position, feedrate reduction (abs or inc)
Position from which a reduced feedrate is used.
FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev
Fixed Travel to fixed stop
stop
 Yes

The counterspindle stops at a defined distance away from transfer position Z1

and then traverses with a defined feedrate up to the fixed stop.
 No

The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Parameters Description Unit

Function, withdrawing
Also take zero point Also take zero point
 Yes
 No
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system offset by Z1 must be saved.
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...
Z1 Amount by which the workpiece is withdrawn from the main spindle (inc)
F Feedrate mm/min

Parameters Description Unit

Function, rear face
Work offset Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW
and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved:
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...

Turning
536 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Multi-channel support
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

Parameters Description Unit

ZW Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinate system mm
ZV Offset Z = 0 mm
Workpiece zero is offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

Parameters Description Unit

Function, front face
Work offset Work offset for machining the next front face:
 Basic reference
 G54
 G55
 G56
 G57
 ...

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 537
Multi-channel support
10.7 Synchronizing counterspindle

Turning
538 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
User data 11
11.1 Overview
The defined user data may be displayed in lists.
The following variables can be defined:
● Data parameters (R parameters)
● Global user data (GUD) is valid in all programs
● Local user data (LUD) is valid in one program
● Program-global user data (PUD) is valid in one program and the called subroutines.
Channel-specific user data can be defined with a different value for each channel.

Entering and displaying parameter values

Up to 15 positions (including decimal places) are evaluated. If you enter a number with more
than 15 places, it will be written in exponential notation (15 places + EXXX).

LUD or PUD
Only local or program-global user data can be displayed at one time.
Whether the user data are available as LUD or PUD depends on the current control
configuration.

Machine manufacturer
Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Note
Reading and writing variables protected
Reading and writing of user data are protected via a keyswitch and protection levels.

Searching for user data

You may search for user data within the lists using any character string.
Refer to the "Defining and activating user data" section to learn how to edit displayed user
data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 539
User data
11.2 R parameters

11.2 R parameters
R parameters (arithmetic parameters) are channel-specific variables that you can use within
a G code program. G code programs can read and write R parameters.
These values are retained after the control is switched off.

Number of channel-specific R parameters

The number of channel-specific R parameters is defined in a machine data element.
Range: R0-R999 (dependent on machine data).
There are no gaps in the numbering within the range.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "User variable" softkey.

3. Press the "R variables" softkey.

The "R parameters" window appears.

Delete R variables

1. Press the ">>" and "Delete" softkeys.

The "Delete R parameters" window appears.

2. Enter the R parameter(s) whose channel-specific values you would like

to delete and press the "OK" softkey.

A value of 0 is assigned to the selected R parameters or to all R

parameters.

Turning
540 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 User data
11.3 Global GUD

11.3 Global GUD

Global user data

Global GUDs are NC global user data (Global User Data) that remains available after
switching the machine off.
GUDs apply in all programs.

Definition
A GUD variable is defined with the following:
● Keyword DEF
● Range of validity NCK
● Data type (INT, REAL, ….)
● Variable names
● Value assignment (optional)

Example
DEF NCK INT ZAEHLER1 = 10
GUDs are defined in files with the ending DEF. The following file names are reserved for this
purpose:

File name Meaning

MGUD.DEF Definitions for global machine manufacturer data
UGUD.DEF Definitions for global user data
GUD4.DEF User-definable data
GUD8.DEF, GUD9.DEF User-definable data

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "User variable" softkey.

3. Press the "Global GUD" softkeys.

The "Global user data" window is displayed. A list of the defined UGUD
variables will be displayed.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 541
User data
11.4 Channel GUD

- OR -
Press the "GUD selection" softkey and the "SGUD" to "GUD6" softkeys
if you wish to display SGUD, MGUD, UGUD as well as GUD4 to GUD 6
of the global user variables.

- OR -
Press the "GUD selection" and ">>" softkeys as well as the "GUD7" to
"GUD9" softkeys if you want to display GUD 7 to GUD 9 of the global
user data.

Note
After each start-up, a list with the defined UGUD variables is displayed in the "Global user
data" window.

11.4 Channel GUD

Channel-specific user data

Like the GUDs, channel-specific user data are applicable in all programs for each channel.
However, unlike GUDs, they have specific values.

Definition
A channel-specific GUD variable is defined with the following:
● Keyword DEF
● Range of validity CHAN
● Data type
● Variable names
● Value assignment (optional)

Example
DEF CHAN REAL X_POS = 100.5

Turning
542 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 User data
11.5 Local LUD

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "User variable" softkey.

3. Press the "Channel GUD" and "GUD selection" softkeys.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.

4. Press the "SGUD" ... "GUD6" softkeys if you want to display the SGUD,
MGUD, UGUD as well as GUD4 to GUD 6 of the channel-specific user
variables.

- OR -
Press the "Continue" softkey and the "GUD7" to "GUD9" softkeys if you
want to display GUD 7 to GUD 9 of the channel-specific user data.

11.5 Local LUD

Local user data

LUDs are only valid in the program or subroutine in which they were defined.
The control displays the LUDs after the start of program processing. The display is available
until the end of program processing.

Definition
A local user variable is defined with the following:
● Keyword DEF
● Data type
● Variable names
● Value assignment (optional)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 543
User data
11.6 Program PUD

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "User variable" softkey.

3. Press the "Local LUD" softkey.

11.6 Program PUD

Program-global user data

PUDs are global part program variables (Program User Data). PUDs are valid in all main
programs and subroutines, where they can also be written and read.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "User variable" softkey.

3. Press the "Program PUD" softkey.

Turning
544 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 User data
11.7 Searching for user data

11.7 Searching for user data

You can search for R parameters and user data.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "R parameters", "Global GUD", "Channel GUD", "Local GUD"
or "Program PUD" softkeys to select the list in which you would like to
search for user data.

3. Press the "Search" softkey.

The "Search for R Parameters" or "Search for User Data" window
opens.
4. Enter the desired search term and press "OK".

The cursor is automatically positioned on the the R parameter or user

data you are searching for, if they exist.

11.8 Defining and activating user data

By editing a DEF/MAC file, you can alter or delete existing definition/macro files or add new
ones.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Startup" operating area.

2. Press the "System data" softkey.

3. In the data tree, select the "NC data" folder and then open the
"Definitions" folder.
4. Select the file you want to edit.
5. Double-click the file.
- OR -

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 545
User data
11.8 Defining and activating user data

Press the "Open" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <INPUT> key.

- OR -
Press the <Cursor right> key.
The selected file is opened in the editor and can be edited there.

6. Define the desired user data.

7. Press the "Exit" softkey to close the editor.

Activating user data

1. Press the "Activate" softkey.

A prompt is displayed.
2. Select whether the current values in the definition files should be
retained
- OR -
Select whether the current values in the definition files should be
deleted.
This will overwrite the definition files with the initial values.
3. Press the "OK" softkey to continue the process.

Turning
546 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Teaching in a program 12
12.1 Overview
The "Teach in" function can be used to edit programs in the "AUTO" and "MDA" modes. You
can create and modify simple traversing blocks.
You traverse the axes manually to specific positions in order to implement simple machining
sequences and make them reproducible. The positions you approach are applied.
In "AUTO" teach-in mode, the selected program is "taught".
In "MDA" teach-in mode, you teach to the MDA buffer.
External programs, which may have been rendered offline, can therefore be adjusted and
modified according to need.

12.2 General sequence

General sequence

Select the desired program block, press the relevant softkey "Teach
position", "Rap. tra. G01", "Straight line G1" or "Circ. interm. pos. CIP",
and "Circ. end pos. CIP" and traverse the axes to change the program
block.
You can only overwrite a block with a block of the same type.
- OR -
Position the cursor at the desired point in the program, press the
relevant softkey "Teach position", "Rap. tra. G01", "Straight line G1" or
"Circ. interp. pos. CIP", and "Circ. end pos. CIP" and traverse the axes
to insert a new program block.
In order for the block to be inserted, the cursor must be positioned in an
empty line using the cursor key and input key.
Press the "Accept" softkey to teach-in the modified or new program
block.

Note
All defined axes are "taught in" in the first teach-in block. In all additional teach-in blocks,
only axes modified by axis traversing or manual input are "taught in".
If you exit teach-in mode, this sequence begins again.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 547
Teaching in a program
12.3 Inserting a block

Operating mode or operating area switchover

If you switch to another operating mode or operating area in teach-in mode, the position
changes will be canceled and teach-in mode will be cleared.

12.3 Inserting a block

You have the option of traversing the axes and writing the current actual values directly to a
new position block.

Requirement
"AUTO" mode: The program to be edited is selected.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Traverse the axes to the relevant position.

6. Press the "Teach position" softkey.
A new program block with the current actual position values will be
created.

Turning
548 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Teaching in a program
12.3 Inserting a block

12.3.1 Input parameters for teach-in blocks

Parameters for teach-in of position and teach-in of G0, G1, and circle end position CIP

Parameter Description
X Approach position in X direction
Y Approach position in Y direction
Z Approach position in Z direction
F Feedrate (mm/r; mm/min) - only for teach-in of G1 and circle end position CIP

Parameters for teach-in of circle intermediate position CIP

Parameter Description
I Coordinate of the circle center point in the X direction
J Coordinate of the circle center point in the Y direction
K Coordinate of the circle center point in the Z direction

Transition types for teach-in of position and teach-in of G0 and G1, and ASPLINE
The following parameters are offered for the transition:

Parameter Description
G60 Exact stop
G64 Corner rounding
G641 Programmable corner rounding
G642 Axis-specific corner rounding
G643 Block-internal corner rounding
G644 Axis dynamics corner rounding

Motion types for teach-in of position and teach-in of G0 and G1

The following motion parameters are offered:

Parameter Description
CP Path-synchronous
PTP Point-to-point
PTPG0 Only G0 point-to-point

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 549
Teaching in a program
12.4 Teach-in via Windows

Transition behavior at the beginning and end of the spline curve

The following motion parameters are offered:

Parameter Description
Start
BAUTO Automatic calculation
BNAT Curvature is zero or natural
BTAN Tangential

End
EAUTO Automatic calculation
ENAT Curvature is zero or natural
ETAN Tangential

12.4 Teach-in via Windows

12.4.1 General
The cursor must be positioned on an empty line.
The windows for pasting program blocks contain input and output fields for the actual values
in the WCS. Depending on the default setting, selection fields with parameters for motion
behavior and motion transition are available.
When first selected, the input fields are empty unless axes were already traversed before the
window was selected.
All data from the input/output fields are transferred to the program via the "Accept" softkey.

Precondition
"AUTO" mode: The program to be edited is selected.

Turning
550 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Teaching in a program
12.4 Teach-in via Windows

Procedure

1 Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Use the cursor and input keys to position the cursor at the desired point
in the program.
If an empty row is not available, insert one.
6. Press the softkeys "Rap. tra. G0", "Straight line G1", or Circ. interm.
pos. CIP" and "Circ. end pos. CIP".

The relevant windows with the input fields are displayed.

7. Traverse the axes to the relevant position.

8. Press the "Accept" softkey.
A new program block will be inserted at the cursor position.
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel your input.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 551
Teaching in a program
12.4 Teach-in via Windows

12.4.2 Teach in rapid traverse G0

You traverse the axes and teach-in a rapid traverse block with the approached positions.

Note
Selection of axes and parameters for teach-in
You can select the axes to be included in the teach-in block in the "Settings" window.
You also specify here whether motion and transition parameters are offered for teach-in.

12.4.3 Teach in straight G1

You traverse the axes and teach-in a machining block (G1) with the approached positions.

Note
Selection of axes and parameters for teach-in
You can select the axes to be included in the teach-in block in the "Settings" window.
You also specify here whether motion and transition parameters are offered for teach-in.

12.4.4 Teaching in circle intermediate and circle end point CIP

Enter the intermediate and end positions for the circle interpolation CIP. You teach-in each of
these separately in a separate block. The order in which you program these two points is not
specified.

Note
Make sure that the cursor position does not change during teach-in of the two positions.

You teach-in the intermediate position in the "Circle intermediate position CIP" window.
You teach-in the end position in the "Circle end position CIP" window.

Turning
552 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Teaching in a program
12.4 Teach-in via Windows

The intermediate or interpolation point is only taught-in with geometry axes. For this reason,
at least 2 geometry axes must be set up for the transfer.

Note
Selection of axes for teach in
You can select the axes to be included in the teach-in block in the "Settings" window.

12.4.5 Teach-in A spline

For Akima-spline interpolation, you enter interpolation points that are connected by a smooth
curve.
Enter a starting point and specify a transition at the beginning and end.
You teach-in each interpolation point via "Teach in of position".

Software option
You require the "Spline-Interpolation" option for A Spline interpolation.

Note
The relevant option bit must be set to enable you to program a spline interpolation.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 553
Teaching in a program
12.4 Teach-in via Windows

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Press the ">>" and "ASPLINE" softkeys.

The "Akima-spline" window opens with the input fields.

6. Traverse the axes to the required position and if necessary, set the
transition type for the starting point and end point.
7. Press the "Accept" softkey.
A new program block will be inserted at the cursor position.
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel your input.

Note
Selection of axes and parameters for teach-in
You can select the axes to be included in the teach-in block in the "Settings" window.
You also specify here whether motion and transition parameters are offered for teach-in.

Turning
554 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Teaching in a program
12.5 Editing a block

12.5 Editing a block

You can only overwrite a program block with a teach-in block of the same type.
The axis values displayed in the relevant window are actual values, not the values to be
overwritten in the block.

Note
If you wish to change any variable in a block in the program block window other than the
position and its parameters, then we recommend alphanumerical input.

Requirement
The program to be edited is selected.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Click the program block to be edited.

6. Press the relevant softkey "Teach position, "Rap. tra. G0", "Straight line
G1", or "Circ. interm. pos. CIP", and "Circ. end pos. CIP".
The relevant windows with the input fields are displayed.
7. Traverse the axes to the desired position and press the "Accept"
softkey.
The program block is taught with the modified values.
- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the changes.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 555
Teaching in a program
12.6 Selecting a block

12.6 Selecting a block

You have the option of setting the interrupt pointer to the current cursor position. The next
time the program is started, processing will resume from this point.
With teach-in, you can also change program areas that have already been executed. This
automatically disables program processing.
You must press reset or select a block to resume the program.

Requirement
The program to be processed is selected.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> key.

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Place the cursor on the desired program block.

6. Press the "Block selection" softkey.

Turning
556 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Teaching in a program
12.7 Deleting a block

12.7 Deleting a block

You have the option of deleting a program block entirely.

Requirement
"AUTO" mode: The program to be processed is selected.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Click the program block to be deleted.

6. Press the ">>" and "Delete block" softkeys.
The program block on which the cursor is positioned is deleted.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 557
Teaching in a program
12.8 Settings for teach-in

12.8 Settings for teach-in

In the "Settings" window, you define which axes are to be included in the teach-in block and
whether motion-type and continuous-path mode parameters are to be provided.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Machine" operating area.

2. Press the <AUTO> or <MDA> key.

3. Press the <TEACH IN> key.

4. Press the "Teach prog." softkey.

5. Press the ">>" and "Settings" softkeys.

The "Settings" window appears.

6. Under "Axes to be taught" and "Parameters to be taught", select the

check boxes for the relevant settings and press the "Accept" softkey to
confirm the settings.

Turning
558 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Working with a B axis 13
13.1 Lathes with B axis
With an additional B axis, you have the option of aligning milling machines and lathes.

%D[LV
7RROVSLQGOH

0DLQVSLQGOH
&
& %
&RXQWHUVSLQGOH

&
;

<

=

The initial setting in which all tools must be measured is B=0.

When turning, you can align the tool for special machining operations using the B axis and C
axis of the tool spindle.
When milling, you can swivel the workpiece using the B and C axis of the main or
counterspindle so that you can mill and drill on inclined surfaces.
The B axis is also used for aligning tools for face and peripheral surface machining.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 559
Working with a B axis
13.1 Lathes with B axis

Alignment angles β and γ

Alignment angles β and γ are required for turning with tool alignment.

ˠ
˟

β: Rotation around the Y axis (with the B axis)

γ: Rotation around the Z axis (with the tool spindle)

Turning
560 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working with a B axis
13.1 Lathes with B axis

Turning
Alignment angles allow you to perform a wide range of different turning operations (for
example, internal and external longitudinal machining, surface machining with a main spindle
and counterspindle, residual material) without changing the tool.

˟ |

ǩ |

; ;
˟ |

ǩ |
= =

/RQJLWXGLQDOPDFKLQLQJRXWHU /RQJLWXGLQDOPDFKLQLQJLQQHU

˟ | ˟ |

ǩ | ǩ |
; ;

= =

)DFHPDFKLQLQJPDLQVSLQGOH )DFHPDFKLQLQJFRXQWHUVSLQGOH

Display of the B axis

The B axis is displayed in the following windows:
● Axis position display in actual value window
● In the “Positioning” window to position axes in manual operation
● You can display the B axis in the work offset lists using the "Work offset" softkey and you
can also define the offset.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 561
Working with a B axis
13.2 Tool alignment for turning

13.2 Tool alignment for turning

The input fields for the β and γ angles for aligning the tool are available in the tool screen
and in all turning screen.

β angle
In the entry field "β" you have the possibility of selecting the main alignment of the tool:

 : β = 0°

 : β = 90°

 Empty : The required angle can be freely entered

Programming when machining with a counterspindle

When machining on the counterspindle, it is programmed in exactly the same way as the
main spindle.
The direction display of the arrows depends on the settings.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

γ angle
In the entry field "γ" you have the possibility of selecting the main alignment of the tool:
● 0°
● 180°
- or -
● Free entry field to enter the required angle

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
562 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working with a B axis
13.3 Milling with a B axis

13.3 Milling with a B axis

No special entries are required for face machining and peripheral surface machining.

Face machining
Milling at the face (G17) is realized on the main spindle in the B axis position B = 0°. If you
are machining at the face (G17) of the counterspindle, then this corresponds to the opposite
setting of the B axis position B = 180°.

Peripheral surface machining

Milling on the peripheral surface is always realized in the B axis position, B = 90° (main and
counterspindle).

Machining on an inclined surface

You can define inclined surfaces in a swivel mask.
You can enter the rotation of the planes around the geometry axes (X, Y, Z) of the tool
coordinate system as described in the workpiece drawing. The rotation of the Work in the
program is then automatically converted to a rotation for the relevant B and C axis of the
machine during machining.
The swivel axes are always rotated to place the tool axis perpendicular to the machining axis
for machining. During machining, the rotary axes are stationary.
The coordinate system is adapted to the surface to be machined irrespective of the required
rotary axis positions.

13.4 Swiveling
General sequence
● Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined via the swivel screen.
● Machining with the setting “Face B”.
● If another machining type follows, swiveling is automatically deselected.

The swiveled coordinates are maintained in the reset state and after Power On. So you can
still move out of an inclined hole, for example, with retraction in the +Z direction.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Swiveling is executed one axis at a time. In the case of axis-by-axis swiveling, the coordinate
system is rotated about each axis in turn, with each rotation starting from the previous
rotation. The axis sequence can be freely selected.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 563
Working with a B axis
13.4 Swiveling

Procedure

1. The "Spigot res. mat." input window opens if you press the "Various"
softkey.

2. Press the "Swivel plane" softkey.

3. Press the "Initial position" if you wish to reestablish the basic setting, i.e.
you wish to set the values back to 0.
This is done, for example, to swivel the coordinate system back to its
original orientation.

Parameter Description Unit

T Tool identifier
RP Retraction plane for face B mm
C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degrees
X0 Reference point for rotation mm
Y0 Reference point for rotation mm
Z0 Reference point for rotation mm
Swivel mode  axis-by-axis: Swivel coordinate system axis-by-axis
 Solid angle: Swivel via solid angle
 Proj. angle: Swiveling via projection angle
 Direct: Position rotary axes directly
Axis sequence Sequence of the axes which are rotated around - (only for axis-by-axis swivel
mode)
XYZ or XZY or YXZ or YZX or ZXY or ZYX
X Axis angle The sequence of the axes can be Degrees
Y Axis angle interchanged as required using the Degrees
Select key.
Z Axis angle Degrees
X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm
Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm

Note
Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before (X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1,
Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Work offsets").

Turning
564 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working with a B axis
13.5 Approach/retraction

13.5 Approach/retraction
If you want to optimize approach/return for swiveling with the B axis, you can create a
special cycle that ignores the automatic approach/retraction strategy.
You can insert the approach/retraction cycle between any machining step program blocks,
but not within linked program blocks.

Sequence
The starting point for the approach/retraction cycle is the safety clearance approached after
the last machining operation.
If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1
to P3) to the tool change point and through a maximum of 3 additional positions (P4 to P6) to
the next starting point.
The 1st, 3rd, and 6th positions move the linear axes, while the 2nd and 5th positions move
the rotary axes.
If no tool change is needed you can generate no more than 6 motion blocks.
The numbers (1 – 6) represent the processing sequence.

Note
Programming additional positions
If 3 or 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/retraction, you can call the cycle several
times in succession to program further positions.

CAUTION

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/retraction
cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.

Parameter Description Unit

F1 Feedrate to approach the first position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X1 1. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z1 1. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Y1 Retraction to safety clearance mm
β2 Beta angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees
γ2 Gamma angle for 1st swivel movement Degrees
Tracking The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
F3 Feedrate to approach the third position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 565
Working with a B axis
13.5 Approach/retraction

Parameter Description Unit

X3 3. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z3 3. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Tool change  TlChngPt: Approach the tool change point from the last programmed position
and carry out a tool change
 Direct: Tool is not changed at the tool change position, but at the last
programmed position
 No: Tool is not changed
T Tool name (not for tool change "no")
D Cutting edge number (not for tool change "no")
F4 Feedrate for approach to the fourth position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X4 4. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z4 4. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
β5 Beta angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees
γ5 Gamma angle for 2nd swivel movement Degrees
Tracking The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
F6 Feedrate to approach the sixth position mm/min
Alternatively, rapid traverse
X6 6. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Z6 6. position (inc or ∅ abs) mm
Y6 Retraction to safety clearance mm

Turning
566 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working with a B axis
13.6 Position pattern

13.6 Position pattern

In drilling and milling operations with face B, position patterns "full circle/pitch circle" provide
the following options for machining on inclined surfaces
● with swivel plane
● with C axis

Procedure

1. Press the "Drilling" softkey.

2. Press the "Positions" and "Full circle/pitch circle" softkeys.

Parameter Description Unit

Face B on the swivel plane
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.
α1 Indexing angle: After the first hole has been drilled, all additional positions are Degrees
approached at this angle (only for pitch circle).
Positive angle: Additional positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Additional positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
R Radius of full circle mm
N Number of positions on circle
Positioning Straight line: Next position is approached linearly in rapid traverse. mm
Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined
in the machine data.
Face B - wit C axis
Z0 Z coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
X0 X coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
Y0 Y coordinate of the reference point (abs) mm
α0 Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to C axis. Degrees
Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise.
Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 567
Working with a B axis
13.7 Tool selection for the manual mode

Parameter Description Unit

α1 Indexing angle: After the first hole has been drilled, all additional positions are Degrees
approached at this angle (only for pitch circle).
Positive angle: Additional positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction.
Negative angle: Additional positions are rotated in clockwise direction.
N Number of positions on circle

13.7 Tool selection for the manual mode

For the preparatory actions in the manual mode, tool selection and spindle control are both
performed centrally in the T, S, M window.

Figure 13-1 TSM window for the B and C axis

Turning
568 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Working with a B axis
13.8 Measuring a tool with the B axis

Procedure

Aligning the milling and turning tool with β angle:

Press the <SELECT> key and select
 0° or
 90° or
 Value entry box to freely enter the angle.

Aligning the turning tool with γ angle:

Press the <SELECT> key and select
 0°
 180°
 Value entry box to freely enter the angle.

See also
Selecting a tool and spindle (Page 97)

13.8 Measuring a tool with the B axis

Procedure

1. For the preparatory actions in the manual mode, tool selection and
spindle control are both performed centrally in the T, S, M window.

2. Then, as usual, measure the tool using the "Measure tool" function.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

See also
T,S,M window (Page 97)
Measuring a tool manually (Page 71)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 569
Working with a B axis
13.8 Measuring a tool with the B axis

Turning
570 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Working with two tool carriers 14
With SINUMERIK Operate, you can work at a lathe with two tool holders, both of which are
mounted on an X axis. The tool carriers may be revolvers, multifix, or a combination of both.
The main machining is performed in the negative X axis direction. As both tool holders are
mounted on the same axis it is only possible to machine with one tool.
The workpiece is always located between the two tool holders. The tool lengths of all tools,
i.e. of both tool holders, have the same reference point, which is usually on tool holder 1.
That is why the tool lengths of the tools of the second tool holder are always longer than
those of the tools on the first tool holder.

14.1 Programming with two tool carriers

You always program in the basic coordinate system (workpiece coordinate system of the first
tool holder). You do not have to take into account in which tool holder the tool is inserted.

Tool on the second tool holder

If a tool on the second tool holder is selected, the X and Y axes are mirrored and the main
spindle and counterspindle are offset (rotated) through 180°.

7RROKROGHU

; :RUNSLHFHFRRUGLQDWH
V\VWHPZKHQ
/ XVLQJWKH
VWWRROKROGHU
=

/

=
:RUNSLHFHFRRUGLQDWH
V\VWHPZKHQ
XVLQJWKH
; QGWRROKROGHU

7RROKROGHU

In the simulation, the tool is always displayed on the correct side, just the same as it is used
at the machine.
The programmed C offset around 180° only affects C axes, not spindles.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 571
Working with two tool carriers
14.2 Measure tool

It is not possible to machine a thread with tools that are distributed between both tool
holders.

G code programming
The following points must be taken into account for G code programming:
● After a tool change, tool mirroring on the second tool holder is automatically activated.
● When a TRANSMIT command is programmed, tool mirroring on the second tool holder is
automatically activated.

14.2 Measure tool

Selection options "Toolholder 1" and "Toolholder 2" are available for scratching when
measuring a tool. This is how you set the tool holder in which the tool to be measured is
located.

Turning
572 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Tool management 15
15.1 Lists for the tool management
All tools and also all magazine locations that have been created or configured in the NC are
displayed in the lists in the Tool area.
All lists display the same tools in the same order. When switching between the lists, the
cursor remains on the same tool in the same screen segment.
The lists have different parameters and softkey assignments. Switching between lists is a
specific change from one topic to the next.
● Tool list
All parameters and functions required to create and set up tools are displayed.
● Tool wear
All parameters and functions that are required during operation, e.g. wear and monitoring
functions, are listed here.
● Magazine
You will find the magazine and magazine location-related parameters and functions for
the tools/ magazine locations here.
● Tool data OEM
This list can be freely defined by the OEM.
Grinding-specific tool data are provided here if you are working with
grinding tools.

Sorting the lists

You can change the sorting within the lists:
● acc. to the magazine
● acc. to the name (tool identifier, alphabetic)
● according to the tool type
● according to the T number (tool identifier, numerical)

Filtering the lists

You can filter the lists according to the following criteria:
● only display the first cutting edge
● only tools that are ready to use
● only tools that have reached the pre-alarm limit
● only locked tools

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 573
Tool management
15.2 Magazine management

Search functions
You have the option of searching through the lists according to the following objects:
● Tool
● Magazine location
● Empty location

15.2 Magazine management

Depending on the configuration, the tool lists support a magazine management.

Magazine management functions

● Press the "Magazine" horizontal softkey to obtain a list that displays tools with magazine-
related data.
● The Magazine / Magazine location column is displayed in the lists.
● In the default setting, the lists are displayed sorted according to magazine location.
● The magazine selected via the cursor is displayed in the title line of each list.
● The "Magazine selection" vertical softkey is displayed in the tool list.
● You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
574 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.3 Tool types

15.3 Tool types

A number of tool types are available when you create a new tool. The tool type determines
which geometry data is required and how it will be computed.

Tool types

Figure 15-1 Example of Favorites list

Figure 15-2 Available tools in the "New tool - milling cutter" window

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 575
Tool management
15.3 Tool types

Figure 15-3 Available tools in the "New tool - drill" window

Figure 15-4 Tools listed in the "New tool - Grinding Tools" window

Turning
576 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.3 Tool types

Figure 15-5 Available tools in the "New tool - turning tools" window

Figure 15-6 Available tools in the "New tool - special tools" window

See also
Changing the cutting edge position or tool type (Page 610)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 577
Tool management
15.4 Tool dimensioning

15.4 Tool dimensioning

This section provides an overview of the dimensioning of tools.

Tool types

WK
/HQJWK;

OHQJ
WLS
W LQ J

+ROGHUDQJOH
&XW

&XWWLQJWLSDQJOH
5HIHUHQFHGLUHFWLRQ
&XWWLQJHGJHUDGLXV
/HQJWK=

Figure 15-7 Finishing tool (Type 510)

/HQJWK;

&XWWLQJWLSOHQJWK

5DGLXV

&XWWLQJWLSZLGWK
/HQJWK=

Figure 15-8 Plunge cutter (Type 520)

Turning
578 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.4 Tool dimensioning

/HQJWK; 'LDPHWHU

/HQJWK=

Figure 15-9 Milling cutter (Type 120)

'LDPHWHU
/HQJWK;

/HQJWK=

7LSDQJOH

Figure 15-10 Drill (Type 200)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 579
Tool management
15.4 Tool dimensioning

/HQJWK; /HQJWK=

Figure 15-11 Threading tool (Type 540)

/HQJWK;

/HQJWK=

5DGLXV

Figure 15-12 Button tool (Type 550)

Turning
580 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.4 Tool dimensioning

'LDPHWHU
/HQJWK=

Figure 15-13 Stop (Type 730)

+ROGHUDQJOH &XWWLQJWLSDQJOH

r r
/HQJWK;
'ULOOš

/HQJWK=

Figure 15-14 Rotary drill(Type 560)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 581
Tool management
15.4 Tool dimensioning

/HQJWK;

'LDPHWHU
3LWFK

/HQJWK=

Figure 15-15 Tap (Type 240)

'LDPHWHU

/HQJWKP

/HQJWKX

Figure 15-16 3D probe

Machine manufacturer
The tool length is measured to the center of the ball or to the ball
circumference.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Note
A 3D probe must be calibrated before use.

Turning
582 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.5 Tool list

15.5 Tool list

All parameters and functions that are required to create and set up the tools are displayed in
the tool list.
Each tool is uniquely identified by the tool identifier and the replacement tool number.
For the tool display, i.e. when displaying the cutting edge positions, the machine coordinate
system is taken into account.

Tool parameters

Column heading Meaning

Location Magazine/location number
 The magazine location numbers
The magazine number is specified first, followed by the location
number in the magazine.
If there is only one magazine, only the location number is displayed.
BS  Load position in the load magazine

The following icons can also be displayed for other magazine types (e.g.
for a chain):
*
 Spindle location as an icon
*
 Locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (applies only when a spindle with
* If activated in magazine
dual gripper is used) as icons.
selection
Type Tool type
Specific tool offset data is displayed depending on the tool type
(represented as an icon).
The icon identifies the position of the tool; this was selected when the tool
was created.
You have the option of changing the tool position or the tool type using
the<SELECT> key.

Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the replacement tool number. You
can enter the name as text or number.
Note: The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters. The
number of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode
characters. The following special characters are not permitted: | # ".
ST Replacement tool number (for replacement tool strategy).
D Cutting edge number
Length X, length Z Tool length
Geometry data length X and length Z
Radius Tool radius

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 583
Tool management
15.5 Tool list

Column heading Meaning

Width/ Cutting edge for Type 150 - side milling cutter and Type 151 - saw
Tip width/ Tip width for Type 520 - plunge cutter and Type 530 - cut-off tool
Tip angle / Tip angle for Type 200 – twist drill and Type 220 – centering tool and
Type 230 – countersink
Pitch Pitch for Type 240 - tap
Drilling radius Drilling radius for Type 560 - rotary drill. Holder angle and cutting tip angle
are fixed.
Cutting edge graphic
The cutting edge graphic shows the positioning defined by the holder
angle, cut direction and cutting tip angle.
Holder angle for Type 500 - rougher and Type 510 - finisher.
The reference direction for the holder angle specifies the cut direction.
In addition to the holder angle, the cutting tip angle is also specified.

N Number of teeth for Type 110 - ball end mill for cylindrical die-sinking
cutter, Type 111 - ball end mill for tapered die-sinking cutter, Type 120 -
end mill, Type 121 - end mill with corner rounding, Type 130 - angle head
cutter, Type 140 - facing tool, Type 150 - side mill, Type 155 - bevel
cutter, Type 156 - bevel cutter with corner rounding, and Type 157 -
tapered die-sinking cutter.
Tip length Tip length of a cutting tool or grooving cutter
The tip length is required for displaying the tools during the simulation of
the program processing.
Direction of spindle rotation
The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for
powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or counter-
spindle for turning tools.
If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "Drilling centric" or
"Thread centric", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting
direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates to match the tool.

Spindle is not switched on

CW spindle rotation

CCW spindle rotation

Coolant 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) can be switched on
and switched off.
The coolant infeed at the machine does not necessarily have to be set-up.
M1 - M4 Other tool-specific functions such as additional coolant infeed, monitoring
functions for speed, tool breakage, etc.

You use the configuration file to specify the selection of parameters in the list.

Turning
584 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.5 Tool list

Software option
In order to be able to manage the parameter spindle direction of rotation,
coolant and tool-specific functions (M1-M4), you require the
"ShopMill/ShopTurn" option.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Icons in the tool list

Icon/ Meaning
Marking
Tool type
Red "X" The tool is disabled.

Yellow triangle pointing The prewarning limit has been reached.

downward
Yellow triangle pointing The tool is in a special state.
upward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tool tip will
provide a brief description.
Green border The tool is preselected.

Magazine/location number
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change
position.
Gray double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the loading
position.
Red "X" The magazine location is disabled.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 585
Tool management
15.5 Tool list

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool list" softkey.

The "Tool list" window is opened.

See also
Displaying tool details (Page 609)
Changing the cutting edge position or tool type (Page 610)

15.5.1 Other data

The following tool types require geometry data that is not included in the tool list display.

Tool types with additional geometry data

Tool type Additional parameters

111 Conical ballhead cutter Corner radius
121 End mill with corner Corner radius
rounding
130 Angle head cutter Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
Wear length (Δ length X, Δ length Y, Δ length Z)
Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z)
V (direction vector 1 - 6)
Vector X, vector Y, vector Z
131 Angle head cutter with Geometry length (length X, length Y, length Z)
corner rounding Corner radius
Wear length (Δ length X, Δ length Y, Δ length Z)
Adapter length (length X, length Y, length Z)
V (direction vector 1 - 6)
Vector X, vector Y, vector Z
140 Face milling External radius
Tool angle
155 Bevel cutter Taper angle
156 Bevel cutter with corner Corner radius
rounding Taper angle
157 Conical die milling cutter Taper angle

Turning
586 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.5 Tool list

You can use the configuration file to specify the data to be displayed for specific tool types in
the "Additional Data" window.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. In the list, select an appropriate tool, e.g. angled head miller.

3. Press the "Additional data" softkey.
The "Additional data - ..." window is opened.
The "Additional data" softkey is only active if a tool for which the
"Additional Data" window is configured is selected.

15.5.2 Creating a new tool

When creating a new tool, the "New tool - favorites" window offers you a number of selected
tool types, known as "favorites".
If you do not find the desired tool type in the favorites list, then select the milling, drilling,
turning or special tool via the corresponding softkeys.

Note
Grinding tools
Additional grinding tools are available depending on the particular machine configuration.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Place the cursor in the tool list at the position where the new tool
should be stored.
For this, you can select an empty magazine location or the NC tool
memory outside of the magazine.
You may also position the cursor on an existing tool in the area of the
NC tool memory. Data from the displayed tool will not be overwritten.
3. Press the "New tool" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 587
Tool management
15.5 Tool list

The "New tool - favorites" window opens.

- OR -
If you want to create a tool that is not in the "Favorites" list, press the
softkey "Cutters 100-199", "Drill 200-299", "Grinders 400-499"
"Turntools 500-599" or "Spec.tool 700-900".
...
The "New tool - milling cutter", "New tool - drill", "New tool - grinding
tools", "New tool - turning tools" or "New tool - special tools" window
opens.
4. Select the tool by placing the cursor on the corresponding tool type
and on the icon of the desired cutting edge position.
5. If more than four cutting edge positions are available, select the
desired cutting edge position with the aid of the <cursor left> and
<cursor right> keys.

6. Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is added to the tool list with a predefined name. If the cursor
is located on an empty magazine location in the tool list, then the tool
is loaded to this magazine location.
The tool creation sequence can be defined differently.

Multiple load points

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Select loading point"
window appears when a tool is created directly in an empty magazine location or when the
"Load" softkey is pressed.
Select the required load point and confirm with the "OK" softkey.

Additional data
If configured accordingly, the "New tool" window opens after the required tool has been
selected and confirmed with "OK".
You can define the following data in this window:
● Names
● Tool location type
● Size of tool

References:
For a description of configuration options, refer to the
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
588 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.5 Tool list

15.5.3 Measuring the tool

You can measure the tool offset data for the individual tools directly from the tool list.

Note
Tool measurement is only possible with an active tool.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Select the tool that you want to measure in the tool list and press the
"Measure tool" softkey.

You jump to the "JOG" operating area and the tool to be measured is
entered in the "T" field in the "Length Manual" screen.

3. Select the cutting edge number D and the replacement tool number ST.

4. Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to
measure.

5. Traverse the tool towards the workpiece in the direction that is to be

measured and scratch it.
6. Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0.
If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual
value display.
7. Press the "Set length" softkey.
The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 589
Tool management
15.5 Tool list

15.5.4 Managing several cutting edges

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of offset data is
assigned to each cutting edge. The number of possible cutting edges depends on the control
configuration.
Tool cutting edges that are not required can be deleted.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Position the cursor on the tool for which you would like to store more
cutting edges.
3. Press the "Cutting edges" softkey in the "Tool list".

4. Press the "New cutting edge" softkey.

A new data set is stored in the list.
The cutting edge number is incremented by 1 and the offset data is
assigned the values of the cutting edge on which the cursor is
positioned.
5. Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.
6. Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.
7. Position the cursor on the cutting edge that you want to delete and
press the "Delete cutting edge" softkey.
The data set is deleted from the list. The first tool cutting edge cannot
be deleted.

Turning
590 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.5 Tool list

15.5.5 Delete tool

Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a clearer overview.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete.
3. Press the "Delete tool" softkey.
A safety prompt is displayed.
4. Press the "OK" softkey if you really want to delete the tool.

Use this softkey to delete the tool.

If the tool is in a magazine location, it is unloaded and then deleted.

Multiple load points - tool in magazine location

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Loading Point
Selection" window appears after pressing the "Delete tool" softkey.
Select the required load point and press the "OK" softkey to unload and delete the tool.

15.5.6 Loading and unloading tools

You can load and unload tools to and from a magazine via the tool list. When a tool is
loaded, it is taken to a magazine location. When it is unloaded, it is removed from the
magazine and stored in the tool list.
When you are loading a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location. You
may also directly specify an empty magazine location.
You can unload tools from the magazine that you are not using at present. HMI then
automatically saves the tool data in the tool list in the NC memory outside the magazine.
Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the
corresponding magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be
entered more than once.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 591
Tool management
15.5 Tool list

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if
the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will find
it at the end of the tool list).
3. Press the "Load" softkey.

The "Load to… " window opens.

The "... location" field is pre-assigned with the number of the first empty
magazine location.
4. Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested location.

- OR -
Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

- OR -
Press the "Spindle" softkey.

. The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location or spindle.

Several magazines
If you have configured several magazines, the "Load to ..." window appears after pressing
the "Load" softkey.
If you do not want to use the suggested empty location, then enter your desired magazine
and magazine location. Confirm your selection with "OK".

Multiple load points

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection"
window appears after pressing the "Load" softkey.
Select the required loading point and confirm with "OK".

Turning
592 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.5 Tool list

Unloading tools

1. Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to unload from the
magazine and press the "Unload" softkey.

2. Select the required load point in the "Load Point Selection" window.
3. Confirm your selection with "OK".

- OR -
Undo your selection with "Cancel".

15.5.7 Selecting a magazine

You can directly select the buffer memory, the magazine, or the NC memory.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Press the "Magazine selection" softkey.

If there is only one magazine, you will move from one area to the next
(i.e. from the buffer memory to the magazine, from the magazine to the
NC memory, and from the NC memory back to the buffer memory) each
time you press the softkey. The cursor is positioned at the beginning of
the magazine each time.
- OR -
If there is more than one magazine, the "Magazine Selection" window
opens. Position the cursor on the desired magazine in this window and
press the "Go to ..." softkey.
The cursor jumps directly to the beginning of the specified magazine.

Hiding magazines

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 593
Tool management
15.5 Tool list

Deactivate the checkbox next to the magazines that you do not want to
appear in the magazine list.

The magazine selection behavior with multiple magazines can be configured in different
ways.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
For a description of configuration options, refer to the
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
594 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.6 Tool wear

15.6 Tool wear

All parameters and functions that are required during operation are contained in the tool
wear list.
Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can measure this wear and
enter it in the tool wear list. The control then takes this information into account when
calculating the tool length or radius compensation. This ensures a consistent level of
accuracy during workpiece machining.
You can automatically monitor the tools' working times via the workpiece count, tool life or
wear.
In addition, you can disable tools when you no longer wish to use them.

Tool parameters

Column heading Meaning

Location Magazine/location number
 The magazine location numbers
The magazine number is specified first, followed by the location
number in the magazine.
If there is only one magazine, only the location number is displayed.
BS  Load position in the load magazine

The following icons can also be displayed for other magazine types (e.g.
for a chain):
 Spindle location as an icon
 Locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (applies only when a spindle
with dual gripper is used) as icons
* If activated in magazine
selection
Type Tool type
Depending on the tool type (represented by an icon), certain tool offset
data is enabled.
The icon identifies the position of the tool; this was selected when the tool
was created.
You have the option of changing the tool position or the tool type using
the <Select> key.

Tool name The tool is identified by the name and the replacement tool number. You
can enter the name as text or number.
Note: The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters. The
number of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode
characters. The following special characters are not permitted: | # ".
ST Replacement tool number (for replacement tool strategy).
D Cutting edge number
Δ length X, Δ length Z Wear for length X, or wear for length Z
Δ Radius Radius wear

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 595
Tool management
15.6 Tool wear

Column heading Meaning

TC Selection of tool monitoring
- By tool life (T)
- By count (C)
- By wear (W)
The wear monitoring is configured via a machine data item.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.
Tool life Tool life
Workpiece count Number of workpieces
Wear * Tool wear
*Parameter depends on
selection in TC
Setpoint Setpoint for tool life, workpiece count, or wear
Prewarning limit Specification of the tool life, workpiece count or wear at which a warning
is displayed.
G The tool is disabled when the checkbox is selected.

Icons in the tool wear list

Icon/ Meaning
Marking
Tool type
Red "X" The tool is disabled.

Yellow triangle pointing The prewarning limit has been reached.

downward
Yellow triangle pointing The tool is in a special state.
upward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tooltip provides a
short description.
Green border The tool is preselected.

Magazine/location number
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change position.

Gray double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the loading position.
(configurable)
Red "X" The magazine location is disabled.

Turning
596 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.6 Tool wear

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool wear" softkey.

See also
Displaying tool details (Page 609)
Changing the cutting edge position or tool type (Page 610)

15.6.1 Reactivate tool

You can replace disabled tools or make them ready for use again.

Preconditions
In order to be able to reactivate a tool, the monitoring function must be activated and a
setpoint must be stored.

Procedure

1. The tool wear list is opened.

2. Position the cursor on the disabled tool which you would like to reuse.
3. Press the "Reactivate" softkey.
The value entered as the setpoint is entered as the new tool life or
workpiece count.
The disabling of the tool is cancelled.

Reactivating and positioning

When the "Reactivate with positioning" function is configured, the selected tool's magazine
location will also be positioned at a loading point. You can exchange the tool.

Reactivation of all monitoring types

When the "Reactivation of all monitoring types" function is configured, all the monitoring
types set in the NC for a tool are reset during reactivation.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 597
Tool management
15.6 Tool wear

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Multiple load points

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection"
window appears after pressing the "Load" softkey.
Select the required load point and confirm with the "OK" softkey.

Turning
598 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.7 Tool data OEM

15.7 Tool data OEM

You have the option of configuring the list according to your requirements.
Depending on the machine configuration, grinding-specific parameters are displayed in the
list with OEM tool data.

Grinding tool-specific parameters

Column heading Meaning

Min. radius Limit value for the radius of the grinding wheel to monitor the geometry.
Actual radius Displays the sum of the geometry value, wear value and, if set, the base
dimension.
Min. width Limit value for the width of the grinding wheel to monitor the geometry.
Actual width The width of the grinding wheel measured, for example, after the
dressing.
Max. speed Maximum speed
Max. peripheral velocity Maximum peripheral velocity
Wheel angle Angle of inclined wheel
Monitoring Monitoring geometry and speed
Tool base dimension Defines whether the base dimension is used when calculating the SUG
and when monitoring the minimum wheel radius.
Spindle number Number of programmed spindle (e.g. grinding wheel peripheral velocity)
and spindle to be monitored (e.g. wheel radius and width).

Param. rad.calc. Selects the parameter to calculate the radius

 Length X
 Length Y
 Length Z
 Radius
Chaining rule This parameter defines which tool parameters of tool cutting edge 2 (D2)
and tool cutting edge 1 (D1) have to be chained to one another. When
the value of a chained parameter is modified, then the other cutting edge
is automatically used when chaining the parameter.

References
You can find more information on grinding tools in the following manual:
Function Manual, Extended Functions W4: Grinding-specific tool offset and monitoring
functions / SINUMERIK 840D sl
Refer to the following document for more information on configuring OEM tool data:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 599
Tool management
15.7 Tool data OEM

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "OEM tool" softkey.

3. Position the cursor on a grinding tool.

Turning
600 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.8 Magazine

15.8 Magazine
Tools are displayed with their magazine-related data in the magazine list. Here, you can take
specific actions relating to the magazines and the magazine locations.
Individual magazine locations can be location-coded or disabled for existing tools.

Tool parameters

Column heading Meaning

Location Magazine/location number
 The magazine location numbers
The magazine number is specified first, followed by the location
number in the magazine.
If there is only one magazine, only the location number is displayed.
BS  Load position in the load magazine

The following icons can also be displayed for other magazine types (e.g.
for a chain):
 Spindle location as an icon
 Locations for gripper 1 and gripper 2 (applies only when a spindle
with dual gripper is used) as icons
* If activated in magazine
selection
Type Tool type
Depending on the tool type (represented by an icon), certain tool offset
data is enabled.
The icon identifies the position of the tool; this was selected when the tool
was created.
You have the option of changing the tool position or the tool type using
the <Select> key.

Tool name The tool is identified by the name and number of the replacement tool
(ST). You can enter the name as text or number.
Note: The maximum length of tool names is 31 ASCII characters. The
number of characters is reduced for Asian characters or Unicode
characters. The following special characters are not permitted: | # ".
ST Number of the replacement tool.
D Cutting edge number
G Disabling of the magazine location.
Mag.loctype Display of magazine location type.
Tool.loctype Display of tool location type.
Ü Marking a tool as oversized. The tool occupies two half locations left, two
half locations right, one half location top and one half location bottom in a
magazine.
P Fixed location coding.
The tool is permanently assigned to this magazine location.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 601
Tool management
15.8 Magazine

Magazine list icons

Icon/ Meaning
Marking
Tool type
Red "X" The tool is disabled.

Yellow triangle pointing The prewarning limit has been reached.

downward
Yellow triangle pointing The tool is in a special state.
upward Place the cursor on the marked tool. A tooltip provides a
short description.
Green border The tool is preselected.

Magazine/location number
Green double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the change position.

Gray double arrow The magazine location is positioned at the loading position.
(configurable)
Red "X" The magazine location is disabled.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Magazine” softkey.

See also
Displaying tool details (Page 609)
Changing the cutting edge position or tool type (Page 610)

Turning
602 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.8 Magazine

15.8.1 Positioning a magazine

You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

Procedure

1. The magazine list is opened.

2. Place the cursor on the magazine location that you want to position
onto the load point.
3. Press the "Position magazine" softkey.
The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

Multiple load points

If you have configured several loading points for a magazine, then the "Load Point Selection"
window appears after pressing the "Position magazine" softkey.
Select the desired loading point in this window and confirm your selection with "OK" to
position the magazine location at the loading point.

15.8.2 Relocating a tool

Tools can be directly relocated within magazines to another magazine location, which means
that you do not have to unload tools from the magazine in order to load them into a different
location.
When you are relocating a tool, the application automatically suggests an empty location.
You may also directly specify an empty magazine location.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The magazine list is opened.

2. Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different
magazine location.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 603
Tool management
15.8 Magazine

3. Press the "Relocate" softkey.

The "... relocate from location ... to location ..." window is displayed. The
"Location" field is pre-assigned with the number of the first empty
magazine location.
4. Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the recommended
magazine location.

- OR -
Enter the required magazine number in the "...magazine" field and the
required magazine location number in "Location" field.
Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Several magazines
If you have set up several magazines, then the "...relocate from magazine... location... to..."
window appears after pressing the "Relocate" softkey.
Select the desired magazine and location, and confirm your selection with "OK" to load the
tool.

Turning
604 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.9 Sorting tool management lists

15.9 Sorting tool management lists

When you are working with many tools, with large magazines or several magazines, it is
useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then you will be able to find a
specific tool more easily in the lists.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool list", "Tool wear" or "Magazine" softkey.

...

3. Press the ">>" and "Sort" softkeys.

The lists are displayed sorted numerically according to magazine

location.

4. Press the "Acc. to type" softkey to display the tools arranged by tool
type. Identical types are sorted according to their radius.

Press the "Acc. to name" softkey to display the tool names in

alphabetical order.
The replacement tool numbers are used to sort tools with the same
names.
- OR -
Press the "Acc. to T number" softkey to display the tools sorted
numerically.

The list is sorted according to the specified criteria.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 605
Tool management
15.10 Filtering the tool management lists

15.10 Filtering the tool management lists

The filter function allows you to filter-out tools with specific properties in the tool
management lists.
For instance, you have the option of displaying tools during machining that have already
reached the pre-alarm limit in order to prepare the corresponding tools for equipping.

Filter criteria
● only display the first cutting edge
● only tools that are ready to use
● only tools that have reached the pre-alarm limit
● only locked tools

Note
Multiple selection
You have the option of selecting several criteria. You will receive an appropriate message
if conflicting filter options are selected.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool list", "Tool wear" or "Magazine" softkey.

...

3. Press the ">>" and "Filter" softkeys.

The "Filter" window is opened.
...

4. Activate the required filter criterion and press the "OK" softkey.
The tools that correspond to the selection criteria are displayed in the
list.
The active filter is displayed in the window header.

Turning
606 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.11 Specific search in the tool management lists

15.11 Specific search in the tool management lists

There is a search function in all tool management lists, where you can search for the
following objects:
● Tools
You enter a tool name. You can make your search more precise by entering a
replacement tool number. Depending on the configuration, the entry field "replacement
tool" is not available.
You have the option of only entering a part of the name as search term.
● Magazine locations or magazines
If only one magazine is configured, then the search is made according to the magazine
location.
If several magazines are configured, then it is possible to search a specific magazine
location in a specific magazine or just to search in a specific magazine.
● Empty locations
The empty location search is realized using the tool size. The tool size is defined by the
number of half locations required to the right, left, top and bottom. All four directions are
of significance for a box magazine. For a chain magazine, a disk-type or a turret, only the
half locations to the right and left are of significance. The maximum number of half
locations, which a tool can occupy is limited to 7.
If the lists with the location type are used, then the empty location search is made using
the location type and location size.
You can enter the location type as numerical value or as text depending on the particular
configuration.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
For a description of configuration options, refer to the
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 607
Tool management
15.11 Specific search in the tool management lists

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool list", "Tool wear" or "Magazine" softkey.

...

3. Press the ">>" and "Search" softkeys.

4. Press the "Tool" softkey if you wish to search for a specific tool.

- OR -
Press the "Magazine location" softkey if you wish to search for a
specific magazine location or a specific magazine.

- OR -
Press the "Empty location" softkey if you wish to search for a specific
empty location.

5. Press the "OK" softkey.

The search is started.
6. Press the "Search" softkey again if the tool that was found is not the
tool that was being searched for.
The search term is kept and with "OK" you start the search for the next
tool that corresponds to the entry.
7. Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the search.

Turning
608 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.12 Displaying tool details

15.12 Displaying tool details

All of the parameters of the selected tool are listed in the "Tool details - all parameters"
window.
The parameters are displayed, sorted according to the following criteria
● Tool data
● Grinding data (if grinding tools have been configured)
● Cutting edge data
● Monitoring data

Protection level
You require access level, key switch 3 (protection level 4) in order to edit the parameters in
the detail window.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. The tool list, the wear list, the OEM tool list or the magazine is opened.

...

2. Position the cursor to the desired tool.

3. If you are in the tool list or in the magazine, press the ">>" softkey and
"Details".

- OR -
If you are in the wear list or OEM tool list, press the "Details" softkey.

The "Tool details" window is displayed.

All of the available tool data is displayed in the list.
4. Press the "Grinding data" softkey if you want to display the grinding
data.

5. Press the softkey "Cutting edge data", if you wish to display the cutting
edge data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 609
Tool management
15.13 Changing the cutting edge position or tool type

6. Press the softkey "Monitoring data", if you wish to display the

monitoring data.

7. Press the "Additional details" softkey.

The "Tool details - all parameters" window is opened.
All of the tool parameters are displayed in the list.

15.13 Changing the cutting edge position or tool type

Procedure

1. The tool list, the wear list, the OEM tool list or the magazine is opened.

...

2. Position the cursor in the column "Type" of the tool that you wish to
change.
3. Press the <SELECT> key.
The "Tool types - Favorites" window opens.

4 Press the <Cursor right> or <Cursor left> key to select the new cutting
edge position or the tool position for grinding tools.

- OR -

Select the desired tool type in the list of favorites or select the required
tool type using the softkeys "Cutters 100-199", "Drill 200-299",
"Grinders 400-499" "Turntools 500-599" or "Spec.tool 700-900".
Note: A grinding tool can only be changed into another grinding tool
type.
5. Press the "OK" softkey.
The new cutting edge position / tool position or the new tool type is
accepted and the corresponding icon is displayed in the "Type" column.

Turning
610 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

15.14 Working with multitool

Using a multitool you have the possibility of storing more than one tool at a magazine
location.
The multitool itself has two or more locations to accept tools. The tools are directly mounted
on the multitool. The multitool is located at a location in the magazine.

Typical applications
One application for using multitools on lathes with revolver and counterspindle is to equip the
multitool with two turning tools. One turning tool for machining on the main spindle and one
turning tool for machining on the counterspindle.
An additional application is to use multitools on lathes equipped with a tool spindle. A
multitool, on which several tools have been mounted, is inserted in the tool spindle at this
machine. A tool change within the multitool is realized by positioning the multitool, i.e. by
rotating the tool spindle.

Geometrical arrangement of the tools on the multitool

The multitool knows the parameters "No. of locations" and "Type of clearance determination
of the locations".
The type of clearance can be defined as follows:
● Using the multitool location number or
● using the angle of the multitool location
If angle is selected here, then the value of the angle must be entered for each multitool
location.
Regarding loading and unloading in a magazine, the multitool is treated as a single unit.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 611
Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

15.14.1 Tool list for multitool

If you work with a multitool, the tool list is supplemented by the column for the multitool
location number. As soon as the cursor is at a multitool in the tool list, certain column
headings change.

Column heading Meaning

Location Magazine/location number
MT loc. Multitool location number
TYPE Symbol for multitool
Multitool name Name of the multitool.
Loc. qty. Number of locations of the multitool.
Type distance  Angle

Clearance of the multitool locations in degrees

 Location number
Multitool location number

Figure 15-17 Tool list with multitool in the revolver

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool list" softkey.

The "Tool list" window is opened.

Turning
612 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

15.14.2 Create multitool

The multitool can be selected in the list of favorites as well as in the list of special tool types.

Figure 15-18 List of favorites with multitool

Figure 15-19 Selection list for special tools with multitool

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 613
Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Position the cursor at the position where the tool is to be created.

For this, you can select an empty magazine location or the NC
tool memory outside of the magazine.
You may also position the cursor on an existing tool in the area of
the NC tool memory. Data from the displayed tool will not be
overwritten.
3. Press the "New tool" softkey.

The "New Tool - Favorites" window opens.

- OR -
Press the "Special tool 700-900" softkey.

4. Select the multitool and press the "OK" softkey.

The "New tool" window appears.
5. Enter the name of the multitool, define the number of multitool
locations and select how the clearance type is determined (e.g.
multitool location number).
If you selected an angle to determine the clearance, then enter
the clearance to the reference location as angular value for each
multitool location.

The multitool is created in the tool list.

The tool creation sequence can be defined differently.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
614 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

15.14.3 Equipping multitool with tools

Precondition
A multitool has been created in the tool list.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Select the required multitool, position the cursor at an empty

multitool location and press the "New tool" softkey.
Using the appropriate selection list, e.g. favorites, select the
required tool

- OR -
Position the cursor on the tool that you wish to load into the
multitool and press the "Load" and "Multitool" softkeys.
The "Load to..." window opens.

Select the required multitool and the multitool location to which

you wish to load the tool.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 615
Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

15.14.4 Removing a tool from multitool

If the multitool was mechanically re-assigned (i.e. new tool were mounted), then old tools in
the tool list must be removed from the multitool.
To do this, the cursor is positioned at the line where the tool is located, which is to be
removed. When unloading, the tool is automatically saved in the tool list outside the
magazine in the NC memory.

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Position the cursor on the tool that you would like to unload from
the multitool and press the "Unload" softkey.

- OR -
Position the cursor on the tool that you would like to remove and
delete from the multitool and press the "delete tool" softkey.

15.14.5 Deleting multitool

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Position the cursor on the multitool that you wish to delete.

3. Press the "Delete multitool" softkey.
The multitool with all of the tools that are located in it is deleted.

15.14.6 Loading and unloading multitool

Procedure

1. The tool list is opened.

2. Position the cursor at the multitool that you wish to load into the
magazine.

Turning
616 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

3. The "Load to" window opens.

The "... location" field is pre-assigned with the number of the first
empty magazine location.
4. Press the "OK" softkey to load the multitool to the recommended
empty location.

- OR -
Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

The multitool together with the tools in it is loaded to the specified

magazine location.

Unloading a multitool
1. Position the cursor on the multitool that you would like to unload
from the magazine and press the "Unload" softkey.
The multitool is removed from the magazine and is saved in the
NC memory at the end of the tool list.

15.14.7 Reactivating multitool

Multitool and tools located on the multitool can be disabled independently of one another.
If a multitool is disabled, then the tools of the multitool can no longer be changed in using a
tool change.
If only one tool on a multitool has a set monitoring function and the lifetime or the unit
quantity has expired, then the tool and the multitool on which the tool is located are disabled.
The other tools on the multitool are not disabled.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

If several tools with monitoring are mounted on the multitool and the lifetime or unit quantity
has expired for one tool, then only this tool is disabled.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 617
Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

Reactivating
If a tool with expired lifetime or unit quantity that is mounted on a multitool is reactivated,
then for this tool, the lifetime/unit quantity is set to the setpoint and the tool and the multitool
are re-enabled (disable status is removed).
If a multitool is reactivated, on which tools with monitoring are mounted, then the lifetime/unit
quantity for all tools on the multitool are set to the setpoint no matter whether the tools are
disabled or not.

Preconditions
In order to be able to reactivate a tool, the monitoring function must be activated and a
setpoint must be stored.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Tool wear" softkey.

3. Position the cursor at the multitool that is disabled and which you
would like to reactivate.
- OR -
Position the cursor on the tool that you would like to reactivate
again.
4. Press the "Reactivate" softkey.
The value entered as the setpoint is entered as the new tool life
or workpiece count.
The tool and the multitool are then no longer disabled (the disable
is withdrawn).

Turning
618 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

Reactivating and positioning

When the "Reactivate with positioning" function is configured, then also the magazine
location at which the selected multitool is located, is positioned to the loading point. You can
exchange the multitool.

Reactivation of all monitoring types

When the "Reactivation of all monitoring types" function is configured, all the monitoring
types set in the NC for a tool are reset during reactivation.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

15.14.8 Relocating a multitool

Multitools can be directly relocated within magazines to another magazine location, which
means that you do not have to unload multitools with the associated tools from the magazine
in order to relocate them to a different location.
When you are relocating a multitool, the system automatically recommends an empty
location. You may also directly specify an empty magazine location.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the "Magazine” softkey.

3. Position the cursor at the multitool that you wish to relocate to a

different magazine location.
4. Press the "Relocate" softkey.
The "... relocate from location ... to location ..." window is
displayed. The "Location" field is pre-assigned with the number of
the first empty magazine location.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the multitool to the
recommended magazine location.

OR -

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 619
Tool management
15.14 Working with multitool

Enter the required magazine number in the "...magazine" field

and the required magazine location number in "Location" field.
Press the "OK" softkey.
The multitool with the tools is relocated to the specified magazine
location.

15.14.9 Positioning multitool

You can position a magazine. In this case, a magazine location is positioned to the loading
point.
Multitools, which are located in a spindle, can also be positioned. The multitool is rotated and
therefore the multitool location involved is brought into the machining position.

Procedure

1. The magazine list is opened.

2. Position the cursor at the multitool location, which you wish to

bring into the machining position (the multitool is located in the
spindle).
3. Press the "Position multitool" softkey.
If the cursor is at a multitool location of a multitool, which is
located in the spindle, the multitool location is positioned to the
machining position.

Turning
620 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Program management 16
16.1 Overview
You can access programs at any time via the Program Manager for execution, editing,
copying, or renaming. Programs that you no longer require can be deleted to release their
storage space.

NOTICE
Execution from USB FlashDrive
Direct execution from a USB FlashDrive is not recommended.
There is no protection against contact problems, falling out, breakage through knocking or
unintentional removal of the USB FlashDrive during operation.
Disconnecting it during operation will result in the stopping of the machining and thus to the
workpiece being damaged.

Storage for programs

Possible storage locations are:
● NC
● Local drive
● Network drives
● USB drives
● V24

Software options

To display the "Local drive" softkey, you require the option "Additional 256 MB
HMI user memory on CF Card of the NCU" (not for SINUMERIK Operate on
PCU50 or PC/PG).

Data exchange with other workstations

You have the following options for exchanging programs and data with other workstations:
● USB drives (e.g. USB FlashDrive)
● Network drives

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 621
Program management
16.1 Overview

Choosing storage locations

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage location that contains the directories
and programs that you want to display. In addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the passive
file system data can be displayed, additional softkeys can be displayed.
The "USB" softkey is only operational when an external storage medium is connected (e.g.
USB FlashDrive on the USB port of the operator panel).

Structure of the directories

In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the following meaning:

Directory

Program

All directories have a plus sign when the program manager is called for the first time.

Figure 16-1 Program directory in the program manager

The plus sign in front of empty directories is removed after they have been read for the first
time.
The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information:
● Name
The name may be a maximum of 24 characters long
Permissible characters include all upper-case letters (without accents), numbers, and
underscores.
● Type
Directory: WPD
Program: MPF
Subprogram: SPF
Initialization programs: INI

Turning
622 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.1 Overview

Job lists: JOB

Tool data: TOA
Magazine assignment: TMA
Zero points: UFR
R parameters: RPA
Global user data/definitions: GUD
Setting data: SEA
Protection zones: PRO
Sag: CEC
● Size (in bytes)
● Date/time (of creation or last change)

Active programs
Selected, i.e. active programs are identified using a green symbol.

Figure 16-2 Active program shown in green

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 623
Program management
16.1 Overview

16.1.1 NC memory
The complete NC working memory is displayed along with all tools and the main programs
and subroutines.
You can create further subdirectories here.

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Press the "NC" softkey.

16.1.2 Local drive

Workpieces, main and subprograms that are saved in the user memory of the CF-Card or on
the local hard disk are displayed.
For archiving, you have the option of mapping the structure of the NC memory system or to
create your own archiving system.
You can create any number of subdirectories here, in which to store any files (e.g. text files
with notes).

Software options
To display the "Local drive" softkey, you require the option "Additional 256 MB
HMI user memory on CF Card of the NCU" (not for SINUMERIK Operate on
PCU50 or PC/PG).

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Press the "Local drive" software key.

On the local drive, you have the option of mapping the directory structure of the NC memory.
This also simplifies the search sequence.

Turning
624 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.1 Overview

Procedure

1. The local drive is selected.

2. Position the cursor on the main directory.

3. Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

The "New Directory" window opens.

4. In the "Name" entry field, enter "mpf.dir", "spf.dir" and "wks.dir" and
press the "OK" softkey.
The directories "Part programs", "Subprograms" and "Workpieces" are
created below the main directory.

16.1.3 USB drives

USB drives enable you to exchange data. For example, you can copy to the NC and execute
programs that were created externally.

NOTICE
Execution from USB FlashDrive
Direct execution from the USB FlashDrive is not recommended.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Press the "USB" softkey.

Note
The "USB" softkey can only be operated when a USB FlashDrive is inserted in the front
interface of the operator panel.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 625
Program management
16.2 Opening and closing the program

16.2 Opening and closing the program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, open the program in the editor.
With programs that are in the NCK memory, navigation is already possible when opening.
The program blocks can only be edited when the program has been opened completely. You
can follow the opening of the program in the dialog line.
With programs that are opened via local network, USB FlashDrive or network connections,
navigation is only possible when the program has been opened completely. A progress
message box is displayed when opening the program.

Note
Channel changeover in the editor
When opening the program, the editor is opened for the currently selected channel. This
channel is used to simulate the program.
If you change over a channel in the editor, this does not influence the editor. Only when
closing the editor do you change into the other channel.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the
program that you would like to edit.
3. Press the "Open" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <INPUT> key.

- OR -
Press the <Cursor right> key.

- OR -
Double-click the program.
The selected program is opened in the "Editor" operating area.
4. Now make the necessary program changes.

Turning
626 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.3 Executing a program

5. Press the "NC Select" softkey to switch to the "Machine" operating area
and begin execution.

When the program is running, the softkey is deactivated.

Closing the program

Press the ">>" and "Exit" softkeys to close the program and editor again.

- OR -
If you are at the start of the first line of the program, press the <Cursor left>
key to close the program and the editor.

To reopen a program you have exited with "Close", press the "Program" key.

Note
A program does not have to be closed in order for it to be executed.

16.3 Executing a program

When you select a program for execution, the controller automatically switches to the
"Machine" operating area.

Program selection
Select the workpieces (WPD), main programs (MPF) or subprograms (SPF) by placing the
cursor on the desired program or workpiece.
For workpieces, the workpiece directory must contain a program with the same name. This
program is automatically selected for execution (e.g. when you select the workpiece
SHAFT.WPD, the main program SHAFT.MPF is automatically selected).
If an INI file of the same name exists (e.g. SHAFT.INI), it will be executed once at the first
part program start after selection of the part program. Any additional INI files are executed in
accordance with machine data MD11280 $MN_WPD_INI_MODE.
MD11280 $MN_WPD_INI_MODE=0:

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 627
Program management
16.3 Executing a program

The INI file with the same name as the selected workpiece is executed. For example, when
you select SHAFT1.MPF, the SHAFT1.INI file is executed upon <CYCLE START>.
MD11280 $MN_WPD_INI_MODE=1:
All files of type SEA, GUD, RPA, UFR, PRO, TOA, TMA and CEC which have the same
name as the selected main program are executed in the specified sequence. The main
programs stored in a workpiece directory can be selected and processed by several
channels.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the
workpiece/program that you would like to execute.
3. Press the "Select" softkey.

The controller switches automatically into the "Machine" operating area.

- OR -
If the selected program is already opened in the "Program" operating
area,
Press the "Execute NC" softkey.
Press the <CYCLE START> key.
Execution of the workpiece is started.

Note
Only workpieces/programs that are located in the NCK memory, local drive or USB drive can
be selected for execution.

Turning
628 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

16.4.1 Creating a new directory

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. You can
create subdirectories in a directory on the local drive and on USB/network drives.
In a subdirectory, in turn, you can create programs and then create program blocks for them.

Note
Directory names must end in .DIR or .WPD. The maximum name length is 49 characters
including the extension.
All letters (except accented characters), numbers, and underscores are permitted for name
assignment. These names are automatically converted to upper-case letters.
This limitation does not apply for work on USB/network drives.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select your chosen storage medium, i.e. a local or USB drive.

3. If you want to create a new directory in the local network, place the
cursor on the topmost folder and press the "New" and "Directory"
softkeys.
The "New Directory" window opens.

4. Enter the desired directory name and press the "OK" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 629
Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

16.4.2 Creating a new workpiece

You can set up various types of files such as main programs, initialization files, tool offsets,
etc. in a workpiece.

Note
Workpiece directories
828D provides you with the option of nesting tool directories. You must note that the length
of the call line is restricted. You will be informed if the maximum number of characters is
reached when entering the workpiece name.
Under a workpiece directory (WPD), 840D sl does not allow any additional workpiece
directories to be created in the NC memory. You can create a free directory structure on the
local drive, USB and network drives; this means that you have the option to create other
workpieces or any number of directories in a workpiece. If you copy this data to the NC
memory then the length of the call line is checked.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder,
in which you would like to create a workpiece.

3. Press the "New" softkey.

The "New workpiece" window appears.
4. If necessary, select a template if any are available.
5. Enter the desired workpiece name and press the "OK" softkey.

The name may be a maximum of 24 characters long.

You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore
symbol (_).
The directory type (WPD) is set by default.
A new folder with the workpiece name will be created.
The "New G code program" window will open.
6. Press the "OK" softkey again if you want to create the program.

The program will open in the editor.

Turning
630 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

16.4.3 Creating a new G code program

You can create G code programs and then render G code blocks for them in a
directory/workpiece.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder,
in which you would like to store the program.
3. Press the "New" softkey.

The "New G Code Program" window opens.

4. If necessary, select a template if any are available.

5. Select the file type (MPF or SPF).
If you are in the NC memory and have selected either the
"Subprograms" or "Part Programs" folder, you can only create one
subprogram (SPF) or one main program (MPF).
6. Enter the desired program name and press the "OK" softkey.

Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length.

You can use all letters (with the exception of special characters,
language-specific special characters, Asian or Cyrillic characters),
numbers and underscores (_).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 631
Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

16.4.4 New ShopTurn program

In the part program and workpiece directories, you can create ShopTurn programs and then
subsequently generate the machining steps for them.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder,
in which you would like to store the program.
3. Press the "New" softkey.

4. Press the "ShopTurn” softkey.

The "New step sequence program" window opens.
The "ShopTurn" type is specified.
5. Enter the desired program name and press the "OK" softkey.

The program name can contain up to 28 characters (name + dot + 3-

character extension).
You can use all letters (with the exception of special characters,
language-specific special characters, Asian or Cyrillic characters),
numbers and underscores (_).

Turning
632 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

16.4.5 Storing any new file

In each directory or subdirectory you can create a file in any format that you specify.
This does not apply to the NC memory. Here you can create the following file types under a
workpiece using the "Any" softkey.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select the desired storage location and position the cursor on the folder,
in which you would like to create the file.
3. Press the "New" and "Any" softkeys.
The "Any new program" window appears

4. Select a file type from the "Type" selection field (for example,
"Definitions GUD") and enter the name of the file to be created when
you have selected a workpiece directory in the NC memory.
The file automatically has the selected file format.
- OR -
Enter a name and file format for the file to be created (e.g. My_Text.txt).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 633
Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

The name may be a maximum of 24 characters long.

You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore
symbol (_).
5. Press the "OK" softkey.

16.4.6 Creating a Joblist

For every workpiece, you can create a job list for extended workpiece selection.
In the job list, you specify instructions for program selection in different channels.

Syntax
The job list contains the SELECT select instructions.
SELECT <program> CH=<channel number> [DISK]
The SELECT instruction selects a program for execution in a specific NC channel. The
selected program must be loaded into the working memory of the NC. The DISK parameter
enables the selection of external execution (CF card, USB data carrier, network drive).
● <Program>
Absolute or relative path specification of the program to be selected.
Examples:
– //NC/WCS.DIR/SHAFT.WPD/SHAFT1.MPF
– SHAFT2.MPF
● <Channel number>
Number of the NC channel in which the program is to be selected.
Example:
CH=2
● [DISK]
Optional parameter for programs that are not in the NC memory and are to be executed
"externally".
Example:
SELECT //remote/myshare/shaft3.mpf CH=1 DISK

Comment
Comments are identified in the job list by ";" at the start of the line or by round brackets.

Template
You can select a template from Siemens or the machine manufacturer when creating a new
job list.

Turning
634 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

Executing a workpiece
If the "Select" softkey is selected for a workpiece, the syntax of the associated job list is
checked and then executed. The cursor can also be placed on the job list for selection.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Press the "NC" softkey, and in directory "Workpieces" place the cursor
on the program for which you wish to create a job list.

3. Press the "New" and "Any" softkeys.

The "Any New Program" window opens.
4. Select entry "Job list JOB" from the "Type" selection field and enter a
name and press the "OK" softkey.

16.4.7 Creating a program list

You can also enter programs in a program list that are then selected and executed from the
PLC.
The program list may contain up to 100 entries.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and the "Program list" softkey.
The "Prog.-list" window opens.

3. Place the cursor in the desired line (program number).

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 635
Program management
16.4 Creating a directory/program/joblist/program list

4. Press the "Select program" softkey.

The "Programs" window opens. The data tree of the NC memory with
workpiece, part program and subprogram directory is displayed.
5. Place the cursor on the desired program and press the "OK" softkey.
The selected program is inserted in the first line of the list together with
its path.
- OR -
Enter the program name directly in the list.
If you are making entries manually, check that the path is correct (e.g.
//NC/WKS.DIR/MEINPROGRAMM.WPD/MEINPROGRAMM.MPF).
//NC and the extension (.MPF) may be added automatically.
With multi-channel machines, you can specify in which channel the
program is to be selected.
6. To remove a program from the list, place the cursor on the appropriate
line and press the "Delete" softkey.

- OR -
To delete all programs from the program list, press the "Delete all"
softkey.

Turning
636 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.5 Creating templates

16.5 Creating templates

You can store your own templates to be used for creating part programs and workpieces.
These templates provide the basic framework for further editing.
You can use them for any part programs or workpieces you have created.

Storage location for templates

The templates used to create part programs or workpieces are stored in the following
directories:
HMI Data/Templates/Manufacturer/Part programs or Workpieces
HMI Data/Templates/User/Part programs or Workpieces

Procedure

1. Select the "Startup" operating area.

2. Press the "System data" softkey.

3. Position the cursor on the file that you wish to store as a template and
press the "Copy" softkey.

4. Select the directory in which you want to store the data - "Part
programs" or "Workpieces" - and press the "Paste" softkey.

Stored templates can be selected when a part program or a workpiece

is being created.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 637
Program management
16.6 Searching directories and files

16.6 Searching directories and files

You have the possibility of searching in the Program Manager for certain directories and
files.

Note
Search with place holders
The following place holders simplify the search:
 "*": replaces any character string
 "?": replaces any character

Search strategy
The search is made in all of the selected directories and their subdirectories.
If the cursor is positioned on a file, then a search is made from the higher-level directory.

Note
Searching in opened directories
Open the closed directories for a successful search.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the storage location in which you wish to perform the search and
then press the ">>" and "Search" softkeys.
The "Find file" window appears.

3. Enter the desired search term in the "Text" field.

Note: When searching for a file, enter the complete name with
extension (e.g. DRILLING.MPF).
4. When required, activate the checkbox "Observe upper and lower case".
5. Press the "OK" softkey to start the search.

6. If a corresponding directory or file is found, then it is marked.

7. Press the "Continue search" and "OK" softkeys if the directory or the file
does not correspond to the required result.

Turning
638 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.7 Displaying the program in the Preview.

- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey when you want to cancel the search.

16.7 Displaying the program in the Preview.

You can show the content on a program in a preview before you start editing.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Select a storage location and place the cursor on the relevant program.
3. Press the ">>" and "Preview window" softkeys.
The "Preview: ..." window opens.

4. Press the "Preview window" softkey again to close the window.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 639
Program management
16.8 Selecting several directories/programs

16.8 Selecting several directories/programs

You can select several files and directories for further processing. When you select a
directory, all directories and files located beneath it are also selected.

Note
Selected files
If you have selected individual files in a directory, then this selection is canceled when the
directory is closed.
If the complete directory with all of the files included in it are selected, then this selection is
kept when closing the directory.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Choose the desired storage location and position the cursor on the file
or directory from which you would like your selection to start.
3. Press the "Select" softkey.

The softkey is active.

4. Select the required directories/programs with the cursor keys or mouse.

5. Press the "Select" softkey again to deactivate the cursor keys.

Canceling a selection
By reselecting an element, the existing selection is canceled.

Turning
640 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.8 Selecting several directories/programs

Selecting via keys

Key combination Meaning

Renders or expands a selection.
You can only select individual elements.

Renders a consecutive selection.

A previously existing selection is canceled.

Selecting with the mouse

Key combination Meaning

Left mouse Click on element: The element is selected.
A previously existing selection is canceled.
Left mouse + Expand selection consecutively up to the next click.

Pressed
Left mouse + Expand selection to individual elements by clicking.
An existing selection will expand to include the element you clicked.

Pressed

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 641
Program management
16.9 Copying and pasting a directory/program

16.9 Copying and pasting a directory/program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save
time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or
program blocks.
The capability of copying and pasting directories and programs can also be used to
exchange data with other systems via USB/network drives (e.g. USB FlashDrive).
Copied files or directories can be pasted in a different location.

Note
You can only paste directories on local drives and on USB or network drives.

Note
Write protection
If the current directory is write-protected for the user, then the function is not offered.

Note
When you copy directories, any missing endings are added automatically.
All letters (except accented characters), numbers, and underscores are permitted for name
assignment. The names are automatically converted to upper-case letters, and extra dots
are converted to underscores.

Example
If the name is not changed during the copy procedure, a copy is created automatically:
MYPROGRAM.MPF is copied to MYPROGRAM__1.MPF. The next time it is copied, it is
changed to MYPROGRAM__2.MPF, etc.
If the files MYPROGRAM.MPF, MYPROGRAM__1.MPF, and MYPROGRAM__3.MPF
already exist in a directory, MYPROGRAM__2.MPF is created as the next copy of
MYPROGRAM.MPF.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Choose the desired storage location and position the cursor on the file
or directory which you would like to copy.
3. Press the "Copy" softkey.

Turning
642 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.9 Copying and pasting a directory/program

4. Select the directory in which you want to paste your copied

directory/program.
5. Press the "Paste" softkey.

If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directory,

you are are informed. You are requested to assign a new name,
otherwise the directory/program is assigned a name by the system.
If the name contains illegal characters or is too long, a prompt will
appear for you to enter a permissible name.
6. Press the "OK" or "Overwrite all" softkey if you want to overwrite
existing directories/programs.

- OR -
Press the "No overwriting" softkey if you do not want to overwrite
already existing directories/programs.

- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if the copy operation is to be continued with the
next file.

- OR -
Enter another name if you want to paste the directory/program under
another name and press the "OK" softkey.

Note
Copying files in the same directory
You cannot copy files to the same directory. You must copy the file under a new name.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 643
Program management
16.10 Deleting a directory/program

16.10 Deleting a directory/program

Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longer using to maintain a
clearer overview of your data management. Back up the data beforehand, if necessary, on
an external data medium (e.g. USB FlashDrive) or on a network drive.
Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data and zero point data and
subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

Temp directory for ShopTurn

If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP"
directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for
calculating solid machining operations.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program manager" operating area.

2. Choose the desired storage location and position the cursor on the file
or directory that you would like to delete.
3. Press the ">>" and "Delete" softkeys.
A prompt appears as to whether you really want to delete the file or
directory.

4. Press the "OK" softkey to delete the program/directory.

- OR -.
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the process.

Turning
644 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.11 Renaming file and directory properties

16.11 Renaming file and directory properties

Information on directories and files can be displayed in the "Properties for ..." window.
Information on the creation date is displayed near the file's path and name.
You can change names.

Changing access rights

Access rights for execution, writing, listing and reading are displayed in the "Properties"
window.
● Execute: This is used for the selection
● Write: Controls the changing and deletion of a file or a directory
You can set the access rights from keyswitch 0 to the current access level. If an access level
is higher than the current access level, it cannot be changed.

Note
Access rights settings
The settings of the access rights for writing or deleting are evaluated in MD 51050.

Changing directories and files

Using the slfsfileattributes.ini configuration file, you have the option of changing or pre-
assigning the access rights of the directories and file types of the NC and user memory (local
drive).
A template is provided under System data in the directory
HMI data/Templates/Examples/Configuration files
After editing the configuration file, save the file in directory HMI data/Settings/Manufacturer
or HMI data/Settings/User.
The new access rights are effective after the machine has been restarted. If, when powering
up, errors are detected in a file, then a corresponding error message
(slfsfileattributesError.txt) is saved under HMI data/Template/Examples/Configuration data.

References
A detailed description can be found in the following documentation:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 645
Program management
16.11 Renaming file and directory properties

Procedure

1. Select the Program manager.

2. Choose the desired storage location and position the cursor on the file
or directory whose properties you want to display or change.

3. Press the ">>" and "Properties" softkeys.

The "Properties from ..." window appears.
...

4. Enter any necessary changes.

Note: You can save changes via the user interface in the NC memory.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to save the changes.

Turning
646 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.12 EXTCALL

16.12 EXTCALL
The EXTCALL command can be used to access files on a local drive, USB data carriers or
network drives from a part program.
The programmer can set the source directory with the setting data SD $SC42700
EXT_PROG_PATH and then specify the file name of the subprogram to be loaded with the
EXTCALL command.

General conditions
The following supplementary conditions must be taken into account with EXTCALL calls:
● You can only call files with the MPF or SPF extension via EXTCALL from a network drive.
● The files and paths must comply with the NCK naming conventions (max. 25 characters
for the name, 3 characters for the identifier).
● A program is found on a network drive with the EXTCALL command if
– with SD $SC42700 EXT_PROG_PATH, the search path refers to the network drive or
a directory contained on the network drive. The program must be stored directly on
that level, no subdirectories are searched.
– without SD $SC42700: The correct location of the program is specified in the
EXTCALL call itself by means of a fully qualified path that can also point to a
subdirectory of the network drive.
● For programs that were generated on external storage media (Windows system) observe
upper and lower case syntax.

Note
Maximum path length for EXTCALL
The path length must not exceed 112 characters. The path comprises the contents of the
setting data (SD $SC42700) and the path data for EXTCALL call from the part program.

Examples of EXTCALL calls

The setting data can be used to perform a targeted search for the program.
● Call of USB drive on TCU (USB storage device on interface X203), if SD42700 is empty:
e.g. EXTCALL "//TCU/TCU1 /X203 ,1/TEST.SPF"
- OR -
Call of USB drive on TCU (USB storage device on interface X203), if SD42700
"//TCU/TCU1 /X203 ,1" contains: EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
● Calls the USB front connection (USB FlashDrive), if SD $SC 42700 is empty: e.g.
EXTCALL "//ACTTCU/FRONT,1/TEST.SPF"
- OR -
Call of USB front connection (USB FlashDrive), if SD42700 "//ACTTCU/FRONT,1"
contains: EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 647
Program management
16.12 EXTCALL

● Call of network drive, if SD42700 is empty: e.g. EXTCALL "//computer name/enabled

drive/TEST.SPF"
- OR -
Calls the network drive, if SD $SC42700 "//Computer name/enabled drive" contains:
EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
● Use of the HMI user memory (local drive):
– On the local drive, you have created the directories part programs (mpf.dir),
subprograms (spf.dir) and workpieces (wks.dir) with the respective workpiece
directories (.wpd):
SD42700 is empty: EXTCALL "TEST.SPF"
The same search sequence is used on the CompactFlash card as in the NCK part
program memory.
– On the local drive, you have created your own directory (e.g. my.dir):
Specification of the complete path: e.g. EXTCALL
"/card/user/sinumerik/data/prog/my.dir/TEST.SPF"
A search is performed for the specified file.

Note
Abbreviations for local drive, CompactFlash Card and USB front connection
As abbreviation for the local drive, the CompactFlash Card and the USB front
connection you can use the abbreviation LOCAL_DRIVE:, CF_CARD: and USB: (e.g.
EXTCALL "LOCAL_DRIVE:/spf.dir/TEST.SPF").
Alternatively, you can also use the abbreviations CF_Card and LOCAL_DRIVE.

Software options
To display the "Local drive" softkey, you require the option "Additional 256 MB
HMI user memory on CF Card of the NCU" (not for SINUMERIK Operate on
PCU50 / PC).

NOTICE
Execution from USB FlashDrive
Direct execution from a USB FlashDrive is not recommended.
There is no protection against contact problems, falling out, breakage through knocking or
unintentional removal of the USB FlashDrive during operation.
Disconnecting it during operation will result in immediate stopping of the machining and,
thus, to the workpiece being damaged.

Turning
648 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.13 Backing up data

Machine manufacturer
Processing EXTCALL calls can be enabled and disabled.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

16.13 Backing up data

16.13.1 Generating an archive in the Program Manager

You have the option of archiving individual files from the NC memory and the local drive.

Archive formats
You have the option of saving your archive in the binary and punched tape format.

Save target
The archive folder of the system data in the "Startup" operating area as well as USB and
network drives are available as save target.

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Select the storage location for the file/files to be archived.

3. In the directories, select the required file from which you want to create
an archive.
- OR -
If you want to back up several files or directories, press the "Select"
softkey and, using the cursor keys or the mouse, select the required
directories or files.
4. Press the ">>" and "Archive" softkeys.

5. Press the "Generate archive" softkey.

The "Generate Archive: Select archiving" window opens.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 649
Program management
16.13 Backing up data

6. Position the cursor to the required storage location, press the "Search"
softkey, enter the required search term in the search dialog and press
the "OK" softkey if you wish to search for a specific directory or
subdirectory.
Note: The place holders "*" (replaces any character string) and "?"
(replaces any character) make it easier for you to perform a search.
- OR -
Select the required storage location, press the "New directory" softkey,
enter the required name in the "New directory" window and press the
"OK" softkey to create a directory.

7. Press "OK".
The "Generate Archive: Name" window opens.
9. Select the format (e.g. archive ARC (binary format)), enter the desired
name and press the "OK" softkey.
A message informs you if archiving was successful.

16.13.2 Generating an archive via the system data

If you only want to backup specific data, then you can select the desired files directly from
the data tree and generate an archive.

Archive formats
You have the option of saving your archive in the binary and punched tape format.
You can display the contents of the selected files (XML, ini, hsp, syf files, programs) in a
preview.
You can display information about the file, such as path, name, date of creation and change,
in a Properties window.

Precondition
The access rights depend on the relevant areas and range from protection level 7 (key
switch position 0) to protection level 2 (password: Service).

Storage locations
● CompactFlash Card under
/user/sinumerik/data/archive, or
/oem/sinumerik/data/archive
● All configured logical drives (USB, network drives)

Turning
650 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.13 Backing up data

Software option

In order to save archives on the CompactFlash Card in the user area you
require the option "Additional HMI user memory on CF card of NCU".

NOTICE
USB FlashDrive
USB FlashDrives are not suitable as persistent memory media.

Procedure

1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.

2. Press the "System data" softkey.

The data tree opens.
3. In the data tree, select the required files from which you want to
generate an archive.
- OR -
If you want to back up several files or directories, press the "Select"
softkey and, using the cursor keys or the mouse, select the required
directories or files.
4. If you press the ">>" softkey, further softkeys are displayed on the
vertical bar.

5. Press the "Preview window" softkey.

The contents of the selected file are displayed in a small window. Press
the "Preview window" softkey again to close the window.
6. Press the "Properties" softkey.
Information about the selected file is displayed in a small window. Press
the "OK" softkey to close the window.

7. Press the "Search" softkey.

Enter the required search term in the search dialog and press the "OK"
softkey if you wish to search for a specific directory or subdirectory.
Note: The place holders "*" (replaces any character string) and "?"
(replaces any character) make it easier for you to perform a search.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 651
Program management
16.13 Backing up data

8. Press the "Archive" and "Generate archive" softkeys.

The "Generate Archive: Select storage location" window opens.
The "Archive" folder with the subfolders "User" and "Manufacturer" as
well as the storage media (e.g. USB) are displayed.
9. Select the required location for archiving and press the "New directory"
softkey to create a suitable subdirectory.
The "New Directory" window opens.
10. Enter the required name and press the "OK" softkey.
The directory is created subordinate to the selected folder.
11. Press the "OK" softkey.
The "Generate Archive: Name" window opens.
12. Select the format (e.g. archive ARC (binary format)), enter the desired
name and press the "OK" softkey to archive the file/files.
A message informs you if archiving was successful.
13. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the message and end the archiving
operation.
An archive file in .arc format is created in the selected directory.

16.13.3 Reading in an archive in the Program Manager

In the "Program Manager" operating area, you have the option of reading in archives from
the archive folder of the system data as well as from configured USB and network drives.

Software option
In order to read-in user archives in the "Program Manager" operating area,
you require the option "Additional HMI memory on CF Card of NCU" (not for
SINUMERIK Operate on PCU50 / PC).

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Press the "Archive" and "Read in archive" softkeys.

The "Read in archive: Select archive" window opens.

Turning
652 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.13 Backing up data

3. Select the archive storage location and position the cursor on the
required archive.
Note: When the option is not set, the folder for user archives is
only displayed if the folder contains at least one archive.
- OR -
Press the "Search" softkey and in the search dialog, enter the
name of the archive file with file extension (*.arc) if you wish to
search for a specific archive and press the "OK" softkey.

4. Press the "OK" or "Overwrite all" softkey to overwrite existing files.

...

- OR -
Press the "Do not overwrite" softkey if you do not want to
overwrite already existing files.

- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if the read-in operation is to be continued
with the next file.

The "Read In Archive" window opens and a progress message

box appears for the read-in process.
You will then obtain a "Read error log for archive" in which the
skipped or overwritten files are listed.
5. Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the read-in process.

See also
Searching directories and files (Page 638)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 653
Program management
16.13 Backing up data

16.13.4 Read in archive from system data

If you want to read in a specific archive, you can select this directly from the data tree.

Procedure

1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.

2. Press the "System data" softkey.

3. In the data tree below the "Archive" directory, in the "User" folder,
select the file that you wish to read in.
4. Press the "Read in" softkey.

5. Press the "OK" or "Overwrite all" softkey to overwrite existing files.

...

- OR -
Press the "Do not overwrite" softkey if you do not want to
overwrite already existing files.

- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if the read-in operation is to be continued
with the next file.

The "Read In Archive" window opens and a progress message

box appears for the read-in process.
You will then obtain a "Read error log for archive" in which the
skipped or overwritten files are listed.
6. Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the read-in process.

Turning
654 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.14 Setup data

16.14 Setup data

16.14.1 Backing up setup data

Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point settings.
You can use this option, for example, to back up tools and zero point data for a specific
machining step program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will
then have quick access to the relevant settings.
Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied
easily into the tool management system using this option.

Backing-up job lists

If you wish to backup a job list, which contains ShopTurn and G code programs, you obtain
dedicated selection boxes to backup the tool data and zero points.

Note
Backing up setup data from part programs
Setup data from part programs can only be backed up if they have been saved in the
"Workpieces" directory.
For part programs, which are located in the "Part programs" directory, "Save setup data" is
not listed.

Backing up data

Data
Tool data  No
 All used in the program (only for ShopTurn program and job list only
with ShopTurn programs)
 Complete tool list
Tool data for ShopTurn  No
programs
 All used in the program
-- only available for job list
with ShopTurn and G  Complete tool list
code programs
Tool data for G code  No
programs
 Complete tool list
-- only available for job list
with ShopTurn and G
code programs
Magazine assignment  Yes
 No

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 655
Program management
16.14 Setup data

Data
Zero points  No

The selection box "Basis zero point" is hidden

 All used in the program (only for ShopTurn program and job list only
with ShopTurn programs)
 All
Zero points for ShopTurn  No
programs
The selection box "Basis zero point" is hidden
-- only available for job list
with ShopTurn and G  All used in the program
code programs  Complete tool list
Zero points for G code  No
programs
-- only available for job list The selection box "Basis zero point" is hidden
with ShopTurn and G  All
code programs
Basic zero points  No
 Yes
Directory The directory is displayed, in which the selected program is located.
File name Here you have the option of changing the suggested file names.

Note
Magazine assignment
You can only read out the magazine assignments if your system provides support for loading
and unloading tool data to and from the magazine.

Turning
656 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.14 Setup data

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Position the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point
data you wish to back up.
...

3. Press the ">>" and "Archive" softkeys.

4. Press the "Setup data" softkey.

The "Backup setup data" window opens.
5. Select the data you want to back up.
6. When required, change the specified name of the originally
selected program here in the "File name" field.
7. Press the "OK" softkey.
The setup data will be set up in the same directory in which the
selected program is stored.
The file is automatically saved as INI file.

Note
Program selection
If a main program as well as an INI file with the same name are in a directory, when
selecting the main program, initially, the INI file is automatically started. In this way,
unwanted tool data can be changed.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 657
Program management
16.14 Setup data

16.14.2 Reading-in set-up data

When reading-in, you can select which of the backed-up data you wish to read-in:
● Tool data
● Magazine assignment
● Zero points
● Basic zero point

Tool data
Depending on which data you have selected, the system behaves as follows:
● Complete tool list
First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data are imported.
● All tool data used in the program
If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system,
you can choose between the following options.

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing tools
will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

- OR -
Press the "Do not overwrite" softkey if existing tools must not be
overwritten.
Already existing tools are skipped, without you receiving any queries.
- OR -
Press the "Skip" softkey if already existing tools are not to be
overwritten.
For an already existing tool, you receive a query.

Selecting loading point

For a magazine, if more than one loading point was set-up, using the "Select loading point"
softkey, you have the option of opening a window in which you can assign a loading point to
a magazine.

Turning
658 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.14 Setup data

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Position the cursor on the file with the backed-up tool and zero point
data (*.INI) that you wish to re-import.

3. Press the <Cursor right> key

- OR -
Double-click the file.
The "Read-in setup data" window opens.
4. Select the data (e.g. magazine assignment) that you wish to read-in.

5. Press the "OK" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 659
Program management
16.15 V24

16.15 V24

16.15.1 Reading-in and reading-out archives

You have the option of reading-out and reading-in archives in the "Program Manager"
operating area as well as in the "Start-up" operating area via the serial V24 interface.

Availability of the serial V24 interface

● SINUMERIK Operate in the NCU
The softkeys for the V24 interface are available as soon as option module is connected
and the slot is occupied.
● SINUMERIK Operate on PCU 50.3
The softkeys for the V24 interface are always available.

Reading-out archives
The files to be sent (directories or individual files) are zipped in an archive (*.ARC).
If you send an archive (*.arc), this is sent directly without being additionally zipped. If you
have selected an archive (*.arc) together with an additional file (e.g. directory), then these
are zipped into a new archive and are then sent.

Reading-in archives
Only archives can be read-in via the V24 interface. These are transferred and then
subsequently unzipped.

Note
Series commissioning archive
If you read-in a series commissioning archive via the V24 interface, then this is immediately
activated.

Externally processing the punched tape format

If you wish to externally process an archive, then generate this in the punch tape format.
Using the SinuCom commissioning and Servicetool SinuCom ARC, you can process the
archive in the binary format and in the series commissioning archive.

Turning
660 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.15 V24

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area, and press the

"NC" or "Local drive" softkey

...

- OR -
Select the "Start-up" operating area and press the "System data"
softkey.

Reading-out archives
2. Select the directories or the files that you wish to send to V24.
3. Press the ">>" and "Archive" softkeys.

4. Press the "Send V24" softkey.

- OR -
Reading in an archive
Press the "Receive V24" softkey if you wish to read-in files via
V24.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 661
Program management
16.15 V24

16.15.2 Setting V24 in the program manager

V24 setting Meaning

Protocol The following protocols are supported for transfer via the V24 interface:
 RTS/CTS (default setting)
 Xon/Xoff
Transfer It is also possible to use a secure protocol for data transfer (ZMODEM
protocol).
 Normal (default setting)
 secure

For the selected interface, secure data transfer is set in conjunction

with handshake RTS/CTS.
Baud rate Transfer rate: Transfer rates of up to 115 kbaud can be selected. The
baud rate that can be used depends on the connected device, the
cable length and the general electrical conditions.
 110
 ....
 19200 (default)
 ...
 115200
Archive format  Punched tape format (default setting)
 Binary format (PC format)
V24 settings (details)
Interface  COM1
Parity Parity bits are used for error detection: The parity bits are added to the
coded characters to make the number of positions set to "1" an uneven
number (uneven parity) or to an even number (even parity).
 None (default setting)
 Odd
 Even
Stop bits Number of stop bits for asynchronous data transfer.
 1 (default)
 2
Data bits Number of data bits for asynchronous data transfer.
 5 bits
 ...
 -8 bits (default setting)
XON (hex) Only for punched tape format
XOFF (hex) Only for punched tape format

Turning
662 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Program management
16.15 V24

V24 setting Meaning

End of data transfer (hex) Only for punched tape format
Stop with end of data transfer character
The default setting for the end of data transfer character is (HEX) 1A
Time monitoring (sec) Time monitoring
For data transfer problems or at the end of data transfer (without end
of data transfer character) data transfer is interrupted after the
specified number of seconds.
The time monitoring is controlled by a time generator (clock) that is
started with the first character and is reset with each transferred
character.
The time monitoring can be set (seconds).

Procedure

1. Select the "Program Manager" operating area.

2. Press the "NC" or "Local drive" softkey.

3. Press the ">>" and "Archive" softkeys.

4. Select the "V24 settings" softkey.

The "Interface: V24" window is opened.
5. The interface settings are displayed.
6. Press the "Details" softkey if you wish to view and process
additional settings for the interface.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 663
Program management
16.15 V24

Turning
664 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Setting up drives 17
17.1 Overview

Set up connections
Up to 8 connections to so-called logical drives (data carriers) can be configured. These
drives can be accessed in the "Program manager" and "Startup" operating areas.
The following logical drives can be set up:
● USB interface
● CompactFlash Card of the NCU, only for SINUMERIK Operate in the NCU
● Network drives
● Local hard disk of the PCU 50.3, only for SINUMERIK Operate on the PCU

Software option
In order to use the CompactFlash Card as data carrier, you require the option
"Additional 256 MB HMI user memory on CF card of NCU" (not for SINUMERIK
Operate of PCU50 / PC).

Note
The USB interfaces of the NCU are not available for SINUMERIK Operate and therefore
cannot be configured.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 665
Setting up drives
17.2 Setting up drives

17.2 Setting up drives

The "Set-up drives" window is available in the "Startup" operating area for configuration.

File
The created configuration data is stored in the "logdrive.ini" file. This file is located in the
/user/sinumerik/hmi/cfg directory.

General information

Entry Meaning
Type No drive No drive defined.
USB local Access to the USB memory medium is only realized via the
TCU to which it is connected.
USB drives are automatically identified if the memory medium
is inserted when SINUMERIK Operate powers-up.
USB global All of the TCUs in the plant network can access the USB
memory medium.
- USB global is not possible under Windows!
NW Windows Network drive
Local drive Local drive
Hard disk or user memory on the CompactFlash Card
Connection Front USB interface that is located at the front of the operator panel.
X203/X204 USB interface X203/X204 that is located at the rear of the
operator panel.
X204 For SIMATIC Thin Client the USB interface is X204.
Device Names of the TCU to which the USB storage medium is
connected, e.g. tcu1. The NCU must already know the TCU
name.
Partition Partition number on the USB memory medium, e.g. 1.
If a USB hub is used, specify the USB port of the hub.
Path  Start direct directory of the data carrier that is connected
via the local drive.
 Network path to a directory that has been released in the
network. This path must always start with "//", e.g.
//Server01/share3.
Access level Assign access rights to the connections: From protection level
7 (key switch position 0) to protection level 1 (password:
Manufacturer).
The particular assigned protection level applies to all
operating areas.
Softkey text Two lines are available as labeling text for the softkey. %n is
accepted as a line separator.
If the first line is too long, then it is automatically separated
into several lines.
If a blank is present, then this is used as line separator.

Turning
666 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Setting up drives
17.2 Setting up drives

Entry Meaning
Softkey icon No icon No icon is displayed on the softkey.
sk_usb_front.png Icon file name. Is displayed on the softkey.

sk_local_drive.png Icon file name. Is displayed on the softkey.

Text file slpmdialog File for softkey dependent on the language. If nothing is
Text context SlPmDialog specified in the input fields, the text appears on the softkey as
was specified in the input field "Softkey text".
If your own text files are saved, then the text ID, which is used
to search for the text file, is specified in the "Softkey text" input
field.
User name Enter the user name and the corresponding password for
Password which the directory is enabled on the server. The password is
displayed in encoded form as as string of "*" characters and is
stored in the "logdrive.ini" file.

Error messages

Error message Meaning

Error occurred when closing a connection An existing drive was not able to be deactivated.
Error occurred when establishing a connection. Drive connection was not able to be established.
Error occurred while establishing a connection: Drive connection was not able to be established.
Incorrect entry or no authorization.
Incorrect data The entered data are either incorrect or
inconsistent.
Function not available The function is not supported with the current
software release.
Unknown error - error code:%1 Error was not able to be assigned.

Procedure

1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.

2. Press the "HMI" and "Log. drive" softkeys.

The "Set Up Drives" window opens.

3. Select the data for the corresponding drive or enter the necessary data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 667
Setting up drives
17.2 Setting up drives

4. Press the "Activate drive" softkey.

The drive is activated.
The operating system now checks the entered data and whether the
connection is established. An OK message is output in the dialog line if
an error is not identified.
The drive can be accessed.
- OR -
If the operating system identifies an error, then you receive an error
message.
Press the "OK" softkey.
You then return to the "Configure drives" window. Check and correct
your entries and re-activate the drive.
If you press the "OK" softkey, the modified data are accepted without
any feedback message. You do not receive any message about a
successful or unsuccessful connection.
If you press the "Cancel" softkey, then all of the data that has not been
activated is rejected.

Turning
668 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
HT 8 18
18.1 HT 8 overview
The mobile SINUMERIK HT 8 handheld terminal combines the functions of an operator
panel and a machine control panel. It is therefore suitable for visualization, operation, teach
in, and programming at the machine.

1 Customer keys (user-defined)

2 Traversing keys
3 User menu key
4 Handwheel (optional)

Operation
The 7.5 TFT color display provides touch operation.
It also has membrane keys for traversing the axes, for numeric input, for cursor control, and
for machine control panel functions like start and stop.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 669
HT 8
18.1 HT 8 overview

It is equipped with an emergency stop button and two 3-position enabling buttons. You can
also connect an external keyboard.

References
For more information about connection and startup of the HT 8, see the following references:
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Customer keys
The four customer keys are freely assignable and can be set up customer-specifically by the
machine manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Integrated machine control panel

The HT 8 has an integrated machine control panel consisting of keys (e.g. start, stop,
traversing keys, etc.), and keys reproduced as softkeys (see machine control panel menu).
See chapter "Controls on the machine control panel" for a description of the individual keys.

Note
PLC interface signals that are triggered via the softkeys of the machine control panel menus
are edge triggered.

Enabling button
The HT 8 has two enabling buttons. Thus, you can initiate enabling functions for operations
that require enabling (e.g. displaying and operating of traversing keys) with either your right
hand or your left hand.
Enabling buttons are available for the following key positions:
● Released (no activation)
● Enabling (center position) - enabling for channel 1 and 2 is on the same switch.
● Panic (completely pushed through)

Turning
670 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 HT 8
18.1 HT 8 overview

Traversing keys
To traverse the axes of your machine using the traversing keys of the HT 8, you must select
"JOG" mode or either the "Teach In" or "Ref.Point" submode. Depending on the setting, the
enabling button must be activated.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Virtual keyboard
A virtual keyboard is available for the easy entry of values.

Changing the channel

● You are able to switch the channel by touch in the status display:
– In the Machine operating area (large status display), by touch operation of the channel
display in the status display.
– In the other operating areas (no status display), by touch operation of the channel
display in the screen headers (yellow field).
● The "1… n CHANNEL" softkey is available in the machine control panel menu that can be
reached via the user menu key "U".

Operating-area switchover
You can display the operating area menu by touching the display symbol for the active
operating area.

Handwheel
The HT 8 is available with a hand wheel.

References
For information about connecting the hand wheel, refer to:
Operator Components and Networking Manual; SINUMERIK 840D sl/840Di sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 671
HT 8
18.2 Traversing keys

18.2 Traversing keys

The traversing keys are not labeled. However, you can display a label for the keys in place of
the vertical softkey bar.
Labeling of the traversing keys is displayed for up to six axes on the touch panel by default.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Showing and hiding

You can link the showing and hiding of the label to activation of the enabling button, for
example. In this case, the traversing keys are displayed when you press the enabling button.
If you release the enabling button, the traversing keys are hidden again.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

All existing vertical and horizontal softkeys are covered or hidden, i.e.
other softkeys cannot be used.

Turning
672 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 HT 8
18.3 Machine control panel menu

18.3 Machine control panel menu

Here you select keys from the machine control panel which are reproduced by the software
by touch operation of the relevant softkeys.
See chapter "Controls on the machine control panel" for a description of the individual keys.

Note
PLC interface signals that are triggered via the softkeys of the machine control panel menus
are edge triggered.

Showing and hiding

The user menu key "U" displays the CPF softkey bar (vertical softkey bar) and the user
softkey bar (horizontal softkey bar).

You can expand the user softkey bar to display eight additional softkeys via
the menu forward key.

You use the "Back" softkey to hide the menu bar again.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 673
HT 8
18.4 Virtual keyboard

Softkeys on the machine control panel menu

Available softkeys:

"Machine" softkey Select the "Machine" operating area

"[VAR]" softkey Select the axis feedrate in the variable increment
"1… n CHANNEL" Change the channel
softkey
"Single Block" Switch single block execution on/off
softkey
"WCS MCS" softkey Switch between WCS and MCS
"Back" softkey Close the window.

Note
The window will automatically disappear when changing regions areas with the "Menu
Select" key.

18.4 Virtual keyboard

The virtual keyboard is used as the input device for touch operator panels.
It opens when you double-click an operator element with input capability (editor, edit field).
The virtual keyboard can be positioned anywhere on the operator interface. In addition, you
can toggle between a full keyboard and a reduced keyboard that only includes the number
block. Moreover, with the full keyboard, you can toggle between English key assignments
and the keyboard assignment for the current language setting.

Procedure

1. Click in the required input field in order to place the cursor there.
2. Click the input field.
The virtual keyboard is displayed.
3 Enter your values via the virtual keyboard.
4. Press the <INPUT> key.

- OR -
Position the cursor on an another operator element.
The value is accepted and the virtual keyboard is closed.

Turning
674 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 HT 8
18.4 Virtual keyboard

Positioning of the virtual keyboard

You can position the virtual keyboard anywhere in the window by pressing the empty bar
next to the "Close window" icon with your finger or a stylus and moving it back and forth.

Special keys on the virtual keyboard

 

1 Num:
Reduces the virtual keyboard to the number block.
2 Eng:
Toggles the keyboard assignment between the English keyboard assignment and the
keyboard assignment for the current language setting.

Number block of the virtual keyboard

Use the "Deu" or "Eng" keys to return to the full keyboard with the English keyboard
assignment or the keyboard assignment of the current language setting.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 675
HT 8
18.5 Calibrating the touch panel

18.5 Calibrating the touch panel

It is necessary to calibrate the touch panel upon first connection to the controller.

Note
Recalibration
If the operation is not exact, then redo the calibration.

Procedure

1. Press the back key and the <MENU SELECT> key at the same time to
start the TCU service screen.

2. Touch the "Calibrate TouchPanel" button.

The calibration process will be started.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen and touch the three calibration
points one after the other.
The calibration process has terminated.
4. Touch the horizontal softkey "1" or the key with the number "1" to close
the TCU service screen.

Turning
676 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Ctrl Energy 19
19.1 Overview
The "Ctrl-Energy" function provides you with the following options to improve the energy
utilization of your machine.

Acquiring the energy consumption

Acquiring the actual energy consumption is the first step to achieving better energy
efficiency. The energy consumption is measured and displayed at the control using the
SENTRON PAC multi-function device.
Depending on the configuration and connection of the SENTRON PAC, you have the
possibility of either measuring the power of the whole machine or only a specific load.
Independent of this, the power is determined directly from the drives and displayed.

Controlling the energy consumption

To optimize the energy consumption, you have the option of defining energy saving profiles
and saving them. For instance, your machine has a basic and a more sophisticated energy-
saving mode - or under certain conditions, automatically switches itself off.
These defined energy states are saved as profiles. At the user interface, you have the
possibility of activating these energy-saving profiles (e.g. the so-called tea break key).

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 677
Ctrl Energy
19.2 Displaying energy consumption

19.2 Displaying energy consumption

You have the option of displaying the actual energy usage values of the individual axes and
the total energy consumption.

Display Meaning
Manual  No input
 Entering and displaying a fixed value
 Displaying a value from a data source
Sentron PAC Displaying an actual value measured by a SENTRON PAC device.
Total of drives Display of the total of all measured drive values.
Total, machine Addition of the values of all axes as well as a fixed value and Sentron
PAC.

The display in the table depends on the configuration.

References
Information on the configuration is provided in the following reference:
System Manual "Ctrl Energy", SINUMERIK 840D sl / 828D

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area and press the "Ctrl Energy" softkey.

- OR -
+ Press the <Ctrl> + <E> keys.

2. Press the "Energy analysis" softkey.

The "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy analysis" window is opened.
You obtain a display of the actual active power for all of the axes.

Turning
678 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ctrl Energy
19.3 Measuring and saving the energy consumption

19.3 Measuring and saving the energy consumption

For the currently selected axes, you have the option of measuring and recording the energy
consumption.
Save the measured usage values so that you can subsequently compare the data.

Note
Up to 3 data sets are displayed. The oldest data set is automatically overwritten if there are
more than 3 measurements.

Measurement duration
The measuring time is limited. When the maximum measuring time is reached, the
measurement is terminated and a corresponding message is output in the dialog line.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Reset

Press the "Reset" softkey.

The contents of the Infeed, Energy recovery and Total columns are deleted.

Procedure

1. The "Ctrl-Energy analysis" window is open

2. Press the "Start measurement" softkey.
The selection box "Setting measurement: Select device" window is
opened.
3. Select the required device in the list and press the "OK" softkey.
The trace is started.
4. Press the "Stop measurement" softkey.
The measurement is ended.
5. Press the "Graphic" softkey, to track the measurement characteristic.

5. Press the softkey "Save measurement" to save the usage values of the
actual measurement.

The selection of the axis to be measured depends on the configuration.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 679
Ctrl Energy
19.4 Displaying measured curves

References
Information on the configuration is provided in the following reference:
System Manual "Ctrl Energy", SINUMERIK 840D sl / 828D

19.4 Displaying measured curves

Procedure

1. The "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy Analysis" window is opened and you

have already performed measurements.
2. Press the "Graphic" and "Saved measurements" softkeys.
The measurement curves are displayed in the window "SINUMERIK
Ctrl-Energy analysis".

3. Press the softkey "Saved measurements" again if you only want to see
the actual measurement.

19.5 Using the energy-saving profile

In the "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy energy-saving profile" window, you can display all of the
defined energy-saving profiles. Here, directly activate the required energy-saving profile - or
inhibit or release profiles.

SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy energy-saving profiles

Display Meaning
Energy-saving profile All energy-saving profiles are listed.
active in [min] The remaining time up until the defined profile is reached is
displayed.

Note
Disable all energy-saving profiles
For example, in order not to disturb the machine while measurements are being made,
select "Disable all".

Turning
680 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ctrl Energy
19.5 Using the energy-saving profile

Once the pre-warning time of a profile has been reached, an alarm window that shows the
remaining time is displayed. Once the energy-saving mode has been reached, then an
appropriate message is displayed in the alarm line.

Energy-saving profiles

Energy-saving profile Meaning

Simple energy-saving mode Machine units that are not required are either throttled or shut down.
(machine standby) When required, the machine is immediately ready to operate again
Full energy-saving mode (NC Machine units that are not required are either throttled or shut down.
standby) Wait times are incurred at the transition into the ready to operate
state.
Maximum energy-saving The machine is completely switched-off.
mode (auto shut-off) Longer wait times are incurred at the transition into the ready to
operate state.

Machine manufacturer
The selection and function of the displayed energy-saving profiles can differ.
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

References
Information on the configuration of the energy-saving profiles is provided in the following
reference:
System Manual "Ctrl Energy", SINUMERIK 840D sl / 828D

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Ctrl Energy" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <CTRL> + <E> keys.
+

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 681
Ctrl Energy
19.5 Using the energy-saving profile

The "SINUMERIK Ctrl-Energy energy-saving profiles" window is

opened.

3. Position the cursor on the required energy-saving profile and press the
"Activate immediately" softkey if you wish to directly activate this state.

4. Position the cursor on the required energy-saving profile and press the
"Disable profile" softkey if you wish to disable this state.
The profile is disabled. The energy-saving profile cannot be used, i.e. it
is grayed-out and displayed without any time information.
The labeling of the "Disable profile" softkey changes to "Enable profile".
Press the "Enable profile" softkey in order to withdraw the energy-
saving profile disable.

5. Press the "Disable all" softkey in order to disable all states.

All profiles are then disabled and cannot be used.
The labeling of the "Disable all" softkey changes to "Enable all".
6. Press the "Enable all" softkey to withdraw the disable for all profiles.

Turning
682 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Easy Message (828D only) 20
20.1 Overview
Easy Message enables you to be informed about certain machine states by means of SMS
messages via a connected modem:
● For example, you would like to be informed about emergency stop states
● You would like to know when a batch has been completed

Control commands
● HMI commands are used to activate or deactivate a user.
Syntax: [User ID] deactivate¸ [User ID] activate
● A special area is reserved in the PLC to which you can send commands in the form of
PLC bytes using SMS commands.
Syntax: [User ID] PLC DataByte
The user ID is optional and required only if a corresponding ID has been specified in the
user profile. The string PLC indicates that a PLC byte is to be written. It is followed by the
data byte to be written in the following format: Base#Value. Base can take the values 2,
10 and 16 and defines the number base. Then follows the separator # and the value of
the byte. Only positive values are allowed to be sent.
Examples:
2#11101101
10#34
16#AF

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Active users
In order to receive an SMS message for certain events, you must be activated as user.

User logon
As registered user, you can log on via SMS to inquire about messages.

Action log
You can obtain precise information about incoming and outgoing messages via SMS logs.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 683
Easy Message (828D only)
20.2 Activating Easy Message

References
Information on the GSM modem can be found in the
PPU SINUMERIK 828D Manual

Calling the SMS Messenger

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "Easy Msg." softkey.

20.2 Activating Easy Message

To commission the connection to the modem for the SMS Messenger, activate the SIM card
at the initial start-up.

Requirement
The modem is connected.

Procedure

Activating the SIM card

1. Press the "Easy Msg." softkey.
The "SMS Messenger" window appears.
"Status" shows that the SIM card has not been activated with a PIN.
2. Enter the PIN, repeat the PIN and press the "OK" softkey.

3. If you made an incorrect entry several times, enter the PUK code in the
"PUK Input" window and press the "OK" softkey to activate the PUK
code.
The "PIN input" window is opened and you can enter the PIN number as
usual.

Activating a new SIM card

1. Press the "Easy Msg." softkey.
The "SMS Messenger" window appears.
"Status" shows that the connection to the modem has been activated.

Turning
684 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Easy Message (828D only)
20.3 Creating/editing a user profile

2. Press the "Settings" softkey.

3. Press the "Delete PIN" softkey to delete the stored PIN.

Enter the new PIN in the "PIN Input" window at the next power up.

20.3 Creating/editing a user profile

User identification

Display Meaning
User name Name of the user to be created or logged on.
Telephone number Telephone number of the user to which the messages are to be sent.
The telephone number must include the country code in order that
control commands can identify the sender (e.g. +491729999999)
User ID The user ID has 5 digits (e.g. 12345)
 It is used to activate and deactivate the user via SMS. (e.g.
"12345 activate")
 The ID is used to additionally verify the incoming and outgoing
messages and to activate the control commands.

Events that can be selected

You must set-up the events for which you receive notification.

Requirement
The modem is connected.

Procedure

Creating a new user

1. Press the "User profiles” softkey.
The "User Profiles" window appears.
2. Press the "New" softkey.

3. Enter the name and telephone number of the user.

4. If required, enter the ID number of the user.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 685
Easy Message (828D only)
20.4 Setting-up events

5. In the area "send SMS for the following events" area, activate the
appropriate checkbox and when required, enter the desired value (e.g.
the unit quantity, which when it is reached, a notification should be
sent).
- OR -
Press the "Default" softkey.
The appropriate window is opened and displays the default values.
6. Press the "Send test message" softkey.
An SMS message with predefined text is sent to the specified telephone
number.

Editing user data and events

1. Select the user whose data you want to edit and press the "Edit"
softkey.
The input fields can be edited.
2. Enter new data and activate the desired settings.
- OR -
Press the "Default" softkey to accept the default values.

20.4 Setting-up events

In the "Send SMS for the following events" area, select the events using the check box,
which when they occur, an SMS is sent to the user.
● Programmed messages from the part program (MSG)
In the part program, program an MSG command via which you receive an SMS.
Example: MSG ("SMS: An SMS from a part program")
● Select the following events using the <SELECT> key
– The workpiece counter reaches the following value
An SMS is sent if the workpiece counter reaches the set value.
– The following program progress is reached (percent)
An SMS is sent if, when executing a part program, the set progress is reached.
– Actual NC program reaches runtime (minutes)
An SMS is sent after the set runtime has been reached when executing an NC
program.
– Tool usage time reaches the following value (minutes)
An SMS is sent if the usage time of the tool reaches the set time when executing a
part program (derived from $AC_CUTTING_TIME).

Turning
686 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Easy Message (828D only)
20.4 Setting-up events

● Messages/alarms from the Tool Manager

An SMS is sent if messages or alarms are output to the Tool Manager.
● Measuring cycle messages for tools
An SMS is sent if measuring cycle messages are output that involve tools.
● Measuring cycle messages for workpieces
An SMS is sent if measuring cycle messages are output that involve workpieces.
● Sinumerik messages/alarms (error when executing)
An SMS is sent if NCK alarms or messages are output that cause the machine to come to
a standstill.
● Machine faults
An SMS is sent if PLC alarms or messages are output that cause the machine to come to
a standstill (i.e. PLC alarms with Emergency Off response).
● Maintenance intervals
An SMS is sent if the service planner registers pending maintenance work.
● Additional alarm numbers:
Here, specify additional alarms where you should be notified if they occur.
You can enter individual alarms, several alarms or alarm number ranges.
Examples:
1234,400
1000-2000
100,200-300

Requirement
● The user profile window is opened.
● You selected the event "Measuring cycle messages for tools", "Measuring cycle
messages for workpieces", "Sinumerik messages/alarms (errors when executing)",
"Machine faults" or "Maintenance intervals".

Editing events

1. Activate the required check box and press the "Details" softkey.
The appropriate window opens (e.g. "Measuring cycle messages for
workpieces") and shows a list of the defined alarm numbers.
2. Select the corresponding entry and press the "Delete" softkey to
remove the alarm number from the list.

- OR -

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 687
Easy Message (828D only)
20.5 Logging an active user on and off

Then press the "New" softkey if you wish to create a new entry.
The "Create new entry" window opens.
Enter the data and press the "OK" softkey to add the entry to the list.

Press the "Save" softkey to save the settings for the result.

3. Press the "Standard" softkey to return to the standard settings for the
events.

20.5 Logging an active user on and off

Only active users receive an SMS message for the specified events.
You can activate users, already created for Easy Message, with certain control commands
via the user interface or via SMS.

The connection has been established to the modem.

Procedure

1. Press the "User profiles” softkey.

2. Select the desired user in the User name field and press the "User
active” softkey

Note
Repeat step 2 to activate further users.
- OR -
Send an SMS with the User ID and the "activate" text to the control (e.g.
"12345 activate")
If the telephone number and the user ID match the stored data, the user
profile is activated.
You receive a message of success or failure per SMS.
3. Press the "User active” softkey to log off an activated user.

- OR -

Turning
688 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Easy Message (828D only)
20.6 Displaying SMS logs

Send an SMS with the "deactivate" text (e.g. "12345 deactivate") to log
off from the Messenger.
An SMS message is not sent to the deactivated user for the events
specified in the user profile.

20.6 Displaying SMS logs

The SMS data traffic is recorded in the "SMS Log" window. In this way, it is possible to see
the chronological sequence of activates when a fault occurs.

Symbols Description
Incoming SMS message for the Messenger.

Message that has reached the Messenger, but which has not been
processed (e.g. incorrect user ID or unknown account).
SMS message sent to a user.

Message that has not reached the user because of an error.

Requirement

The connection has been established to the modem.

Procedure

1. Press the "SMS log" softkey.

The "SMS Log" window appears.

All the messages that have been sent or received by the Messenger are
listed.
Note
Press the "Incoming" or "Outgoing" softkey to restrict the list.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 689
Easy Message (828D only)
20.7 Making settings for Easy Message

20.7 Making settings for Easy Message

You can change the following Messenger configuration in the "Settings" window:
● Name of the controller that is part of an SMS message
● Number of sent messages
– The SMS counter provides information on all sent messages.
– Limit the number of sent messages in order to receive an overview of the costs
through SMS messages, for example.

Setting the SMS counter to zero

When a set limit is reached, no further SMS messages are sent.

Press the "Reset SMS counter" softkey to reset the counter to zero.

Requirement

The connection has been established to the modem.

Procedure

1. Press the "Settings" softkey.

2. Enter an arbitrary name for the controller in the "Machine name" field.
3. If you want to limit the number of sent SMS messages then select the
"Specify limit for SMS counter" entry and enter the desired number.
When the maximum number of messages is reached, you obtain a
corresponding error message.
Note
Check the SMS log to see the exact time when the limit was reached.
- OR -
3. Press the "Default" softkey.
If you have freely selected a machine name, this is replaced by a
default name (e.g. 828D).

Turning
690 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Easy Extend (828D only) 21
21.1 Overview
Easy Extend enables machines to be retrofitted with additional units, which are controlled by
the PLC or that require additional NC axes (such as bar loaders, swiveling tables or milling
heads), at a later point in time. These additional devices are easily commissioned, activated,
deactivated or tested with Easy Extend.
The communication between the operator component and the PLC is performed via a PLC
user program. The sequences to be executed for the installation, activation, deactivation and
testing of a device are stored in a statement script.
Available devices and device states are displayed in a list. The view of the available devices
can be controlled for users according to their access rights.
The subsequent chapters are selected for example only and are not available in every
statement list.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Up to 64 devices can be managed.

References
SINUMERIK 828D Turning and Milling Commissioning Manual

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 691
Easy Extend (828D only)
21.2 Enabling a device

21.2 Enabling a device

The available device options are protected by a password.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Easy Extend" softkey.
A list of the connected devices is displayed.

3. Press the "Enable function" softkey.

The "Enabling of the Devices Option" window is opened.
4. Enter the option code and press the "OK" softkey.
A tick appears in the appropriate checkbox in the "Function" column
and the function is enabled.

21.3 Activating and deactivating a device

Status Meaning
Device activated
System waiting for PLC checkback signal

Device faulty

Interface error in the communication module

Turning
692 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Easy Extend (828D only)
21.4 Commissioning Easy Extend

Procedure

1. Easy Extend is opened.

2 You can select the desired device in the list with the <Cursor up> and
<Cursor down> keys.

3. Position the cursor on the device option for which the function has been
unlocked and press the "Activate" softkey.
The device is marked as activated and can now be used.
4. Select the desired activated device and press the "Deactivate" softkey
to switch the device off again.

21.4 Commissioning Easy Extend

As a rule, the "Easy Extend" function has already been commissioned by the machine
manufacturer. If a first commissioning has not been performed or if, for example, function
tests are to be performed again (e.g. when retrofitting additional devices), this is possible at
any time.
The "Start-up" softkey has been declared as Manufacturer data class (M).

Procedure

1. Select the "Parameter" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Easy Extend" softkey.

3. Press the "Start-up" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.
4. Press the "Comm. startup" softkey to start the commissioning.
Before starting, a complete data backup is generated which you can
then use in an emergency.
5. Press the "Cancel" softkey if you want to abort the commissioning
prematurely.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 693
Easy Extend (828D only)
21.4 Commissioning Easy Extend

6. Press the "Restore" softkey to load the original data.

7. Press the "Device function test" softkey to test the machine

manufacturer's intended function.

Turning
694 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Service Planner (828D only) 22
22.1 Performing and monitoring maintenance tasks
With the "Service Planner", maintenance tasks have been set up that have to be performed
at certain intervals (e.g. top up oil, change coolant).
A list is displayed of all the maintenance tasks that have been set up together with the time
remaining until the end of the specified maintenance interval.
The current status can be seen in the status display.
Messages and alarms indicate when a task has to be performed.

Acknowledging a maintenance task

Acknowledge the message when a maintenance task has been completed.

Note
Protection level
You require protection level 2 (service) to acknowledge completed maintenance tasks.

Service Planner

Display Meaning
Pos Position of the maintenance task in the PLC interface.
Maintenance task Name of the maintenance task.
Interval [h] Maximum time until next servicing in hours.
Remaining time [h] Time until the interval expires in hours.
Status Display of the current status of a maintenance task.
The maintenance task has been started.
The maintenance task is completed.
The maintenance task is deactivated.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 695
Service Planner (828D only)
22.1 Performing and monitoring maintenance tasks

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Service planner" softkey.
The window with the list of all the maintenance tasks that have been set
up appears.

3. Perform the maintenance task when the maintenance interval has

nearly expired or when prompted to do so by alarms or a warning.
4. After you have performed a pending maintenance task and the task is
signaled as "Completed", position the cursor at the appropriate task and
press the "Servicing performed" softkey.
A message is displayed confirming the acknowledgment, and the
maintenance interval is restarted.

Note
You can perform the maintenance tasks before the interval expires. The maintenance
interval is restarted.

Turning
696 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Service Planner (828D only)
22.2 Set maintenance tasks

22.2 Set maintenance tasks

You can make the following changes in the list of maintenance tasks in the configuration
mode:
● Set up a maximum of 32 maintenance tasks with interval, initial warning and number of
warnings to be acknowledged
● Change the interval, time of the initial warning and the number of warnings to be output
● Delete a maintenance task
● Reset the times of the maintenance tasks

Acknowledging a maintenance task

You can acknowledge the maintenance tasks with the "Servicing performed" softkey.

Note
Protection level
You require protection level 1 (manufacturer) to set up and edit maintenance tasks.

Service Planner

Display Meaning
Pos Position of the maintenance task in the PLC interface.
Maintenance task Name of the maintenance task.
Interval [h] Maximum time until next servicing in hours.
1. warning [h] Time in hours at which an initial warning is displayed.
Number of warnings Number of warnings that can be acknowledged by the operator before
an alarm message is output for the last time.
Remaining time [h] Time until the interval expires in hours.
The remaining time cannot be edited.
Status Display of the current status of a maintenance task.
The maintenance task has been started.

The maintenance task is completed.

The maintenance task is deactivated, i.e. the time has been

stopped.
The status cannot be edited.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 697
Service Planner (828D only)
22.2 Wartungsaufgaben einrichten

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the menu forward key and then the "Service planner" softkey.
The window opens and displays a list of all the tasks that have been set
up.
The values cannot be edited.

3. Press the "New maintenance task" softkey to set up a new maintenance

task.
A message informs you that a new maintenance task will be set up at
the next free position. Enter the required data in the columns and press
the "OK" softkey.
- OR -
Position the cursor on the desired maintenance task and press the
"Change task" softkey to change the associated times.
All columns except Remaining time and Status can be edited.
- OR -
Press the "Reset all" softkey to reset all the times.

- OR -
Position the cursor on the desired maintenance task and press the
"Delete task" softkey to remove the maintenance task from the list.

Turning
698 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only) 23
23.1 PLC diagnostics
A PLC user program consists to a large degree of logical operations to implement safety
functions and to support process sequences. These logical operations include the linking of
various contacts and relays. These logic operations are displayed in a ladder diagram.

Ladder add-on tool

As a rule, the failure of a single contact or relay results in a failure of the whole system.
Using the Ladder add-on tool, you can perform a PLC diagnosis in order to find fault causes
or program errors.

Editing of interrupt routines

You can edit the following interrupt programs:
● INT_100 - interrupt program, (is executed before the main program)
● INT_101 - interrupt program, (is executed after the main program)

Marshalling data
Using the Ladder add-on tool, you can "re-wire" inputs (via INT_100) or outputs (via
INT_101) for service purposes.

Generating INT_100 / INT_101 block

If one or several INT_100 or INT_101 blocks are missing, they can be added via the vertical
softkey bar. If these INT blocks exist in a project, they can be deleted via the vertical softkey
bar. You also have the opportunity to change the networks of a program on the control as
well as to save and load these changes.

Note
Saving the PLC project when changing the operating area
If you have created INT_100/INT_101 blocks or inserted, removed or edited networks in an
INT block, you must save the project before you change from the PLC area into another
operating area. Transfer the project into the PLC using the "Download to CPU" softkey. If
this is not done, all of the changes will be lost and must be re-entered.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 699
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.2 Structure of the user interface

23.2 Structure of the user interface

 
 

Figure 23-1 Screen structure

Table 23- 1 Key to screen layout

Screen element Display Meaning

1 Application area
2 Supported PLC program language
3 Name of the active program block
Representation: Symbolic name (absolute name)
4 Program status

Run Program is running

Stop Program is stopped
Status of the application area
Sym Symbolic representation
Abs Absolute representation
5 Display of the active keys (<INPUT>, <SELECT>)

Turning
700 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.3 Control options

Screen element Display Meaning

6 Focus
Performs the tasks of the cursor
7 Information line
Displays information, e.g. for searching

23.3 Control options

In addition to the softkeys and the navigation keys, there are further shortcuts in this area.

Shortcuts
The cursor keys move the focus over the PLC user program. When the window borders are
reached, scrolling is performed automatically.

Shortcuts Action
To the first column of the row

To the last column of the row

Up a screen

Down a screen

One field to the left, right, up or down

To the first field of the first network

-or-

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 701
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.3 Control options

Shortcuts Action

To the last field of the last network

-or-

Open the next program block in the same window

Open the previous program block in the same window

The function of the Select key depends on the position of the input
focus.
 Table line: Displays the complete text line
 Network title: Displays the network comment
 Command: Displays all operands

If the input focus is positioned on a command, all operands including

the comments are displayed.

Turning
702 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.4 Displaying PLC properties

23.4 Displaying PLC properties

The following PLC properties can be displayed in the "SIMATIC LAD" window:
● Operating mode
● Name of the PLC project
● PLC system version
● Cycle time
● Machining time of the PLC user program

Procedure

1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.

2. Press the "PLC" softkey.

The ladder diagram display opens and displays the PLC information.

3. Press the "Reset mach.time" softkey.

The data of the machining time is reset.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 703
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.5 Displaying information on the program blocks

23.5 Displaying information on the program blocks

You can display all the logic and graphic information of a program block.

Display program block

In the "Program block" list, select the program block that you want to display.

Logic information
The following logic information is displayed in a ladder diagram (LAD):
● Networks with program parts and current paths
● Electrical current flow through a number of logical operations

Further information
● Properties
Name of the block, author, number of the subprogram, data class, date it was generated,
date of the last change and comment.
● Local variable
Name of the variable, variable type, data type and comment.

Access protection

If a program block is password-protected. The ladder diagram display

can be enabled using the "Protection" softkey.

Displaying the program status

1. Press the "Program stat. OFF" softkey to hide the program status in the
status display.

2. Press the "Program stat. ON" softkey to unhide the program status in
the status display.

Display progress status

If your PLC has the function "Progress status" available, the status values are displayed at
the time of execution of the operations. The status of the local data memory and the
accumulators is also displayed.

1. Press the "Program stat. OFF" softkey to hide the program status in the
status display.

2. Press the "Program stat. ON" softkey to unhide the program status in
the status display.

Turning
704 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.5 Displaying information on the program blocks

Change colors for displaying of progress or program status

In progress status, different colors are used to display information.

Display Color
Signal flow of power rail, when status active Blue
Signal flow in the networks Blue
All operations that are active and that are executed without Blue
error (corresponds to signal flow)
Status of the Boolean operations (corresponds to signal Blue
flow)
Times and counters active Green
Error during execution Red
No signal flow Gray
No network executed Gray
STOP mode Gray

Note
Colored display in program status
In the display of the program status only the color of the signal flow is relevant.

Enlarging/reducing the display of the ladder diagram

1. Press the "Zoom +" softkey to enlarge the section of the ladder
diagram.
After enlarging, the "Zoom -" softkey is available.
2. Press the "Zoom -" softkey to reduce the section of the ladder diagram
again.

Procedure

1. Ladder add-on tool is opened.

2. Press the "Window 1" or "Window 2" softkey.

...
3. Press the "Program block" softkey.
The "Program block" list is displayed.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 705
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.6 Displaying and editing NC/PLC variables

4. Press the "Properties" softkey if you wish to display additional

information.

- OR -
Press the "Local variables" softkey if you wish to display data of a
variable.

23.6 Displaying and editing NC/PLC variables

The "NC/PLC Variables" window enables the monitoring and modification of NC system
variables and PLC variables.
You receive the following list in which you enter the desired NC and PLC variables in order
to display the actual values.
● Variable
Address for NC/PLC variable.
Faulty variables have a red background and # is displayed in the Value column.
● Comment
Arbitrary comment on the variables.
The column can be shown or hidden.
● Format
Specification of the format in which the variable is to be displayed.
The format can be permanently defined (e.g. floating-point).
● Value
Display of the current value of the NC/PLC variable.

Procedure

1. Ladder add-on tool is opened.

2. Press the "NC/PLC variables" softkey.

The "NC/PLC Variables" window appears.

Turning
706 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.7 Downloading a PLC user program

23.7 Downloading a PLC user program

Download the project data into the PLC if some changes have been made to the project data
and a new PLC user program is available.
When the project data is loaded, the data classes are saved and loaded to the PLC.

Requirement
Check whether the PLC is in Stop mode.

Note
PLC in RUN mode
If the PLC is in RUN mode, a corresponding message is displayed and the "Load in Stop"
and "Load in Run" softkeys appear.
With "Load in Stop", the PLC is set to Stop mode and the project is stored and loaded to the
CPU.
With "Load in Run", the loading operation is continued and the PLC project loaded to the
PLC. Only those data classes that have really been changed are loaded, i.e. generally
INDIVIDUAL data classes.

Procedure

1. Ladder add-on tool is opened.

You have changed project data.
2. Press the "PLC Stop" softkey if the PLC is in the run mode.

3. Press the "Load to CPU" softkey to start the loading operation.

All data classes are loaded.
4. When the PLC project has been loaded, press the "PLC Start" softkey
to switch the PLC to Run mode.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 707
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.8 Editing the local variable table

23.8 Editing the local variable table

You have the option of editing the local variable table of an INT block.

Insert local variable

If you have inserted new networks or operands, it may be necessary to insert new variables
in the local variable table of an INT block.

Name Freely assign.

Variable type Selection:
 IN
 IN_OUT
 OUT
 TEMP
Data type Selection:
 BOOL
 BYTE
 WORD
 INT
 DWORD
 DINT
 REAL
Comment Freely assign.

Procedure

1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is opened.

...

2. Press the "Program block" softkey.

3. Press the "Local variables" softkey.

The "Local Variables" window appears and lists the created variables.
4. Press the "Edit" softkey.
The fields can be edited.
5. Enter a name, select the variable and data type and, if required, enter a
comment.

Turning
708 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.9 Creating a new block

6. Press the "Attach line" softkey if you want to add a further variable and
enter the data.

- OR -
Select the relevant variable and press the "Delete line" softkey to
remove the variable from the list.

23.9 Creating a new block

Create INT blocks i you wish to make changes with the PLC user program.

Name INT _100, INT_101

The number from the selection field "Number, interrupt program" is
taken for the name of the INT block.
Author A maximum of 48 characters is permitted.
Number of the 100
interrupt program 101
Data class Individual
Comment A maximum of 100 lines and 4096 characters are permitted.

Note
Access protection
You have the option of protecting blocks that have been newly created against being
accessed.

Procedure

1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is opened.

...

2. Press the "Program block" softkey to open the list of program blocks.

3. Press the "Add" softkey.

The "Properties" window appears.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 709
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.10 Editing block properties

4. Enter the name of the author, number of the INT block and, if required,
a comment.
The data class of the block is specified.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to transfer the block to the list.

23.10 Editing block properties

You can edit the title, author and comments of an INT block.

Note
You cannot edit the block name, interrupt number and data class assignment.

Procedure

1. The ladder diagram display is opened.

2. Select the relevant block and press the "Program block" softkey.

3. Press the "Properties" softkey.

The "Properties" window appears.

Turning
710 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.11 Inserting and editing networks

23.11 Inserting and editing networks

You can create a new network and then insert operations (bit operation, assignment, etc.) at
the selected cursor position.
Only empty networks can be edited. Networks, that already include statements, can only be
deleted.
A simple, single line can be edited for each network. You can create a maximum of 3
columns per network.

Column Operation
Column 1  NO contact -| |-
-|/|-
 NC contact
Column 2 NOT -|NOT|-
(optional) Rising edge -|P|-
Falling edge -|N|-

Assign -( )
Set -(S)
Reset -(R)
Column 3 Assign -( )
(only possible if no assign, set or reset Set -(S)
operations were specified in the second Reset -(R)
column)

Note
Logical AND (serial contact) and logical OR (parallel contact) are not possible.

The bit combinations comprise one or several logical operations and the assignment to an
output / bit memory.
If the cursor is moved further to the left with the arrow key, the type of assignment or a logic
operation can be selected. A further logic operation cannot be placed to the right of an
assignment. A network must always be terminated with an assignment.

References
For further information about PLC programming, please refer to:
Function Manual Basic Functions, PLC for SINUMERIK 828D (P4)

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 711
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.11 Inserting and editing networks

Procedure

1. An interrupt routine has been selected.

2. Press the "Edit" softkey.

3. Position the cursor on a network.

4. Press the "Insert network" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <INSERT> key.

If the cursor is positioned on "Network x", a new, empty network is

inserted behind this network.
5. Position the cursor on the desired element below the network title and
press the "Insert operation" softkey.
The "Insert Operation" window appears.
6. Select the desired bit operation (NC contact or NO contact) or
assignment and press the "OK" softkey.

7. Press the "Insert operand" softkey.

8. Enter the logic operation or the command and press the <INPUT> key
to complete the entry.

9. Position the cursor on the operation that you want to delete and press
the "Delete operation" softkey.

- OR -
Position the cursor on the title of the network that you want to delete
and press the "Delete network" softkey.

- OR -
Press the <DEL> key.

The network, including all the logic operations and operands, or the
selected operation is deleted.

Turning
712 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.12 Editing network properties

23.12 Editing network properties

You can edit the network properties of an INT block.

Network title and network comment

The title can have a maximum of three lines and 128 characters. The comment can have a
maximum of 100 lines and 4096 characters.

Procedure

1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is opened.

2. Use the cursor keys to select the network that you want to edit.

3. Press the <SELECT> key.

The "Network title / comment" window opens and shows the title and a
possibly assigned comment for the selected network.
5. Press the "Change" softkey.
The fields can be edited.
6. Enter the changes and press the "OK" softkey to transfer the data to the
user program.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 713
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.13 Displaying/canceling the access protection

23.13 Displaying/canceling the access protection

You can password protect your program organizational units (POUs) in the PLC 828
programming tool. This prevents other users from accessing this part of the program. This
means that it is invisible to other users and is encrypted when it is downloaded.
A lock symbol is used to show a password-protected POU in the block overview and in the
ladder diagram.

Procedure

1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is opened.

2 Select the relevant program organizational unit (POU) in the overview

and press the "Program block" softkey.

3. Press the "Protection" softkey.

The "Protection" window appears.
4. Enter your password and press the "Accept" softkey.

23.14 Displaying and editing symbol tables

You can display the symbol tables that are used to obtain an overview of the global
operands available in the project - which you can then edit.
The name, address and possibly also a comment is displayed for each entry.

Procedure

1. Ladder add-on tool is opened.

2. Press the "Symbol table" softkey.

The list with the symbol table entries is displayed.

3. Press the "Edit" softkey if you want to change entries.

The display fields can be edited.

Turning
714 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.15 Searching for operands

4. Use the cursor keys to select the desired entry and the field to be
changed.

5. Enter the value to be changed.

- OR -
Press the "Attach line" softkey to insert an empty line after the selected
entry.

- OR -
Press the "Delete line" softkey to remove the selected entry from the
list.

- OR -
Enter a new value in the selected field.
7. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm your action.

23.15 Searching for operands

You can use the search function to quickly reach points in very large programs where you
would like, for example, to make changes.

Restricting the search

● "Window 1" / "Window 2","Symbol table"
With "Go to", you can jump directly to the desired network.
● "Cross references"
With "Go to", you can jump directly to the desired line.

Requirement
Window 1 / window 2, the symbol tables or the list of cross references is opened.

Procedure

1. Press the "Find" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears. The "Find / Go To" window opens at
the same time.
2. Select the "Find operand" entry in the first input field if you are
searching for a specific operand and enter the search term in the "Find"
input field.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 715
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.15 Searching for operands

3. Select the search range (e.g. Find all).

4. Select the "In this program unit" or "In all program units" entry if you are
in "Window 1" or "Window 2" or in the symbol table in order to restrict
the search.
5. Press the "OK" softkey to start the search.
If the operand you are searching for is found, the corresponding line is
highlighted.
Press the "Continue search" softkey if the operand found during the
search does not correspond to the element you are looking for.

- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey if you want to cancel the search.

Further search options

1. Press the "Go to start" softkey to jump to the start of the ladder diagram
in window 1 or window 2, or the list (cross references, symbol table).

2. Press the "Go to end" softkey to jump to the end of the ladder diagram
in window 1 or window 2, or the list (cross references, symbol table).

Turning
716 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.16 Inserting/deleting a symbol table

23.16 Inserting/deleting a symbol table

New user symbol tables can be generated and changed. Tables that are no longer used can
be deleted.

Note
Delete symbol table
The "Delete" softkey is only available if a user symbol table has been selected.

Procedure

1. The symbol table is opened.

2. Press the "Select sym. table" softkey.

The "Symbol Table - Selection" window appears.
3. Position the cursor at the desired position and press the "Insert sym.
table" softkey.
The "Create Symbol Table" window appears.
4 Enter a symbolic name and press the "OK" softkey.
The new user symbol table is inserted in the line after the cursor
position.
- OR -
Select a symbol table and press the "Change symbol table" softkey if
you wish to change the properties of the symbol table.

5. Position the cursor on the symbol table that you want to delete and
press the "Delete" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 717
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.17 Displaying the network symbol information table

23.17 Displaying the network symbol information table

All of the symbolic identifiers used in the selected network are displayed in the "Network
symbol information table" window.
The following information is listed:
● Names
● Absolute addresses
● Comments
The symbol information table remains empty for networks that do not contain any global
symbols.

Procedure

1. The ladder diagram display (LAD) is opened.

2. Select the desired network and press the "Symbol info" softkey.
The "Network Symbol Information Table" window appears.
3. Use the cursor keys to move within the table.

Turning
718 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.18 Displaying and editing PLC signals

23.18 Displaying and editing PLC signals

PLC signals are displayed and can be changed here in the "PLC status list" window.

The following lists are shown

Inputs (IB)
Bit memories (MB)
Outputs (QB)
Variables (VB)
Data (DB)

Setting the address

You can go directly to the desired PLC address to monitor the signals.

Editing
You can edit the data.

Procedure

1. Ladder add-on tool is opened.

2. Press the "Status list” softkey.

The "Status List" window appears.
3. Press the "Set address" softkey.
The "Set Address" window appears.
4. Activate the desired address type (e.g. DB), enter the value and press
the "OK" softkey.
The cursor jumps to the specified address.
5. Press the "Change" softkey.
The "RW" input field can be edited.
6. Enter the desired value and press the "OK" softkey.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 719
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.19 Displaying cross references

23.19 Displaying cross references

You can display all the operands used in the PLC user project and their use in the list of
cross references.
This list indicates in which networks an input, output, bit memory etc. is used.
The list of cross references contains the following information:
● Block
● Address in the network
● Context (command ID)

Symbolic and absolute address

You can choose between specification in absolute or symbolic address.
Elements for which there are no symbolic identifiers are automatically displayed with
absolute identifiers.

Opening program blocks in the ladder diagram

From the cross references, you have the option of going directly to the location in the
program where the operand is used. The corresponding block is opened in window 1 or 2
and the cursor is set to the corresponding element.

Searching
Using a specific search, you can go directly to the location that you wish to view in more
detail:
● Search for operand
● Jump to sought line

Procedure

1. Ladder add-on tool is opened.

2. Press the "Cross refs." softkey.

The list of cross references appears and the operands are displayed
sorted according to absolute address.
3. Press the "Symbol. address" softkey.
The list of operands is displayed sorted according to symbolic address.
4. Press the "Absolute address" softkey to return to the display showing
the absolute addresses.

Turning
720 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.19 Displaying cross references

5. Select the desired cross reference and press the "Open in window 1" or
"Open in window 2" softkey.
The ladder diagram is opened, and the selected operand is marked.

6. Press the "Find" softkey.

The "Find / Go To" window appears.

7. Select "Find operand" or "Go to" and enter the sought element or the
desired line and select the search order (e.g. search up).

8. Press the "OK" softkey to start the search.

9. If an an element is found that corresponds to the sought element, but is

not at the appropriate position, press the "Continue search" softkey to
find where the search term occurs next.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 721
Ladder Viewer and Ladder add-on (828D only)
23.19 Displaying cross references

Turning
722 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms 24
24.1 Displaying alarms
If faulty conditions are recognized in the operation of the machine, then an alarm will be
generated and, if necessary, the machining will be interrupted.
The error text that is displayed together with the alarm number gives you more detailed
information on the error cause.

WARNING

Please check the situation in the plant on the basis of the description of the active alarm(s).
Eliminate the cause/s of the alarm/s and acknowledge it/them as instructed.
Failure to observe this warning will place your machine, workpiece, stored settings and
possibly even your own safety at risk.

Alarm overview
You can display all upcoming alarms and acknowledge them.
The alarm overview contains the following information:
● Date and time
● Deletion criterion
specifies the key or softkey used to acknowledge the alarm
● Alarm number
● Alarm text

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "Alarm list” softkey.

The "Alarms" window appears.
All pending alarms are displayed.
The "Hide SI alarms" softkey is displayed if safety alarms are pending.
3. Press the "Hide SI alarms" softkey if you do not wish to display SI
alarms.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 723
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.1 Displaying alarms

4. Position the cursor on an alarm.

...

5. Press the key that is specified as acknowledgement symbol to delete

the alarm.
- OR -
Press the "Delete HMI alarm" softkey to cancel an HMI alarm.

- OR -
Press the "Acknowledge alarm" softkey to delete a PLC alarm of the SQ
type (alarm number as of 800000).
The softkeys are activated when the cursor is on the corresponding
alarm.

Acknowledgement symbols

Symbol Meaning
Turn the unit off and back on (main switch), or press NCK POWER ON.

Press the <RESET> key.

Press the <ALARM CANCEL> key.

- OR -
Press the "Acknowl. HMI alarm" softkey.
...

Press the key provided by the manufacturer.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Turning
724 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.2 Displaying an alarm log

24.2 Displaying an alarm log

A list of all the alarms and messages that have occurred so far are listed in the "Alarm Log"
window.
Up to 500 administered, incoming and outgoing events are displayed in chronological order.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "Alarm log" softkey.

The "Alarm Log" window opens.

All of the coming and going events - that have occurred since the HMI
was started - are listed.
3. Press the "Display new" softkey to update the list of displayed
alarms/messages.

4. Press the "Save Log" softkey.

The log that is currently displayed is stored as text file alarmlog.txt in the
system data in directory card/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/alarm_log.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 725
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.3 Displaying messages

24.3 Displaying messages

PLC and part program messages may be issued during machining.
These message will not interrupt the program execution. Messages provide information with
regard to a certain behavior of the cycles and with regard to the progress of machining and
are usually kept beyond a machining step or until the end of the cycle.

Overview of messages
You can display all issued messages.
The message overview contains the following information:
● Date
● Message number
is only displayed for PLC messages
● Message text

Proceed as follows

1. Select the "Diagnosis" operating area.

2. Press the "Messages" softkey.

The "Messages" window appears.

Turning
726 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.4 Sorting, alarms, faults and messages

24.4 Sorting, alarms, faults and messages

If a large number of alarms, messages or alarm logs are displayed, you have the option of
sorting these in an ascending or descending order according to the following criteria:
● Date (alarm list, messages, alarm log)
● Number (alarm list, messages)
As a consequence, for every extensive lists, you can obtain the required information faster.

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the softkey "Alarm list", "Messages" or "Alarm log" to display the
requested messages and alarms.
...

3. Press the "Sort" softkey.

The list of entries is sorted in ascending order according to date, i.e. the
most recent information is at the end of the list.

4. Press the softkey "Descending" to sort the list in a descending order.

The most recent event is shown at the beginning of the list.
5. Press the "Number" softkey if you wish to sort the alarm list or the list
with messages according to numbers.

6. Press the "Ascending" softkey if you wish to display the list in an

ascending order.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 727
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.5 PLC and NC variables

24.5 PLC and NC variables

24.5.1 Displaying and editing PLC and NC variables

The "NC/PLC variables" window allows NC system variables and PLC variables to be
monitored and changed.
You receive the following list in which you can enter the desired NC/PLC variables in order to
display the actual values.
● Variable
Address for NC/PLC variable
Incorrect variables have a red background and are displayed with a # character in the
value column.
● Comment
Any comment on the variable.
The columns can be displayed and hidden.
● Format
Specify the format in which the variable is to be displayed.
The format can be specified (e.g. floating point)
● Value
Displays the actual value of the NC/PLC variables

PLC variables
Inputs Input bit (Ex), input byte (EBx), input word (EWx), input double word (EDx)
Outputs Output bit (Ax), output byte (ABx), output word (AWx), output double word
(ADx)
Bit memory Memory bit (Mx), memory byte (MBx), memory word (MWx), memory
double word (MDx)
Times Time (Tx)
Meters Counter (Cx)
Data Data block (DBx): data bit (DBXx), data byte (DBBx), data word (DBWx),
data double word (DBDx)

Formats
B Binary
H Hexadecimal
D Decimal without sign
+/-D Decimal with sign
F Floating point (for double words)
A ASCII character

Turning
728 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.5 PLC and NC variables

Notation for variables

● PLC variables
EB2
A1.2
DB2.DBW2
● NC variables
– NC system variables - notation
$AA_IM[1]
– User variables/GUDs - notation
GUD/MyVariable[1,3]
– OPI - notation
/CHANNEL/PARAMETER/R[u1,2]

Note
NC system variables and PLC variables
 System variables can be dependent on the channel. When the channel is switched over,
the values from the corresponding channel are displayed.
 For user variables (GUDs) it is not necessary to make a specification according to global
or channel-specific GUDs. The indices of GUD arrays are, just like NC variables in the
system variable syntax, 0-based; this means that the first element starts with the index 0.
 Using the tooltip, for NC system variables, you can display the OPI notation (with the
exception of GUDs).

Changing PLC variables

Changes can only be made to the PLC variables with the appropriate password.

DANGER

Changes in the states of NC/PLC variables have a major impact on the machine. Incorrect
configuration of the parameters can endanger human life and cause damage to the
machine.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 729
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.5 PLC and NC variables

Changing and deleting values

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "NC/PLC variab." softkey.

The "NC/PLC variables" window opens.

3. Position the cursor in the "Variable" column and enter the required
variable.
4. Press the <INPUT> key.
The operand is displayed with the value.

5. Press the "Details" softkey.

The "NC/PLC variables: Details" window is opened. The information for
"Variable", "Comment" and "Value" are displayed in the full length.
6. Position the cursor in the "Format" field and choose the required format
with <SELECT>.

7. Press the "Display comments" softkey.

The "Comments" column is displayed. You have the option of creating
comments or editing existing comments.
Press the "Display comments" softkey once again to hide the column
again.

8. Press the "Change" softkey if you would like to edit the value.
The "Value" column can be edited.
9. Press the "Insert variable" softkey if you wish to select a variable from a
list of all of the existing variables and insert this.
The "Select variable" window opens.
10. Press the "Filter/search" softkey to restrict the display of variables (e.g.
to mode groups-variables) using the "Filter" selection box and/or select
the desired variable using the "Search" input box.
Press the "Delete all" softkey if you would like to delete the entries for
the operands.

11. Press the "OK" softkey to confirm the changes or the deletion.

- OR -
Press the "Cancel" softkey to cancel the changes.

Turning
730 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.5 PLC and NC variables

Note
"Filter/Search" when inserting variables
The start value for "Filter/Search" of variables differs.
For example, to insert the variable $R[0], set "Filter/Search":
 The start value is 0, if you filter according to "System variables".
 The start value is 1, if you filter according to "All (no filter)". In this case, all signals are
displayed and shown in the OPI notation.

Changing operands
Depending on the type of operand, you can increment or decrtement the address by 1 place
at a time using the "Operand +" and "Operand -" softkeys.

Note
Axis names as index
For axis names, the softkeys "Operand +" and "Operand -" do not act as index, e.g. for
$AA_IM[X1].

Examples
DB97.DBX2.5
Result: DB97.DBX2.6
$AA_IM[1]
Result: $AA_IM[2]
MB201
Result: MB200
/Channel/Parameter/R[u1,3]
Result: /Channel/Parameter/R[u1,2]

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 731
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.5 PLC and NC variables

24.5.2 Saving and loading screen forms

You have the option of saving the configurations of the variables made in the "NC/PLC
variables" window in a screen form that you reload again when required.

Editing screen forms

If you change a screen form that has been loaded, then this is marked using with * after the
screen form name.
The name of a screen form is kept in the display after switching-off.

Procedure

1. You have entered values for the desired variables in the "NC/PLC
variables" window.
2. Press the ">>" softkey.

3. Press the "Save screen" softkey.

The "Save screen: Select archiving" window opens.
4. Position the cursor on the template folder for variable screen forms in
which your actual screen form should be saved and press the "OK"
softkey.
The "Save screen: Name" window opens.
5. Enter the name for the file and press the "OK" softkey.
A message in the status line informs you that the screen form was
saved in the specified folder.
If a file with the same name already exists, they you will receive a
prompt.
6. Press the "Load screen" softkey.
The "Load screen" window opens and displays the sample folder for the
variable screen forms.
7. Select the desired file and press the "OK" softkey.
You return to the variable view. The list of all of the predefined NC and
PLC variables is displayed.

Turning
732 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.5 PLC and NC variables

24.5.3 Load symbols

PLC data can also be edited via symbols.
To do this, the symbol tables and texts for the symbols in the PLC project must have been
suitably prepared (STEP7) and made available in SINUMERIK Operate.

Preparing PLC data

Save the generated files in the /oem/sinumerik/plc/symbols directory.

Procedure

1. The variable view is opened.

2. Press the ">>" and "Load icons" softkeys.

The "Import PLC symbols: *.snh" window opens.

3. In the folder "/oem/sinumerik/plc/symbols", select the "PlcSym.snh" file

to import the symbols and then click on "OK".

4. In the folder "/oem/sinumerik/plc/symbols", select the "PlcSym.snt" file

to import the symbols and then press the "OK" softkey.

You will obtain an appropriate note if the tables were successfully

imported.
5. Press the "OK" softkey.
You return to the "NC/PLC variables" window.
6. Restart the SINUMERIK Operate in order to activate the files.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 733
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.6 Version

24.6 Version

24.6.1 Displaying version data

The following components with the associated version data are specified in the "Version
data" window:
● System software
● Basic PLC program
● PLC user program
● System extensions
● OEM applications
● Hardware
Information is provided in the "Nominal version" column as to whether the versions of the
components deviate from the version supplied on the CompactFlash Card.

The version displayed in the "Actual version" column matches the version of
the CF card.
The version displayed in the "Actual version" column does not match the
version of the CF card.

You may save the version data. Version displays saved as text files can be further
processed as required or sent to the hotline in the event of an error.

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnosis" operating area.

2. Press the "Version" softkey.

The "Version Data" window appears.
Data from the available components are displayed.
3. Select the component for which you would like more information.

4. Press the "Details" softkey, in order to receive more exact information

on the components displayed.

Turning
734 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.6 Version

24.6.2 Save information

All the machine-specific information of the controller is combined in a configuration via the
user interface. You can save machine-specific information on the drives that have been set-
up.

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "Version" softkey.

It takes some time to call the version display. While the version data is
being determined a progress message box and the appropriate text are
displayed in the dialog line.
3. Press the "Save" softkey.
The "Save version information: select archive" window opens. The
following storage locations are offered depending on the configuration:
 Local drive
 Network drives
 USB
 Version data (archive: Data tree in the "HMI data" directory)
4. Then press the "New directory" softkey if you wish to create your own
directory.

5. Press the "OK" softkey. The directory is created.

6. Press the "OK" softkey again to confirm the storage location.

The "Save version information: name" window opens. The following

options are available:
 In the "Name:" text field, The file name is pre-assigned with
<Machine name/no.>+<CF-card number>. "_config.xml" or
"_version.txt" is automatically attached to the file names.
 In text field "Comment", you can add a comment, which is stored
with the configuration data.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 735
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.7 Logbook

Select the following via a checkbox:

 Version data (.TXT): Output of pure version data in text format.
 Configuration data (.XML): Output of configuration data in XML
format. The configuration file contains the data you entered under
Machine identity, the license requirements, the version information
and the logbook entries.
7. Press the "OK" softkey to start the data transfer.

24.7 Logbook
The logbook provides you with the machine history in an electronic form.
If service is carried out on the machine, this can be electronically saved. This means that it is
possible to obtain a picture about the "History" of the control and to optimize service.

Editing the logbook

You can edit the following information:
● Editing information on the machine identity
– Machine name/No.
– Machine type
– Address data
● Make logbook entries (e.g. "filter replaced")

Output of the logbook

You have the possibility of exporting the logbook by generating a file using the "Save
version" function in which the logbook is contained as section.

Turning
736 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.7 Logbook

24.7.1 Displaying and editing the logbook

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "Version" softkey.

3. Press the "Logbook" softkey.

The "Machine logbook" window opens.

Editing end customer data

You have the option of changing the address data of the end customer
using the "Change" softkey.

24.7.2 Making a logbook entry

Using the "New logbook entry" window to make a new entry into the logbook.
Enter your name, company and department and a brief description of the measure taken or a
description of the fault.

Note
If you wish to make line breaks in the "fault diagnostics/measure" field, use the key
combination <ALT> + <INPUT>.

The date and entry number are automatically added.

Sorting the entries

The logbook entries are displayed numbered in the "machine logbook" window.
More recent entries are always added at the top in the display.

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 737
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.7 Logbook

Procedure

1. The logbook is opened.

2. Press the "New entry" softkey.
The "New logbook entry" window opens.
3. Enter the required data and press the "OK" softkey.
You return to the "Machine logbook" window and the entry is displayed
below the machine identity data.

Note
Once you have stored an entry this can no longer be changed or deleted.

Searching for a logbook entry

You have the option for searching for specific entries using the search function.

1. The "Machine logbook" window is opened.

2. Press the "Search..." softkey and enter the desired term in the search
form. You can make a search according to date/time, company
name/department or according to fault diagnostics/measure.
The cursor is positioned on the first entry that corresponds to the search
term.
3. Press the "Continue search" softkey if the entry found is not the one that
you are looking for.

Additional search option

Press the "Go to Beginning" softkey to start the search at the latest
entry.

Press the "Go to End" softkey to start the search at the oldest entry.

Turning
738 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.8 Creating screenshots

24.8 Creating screenshots

You can create screenshots of the current user interface.
Each screenshot is saved as a file and stored in the following folder:
/user/sinumerik/hmi/log/screenshot

Procedure

Ctrl + P Press the <Ctrl+P> key combination.

A screenshot of the current user interface is created in .png format.
The file names assigned by the system run in ascending order from
"SCR_SAVE_0001.png" to "SCR_SAVE_9999". You can create up to 9,999
screenshots.

Copy file

1. Select the "Start-up" operating area.

2. Press the "System data" softkey and open the specified folder.

As you cannot open screenshots in SINUMERIK Operate, you must

copy the files to a Windows PC either via "WinSCP" or via a USB
FlashDrive.
You can open the files using a graphics program, e.g. "Office Picture
Manager".

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 739
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.9 Remote diagnostics

24.9 Remote diagnostics

24.9.1 Setting remote access

You can influence the remote access to your control in the "Remote diagnostics (RCS)"
window.
Here, rights for all types of remote control are set. The selected rights are defined from the
PLC and using the setting at the HMI.
The HMI can restrict the rights specified from the PLC, but however, cannot extend the rights
beyond the PLC rights.
If the settings made permit access from outside, then this is still dependent on a manual or
automatic confirmation.

Rights for remote access

The "Specified from PLC" field shows the access rights for remote access or remote
monitoring specified from the PLC.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

In the "Selected in the HMI" selection box, you have the possibility of setting rights for
remote control:
● Do not permit remote access
● Permit remote monitoring
● Permit remote control
The combination of the settings in the HMI and in the PLC show the valid status as to
whether access is permitted or not. This is displayed in the "Resulting from" line.

Settings for the confirmation dialog box

If the settings made for "Specified from the PLC" and "Selected in the HMI" permit access
from outside, then this is however, still dependent on either a manual or automatic
confirmation.
As soon as a remote access is permitted, at all of the active operating stations, a query
dialog box is displayed for the operator at the active operating station to either confirm or
reject an access.
For the case that there is no local operation, then the control behavior can be set for this
particular scenario. You define how long this window is displayed and whether, after the
confirmation has expired, the remote access is automatically rejected or accepted.

Turning
740 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.9 Remote diagnostics

Display of the state

Remote monitoring active

Remote control active

If remote access is active, using these icons you will be informed in the status line as to
whether a remote access is presently active or whether only monitoring is permitted.

Procedure

1. Select the "Diagnostics" operating area.

2. Press the "Remote diag." softkey.

The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window is opened.
3. Press the "Change" softkey.
The "Selected in the HMI" is activated.
4. If you desire remote control, select the entry "Permit remote control".

In order that remote control is possible, the entry "Permit remote

control" must be specified in the fields "Specified from the PLC" and
"Selected in the HMI".
5. Enter new values in the group "Behavior for confirming remote access"
if you wish to change the behavior for confirming remote access.
6. Press the "OK" softkey.
The settings are accepted and saved.

References
For a description of configuration options, refer to the
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 741
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.9 Remote diagnostics

24.9.2 Permit modem

You can permit remote access to your control via a teleservice adapter IE connected at
X127.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

Software option
You need the "MC Information System RCS Host" option to display the
"Permit modem" softkey.

Procedure

1. The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window is opened.

2. Press the "Permit modem" softkey.

Access to the control via modem is enabled so that a connection can be
established.
3. To block access again, press the "Permit modem" softkey again.

24.9.3 Request remote diagnostics

Using the "Request remote diagnostics" softkey, from your control you have the option of
actively requesting remote diagnostics with your machinery construction OEM.
The access via modem must be enabled if the access is to be made via modem.

Machine manufacturer
Please refer to the machine manufacturer's specifications.

When requesting remote diagnostics, you obtain a window with the corresponding pre-
assigned data and values of the ping service. If required, you can ask your machine
manufacturer for this data.

Turning
742 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.9 Remote diagnostics

Data Meaning
IP address IP address of the remote PC
Port Standard port that is intended for remote diagnostics
Send duration Duration of the request in minutes
Send interval Cycle in which the message is sent to the remote PC in seconds
Ping send Message for the remote PC
data

Procedure

1. The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window is opened.

2. Press the "Request remote diagnostics" softkey.

The "Request remote diagnostics" window is displayed.
3. Press the "Change" softkey if you would like to edit the values.

4. Press the "OK" softkey.

The request is sent to the remote PC.

References
Commissioning Manual SINUMERIK Operate (IM9) / SINUMERIK 840D sl

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 743
Alarms, error messages, and system alarms
24.9 Remote diagnostics

24.9.4 Exit remote diagnostics

Procedure

1. The "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" is opened and it is possible that

remote monitoring or remote access is active.

2. Block modem access if access via modem is to be blocked .

- OR -
In the "Remote diagnostics (RCS)" window, reset the access rights to
"Permit no remote access" .

Turning
744 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Appendix A
A.1 Overview
6,180(5,.'VO'RFXPHQWDWLRQ2YHUYLHZ
*HQHUDO'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6
'VO 'VO 6
'LVO
'VO

6DOHV%URFKXUH &DWDORJ1& 30&DWDORJ6,027,21

6,1$0,&66DQG0RWRUV
IRU3URGXFWLRQ0DFKLQHV

8VHU'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.
'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
' ' 'LVO 6
'
'VO

2SHUDWLQJ,QVWUXFWLRQV 2SHUDWLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 3URJUDPPLQJ0DQXDO 'LDJQRVWLFV0DQXDO

ದ8QLYHUVDO ದ7XUQLQJ ದ)XQGDPHQWDOV ದ,627XUQLQJ
ದ7XUQLQJ ದ0LOOLQJ ದ-RESODQQLQJ ದ,620LOOLQJ
ದ0LOOLQJ ದ0HDVXULQJF\FOHV
ದ+0,$GYDQFHG

0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO 'VO
6 ' 6

0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO 6\VWHP0DQXDO &RPPLVVLRQLQJ0DQXDO 3DUDPHWHU0DQXDO

ದ1&8 *XLGHOLQHVIRUPDFKLQH &WUO(QHUJ\ ದ&1&1&.3/& ದ3DUW
ದ2SHUDWRUFRPSRQHQWV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 'ULYH ದ3DUW
DQGQHWZRUNLQJ ದ%DVLF6RIWZDUHDQG ದ'HWDLOHG
2SHUDWLQJ6RIWZDUH 0DFKLQH'DWD
ದ%DVLF6RIWZDUHDQG 'HVFULSWLRQ
+0,$GYDQFHG ದ6\VWHPYDULDEOHV
0DQXIDFWXUHUVHUYLFHGRFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,1$0,&6 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'VO 'VO 6 'VO
' 'LVO
'VO
'

)XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO )XQFWLRQ0DQXDO &RQILJXUDWLRQ0DQXDO

ದ%DVLF)XQFWLRQV ,62GLDOHFWV 'ULYHIXQFWLRQV 6DIHW\,QWHJUDWHG (0&'HVLJQ*XLGHOLQHV
ದ([WHQVLRQ)XQFWLRQV
ದ6SHFLDOIXQFWLRQV
ದ6\QFKURQL]HGDFWLRQV
ದ7RROPDQDJHPHQW

,QIRUPDWLRQ7UDLQLQJ (OHFWURQLFGRFXPHQWDWLRQ

6,180(5,. 6,180(5,. 6,180(5,.

'2&RQ&' 0\'RFXPHQWDWLRQ
%HJLQQHUvV0DQXDO 7UDLQLQJGRFXPHQWV 0DQXDOV '2&RQ:(% 0DQDJHU
0LOOLQJDQG7XUQLQJ ದ0LOOLQJPDGHHDVLHU 7RRODQG
ZLWK6KRS0LOO PROGPDNLQJ
ದ7XUQLQJPDGHHDVLHU
ZLWK6KRS7XUQ

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 745
Appendix
A.1 Overview

Turning
746 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
Index

Setup data, 655

Base offset, 79
Basic blocks, 113
A Binary format, 649
Blank input
Absolute dimensions, 206 Function, 185
Actual-value display, 40 Parameter, 186, 507
Alarm log Block
display, 725 Search, 92, 119, 122, 123
Sorting, 727 Block search, 118
Alarms, 723 Mode, 125
Sorting, 727 Multi-channel view, 525
Align milling tool - CYCLE800 Program interruption, 92, 122
Parameter, 452 Search pointer, 92, 119, 122, 123
Alignment angle, 560, 562 Search target parameters, 124
Any file Search target specification, 121
Create, 633 Boring - CYCLE86
Approach/retract cycle Function, 263
Parameter, 232 Parameter, 265
Approach/retraction cycle, 231
Archive
Generate in the program manager, 649 C
generating in the system data, 650
read in archive from system data, 654 Calculator, 47
reading-in in the Program Manager, 652 Fits, 329
Asian characters, 51 Centering - CYCLE81
Auxiliary functions Function, 256
H functions, 150 Parameter, 258
M functions, 150 Changing a program block, 221
Axes Channel switchover, 65
Defined increment, 101 Chuck dimensions, 89
Direct positioning, 103 Circle, 470
Referencing, 60 Circle position pattern - HOLES2
Repositioning, 117 Function, 286
Traversing, 101 Circular pocket - POCKET4
Variable increment, 102 Function, 360
Parameter, 365
Circular position pattern - HOLES2
B Parameter, 288
Circular spigot - CYCLE77
B axis, 559 Function, 370
Alignment angle, 562 Parameter, 373
Approach/retraction, 565 Circumferential groove - SLOT2
Measure tool, 569 Function, 382
Milling, 563 Circumferential slot - SLOT2
Position pattern, 567 Parameter, 385
Swiveling, 563 Clamping the spindle, 209
Backing up Coarse and fine offsets, 80
Data, 649, 650 Context-sensitive online help, 55

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 747
Index

Continuous-path mode, 549 Cut-off - CYCLE92

Contour call - CYCLE62 Function, 316
Function, 331, 416 Parameter, 317
Parameter, 332, 417 Cutting edge width, 584
Contour milling - CYCLE63 Cutting tip length, 584
Function, contour pocket, 429 Cutting tip width, 584
Function, contour spigot, 435 CYCLE61- face milling
Function, residual material contour pocket, 433 Function, 351
Function, residual material contour spigot, 438 Parameter, 354
Parameter, contour spigot, 438 CYCLE62 - new contour
Parameters, contour pocket, 432 Function, 321, 408
Parameters, residual material contour pocket, 435 Parameter, 410
Parameters, residual material contour spigot, 441 CYCLE62- contour call
Contour milling - CYCLE64 Function, 331, 416
Function, predrilling, 425 Parameter, 332, 417
Parameters, centering, 427 CYCLE63 - contour milling
Parameters, predrilling, 429 Function, contour pocket, 429
Contour turning - CYCLE952 Function, contour spigot, 435
Function, grooving, 340 Function, residual material contour pocket, 433
Function, grooving residual material, 343 Function, residual material contour spigot, 438
Function, plunge turning, 345 Parameter, contour spigot, 438
Function, plunge turning residual material, 349 Parameters, contour pocket, 432
Function, stock removal, 332 Parameters, residual material contour pocket, 435
Function, stock removal residual, 337 Parameters, residual material contour spigot, 441
Parameters, grooving, 343 CYCLE64 - contour milling
Parameters, grooving residual material, 345 Function, predrilling, 425
Parameters, plunge turning, 348 Parameters, centering, 427
Parameters, plunge turning residual material, 350 Parameters, predrilling, 429
Parameters, stock removal, 337 CYCLE70 - engraving
Parameters, stock removal residual material, 339 Function, 399
Coordinate system Parameter, 405
Switching over, 66 CYCLE70 - thread milling
Coordinate transformation, 464 Function, 395
Copying Parameter, 399
Directory, 642 CYCLE72 - Path milling
Program, 642 Function, 418
Counterspindle, 89 Parameter, 423
Synchronizing, 533 CYCLE76 - rectangular spigot
Create Function, 366
Program block, 136 Parameter, 369
Workpiece, 630 CYCLE77 - circular spigot
Creating Function, 370
Any file, 633 Parameter, 373
Directory, 629 CYCLE78 - Drilling and thread milling
G Code program, 631 Function, 276
Job list, 634 Parameter, 279
Multi-channel program, 500 CYCLE79 - multi-edge
Multitool, 613 Function, 374
NC directory on the local drive, 624 Parameter, 376
Program list, 635 CYCLE801 - grid/frame position pattern
Ctrl Energy Function, 283
Energy analysis, 678 Parameter, 285

Turning
748 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Index

CYCLE802 - freely programmable positions Function, stock removal, 332

Parameter, 283 Function, stock removal residual, 337
CYCLE81 - centering Parameters, grooving, 343
Function, 256 Parameters, grooving residual material, 345
Parameter, 258 Parameters, plunge turning, 348
CYCLE82 - drilling Parameters, plunge turning residual material, 350
Function, 258 Parameters, stock removal, 337
Parameter, 260 Parameters, stock removal residual material, 339
CYCLE83 - deep-hole drilling CYCLE98 - thread turning
Function, 266 Function, thread chain, 312
Parameter, 269 Parameters, thread chain, 315
CYCLE832 - High Speed Settings CYCLE99 - thread turning
Function, 454 Function, face thread, 303
Parameter, 456 Function, longitudinal thread, 303
CYCLE84 - tapping without compensating chuck Function, tapered thread, 303
Function, 270 Parameters, face thread, 312
Parameter, 275 Parameters, tapered thread, 310
CYCLE840 - tapping with compensating chuck Cycles
Function, 270 Current levels, 182
Parameter, 275 Hiding cycle parameters, 193
CYCLE85 - reaming Screen forms, 182
Function, 261
Parameter, 262
CYCLE86 - boring D
Function, 263
Data block (SB2), 111
Parameter, 265
Deep-hole drilling - CYCLE83
CYCLE899 - open slot
Function, 266
Function, 386
Parameter, 269
Parameter, 393
Delete
CYCLE92 - cut-off
Multitool, 616
Function, 316
Deleting
Parameter, 317
Directory, 644
CYCLE930 - groove
Program, 644
Function, 295295
Device
Parameter, 298298
Activate/deactivate, 692
CYCLE940 - undercut
Enabling, 692
Function, DIN thread, 300
Directory
Function, form E, 298
Copying, 642
Function, form F, 298
Creating, 629
Function, thread, 300
Deleting, 644
Parameters, DIN thread, 302
Highlight, 640
Parameters, form E, 299
Pasting, 642
Parameters, form F, 300
Properties, 645
Parameters, thread, 303
Selecting, 640
CYCLE951 - stock removal
Displaying
Function, 292
Energy consumption, 678
Parameter, 295
Program level, 114
CYCLE952 - contour turning
DRF (handwheel offset), 127
Function, grooving, 340
Drilling - CYCLE82
Function, grooving residual material, 343
Function, 258
Function, plunge turning, 345
Parameter, 260
Function, plunge turning residual material, 349
Drilling and thread milling - CYCLE78

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 749
Index

Function, 276 Parameter, 283

Parameter, 279 Function
Drilling centered Setting milling tool - CYCLE800, 453
Function, 459
Parameters, 461
Drilling radius, 584 G
Drive
G code program
Error messages, 667
Blank input, 185
Logical drive, 665
G Code program
Setting up, 666
Creating, 631
DRY (dry run feed), 127
G functions
Dual editor, 137
Display all G groups, 149
Duplo number, 583
G Functions
Displaying selected G groups, 147
Global user data, 541
E
Grid/frame position pattern - CYCLE801
Easy Extend, 692 Function, 283
Activate/deactivate device, 692 Parameter, 285
Enabling a device, 692 Groove - CYCLE930
First commissioning, 693 Function, 295
Easy Message, 683 Parameter, 298
Commissioning, 684
Settings, 690
User log on/off, 688 H
Editor
Handheld terminal 8, 669
Calling, 131
Handwheel
Settings, 138
Assigning, 92
Elongated hole - LONGHOLE
High Speed Settings - CYCLE832
Function, 393
Function, 454
Parameter, 395
Parameter, 456
Enabling button, 670
Highlight
Energy consumption
Directory, 640
displaying, 678
Program, 640
Engraving - CYCLE60
HOLES1 - line position pattern
Function, 399
Function, 283
Parameter, 405
Parameter, 285
Equipping tools
HOLES2 - circle position pattern
Multitool, 615
Function, 286
Executing
HOLES2 - circular position pattern
Program, 627
Parameter, 288
EXTCALL, 647
HT 8, 669
Enabling button, 670
Touch Panel, 676
F
Traversing keys, 672
Face milling - CYCLE61 User menu, 673
Function, 351 Virtual keyboard, 674
Parameter, 354
Feed data
Actual value window, 42 I
Fit calculator, 329
Incremental dimensions, 206
Freely programmable positions - CYCLE802
Interruption point

Turning
750 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Index

Approaching, 92, 122 Settings, 108

Traversing axes, 101
Master dimension, 328
J MDA
Deleting a program, 96
Job list
Executing a program, 96
Creating, 634
MDI
Multi-channel support, 504
Loading a program, 94
Saving a program, 95
Measurement
L
Tool, 589
Ladder viewer, 699 Measuring
Line position pattern - HOLES1 Tool, 71
Function, 283 Messages, 726
Parameter, 285 Sorting, 727
Loading Mirroring
Multitool, 616 Parameters, 468
Logbook, 736 Mode groups, 65
display, 737 Mold making programs, 140
Edit the address data, 737 Mold making view, 140
Entry search, 738 Changing a graphic, 144
Making an entry, 737 Changing the section, 145
Output, 735 Editing a program block, 143
LONGHOLE - elongated hole Searching for program blocks, 144
Function, 393 Starting, 142
Parameter, 395 Multi-channel data, 501
Longitudinal slot - SLOT1 Multi-channel editor, 500
Function, 377 Synchronized view, 517
Parameter, 381 Time synchronous view, 520
Wait points, 520
Multi-channel program
M Creating, 500
Editing a G code program, 505
M functions, 150
Editing the ShopTurn program, 507
Machine control panel
Multi-channel support, 504
Operator controls, 33
Changing the job list, 504
Machine-specific information
Defining multi-channel data, 501
Save, 735
Program blocks, 515
Machining
Running-in a program, 524
Canceling, 110
Simulation, 522
Starting, 109
Multi-channel view, 525
Stopping, 109
"Machine" operating area,
Machining schedule
Block search, 525
ShopTurn program, 198
Program control, 525
Machining step program, 197
Settings, 496, 531
Magazine
Multi-edge - CYCLE79
Positioning, 603
Function, 374
Magazine list, 601
Parameter, 376
Magazine management, 574
Multitool, 613
Maintenance tasks
Creating, 613
Monitoring/performing, 695
Delete, 616
Setting up, 697
Equipping tools, 615
Manual mode, 97

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 751
Index

Loading, 616 Program, 642

Parameters in the tool list, 612 Path milling - CYCLE72
Positioning, 620 Function, 418
Reactivating, 618 Parameter, 423
Relocating, 619 Path motion, 470
Removing tool, 616 Pinyin
Unloading, 617 Input editor, 51
PLC diagnostics
Ladder add-on tool, 699
N PLC symbols
Loading, 733
NC directory
PLC variables, 730
creating on local drive, 624
POCKET3 - rectangular pocket
NC variables, 728
Function, 355
NC/PLC variables
Parameter, 360
Changing, 730
POCKET4 - circular pocket
Load symbols, 733
Function, 360
New contour - CYCLE62
Parameter, 365
Function, 321, 408
Polar coordinates, 208
Parameter, 410
Positioning
Number of teeth, 584
Magazine, 603
Multitool, 620
Positions
O
display/hide, 289
Offset, 465 Preview
Online help Program, 639
Context-sensitive, 55 Program
Open Closing, 626
Program, 626 Copying, 642
Second program, 137 Deleting, 644
Open slot - CYCLE899 Executing, 627
Function, 386 Generating with cycle support, 184
Parameter, 393 Highlight, 640
Operating area Open, 626
Changing, 43 Opening a second program, 137
Operating mode Pasting, 642
AUTO, 64 Preview, 639
Changing, 43 Properties, 645
JOG, 63, 97 Selecting, 640
MDA, 64 Program block, 136
Operator panel fronts, 22 Changing, 131
Copying and inserting, 134
Delete, 134
P linked, 201
Numbering, 135
Parameter
Repeat, 218
Align milling tool - CYCLE800, 452
Replacing, 214
Calculating, 46
Search, 132
Changing, 46
Selecting, 134
Entering, 45
Program block display, 43, 113
Setting milling tool - CYCLE800, 454
Program blocks, 515
Pasting
Multi-channel support, 515
Directories, 642

Turning
752 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Index

Program control, 525 Reaming - CYCLE85

activate, 128 Function, 261
Multi-channel view, 525 Parameter, 262
Program editing, 115 Rectangular pocket - POCKET3
Program header, 212 Function, 355
Program level Parameter, 360
Displaying, 114 Rectangular spigot - CYCLE76
Program list Function, 366
Creating, 635 Parameter, 369
Program Manager, 652 Reference point approach, 60
Searching directories and files, 638 Relocating
Program runtime, 153 Multitool, 619
Program settings Tool, 603
changing, 222 Remote access
Parameters, 223 permit, 742
Program views Setting, 740
G code program, 178 Remote diagnostics, 740
ShopTurn program, 198 Exit, 744
Programmed stop 1, 127 requesting, 742
Programmed stop 2, 127 Removing tool
Programming graphics Multitool, 616
ShopTurn program, 198 Repeat positions
Programs Function, 291
Correcting, 43, 113, 115 Parameter, 291
Editing, 131 Replacement tool number, 583
Managing, 621 Repositioning, 117
Renumbering blocks, 135 RG0 (reduced rapid traverse), 127
Replacing text, 133 Rotation, 466
Running-in, 111 Running-in
Searching for a program position, 132 Multi-channel program, 524
Selecting, 110
Teach-in, 547
Properties S
Directory, 645
Save
Program, 645
Setup data, 655
Protection levels, 53
SB (single blocks), 127
PRT (no axis motion), 127
SB1, 111
Punched tape format, 649
SB2, 111
SB3, 111
Screenshots
Q
Copy, 739
Quantity, 220, 596 Creating, 739
Open, 739
Search
R in the Program Manager, 638
Logbook entry, 738
R parameters, 540
Search mode, 125
Reactivating
Search pointer, 92, 119, 122, 123
Multitool, 618
Selecting
Tool, 597
Directory, 640
Reading in
Program, 640
Setup data, 658
Service Planner, 695

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 753
Index

Setting actual values, 68 Skip blocks, 128

Setting milling tool - CYCLE800 SKP (skip blocks), 127
Function, 453 SLOT1 - longitudinal slot
Parameter, 454 Function, 377
Settings Parameter, 381
Editor, 138 SLOT2 - circumferential groove
For automatic operation, 154 Function, 382
For manual operation, 108 SLOT2 - circumferential slot
Multi-channel view, 496, 531 Parameter, 385
Teach-in, 558 SMS messages, 683
Setup data Log, 689
Backing up, 655 Spindle chuck data, 89
reading in, 658 Parameter, 91
ShopTurn program Store chuck dimensions, 89
Approach/retraction cycle, 231 Spindle data
Circle with known center point, 474 Actual value window, 42
Circle with known radius, 476 Spindle speed limitation, 88
Coordinate transformation, 464 Status display, 37
creating, 210 Stock removal
Cutting edge (D), 215 in JOG, 104
Cutting rate (V), 216 Stock removal - CYCLE951
Entering the quantity of workpieces, 220 Function, 292
Feedrate (F), 216 Parameter, 295
Machining cycle, approach/retraction, 204 Straight line, 472
Machining planes, 202 Submode
Machining type, 217 REF POINT, 63
Machining with counterspindle, 483 REPOS, 63
Mirroring, 468 TEACH IN, 64
Polar coordinates, 478 Switching off, 59
Program blocks, 214 Switching on, 59
Program header, 212 Switching over
Program settings, 222 Channel, 65
Radius compensation, 215 Coordinate system, 66
Rotation C axis, 469 Unit of measurement, 67
Scaling, 467 Swivel plane
Spindle speed (S), 216 Parameters, swivel plane, 450
Straight and circle, 470 Swivel tool
Straight line, 472 Parameters, align turning tool, 451
Straight line polar, 480 Symbol tables, 714
Structure, 201 Synchronized actions
Tool (T), 215 Displaying status, 151
Simulation Synchronized view
Alarm display, 175 Multi-channel editor, 517
Changing a graphic, 171 Synchronizing
Multi-channel support, 522 Counterspindle, 533
Program control, 169
Showing and hiding the path display, 168
Views for multi-channel support, 523 T
Simultaneous recording, 159
Tailstock, 90
Single block
Tapping with compensating chuck - CYCLE840
Coarse (SB1), 111
Function, 270
Fine (SB3), 111
Parameter, 275

Turning
754 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0
 Index

Tapping without compensating chuck - CYCLE84 Tool data

Function, 270 Actual value window, 41
Parameter, 275 Backing up, 655
Teach-in, 547 reading in, 658
Changing blocks, 555 Tool life, 596
Circle intermediate position CIP, 552 Tool list, 583
Deleting blocks, 557 Open, 583
General sequence, 547 Tool management, 573
Inserting a position, 548 List filtering, 606
Inserting blocks, 550 Sorting lists, 605
Motion type, 549 Tool parameters, 578
Parameter, 549 Tool types, 575
Rapid traverse G0, 552 Touch Panel
Selecting a block, 556 Calibrating, 676
Settings, 558
Traversing block G1, 552
Templates U
Creating, 637
Undercut - CYCLE940
Storage locations, 637
Function, DIN thread, 300
Thread
Function, form E, 298
Synchronizing, 106
Function, form F, 298
Thread centered
Function, thread, 300
Function, 461
Parameters, DIN thread, 302
Parameters, 463
Parameters, form E, 299
Thread milling - CYCLE70
Parameters, form F, 300
Function, 395
Parameters, thread, 303
Parameter, 399
Unit of measurement
Thread turning - CYCLE98
Switching over, 67
Function, thread chain, 312
Unloading
Parameters, thread chain, 315
Multitool, 617
Thread turning - CYCLE99
User acknowledgement, 61
Function, face thread, 303
User data, 539
Function, longitudinal thread, 303
Channel GUD, 542
Function, tapered thread, 303
Definition, 545
Parameters, face thread, 312
Global GUD, 541
Parameters, longitudinal thread, 307
Local LUD, 543
Parameters, tapered thread, 310
Program PUD, 544
Tip angle, 584
R parameters, 540
Tool
Search, 545
Change type, 610
User variables
Changing the cutting edge position, 610
Activate, 545
Delete, 591
Global GUD, 545
Details, 609
Dimensioning, 578
Loading, 591
V
Measure manually, 71
Measurement, 589 Variable screen forms, 732
Measuring, 71 Virtual keyboard, 674
measuring using a magnifying glass, 76
Reactivating, 597
Relocating, 603 W
Unloading, 591
Wear list, 595

Turning
Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0 755
Index

Work offsets, 79
Active WO, 80
Calling, 218
Delete, 85
Displaying details, 84
Overview, 81
Settable WO, 83
Setting, 68
Working area limitation, 87
Workpiece
Create, 630
Workpiece counter, 153

Z
Zero point settings
Backing up, 655
reading in, 658

Turning
756 Operating Manual, 02/2011, 6FC5398-8CP40-1BA0